Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Cyrus’ POV

It’s been three months since TJ and I started dating, three months since that kiss, and that moment where the guys sang with him the song he wrote me. It’s been three months since the play premiered, and since I decided to write another one, and another one, and another one. Surprisingly, I have a lot of inspiration now that I’m with TJ. I always tried to not write about my personal experiences, but now all I do is write about them. That’s kind of crazy. Right... I need to fill you up with everything that has happened in these months: well, first, Buffy is doing great with her dance classes; she's really close with Iris now; Andi has been really busy at the gallery with Walker and Libby that we barely see them these days; No Exit has been pretty busy too, but I still have time to see TJ, we’re not like with each other all the day, every day, nor we talk or text the whole day, we just talk to each other without forgetting that we actually have lives. 

Right now, I’m on my way to see CeCe and Bex. We are just a few months to finally meet Andi’s little brother... oh, I didn’t mention that earlier, right? Well, she is having a brother, we are happy and excited for her and Bex and Bowie, and CeCe. So we’re just planning some stuff; Bowie is actually doing the same with No Exit. And just in case you were wondering, yes, I still have panic attacks, and honestly, some days, I don’t even know why they happen. I’m still trying to figure out how I can live with them. But my life has not been that bad; I try to not fall into the toxic positivity hole. Honestly, I don’t really think I can ever fall into that thing, I mean, I’m kind of a person who just doesn’t like to see everything good, I need the bad stuff too, I don’t want to go and tell everybody “Hey, your life is beautiful, just smile nothing bad actually happened” because that’s the type of people we all dislike. 

"You are late," Says CeCe as soon as she opens the door. 

"Hello CeCe, it’s nice to see you too" I smile. 

"Oh, mom, please! Cyrus, come in" Bex smiles at me. 

I follow them to the room, CeCe looks proud at what we’re staring at, but Bex looks a bit annoyed. 

"Can you please remember me why Cyrus is here again?" Bex places her hand on my shoulder. 

"He’s helping us," CeCe says in that tone.

"I don’t mind helping" I turn to Bex. 

"I’m sure he has something else to do... aren’t you meeting TJ at Red Rooster?" She looks like she really doesn’t want me to be here. 

"I was, but he has a band meeting at the pizzeria," I say. You know, there are times where I really wish I could just shut up. 

"See? Now let’s start with this" CeCe looks down at the paint on the floor. 

"You know I want a pizza now..." Bex whispers to herself. "Hey, who wants pizza?" She smiles. 

"You can’t do that Rebecca," CeCe’s tone is now intimidating. "Let’s do this now," 

"Can’t Bowie do this?" She asks, looking at her mom with big puppy eyes. 

It doesn’t take us more than five minutes to start with CeCe’s task. We’re painting the baby’s nursery. She said we should make acceptable progress before going for the pizza that Bex was craving. I’m doing almost everything, while Bex is trying her best to help me but, well, she’s pregnant, so she needs some breaks between our work. CeCe is helping too, but she’s kind of slow at this; she wants everything to be perfect. I wonder what the hell Andi is doing right now. The gallery is not an option, she had a free day today. Why is she not here? Helping her mother and her grandmother to paint her brother’s room? What can be more important than this? I mean, a lot of things, yes, but this is also cool and entertaining... and... who am I lying? This is really boring. And CeCe telling me how to do it every ten seconds is not helping me at all; I take a quick break from painting to text my boyfriend; the meeting should be over by now, but I have some other messages from my best friends, of course. 

Good hair crew

Andi:  Cyrus look we found these cool jackets. Do you want one? 

Buffy:  You’ll have to pay us later, but just tell us if you want it.

Cyrus:  Where are you two? I’m in your house Andi, painting. 

Andi:  That’s why I’m not in my house right now...

Buffy:  Just leave

Cyrus:  I can’t do that

Cyrus:  I’m not that mean

Cyrus:  And yes, I want the jacket

I close their chat and take a look at the room, it’s looking better. CeCe leaves to look for something to drink, and Bex is listing all the reasons why we should go for a pizza, I look back at my phone and open TJ’s chat.  

TJ:  Guess who’s singing at the pizzeria next week?

Cyrus:  You guys are singing there next week?!

TJ:  Yeah, Marty got us this

TJ:  Where are you btw? 

Cyrus:  At Andi’s

Cyrus:  Helping CeCe and Bex 

Cyrus:  Want to do something later? 

TJ:  Sure, we have practice at Jonah’s, you are free to come :) 

I hear CeCe’s voice asking me for help, so I put my phone back into my pocket, and I rush to help her. Bex is still telling her list... and making CeCe lose her patience, so she finally decides to go for the pizza her daughter is craving.  

TJ’s POV

The moment we enter the pizzeria, we can notice Marty’s smile growing even bigger than usual, he knows something that we clearly ignore. Jonah acts as normal as usual, and he finds a table for us to sit, we follow him and wait for Marty to say something, he was the one who called for a band meeting in this specific place, but someone’s missing, Paul texted us that he’s a bit late due to the school. I should be doing homework right now, but here I am, with my friends at the pizzeria. These past three months have been great for us, we play regularly at Red Rooster and the gallery too, even Amber, who’s working at The Spoon again, got us a small gig there. Paul’s parents told him to take school a bit more seriously he really dedicated too many hours to the band already that sometimes even we forgot that he goes to school too, but he’s been doing good; Marty is still on that mission to ask Buffy out, but he’s just not that good at it; Jonah keeps writing music, Bowie is our teacher when it comes to that topic, so he spends a lot of time at the music store. And for me, well, I have a nice relationship with Cyrus, I’m not doing that bad at school... and, yes, I still have panic attacks, mainly when I’m doing homework. I have this friend that tries to tell me how everything will be okay and to smile and live a happy life, I still don’t get why we are friends... but that’s not a bad thing I guess, one day they will probably understand how saying those things doesn’t help at all. 

I see Paul approaching our table; he looks like he’s been running. Jonah and Marty greet him with big smiles, but the first thing he does is ask for a glass of water. His life between school and the band must be so hard. 

"Did you come running from school or something?" Jonah asks him.

"Yeah," He says, taking a big sip from the water once it’s in front of him. "Marty said it was important," 

Jonah and I turn to Marty with disapproving faces. 

"Why are we here?" I ask Marty. He starts smiling again. 

"We’re playing here next Friday, guys!" He moves his hands in excitement.

"You’re kidding," Jonah says with a surprised tone.

"No, I’m serious" He calls a waiter to order our pizza. 

"You can next Friday, right Paul?" I turn to him. 

"Yes, I only need to do my homework in the way here, and It’ll be fine" He nods. 

"Then it’s done" Marty smiles. "We need to practice" 

"What songs are we singing?" Jonah asks us. "Do we need a new one?" 

"We’ve been playing a lot since we started the band, and right now, you’re questioning that?" Marty asks him playfully.  

We all laugh at Jonah’s expression after hearing those words. I guess he’s only nervous about this, I mean, I’m nervous too, at this pace, we’ll play at every place here in Shadyside. But this is good for us and our career. I never thought the band would be so important to me and how these guys would be my best friends along the way. Honestly, this exact moment, the pizza, the announcement Marty did, it feels like Lemonade Mouth and I love that movie, maybe that’s one of the reasons why I ended up here with these guys, but we’re not five, so we can’t be them. 

Once we finish the pizza and talk about what songs we pretend to sing, we decide that we should go to Jonah’s house to practice; I take a moment to text Cyrus about the good news. He always gets happy for our achievements as a band, and I get happy for his as a playwright. Did I mention that he has written like two or three plays in three months? We can’t even write four songs in a month, it always takes us more time than necessary, but he wrote three full plays by himself... I mean, my boyfriend is amazing guys. Anyway, we keep walking in the direction of Jonah’s. Marty is still talking about our gig. It feels like we’re growing, even more, I don’t know how to find the words, but this really feels like something different, we’re not the same four guys who decided to start a band, well no, Jonah wanted to create a band. And then Marty joined, and then I joined, and then we found Paul, and we’re complete. It doesn’t really matter how we got together, but I’m sure that even in ten or a hundred lifetimes we would find each other and become No Exit. 

I smile unconsciously, looking at my friends who are talking with so much excitement. They turn to me, and Marty grabs my arm, we start to walk at the same pace. Jonah’s house is a few blocks ahead. 

"Did you already ask Buffy out?" Jonah asks Marty. His face turns red at the simple thought of it. 

"No..." He tries to smile. "I’m not good at it. TJ, do you have any advice?" He's still looking straight ahead. 

"Do you want us to write a song too?" Paul asks innocently. 

"First, he needs to ask her out on a date..." Jonah smiles gently. 

"What if you invite her to our gig at the pizzeria?" I turn to him. 

"That’s not a bad idea..." He nods. 

"Alright, give me your phone," Jonah says, making us turn to him. "Come on, just do it" Marty gives him his phone, waiting for him to say something, but Jonah’s only typing. 

"What are you-" A loud 'shh' causes Paul to stop mid-sentence.

"Done," Jonah says, showing us Marty's phone screen.

"I’m not sure if that’s actually the way you should ask someone to come to see us play," I say.

"Yeah... those are too many smiley faces," Paul adds. 

"I’m not cupid guys," Jonah defends himself. 

We finally made it to Jonah’s house, and yes, Marty is still asking us if there’s a way to unsend a message. We are in the middle of practicing a new song. Paul wrote this one, and it’s great, the lyrics are so meaningful, and the rhythm Jonah and I added to it makes it a complete piece of art. Marty is focused on his bass... or that’s what he says, we all see he’s looking at his phone waiting for a text from Buffy. 

Cyrus’ POV

Andi and Buffy were already at the pizzeria when Bex, Cece, and I arrived, they tried to run away from us, but Bex went directly to them. Now we are all sharing two pizzas, probably this is too good for the pregnant one who was craving this food. I try to enjoy the food as much as I can, ignoring what Cece is telling my best friends for not helping us with the bedroom for the little one. The pizza looks more delicious when Bex eats it. Right now, all I can think about is the news TJ told me about earlier, them playing here is huge. I turn to see my friends, Buffy’s expression is curious, she’s reading something, but as soon as Andi leans to read it, she puts her phone down and smiles at Cece, apologizing for not helping; when we leave the pizzeria, I tell them I have to go and see the band's practice, but Buffy this time offers to come with me... leaving us confused. 

"Is there anything you have to share with us, Driscoll?" Andi asks her. 

"Nope," She smiles. 

"Come on, that’s your fake smile!" I say, laughing once she turns to me. 

"Fine, read this" She gives us her phone. We find an interesting message from Marty. 

"Oh my... Marty has a crush on you!" Andi smiles at the screen. 

"What? No, he doesn’t" She takes her phone away from her hands. 

"You know TJ asked me out in a weird way too..." All I get is a poker face from her. 

"Is that why you want to go with Cyrus?" Andi smiles even bigger than before. "I want to go too!" 

"You’re not going anywhere, Andi Mack" Bex’s voice erases Andi’s smile immediately. "We’re going home" She grabs her hand. "Goodbye, Buffy and Cyrus!" We watch them leave with CeCe. 

"I can go, right?" Buffy asks me. "Do you think that’s okay?" 

"Yes, it is" I smile. 

On the way to Jonah’s house, I don’t ask her too many questions... I’m not sure if she actually likes Marty back, but she’ll tell us when it’s time and when she’s ready. I want to help her, but I don’t know how. Maybe she is in the spot as I was before dating TJ; I never felt ready to tell my best friends that I like him... but I did it, and now we’re dating. And somehow, they helped us, just like the rest of the band. I have to talk with TJ, maybe he knows something... he could even send that text, but he doesn’t send a lot of emojis, so I’m not sure what could have happened. Or I can just don’t do that... it’s not like I’m cupid or something. 

Jonah's mom welcomes us with a warm smile and walks us to where the boys are. I can’t tell if Buffy’s calm or nervous. The guys were surprised to see us there, well, just to see Buffy there. She never comes to these things; on the other hand, I come to see them practice often. TJ smiles at me while he's playing something with Jonah; Marty's face tells me he didn't expect to see Buffy here after he sent her that message, I honestly don't want to remember how it was written; I can’t describe the rhythm of the song, but it’s definitely a new one, and I like it. I turn to see Buffy, she’s smiling at the beat Paul is playing to complete what TJ and Jonah started. Marty seems a bit distracted, but after a few "Marty!" coming from Paul’s deep voice, he starts playing with them.  

"That was a good practice!" Jonah smiles at the guys, then he turns to us. "Thank you for coming"

TJ walks up to me, smiling, then he takes my hand, and I quickly greet him. He gives me a kiss on the cheek, and I can feel the stares of everyone in the room on us. 

"Please, not that," Marty says, making us laugh.

"I think it’s cute" Paul turns to him. 

"I guess I have to agree with Paul," Buffy says. "It’s kind of cute," 

Jonah, TJ, and Paul turn to Marty. He’s glancing at Buffy after she talked. They’re super obvious, he definitely has a crush on her, but she’s too focused on the instruments in front of her to notice the scene. I clear my throat to get all the attention on me, consider it a favor for these four guys... they’re so dumb and obvious... wait, is this how all best friends are? I mean us, the good hair crew, are like them too? Cyrus focus, I don’t need to open that door... yet. Maybe I can get some answers now; the guys play two songs before TJ and I decided to go out for a walk. No one else wanted to come with us, so we have complete privacy, now is the time to make him talk. 

We stop at the park near Jonah’s house. We are staring at the sky, hands interwind, and me telling him about the crazy day I had, what I have to do tomorrow at the theater and how the novel thing goes. He’s listening to me with a smile across his face, he even gives me ideas to write... they’re not the best ones, but I promise him that I will consider using at least one of those. This is exactly how I can describe our relationship, we listen to each other and try to help when the other needs it... we can also come to the park, lay on the grass, and just stare at the sky. Honestly, these moments are incredible. 

"I need to ask you something," I say as I sit down for a moment; he is still looking at the sky. 

"You can ask me anything" He sits smiling at me.

"Does Marty have a crush on Buffy? I know I shouldn’t ask because it’s not any of my business, but I really want to know" I try not to laugh. 

"She told you about the message, didn't she?" He leans closer to me.

"Yes. I want to know... I won’t tell her," We’re so close to each other’s face. 

"I’m not sure if I should tell you" He smiles gently. 

"Come on Teej," I smile. "I’ll read a book to you right now..." I make a pause. "And I’ll kiss you" He smiles, but I know he’s considering it. 

"Does she like him?" He asks. 

"I don’t know. She doesn’t want to tell us," I sigh. 

"I need the kiss first... then I’ll tell you" He has that smile on his face. 

I look at him, knowing exactly what he is doing, but he just keeps smiling. I guess I don't have a choice... as if I didn't want to kiss him, ha. I move a little closer to his face, but just as I'm about to press our lips together, my phone interrupts us. I sigh, but I hear TJ giggling. I close my eyes in defeat, TJ tells me not to pick up, and I consider it, we're having a good time together; I look sideways at my phone, it's Buffy. Before I can pick up I feel TJ's breathing closer than before, so when I turn around, he's the one kissing me. Eventually, my phone stops ringing, so as we separate I look at TJ with a smile, but to my surprise, he does answer my question from a few minutes ago with a "yes, he likes her." 

Buffy’s POV

Paul has been talking to me about his drums for about ten minutes, and it’s interesting, but I really wish to go and talk to Marty about the text he sent me. I tried texting Cyrus, so he and TJ come back, but I guess they’re too focused on each other right now. I smile once I start to notice Paul is hesitating as he continues his talk about his favorite drumsticks brand. Just to make him know that I’m not bored, even if I don’t understand a lot of what he’s saying right now. I hear Jonah and Marty behind me, they’re talking about a song. The one TJ sang to Cyrus, I’m not sure why. Paul asks me if I play any instruments, but I shake my head, actually, I tried it once with Bowie’s guitar that day I was waiting for Iris, but it’s not as easy as I thought. He offers to teach me how to play the drums only for this time. I’m not sure if I should say yes or no. He’s smiling, and I don’t want to break his heart; he really thinks I’m interested in the drums. I stand up from my seat and walk to his drums, he stays next to me, explaining what I have to do. Jonah and Marty turn to us, and they approach smiling. 

I start to do what he tells me to, and the feeling of playing this thing is the best. All the insecurity I felt is melting away; now I get why Paul loves his drums so much. I’m not doing it like a professional, but I’m trying my best, and it seems to be good because the guys seem surprised. I stop once Paul tells me I’m done with the beat he made me play. 

"You are amazing, Buffy!" Jonah smiles. 

"Maybe I can be a drum teacher," Paul says to himself, but we listen clearly to what he said. I laugh, but he looks a bit embarrassed. "You did amazing," 

"Yeah... You... You’re... uhm..." Marty tries to say something, but we can't understand him well. "I mean, you did really well. You could even be Paul’s replacement if he doesn’t do good at school and his mom tells him to quit the band" None of us say a word. Until Paul, with his deep voice, decides to speak.

"But my mom loves the band" His face looks so innocent. 

Jonah clears his throat. And right after, he makes up an excuse to leave the room with Paul, leaving me alone with the only person I wanted to talk to; he doesn’t say anything, so I decide to speak first. I leave Paul’s drumsticks in the case he has and take a seat next to him. He looks kind of worried. 

"Hey," I say softly, pushing him a little with my elbow. 

"Hey..." He keeps looking at his bass. 

"I like your bass" I smile, knowing he might turn to me. 

"Thanks..." But he doesn’t turn to me. 

The silence in the room returns. I sigh before looking at him once more. Yes, it's time to go Buffy, he doesn't want to talk.

"About that text..." He suddenly says. "I wanted to invite you as a normal person should do, but Jonah added all those smiley faces..." He finally turns to me. I try not to smile. 

"It’s alright... I came to tell you that I’d love to go" I smile. His face seems to light up. 

Paul returns to the room with some sandwiches for us. He was about to leave when Marty tells him to stay with us. The poor guy looks so confused about it; Jonah is the next one to return, so we sit on the floor, they are showing me the songs they have been working on, as if my opinion were important, all of their songs are good. When I’m about to read another one, Marty tells me that song is not ready yet, I turn to Paul, looking as confused as I am, but I take the chance to stand up and try to call Cyrus. He didn’t pick up. Who am I supposed to talk about what just happened? Paul? Jonah’s mother? I sigh, putting my phone back into my jacket. I don’t know exactly how I feel for Marty, and that’s why I haven’t told my friends. But who knows? Maybe next Friday something will happen.

TJ’s POV

Cyrus and I read a book just as he said before. We don’t know exactly what Buffy needed, but she didn’t call him again, and he didn’t return the call. I’m reading out loud while he lays in the grass with his eyes closed. I stop once I look at him. He opens an eye asking me why I stopped, but I don’t read from where I left it, instead, I tell him to sit, there’s something I wanted to show him... well, it’s not exactly "show" but there’s a song I wanted to sing to him, I found it the other day when I was with Paul and Blue in their house, we started to play music randomly, and this song played... I had to look up the translation, but the feeling was the same... the song reminded me of Cyrus. 

He sits in front of me, and then I start singing a part of the song. Believe me, I had to practice this many times. Blue helped me with the timing of the words since it’s in another language, and adjusting the translation was too difficult for me. He starts to smile. I don’t know if it’s because of the song or just because he loves when I sing to him. 

"That’s a beautiful song Teej" He holds my hand. 

"Thank you. It reminded me of you" I smile. 

"Please sing that part again, the heart one" I chuckle after hearing his request. 

"Please know that I dedicate my heart to you,"  I sing as he wanted.

"If you found such a beautiful song, I can find one that I can sing to you," 

"I like the idea of that," Cyrus singing to me? Yes, please. 

"Then I’ll look for a song too. It’s going to be a surprise" He leans to give me a short kiss. 

We head back to Jonah’s house after I get a text from Paul. They finished the song Marty was stuck with. I don’t know how, but he said Marty has many ideas for songs, and they need me back. Cyrus was humming the song I sang before. And I don’t blame him, it is a really good one; once we’re back with the boys, Buffy takes Cyrus away, telling him that Andi needs them in The Spoon, they left so fast that we couldn’t say a proper goodbye to them. As soon as I sit with my friends. Marty starts to tell us about what happened with Buffy, and yes, we’re happy for him... and for her too. 

Chapter Text

TJ's POV

I'm looking for something to buy for my boyfriend with Blue. Paul said he had something to do at school so he'll be late. I want to give Cyrus a gift so he can wear a shirt at our gig in the pizzeria, it was Paul's idea, my idea was to write him another song, but the guys refused that option since it is Marty's opportunity to do something cute for Buffy, so I had to change the plan. But this idea is actually pretty cool. If I only were good at buying clothes, I don't have a good style. I only buy what doesn't look like something I would wear when I was thirteen. But getting back on what we are doing today, I thought Blue was the perfect person to do this, she helped me to look amazing when Cyrus and I became boyfriends... but that was because it was also an important night for her... but we all won, right?; the idea was calling Amber, Iris, and Blue to help me, but Amber had something to do, and Iris had a class, and I should be in the library with a friend studying, but I thought that coming here with Blue and Paul was a better idea, seeing them acting like the siblings that they are is the best thing in the world, they are really different. Why does almost everyone in Shadyside seem to be an only child? Paul is the first person I know that has two siblings and Marty, who has a brother. 

"Do you think he’d like this?" I ask Blue as we both see the shirt. 

"Yes, this will look good on him," She answers. 

"Hey... are you two best friends now?" Paul's voice catches our attention. He just entered the store.

"Yes, you are fired now," Blue teases him. 

"Nice joke kid," He gives her a kiss on the head. 

"One year and a half Paul! You're not ten years older!" She says, annoyed. 

"Alright, now I see why my parents only had one child" I smile at them. 

"Hey!" They turn to me. 

"Sorry," I offer them the shirt. 

Paul says he doesn't like the shirt and that it looks like something he would never wear, so that tells me that it's a good one. His style is based on black t-shirts and jeans and sometimes he wears something formal on a regular day, but that's only when Blue is wearing something incredible; this sibling stuff that I don't get... but Cyrus' style is totally different, it is pretty cool, the good hair crew not only have good hair, but they also dress incredibly. And I am proud, like, my boyfriend has an amazing style, even though I don't. 

We leave the store with more things than we actually wanted to. Paul started to grab some clothes for the gig. Blue only watched the scene since she had to leave for the theater soon, so Paul and I go for a coffee. We were walking when I saw Amber waiting outside the gallery, maybe she wanted to see something, or she wanted to meet with Andi, Libby, and Walker now that she is spending a lot of time there, but I am happy that she has more friends. Paul is telling me how he suddenly decided that it was a good idea to give drum lessons. I knew he had some ideas about this, he was pretty excited about teaching Buffy, or that's what Jonah said. I try not to talk too much about Cyrus, but it's impossible. Every single thing he does it's amazing; he is still working on that novel, as far as I know, he wanted to attend one of Buffy's classes to get some inspiration from the pain, whatever that means. Paul goes for some muffins, and I take the opportunity to text Cyrus. 

TJ:  How is the class going? 

Cyrus:  please save me 

Cyrus:  we're taking a break but I don't think I can do this anymore 

Cyrus:  I'm not made for dancing, that is clearly not my thing

TJ:  I'll bring you a muffin once the class is over 

Cyrus:  a chocolate chocolate chip one, please

TJ:  see you in 20 

I put my phone on the table once Paul comes back, we talk for ten minutes more, we never get out of something to talk about, it's actually funny. He is the funniest and cutest person. He really gives the band and the friend group a different vibe. 

Cyrus' POV

I have been stuck with the novel, and I don't get why. I wrote the plays so easily, but I can't write a novel, and both need a lot of energy and time, but I haven't found my inspiration. That's why I decided when I was in my bed reading a book to come and take one of Buffy's classes. Iris always talks a lot about it and, this time, I wanted to give it a try. How bad can this actually be? I mean, I know I helped her and the guys with the surprise for Paul, and I suffered, but I think I can do it better this time. I am not a good dancer, and something in my head is telling me that this is a bad idea. But Buffy and Iris are happy about me going to the class, so I must go. I am on my way to the dance studio. Looking at every person around me, you know because I need inspiration, how can I turn any of these people into a character for a thriller? Yes, I'm trying to write a thriller, and I know that's not what I'm used to doing because romance is kind of everything I know. And it's cool, I have something I am good at, but I want more. I wanted to try something different. I mean, I wrote a play based on TJ and me, but now I don't want to write something that comes from my relationship with TJ or my best friends. I want something new, a new field, a challenge. 

I enter the dance studio smiling as I see Iris texting someone. She has her eyes glued to her phone; she does not notice that I am already here, walking in her direction. I say a happy "Hello, Iris!" and she holds her phone close to her chest, smiling nervously at me. That is suspicious. She blinks a few times before putting her phone away, then she gives me a warm hug. Now I am curious about whatever she is hiding. But no, Cyrus, you already made TJ tell you if Marty likes Buffy, and you don't know what to do with that information! 

I smile at her, and we start to talk about the class. She is excited about today's class. And since they are starting a new choreography, I will not be a complete disaster. We hear Buffy's voice greeting all of us, and I see someone I know too well in the back... CeCe. She has a big smile and looks ready to start; I take a look at the rest of the people in here, and my clothes may not be the best ones for this dance, they look so cool and still comfy, but I look as I am about to wash my parents' car. Do clothes matter when you are dancing? No, let me ask something else: does it even matter how you look? 

Buffy says the class is almost over, and we can take a break before trying to dance to the whole thing for the first time in two hours. Who said Cyrus Goodman can't dance for two hours? I just want to talk to them for a second; I grab my phone, at the same time as Iris grabs hers. I see that TJ texted me about the class, and I tell him exactly what's in my mind. Buffy's voice takes me back to the real world. I unconsciously do the same thing Iris did when I greeted her before. 

"What was that?" She laughs. "I'm not reading anything. But it's not like I need glasses, I'm not like your boyfriend,"

"He looks cute with his glasses," I smile at her. 

"So, tell me, how is the class going?" 

"It hurts," I sigh. 

"You'll get used to it, don't worry," Her smile tells me that she is making fun of me. 

"Woah, that is exactly what I expected you to say," I say in a sarcastic tone. 

"We can go for donuts once the class is over," She says looking at me and then at Iris, who's been listening to us the whole time. 

"Sounds good," She says, smiling. 

"Well, TJ is coming, so that makes four people to share donuts with," I say, waiting for Buffy's response. 

"Yeah, just go with him, that means more donuts for us," She smiles. 

We get back at the dancing again. I'm not sure if I want to come back, but Buffy knows that was a possibility so, she won't be sad or mad about me not wanting to do this again... in my life. She tells us pretty nice words, honestly. Maybe I can come back for one more time if she is telling me those things again; I see CeCe leaving the studio while she's in a call, then I turn to see Buffy and Iris talking and smiling. They're talking about dancing and art, the usual, I guess. A figure in the mirror catches my attention. TJ is standing there waiting for me, and our eyes meet through the mirror, making us smile. I rush to take my stuff and say goodbye to my friends. TJ greets them and tells Iris to call Amber because there is something he wants to ask them. I don't understand what he means, but he's always making plans with his best friends, just as I do with mine. Once we leave the studio, he gives me my precious muffin, the amount of sugar that I needed. 

"Are you ready for Friday?" I ask him as I look at my muffin before taking another bite. 

"Yes," He smiles. "For the first time in a while, I don't feel worried that something bad could happen, such a forgetting the lyrics, or that Paul can't make it because of school," 

"That's nice," I smile. "I'm glad you are feeling better," 

"Thanks, but I want to know how you are doing,” He makes a pause when he notices the confusion on my face. “Writing the novel must be stressful,” 

"It is, but I can handle it, don't worry" I hope you're right, Cyrus.

"I trust you, but you'll call me if something goes wrong, right?" He asks me. His eyes tell me how worried he is about my mental health. 

"Yes, I will" I smile warmly at him. 

When I finish the muffin, we walk to my house. He has homework to do and practice with the band in two hours, but he still wanted to come with me. We are holding hands while I talk about the class and how I am not moving tomorrow. He listens to every single word I say with a smile on this face. Maybe he likes it when I complain about the minimum effort I do when it comes to this kind of things, like playing basketball once with Andi and Buffy or dancing in Buffy's class, or just that time Marty thought it was a good idea for me to play soccer with them, and twenty-five minutes later I was laying on the ground running out of air. At least one good thing happened that day, Jonah said I'm good at kicking. I even scored a goal; I give TJ a goodbye kiss before entering my house, ready to write something, or at least to try to write something. 

Andi's POV

"Mom, I'll be out. See you later," I say as loud as I can, getting an 'okay' from her. 

I have ten minutes to be in The Spoon, so I'm taking my dad's car. I'm meeting with this person, again, I've been seeing for a few weeks, this is like our fourth date, and we're not an official couple yet, but we are just taking it slow. Who is this mysterious person? I'm not telling you yet. Just wait. I am also waiting for Buffy to admit that she likes Marty. And then maybe I'll think about revealing their identity to my friends. I want this to be a secret for as long as I can keep it that way. This person is really cool. And I've known them for some time now. We like to go on dates to The Spoon... and we are planning a road trip, we just want to spend time together without having to explain our friends about this, because I don't know how I can even say this to my friends. Cyrus kind of did the same with TJ. But we were there when they confessed... and when they kissed... and when TJ and the guys sang Cyrus a beautiful song. I can take that as a good example, I can do something beautiful for this person, maybe a painting or a sculpture, and I am sure they'll like it. They always say how talented I am. And well, they really make me blush a lot. 

I enter the place and look for that familiar face. They are sitting at a table, not so visible from outside. I approach the table smiling, I thought I was early for our date... oh yeah, I totally forgot how they are always on time, or just earlier than everybody else. I like that honestly. TJ is almost running late everywhere and Cyrus is still dating him, so, this is not really bad. I sit with this person, and we start talking about how our days were yesterday. I had to help my parents with a lot of stuff in the house, getting closer and closer to having my little brother with us made everybody act weird, even me. CeCe is trying to help us. But she has the job at the theater with Cyrus. And she can't just leave that to help us, three adults, to get everything ready for the baby. But this person has a more interesting life than I do. They often come to the gallery and they are friends with Walker and Libby. We were eating when I saw someone familiar outside The Spoon yes that's Paul. My date asks me what to do when we see him entering the place, and they hide under the table, just in time for Paul to notice me eating alone... a lot of food. He waves at me and starts approaching my table. 

"Hello! Paul!" I say louder than expected. He looks genuinely confused. And scared. 

"Hello, Andi..." He says shyly. 

"I'm sorry. I am just happy to see you," Oh, I am a terrible liar. 

"Then can I sit with you? I don't like to eat alone," He smiles. What are you going to do, amazing Andi?

"I'm waiting for... my dad... actually," I say. 

"Oh, I get it, then I'll call my sister,” He nods. "Goodbye, Andi, have a nice day," 

I see him leave the place. 

"You can come out," I tell her. 

"You know I already did that a while ago..." I smile at the words as I roll my eyes. 

"Let's just enjoy our date, please," I make them smile. 

I feel little bad for not letting Paul sit with us, but he is my friend too, and if he knows about Amber and me, it would be hard to keep the secret. I am not saying he is bad at it, but he'll be just too excited about this; we continue with our date, adding some things to the road trip we have in mind. I only hope this goes well and nothing unexpected happens, and by that, I mean the birth of my brother... or my friends wanting to come with me on this road trip. 

Paul's POV

Is it my imagination or is Andi acting weird? Not a normal weird like Jonah and me, but a Marty weird. She usually likes eating with me. Or that's what I think, maybe she does not like me, or maybe she does not consider me a friend. But that's not possible. She is a nice person to everyone, she's like TJ, she cares for others a lot, without forgetting herself. Maybe she wanted to eat alone, my sisters do that often, especially Blue. But hopefully, she does want company this time because I'm going to the theater. I always like to walk alone and see what others do, like the couple holding hands while the guy buys him a flower, or the old man who's always reading outside the bookstore, or the kid with his mom and their dog walking on the opposite side of the street. I like seeing people being people, how they live their lives, how they enjoy a coffee and read the newspaper, a book, or their phones. The simplicity in a day of thousand of persons is what I call the moment I find inspiration to write a new song... or to do my homework. 

The gig at the pizzeria is everything we could ask for, but the number of things I have to do lately at school is torture, but Friday is helping me to get through the week. There are a few new songs that I have. My sister is very good at writing too, we had a writing session for a song that Jonah asked me to finish. Marty and he couldn't find the right path to the song. I tried to tell TJ to write with me, but he had to help his father with something important, and my sister saw me a little stuck with it so, she helped me, who knew Blue could be a good actress and a good lyricist? 

I enter the theater looking for Blue, only to find her talking with Cece and the guys. Why are the guys here? I thought the practice was in two hours. Jonah waves at me, and Marty tells me to go and join them. The moment I get closer, CeCe says something that catches my attention. No, it's not a musical this time. She actually wants us to play at an event in Cloud 10, I only visited it a few times, and Bex styled my hair. After she leaves, Marty starts singing: "we're playing at cloud ten!". I notice that my sister is still here smiling at the news, and for a moment, I forget how she doesn't like her name... I don't say it, but I was about to.

"Wait" Jonah makes a pause trying to process something. "Your name is not Blue?" I meet my sister's eyes. She is about to laugh. Yes, a laugh that means so many things, like that I'm ruined. 

"Uhm no... that's just how people call me" She smiles, but I'm sure she wants to hit me.

"Why do they call you like that?" Marty asks her. TJ and I exchange glances. 

"You never noticed my sister's hair?" I turn to them. "It's blue!" 

"You learn new things every day," TJ says. "Let's go eat something. Paul looks like he needs some food," 

"Yeah, we can go, but" Marty turns to my sister. "What's your name then?" 

"That's top-secret let's go" TJ grabs his arm, and they get out of the theater. I turn to Blue. She is smiling at me, and not in a nice way, to be honest, she kind of looks mad. I see Bowie walking to the exit, and I approach him with a smile, and a low 'help me', that's how siblings are, right? 

Cyrus' POV

I was trying to write when I got a call from CeCe. She wanted to meet No Exit at the theater. We tried calling Paul a few times, but he didn't answer, so she decided to tell them if they were available to play at Cloud 10. That is a great opportunity for the guys. I also talked about a few things with Bowie since I have another musical in mind. I hope Blue knows how to sing and dance because the main character is definitely for her. Right now, we are at Marty's house eating something he prepared. Those cooking classes that he takes with his mom are so good. 

Buffy's dance class made me realize that maybe I can make another musical. I didn't get the motivation and inspiration I wanted to have for the novel, but I had a good idea, right? These days I'm feeling so much better, I mean, I could never go back to a dance class because I might be afraid of having a panic attack, but today I feel different. I truly feel great. I even think you can feel it in my vibe. I went to the dance class, and I did something I never thought I was brave enough to do, and I am proud. 

"We have practice at Jonah's," TJ's voice takes me back to the real world. "Want to come?"

"I can't. I'll go to Red Rooster. I have something to talk to Bowie" I smile. "That will take me like an hour. Want to hang out after that?" I intertwine our fingers. 

"I can’t... the practice will last about three hours," He sighs. "If you want..." 

"Don't worry, I'll be waiting to see you another day" I give him a short kiss. "Have fun!" I say to the guys before turning to TJ again and finally, say goodbye. 

Now I am on my way to Red Rooster, enjoying how beautiful the day is. Talking and planning with Bowie for hours at the music store is fun, right? I mean, wanting to spend time with TJ is important, but I can wait until tomorrow or any other day, so I can talk to Bowie about the musical without any distractions. I can even help him to plan the whole thing. I mean I'm not a songwriter. That's obvious. But I can give him ideas that are related to the musical. I stop walking when I see Andi smiling, she is inside the gallery, but I can't see clearly who is with her, but her smile is different. She is definitely not smiling at her parents or CeCe, nor her coworkers, or Buffy. Her smile is so big, she looks so happy, just like I do when I am with TJ... maybe she is seeing someone? But who could it be? 

Chapter Text

TJ's POV

Today is Friday, and our gig at the pizzeria is in a few hours. The guys are excited and nervous, and Paul is probably nervous too. He is at school finishing something with some classmates. I am supposed to be doing homework and getting ready with Amber and Iris, but I am on my way to Cyrus' house because, yeah, I forgot to give him the shirt I bought for him the other day. And Amber canceled, she said she had something else to do, and Iris used that as the opportunity to go to the gallery. They are acting so weird these days, but it's fine. We are weird. If Cyrus has the Good Hair Crew, we can be the Weird Trio... wait, that is not a good name. Have I mentioned that my parents are coming to see us this time? Well, now you know. The Kippen's are coming, minus my grandparents. 

I talked to Jonah and Marty earlier. We need to be at Jonah's house one hour before we play to help Marty with whatever he is saying to Buffy. That is another reason why I am going to Cyrus'. I want to know what he knows about this whole situation. We agreed to not do anything. We want to let them go at their own pace; even though we don't know if Buffy likes him back, everyone knows about Marty's crush on her. And now that I think about it, maybe I was just like him three months ago. 

Without noticing I am outside Cyrus' house, waiting for him to open the door. It is a nice day, and we could not ask for a better time to play at the pizzeria. I still do not know how I feel about this. I am happy and kind of scared now that my parents are coming. What if everything I have worked for this week is not enough? What if I mess up something? I don't want it to go wrong with them there, I mean, Cyrus saw me at my worst, and yes, I am talking about that time I had a panic attack, and he had to play instead of me. But this is a whole new TJ. I'm not the guy I was then. Well, that is what I think. 

"Hello? Are you planning to stand there for hours?" I hear Cyrus' voice. "Paul was right. You make the expressions too" He smiles. 

"Well, my boyfriend does that a lot..." I smile at him. "I got you something," 

"A gift? I thought I had to give you one for the gig," He looks at the box in my hands. 

"Yes, but I wanted to give you something" I make a pause. "Blue helped me to choose this," 

"Then you bought me clothes" He smiles as he takes the box. 

His face says it all. He likes the shirt. Thank you, Blue. Seeing Cyrus smile like this makes me so happy, like, hey, what am I afraid of if I have him there? Nothing can go wrong with him by my side or in my sight? You get the point, right? I stayed in his house for a while, laughing and just spending time together; we read some chapters of a book he wanted us to read. And came up with the best idea for a song... and to add to his novel, maybe you can guess it since he is writing a thriller. Well, we were doing just fine, relaxing and staring at each other, but I got a message from Jonah asking for me to go to Marty's house. And if I have to guess, I'd say we have a fashion emergency just like when we went to her dance exhibition. And hopefully, he has better clothes this time. Maybe I am asking for too much. 

Marty's POV

I was relaxed this morning until I realized something important. Yes, I don't know what to wear for the gig. I want to impress Buffy. But the last time I tried, I told the guys to check my father's clothes. And that was a big no from them, so this time, I decided to go and buy some stuff alone, and the next part of my plan is to call the guys. Which I already did, well, I only called Jonah, and he is texting TJ. We are waiting for a signal from Paul. He has been stressed out with school lately. The poor guy is not made for all the physics stuff he has to do to keep his parents happy. Sometimes I feel like he works so hard for everything. My parents never told me what to study, they let me dive into all of the possibilities, and right now, I am focused on the band. I don’t have to choose something yet I have my whole life to decide what to study. But it feels as if Paul does not have any chance to do that. At least he can have fun at the pizzeria with us, his best friends. 

Jonah is still staring at the clothes in my bed, two of my dogs next to him doing the same. Do I have such a bad style? Or is it just that they don't get my style. I prefer the second option, honestly. We hear Paul's deep voice coming from outside my door, and five seconds later, he and TJ open the door, the rescue team is complete. I don't usually worry about what I wear for these situations, I only think about playing my bass, and that's all. But everything is different since I realized that I like Buffy in the same way TJ likes Cyrus. That is why I wanted to look great. I want her to notice what a great choice I am. I wrote a song about her, and we are going to play it in a few hours, and we spent hours practicing it. The guys really want to help me with her, but I am not confessing. It's not the moment yet. I prefer taking my time with this, I mean, I am too weird, and maybe she thinks that too. Almost every person in Shadyside thinks that about me. And it is pretty cool, to be honest, I will never feel bad if someone calls me weird because I am not the only one, we are a band of weird guys playing music together, plus our first band name was The Sandwiches. And my bass is named Sandwich too. I am happy to be weird. 

"I like the clothes," TJ starts. "Did you ask Blue for help?" 

"First, I'm offended that you think I have a bad style as yours," I hear Jonah and Paul laugh. "And second, I chose them by myself" I smile. 

"Impressive," Says Jonah. 

"If you had good clothes, why did you call us?" Paul asks. 

"I didn't know if they were good clothes! I needed your opinion" 

"Well, I like the clothes," He says with that deep voice. TJ and Jonah nod to his words. 

"Then everything is ready" I smile, looking at my clothes. 

"Almost," Jonah says in that tone. "You still need to give Buffy a good impression," 

Thanks, Jonah, as if I had not been thinking about it the whole day. 

"Right..." I nod. 

"But don't forget that is our big night too! As a band," Paul smiles at us. 

He really saved me from thinking the worst. We know he is right. It is our big night, and if we are lucky enough, we can have the chance to play there every week. This is the opportunity we were waiting for. No Exit has become a significant part of my life. We are now more than just four dudes that play instruments and sing together. We are best friends, family. Buffy is definitely important, but tonight is also about them, us. It's about No Exit. 

The guys stayed a few more minutes in my room before all of them left. We have to start with our work at the pizzeria. And I have to practice the song one more time all alone. And maybe have an imaginary conversation with Buffy in front of the mirror. God, I need to stop talking to TJ at 2 a.m., this is not what I would usually do, but it is kind of funny. I let another dog come into my room and start talking to them about Buffy. At this point, I think they all already like her as much as I do. 

Cyrus' POV

Do you ever have to listen to a friend talk about their experience playing the drums for twenty minutes? Because that is what is happening to Andi and me right now. Since Paul tried to teach Buffy how to play the drums. She has been telling us about it every three hours. We are at Andi's house getting ready for the guys' gig. And if you mention the instruments, she will start talking about them. It's nice that she finds that instrument so interesting, and from what I know, it helps Paul a lot. He has many things in common with Buffy. They can be good friends. They both want to be good at what they like. Well, they are already friends, but not as close as you can think. 

Once Buffy finishes her story. Andi starts to talk about how excited and scared she is about meeting her little brother. We are very happy for her. But she already offered the Good Hair Crew as babysitters when Bex and Bowie have emergencies. We didn't vote, but she knew that we would say yes to that. We are talking about our best friend's little brother. And their age difference reminds me of Selena Gomez's with her little sister. But everyone already loves that little boy... and we do not even know his name yet. 

I take out the shirt TJ gave me, and with a smile, I show it to my friends in a very subtle way. I start walking around the room with the shirt as if it were a dress. They look at me with confused smiles and curiosity about the shirt. When I turn to them, they wait for me to say something, but I stay in silence for a minute. I am not going to say it. They need to ask me first, I need the attention. 

"Where does that come from?" Buffy finally asks. 

"It's a pretty one," Andi smiles. 

"Thanks...” I give a spin. "TJ gave it to me," And I smile. 

"TJ? Did somebody help him?" I know that tone. And yes, I was impressed too, I like TJ's style, but Blue's style is out of this world. 

"Yes, Blue... but it's a cute one," I say before going to Andi's bathroom to get ready. 

I go back to her room after a few minutes. They were talking about how weird was that text from Marty. And it didn't take Andi Mack long to start making up scenarios where Marty plays a song for Buffy. And then, when the song ends, they go outside the pizzeria so he can confess his feelings for her. That leaves Buffy almost laughing. It's not like it's never going to happen, but that doesn't sound like Marty... I know TJ, and he knows him too well. He is afraid to say hi to Buffy. How can he sing a whole song to her and then confess? Maybe Andi has to stop watching so many romcoms with CeCe on her free days. 

Bex enters Andi's room, and we immediately ask her how she feels. She says big before sitting in the bed. Andi smiles at her proudly. Meanwhile, Buffy and I keep asking her stuff about the baby. But there is a question she does not want to answer yet... the baby's name. Not even Andi or CeCe now the baby's name. Only her and Bowie are the only ones that know, but they won't say a thing until the baby is here. And that makes sense... in their heads, we all want to know, but I guess we'll have to wait a little more; Bex tells us to film the guys before we leave to the pizzeria. I glance at Buffy for a moment. She seems to be trying to decide something in her head. I lose focus on her when my phone indicates that I have a new text. It's from TJ, they are already there waiting for us. 

TJ's POV

It took us a while to get everything ready. And since it is our first time playing here, we are nervous as hell. Paul made it right on time. He has been suffering thanks to school. But playing always makes him happy. And he does not look so happy, I mean, he is happy for sure. But I know something is going on, maybe it's school-related; Jonah calls for a small meeting before we play, we all notice Paul's face. He looks worried. Marty decides to ask him what is going on. And I am sure he thought he would quit the band or something like that. But Paul loves No Exit more than anyone; we wait for him to say something. After someone tells us that it is almost time, he speaks. 

"I'm not doing great in my classes, and I am working hard to have good grades... my parents are going to kill me," He says with a low volume in his voice. "And I don't know what to do," He sighs. 

"I am not a genius in physics, but I can help you," Marty offers. 

"Yeah, me too" Jonah smiles at him. 

"And I am not good at that, but I can ask my father to help you" I put a hand on his shoulder. "You don't have to do everything alone. We are one, Paul" I smile. 

"Can that be our slogan?" Marty asks suddenly, making us laugh. 

"We'll talk about it later," Jonah tells him. "But TJ is right, we are one, we are more than a band" He smiles at him. 

Paul looks relaxed after hearing those words, he doesn't have to do everything his parents ask him to. He can fail, there is nothing wrong with that. But I also get his position. Getting good grades is essential to his parents. Especially when we are talking about their only son. People always say how the middle children are often ignored, as a joke, but Paul receives a lot of attention from his parents. Well, they give all of their attention to their three children. And I can't relate to or talk about it because I am an only child. 

Jonah guides us to our instruments. There is a lot of people in here. I see Amber and Iris sitting with Walker, and I see my parents smiling at us. I keep looking at every face in the place until my eyes finally meet Cyrus'. I smile at him and then turn to the guys. Marty starts to talk since he is like the second leader of the band... and he got us this gig, but I am not sure if he can do it with Buffy staring at him with a friendly smile on her face. Jonah and Paul also notice how Marty's confidence drops when he sees Buffy. He freezes for a short time, and then he starts talking again... but with difficulty. So we do what we think is the correct thing to do... tell Jonah to help him give the speech. He smiles before heading Marty's way. Everybody notices the nervousness in his voice. But when Jonah takes the microphone away from him with a warm smile, he turns to us and thanks us. 

Jonah says an emotional, in his way, and funny speech. Marty keeps glancing at Buffy in every opportunity he has. But once he sees Paul approaching his drums, reality hits him with the fact that we need to play and not just talk for maybe an hour or two; we start with a new song that Jonah and Paul wrote, Mockingbird, the title may sound calm and relaxing, but it actually has a killing rhythm, and lyrics of course; playing at the pizzeria is not as different than playing at Red Rooster or at the gallery... even at The Spoon, I understand that everything can feel familiar with my best friends playing with me, but I'm not going to lie I thought something bad could happen before we even started, like Paul not making it on time, or one of us getting lost. Well, the last one is impossible, honestly. We stop playing for a few minutes to eat pizza with our friends and families. Paul's parents are here, Jonah's parents are here, Marty's parents are here, and my parents are here. We probably take a lot of space in the place, one super big family, or somewhat like that. 

"You guys rock!" Jonah’s father says with a pose, making Jonah close his eyes in embarrassment. 

"Thank you, sir," I say, smiling and playfully teasing Jonah about it. 

"Do you guys know how big it is that you are playing in here?" Amber says as she approaches us with Andi, Cyrus, Buffy, and Iris behind her. 

"You are going to be rockstars in no time," Andi adds with a smile. 

"I thought they already were," Iris jokes. 

"Thanks, guys," I hug Iris. 

"Please tell me you are singing another new song," Cyrus asks us.

"Of course, we will do that, Cyrus," Marty says, making emphasis in Cyrus. I get it, Marty. "Are you... enjoying the..." He mumbles.

"Paul, can I talk to you for a second?" Buffy says, leaving the four of us confused. 

Jonah turns to Marty, and his expression doesn't say a lot. Buffy and Paul leave in the direction of the instruments. After an awkward silence falls into our tables, Iris makes her best to keep things natural. She asks Jonah about his new guitar, and we turn to him and listen to his recommendations. And how much he has learned with Bowie; I notice how Marty keeps glancing at Buffy and Paul talking. She's smiling and explaining something with her hands, and Paul only listens to her nodding. How did we end up in this position? What are they talking about? 

Buffy's POV 

I had been thinking about this the whole day. And I was still not sure about doing this on our way here, but Andi and Cyrus wanted to be on time. When we enter the pizzeria and see all the people there, we look for a better spot to see the show. We were excited for the guys. Andi wanted to be a supportive best friend for Jonah and the rest of No Exit. We all know that Cyrus loves that his boyfriend is part of a band. He is living in a dream with this. And well, I came here for the music, yes, and maybe to get some answers about the Marty thing. But I also came here for Paul, there is something important I really want to talk to him about. I haven't told my best friends for a reason, I still don't know if it is a good idea. 

The guys, play the song they were practicing that day Cyrus and I went to see them. And I like this song so much, the rhythm is great, and the lyrics are out of this world. Jonah really knows his stuff. Did I mention the incredibly cute and kind of embarrassing moment Marty had before the show started? I liked the words he was saying, but as soon as he saw me. The words did not come out. And Jonah saved the day; maybe Andi is right, and he actually likes me, or he didn't expect me to be here. Anyway, their next songs are good. They also play one of my favorites, one TJ wrote for Cyrus. They are cute, and TJ writes pretty good songs too. 

Once they take a break, Amber wants to go and talk to them, so we all go with her. Their parents are here. I recognize Jonah's parents so fast. Their parents really fit with them, if you know what I mean, they are really look alike. They start talking to the guys, and I'm still debating this with myself. If I don't do this right now, I will lose the moment; I ask Paul to talk to him, and everyone looks surprised, even him. Did I say something wrong? I don't think so. He accepts, we sit near the instruments, but I still feel all those eyes on us, but who cares? This is important.

"I have a proposal for you," I say with a confident smile. 

"What kind of... proposal?" He asks shyly. 

"I want you to give me drum lessons" I keep smiling, waiting for his response. 

"Oh, that proposal" He smiles. "I like the idea, I would love to give you lessons,"

"Then we can start planning it because I have other things to do, and TJ said you have a lot of homework lately" I use my hands as I speak. I don't know why it just happened. 

I keep talking, and he keeps listening and nodding. When they have to start playing again, I leave smiling and go to find Andi and Cyrus. Jonah and TJ were staring at me with confusion, and Marty barely glanced at me during a beautiful song he texted me about. He was excited to sing it and for me to hear it. But something happened to him. He is not the Marty that sends me messages and funny pictures. 

Marty's POV

I'm not going to lie. Seeing Buffy talking with Paul made me feel a little sad. Does Buffy like Paul? Why Paul? Well, the real question is: why not Paul? He is amazing... and a drummer. Jonah and TJ tried to cheer me up, but during the song we wrote for Buffy, I couldn't even look at her, I felt dumb for writing a song about her when she could probably like Paul and not me. And I don't care what TJ says, what if she likes Paul?; TJ had the great idea to ask him about what Buffy told him. Maybe he just wants to make me feel bad. Yeah, it has to be that. Jonah tries to hold his laugh when Paul tells us innocently why Buffy wanted to talk with him. 

"Wait, she said what?" I ask with my mouth open in surprise... and relief.

"She wants to learn how to play the drums," He repeats. "I know what you were thinking, but it wasn't that, don't worry" He smiles. 

"You thought the same thing, right?" TJ asks. "We all thought the same thing," 

"Yeah," Jonah nods. 

"It was a freaking false alarm," I say, smiling. 

They turn to me, smiling. That is how they say that I still have an opportunity with Buffy. The only problem we have here is... does she likes me? Or does she just see me as a friend? I can be a good friend, I'm funny, or that is what everybody says about me. 

"I need you to focus on a different thing," Jonah says. "We just played at the pizzeria, guys," He says with a big smile. 

"We played at the pizzeria!" TJ and Paul say in unison excitedly. 

"We did it!" I sing. "This is only the beginning, guys" I look at them.

"No exit?" Jonah put his hand in front of us. He tries to do that thing with the hands that people usually do. 

"No exit" TJ puts his hand above Jonah's. 

"No exit" Paul imitates the action.

"No exit," I say with a confident tone, putting my hand above Paul's. 

"No exit!” We say at the same time. 

"I have to go guys, I'm walking Cyrus home" TJ smiles and leaves with his keyboard. 

Jonah, Paul, and I finish with the rest of our stuff, minus the drums since they belong to the pizzeria. I see my mom waiting for me outside, so I tell the guys that I'll see them tomorrow. Before I can open the car door, I receive a message from Buffy, and as I read it, a big smile spreads across my face. 

Cyrus' POV

The moment Buffy told us that she will take drum lessons with Paul, we couldn't believe it, first because we thought she might like him, and second... I really do not have a second one. We are happy for her in this new journey in her life... she might become a drummer in a band too. Maybe we can start a band. No, that is TJ's thing, not mine; I see TJ talking with the band. I'm waiting for him outside the pizzeria. Andi had to go back since Bex craves some brownies again, and Amber wanted some brownies for her mom too, so they left together, and Buffy went with Iris to drink a coffee. So that only leaves me with Walker, but he waited for a few minutes before leaving me alone. I keep waiting outside, and I hear a loud No Exit. But I think I ruined their moment. TJ sees me and leaves the place too fast. I smile at him, and we start walking. 

"You were amazing," I say, admiring his smile. He is in a good mood. 

"Thanks" He turns to me, smiling before leaving a small kiss on my lips. "I had my muse in the crowd," 

"Muse, huh?" I smile. "I like it," 

"Please don't make fun of me. You know that sometimes I don't think before speaking" 

"Don't worry, I won't say anything... muse" I laugh when he turns to me and closes his eyes, defeated. 

Once we are in front of my house, I hug him, just smelling his clothes, wishing him to stay here with me until tomorrow, but I have to work early, and he has to do homework as soon as he gets home. I look at him still hugging us, and he glances down smiling. Damn, I love his smile so much. He breaks the distance with a kiss. This might be an uncomfortable position to kiss someone. But when it comes to TJ, I do not care. He says he has to go, and I give him one last kiss before entering my house; I look around for any of my parents, but it seems that I'm alone, again. I read my messages, Andi sent something important to the group chat. 

Good hair crew 

Andi:  Buffy, did you talk to Marty? 

Buffy:  about what? 

Andi:  he probably thinks you like Paul 

Buffy:  don't you think Paul told him what we talked about?

Buffy:  but yeah, I sent him a text, and he's coming to one of my classes tomorrow

Cyrus:  this guy knows what he is doing 

Andi:  he wants to try Buffy's interests, he's smart 

Buffy didn't reply to our messages. Maybe it was not a good idea to tell her that. What can I do to help? Maybe, attending that class... with Andi... or TJ. Yes, it has to be him. We can become spies or something, I have to text him first, but this is a good plan. Well, it's not a plan at all, I just was being impulsive, but you get it. 

Chapter Text

Andi's POV

I wanted to go and see Marty and Buffy in the class, they make such a cute couple, but I have to do something called: going to work, at least I can see Amber again. In case you were wondering, no, she does not work there. But she visits us and helps us sometimes. But do you know what the best part is? My friends don't even suspect that something is going on between us, and it's pretty exciting. But how long can we make this last? I mean, my friends like to know every single detail about each other's lives, but I still don't know if it's a good idea to tell them this. We are not a couple, we just go out on dates, and that’s all. We don't have a formal thing yet. And it is cool, but is it what I want? My life has been a rollercoaster lately, and by that, I mean the fact of me being an older sister. I am just scared. What if I am not a good sister? What if the baby hates me? Why my parents don't want to tell us the name already? I just cannot wait until the baby is born. That is not fair, I couldn't even tell them my name suggestions. And I had a lot of them. I wanted to give my little brother something special, but I still can't find the inspiration to make it, to start doing what I have planned. But I am Andi Mack, and I can solve this. I can get out of this creative block that I have right now, I only need to talk with other people that love art as much as I do, like my coworkers and friends, Walker and Libby. So yeah, I am asking for help this time. 

"Andi, can you please tell Cyrus that CeCe needs him at the theater in two hours" My mom is sitting in front of a big slice of cake. "She said that Bowie needs to be there too," Her tone tells me that she still doesn't know about the possible new musical. 

"I'll tell them, don't worry" I smile at her. "I have to go, bye mom... bye unnamed little brother" I was about to leave the kitchen when I hear a hey coming from there. I turn to my mom again. 

"We will tell you the name," She says unbothered. 

"Then tell me!" I smile.  

"But not now" She gives me a fake smile. 

"He is my brother, and I don't know his name," I say, a little annoyed. "I thought that this would make us bond more, mom" I look at her expression. Maybe it was too late for her to start the bond thing. And I have to go to work. "I have to go. Walker already sent me five messages, I'll see you later" I start walking out of the kitchen. 

"Don't forget to tell Cyrus and Bowie what I told you!" She says while eating some cake. 

"I won't!" I close the door behind me. 

Maybe I don't spend as much time at home or with my parents, but I have a lot of work to do at the gallery. Have I become a fully grown-up? Is this Andi Mack: adulting series? I need to do something. I can't just be into that phase of my life. What is next? Questioning who I am? Well, maybe I don't know who I really am. Why do we have to think about all this stuff when we grow up? Can't we just have all the answers? This is a bit annoying. And sad, but it is normal, I guess. 

I cannot take the car this time, so I walk. Maybe that can help me think about something to do at the gallery, we are looking for a new event, but we don't have a lot of ideas. Walker said that we should think of ways to make the exhibitions different. Well, he did not say that, so we can think about any event. But we only need to include the gallery in it. And yes, I do not have a single idea yet. Maybe we can team up with Buffy's dance class and plan something here. We can't make No exit play there every time we want it, they have other places to play at, like The Spoon, Red Rooster, Tony's, and now Cloud 10, and to that list, you have to add us, Shadyside's Art Gallery. Everybody seems to want them to play for their events these days. That is why we need some new ideas that don't involve No Exit. 

"Hello, Andi," Walker greets me. I smile at him and Libby. "Libby was telling me about her idea, and it is amazing," He starts. "Her proposal is to offer some kind of a DIY. The people can come and do their art, and if our boss approves it, we can put all of those in the exhibition," 

"That is a fantastic idea!" I smile. I turn to Libby to tell her that she is a genius.

"And my idea was to have events with a specific dress code, kind of as a Halloween party, it can be a role thing. They come here, we have the event, and we introduce them to art," He says. 

They have great ideas, and all I could think of was to team up with Buffy's dance class. It is not a bad idea, but I need something more creative. That can make people interested in this place and want to come and ask for more. We can make all of those ideas work, but we need more. 

"My idea was..." I start hesitating. "My idea was to team up with Buffy's dance class, we chose with them a theme, kind of the dress code thing, but for them to create choreographies based on what we chose" Maybe this is not the best idea. 

We keep discussing our ideas, to decide the order we can start with the events. We all vote for a different one, making the decision impossible. Luckily, Amber and Iris enter the gallery. They come a lot to help us... and to spend time with us. They are such a blessing to have here. Now with their help, we can make the decision. 

TJ's POV

We are at my house this time, no practice. No writing sessions. Well, Paul needs help with a song he started last night. But we are at my room talking about our gig at Cloud 10; Jonah is happy since we have never played there before. Now you can add one more place in Shadyside that they wanted us to play at. Is this actually happening? I mean, people actually like what we do, our music. It feels like a dream. Marty isn't here, since he had to go to Buffy's class, I was supposed to go with Cyrus, but CeCe asked him to go to the theater to talk about something important. Another play, probably. I didn't want to go alone to the class and Paul didn't want to go with me, so we called Jonah to finish the song. And it has been a good idea until now. 

"With which song are we opening at Cloud 10?" Jonah asks us while he writes in Paul's notebook. 

"I like Marty's new one," Paul says. "Plus, he can sing it to Buffy, without thinking that she likes me,"

"Yeah, I like that one too. It is a good choice" I smile. 

"What if we play this one too?" Jonah hands Paul the notebook. "Do you like it?" He asks with a smile. I look at the now-finished song above Paul's shoulder.

"Jonah, you are a lyrics genius!" I glance at him.

We started to write a possible list of the songs we will sing. We only need Marty to tell us which songs he wants to play. Our phones indicate that we have a new message, and yes, it's from the guy of the hour. He wants us to go to the class, he is not the best dancer but he's definitely not me, so he can survive a class, so this might be about him doing something stupid or embarrassing himself in front of Buffy... again. 

We make our way to the class. And Jonah is still asking about what songs to play and in what order to play them. We want to include some covers, we have too many songs written, but we still need to compose the music for them, although it seems like a simple job in No Exit, it is not so simple, and it is something we have to do as a team. Personally, I prefer to start with the melody rather than the lyrics. And I have the advantage that my parents are always willing to help me, that way I just show the guys my idea and they add what they think is best. It's been a great idea to ask my mom for help. She really seems to enjoy that quality time with me, not to mention that my dad is always singing our songs around the house, especially when the guys go to our writing sessions, I wouldn't be surprised if one day he shows up with the shirts he wants us to make. That's another funny thing, we only have the name of the band, a logo? No, there isn't one yet. 

We find Marty outside the dance studio. Buffy is talking to him. Apparently, the class is over now, and we hadn't noticed it thanks to being too busy with Paul's song. The good thing about this is that we can talk to him about the Cloud 10 performance. We're still not sure what to do about the band logo thing, as Bex offered to design flyers with our logo, but the moment we told her we didn't have one it was a bit awkward. Since then, we have focused exclusively on writing and composing songs, but we haven't touched on the logo issue. Is it necessary to have a logo? Definitely, what does it mean for the band? I don't know, we just let everything flow naturally. We don't always have a plan. Jonah didn't expect us to get this far as a band once he decided to put those posters up on Red Rooster, so don't expect too much from us. 

"Guys! I told Buffy about the new song we wrote," Marty says with a big smile. 

"Which one? We have like twenty songs written," Paul asks, a bit confused, but he made Buffy laugh, so he smiled at her, and the rest of us just stare at them. 

I clear my throat to draw the attention to me, instead of Buffy and Paul. Jonah seems to understand my plan, so he helps me by asking me some questions. I glance at Marty, who is still staring at Buffy.

"Sorry to leave like this, Buffy, but we actually have a band meeting," I say, turning to Jonah and Paul for backup. 

"Right! Marty must have forgotten about the meeting," Jonah says, nodding. "We need to discuss the songs we are playing at Cloud 10" He smiles. 

"Goodbye, Buffy!" Paul smiles at her while grabbing Marty by his arm. 

Once we left Buffy far behind us. We start talking about the songs, not before Paul looked at Marty, telling him that he shouldn't think about what happened a few minutes ago since he's sure Buffy likes Marty a lot too. He doesn't say much, so we take that as him actually believing Paul. Jonah continues the conversation of the songs and his idea to add a rhythm to the one that he finished with us earlier. We stop at Red Rooster to ask Bowie something important and to look at some albums. We need inspiration for that logo, although I know I'm the only one thinking about it right now. 

Cyrus' POV

The talk about the new musical lasted longer than I expected. Bowie was excited to be working with us again almost a year later, which he exaggerated a bit, it hasn't been a year. But what I can assure you is that not only will we have Jonah working on the songs with him, but all of No Exit may be working with us. Which is exciting, but I have to be very professional about this. I'll probably make a prank on TJ. It wasn't long before we walked around the theater thinking of some ideas about set design and all that. By the time CeCe ended our meeting, Bowie went back to Red Rooster, and I left the theater and ran into Iris, who was passing by looking for Amber. We started talking, so we decided to eat at The Spoon. And here we are, eating and drinking milkshakes while I tell her what happened at the theater and our new idea. For a moment, I do not stop talking about myself, so I better ask her about something interesting that has happened to her. The topic is amazing. Iris is a deep and intelligent person. 

"So that is what I was thinking about," Iris takes a sip from her milkshake. "Who am I? Who is Iris?" She makes a little dramatic pause. "And it was clear, I think I already know what I exactly want in my life. Can you believe it was so easy?" 

"Yeah," I nod. "I never thought of that before..." 

"Then do it now!" She stares at my eyes. "Who is Cyrus Goodman?" 

I was about to answer because it is supposed to be easy, right? But I couldn't, my mouth was open, and she was waiting for something to happen. Who is Cyrus Goodman? That is a good question. I never asked myself that before... nobody asked me that before. I was so sure to actually know what I want, who I am, but now that I have to define it, to say it out loud... I do not know. I write, yes, I love my job, absolutely, but who is that person? What does this person want? If I don't know it... who knows it? Does TJ know who he is in a relationship with? Do I even have a thing? A reason to wake up every day is that it is not the fact that I am an adult and I have to work, and I have friends and a boyfriend. This is not how I expected to spend my lunch... questioning who I am; Iris is still waiting for a response, but I don't have one, she said it was so easy, but it's not. 

"You can think about it later" She smiles. 

"Yes, I totally need more than a minute to say it..." I almost finish my milkshake after saying that. 

Who is Cyrus Goodman? That is a good question. Do I do what I do because everybody expects me to do it? Do I only choose this life because I felt pressure? Even if it wasn't exactly like that, why am I doing what I'm doing? This needs more than five minutes to get what I want and who I am. This had to happen right now? In the middle of the day, while I am eating with Iris? Why being an adult is so difficult? You don't know anything. You don't even know you. Hopefully, I am not the only one in Shadyside thinking this. I mean, Iris did it... but she got the answer quickly. But let's be real for a second. Is there anybody who knows what they want to do and who they are? Is there any person out there who can tell me if they actually know it? A single person who has never thought: who am I? what do I want to do for the rest of my life? I only need one person... so I can ask them a bunch of questions.

Andi's POV

After a whole day in the gallery trying to think of a different idea that does not involve my friends, I have... nothing. Thinking about a new idea is difficult, but we decided to start with Libby's idea. It was the best one among the three. Iris and Amber helped us with many things. I even texted Buffy and Cyrus for help, but they could not think anything. That was my day, in summary, me doing my best. Now, I'm walking home with Amber, she tried to help me as well, but yeah, it's pretty much the same story. The cold wind, the streetlights, the moon, and the stars are our best company as we walk across the park. I know that I do not look as cool and happy as usual, but I cannot stop thinking about how bad I am drowning in this block. Do I need Cyrus' help? Maybe it is a good idea to tell him about this, he does not know exactly how I feel. Nobody knows, except for Amber. She keeps talking about how cool it is to be in the gallery the whole day with us appreciating the art. Yes, I am listening, but I don't look focused enough. She stops right in the middle of the swings. I notice quickly and turn to her. She is standing there as if she were waiting for me to say something... and the only thing that I manage to do is... sigh. 

"Hey" She looks at me with those beautiful eyes. "Let's just stay here and look at the stars,"

"What if someone sees us? What are we going to say?" I answer, hesitating. 

"We are two friends who wanted to look up at the stars. Is that a crime?" I see the smile on her face.

"Right... we are friends," I say, whispering. 

At this point, I should not think that the word friends is bad or not enough, right? I mean, we are friends, but I thought we might be something else after all those dates. I am too afraid to ask that question. What if she is not ready for it? But, what if she is waiting for me to ask? Is it all downhill from here? I don't want to think about the gallery, that idea, or even the fact that my parents don't trust me enough to tell me my sibling's name. I need a break from everything and everyone. Everyone but her, I know that I don't have to hold my breath or try not to cry because I'm too stressed out because she understands it. How is it possible that I, Andi Mack, am living so stressed out of everything in my life? When did I cross that line? Why being an adult is so difficult? Why do you have all of these existential crises in your twenties? I'm starting to miss when I was 13, a lot of drama but fewer adult crises. 

I follow her to the swings, and I can't help but picture Cyrus and TJ on these. He always talks about the swings... maybe that can be a sign, and this can be our romantic moment. We both look up at the stars. This may be the most romantic thing we've ever done. Not even the lunch date the other day can top this. I'm not the best at using words, which is why I'm not into writing like Cyrus. But if I had to describe how I feel right now, I'd say I feel just like that time Cyrus forced us to watch Pride and Prejudice, when Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy are dancing. He had told us he felt that way once with TJ, but I didn't think it was a real thing until today. Being on the swings. Looking at the stars makes everything that has happened in my day disappear. Because I am and will only be counting this moment, where the only thing you hear is our breaths. And the movement of her hand taking mine, something that doesn't seem real, that makes me feel like I am in a movie, in a book. 

I try not to smile as I feel her hand, feeling everything else disappear and only the two of us and the sky above us remain. Like I said, like in a movie, like that moment I'd only heard about from my best friend. 

"Do you feel better now?" She asks me. I don't know what to say, I feel relaxed, but I don't want to let go of this moment. 

"Yeah..." I sigh. "I want to stay here for a bit," 

"We can stay here as long as you want,"  

Maybe I cannot run away from all the things that have been bothering me, but at least I can sneak away for a moment with her, and that is more than enough. I know I need to go back to the real world, but I can have this moment for a while. 

TJ's POV  

I have a lot of ideas for that logo but I cannot make this happen unless the whole band is on the same page as I am, which is difficult since Marty has his head on something else, Paul is struggling with school right now trying to save some of his classes, and Jonah... well Jonah is focused on which songs we're going to play at Cloud 10. Maybe I don't have to worry about it so soon, but I don't like looking at the flyers with a simple No Exit on them. We need something that leaves an impact and attracts people to listen to our music. We have good songs and a good sound, but not a logo. We are missing that. We had some big changes when we decided that The Sandwiches was not good enough, then, No Exit was born. Maybe I can plan something with Bowie or ask Cyrus about it. He is probably at his house right now. Plus, this is the perfect opportunity to ask him about his day... and listen to how much he missed me. And how I missed him more... maybe we are one of those couples that some people hate... but I don't really care. 

I put back the album I was looking at, but when I look at my phone, I find some messages from my best friends. Apparently, Amber and Iris want me to help them think of something to help Andi. I do not really pay much attention to the messages now, even though I don't understand Iris and Amber's because I don't have any texts from Cyrus. Which is strange, we haven't seen each other all day, and yes, we're not like sending each other a hundred messages all day. But he always tells me about his day. So, I don't think much about it and decide to call him.

It takes a few moments to finally hear his voice on the other side of the line. He sounds tired. Maybe he was sleeping. Yeah, it has to be that he was definitely sleeping.

"TJ?" He repeats. Stopping my inner fight. 

"Yeah," I say, a bit surprised. "I mean, were you sleeping?" I ask him softly. 

"Something like that. I was laying in the bed, thinking about stuff" He sounds really tired of thinking about stuff. 

"Are you still struggling to continue the thriller?" I’m sure that it has to be that. But the silence that makes an unexpected appearance remains for a few more seconds. 

"Yes. It is that. I can't think of anything else. Maybe I should stick to romance" He sighs. 

I don't know what to say. There is this strange vibe that this is not only about the thriller and I don't know if I should ask about it. Why am I so clueless when it comes to relationships? Come on, TJ, say something nice to him. 

"Maybe you need some time off everything. We can go out somewhere after the gig at Cloud 10," I ask with so much confidence in my voice. So he won't even notice that my right hand is shaking right now and that many scenarios where he tells me that he wants to break up are dancing in my mind. 

"Remember that time I told you to just run away for a while?" He asks. I answer too fast to that question. But it's true, I remember many things he has said to me. Yeah, I'm that kind of person. "We should do that for real this time. Just a few days" I cannot see him, but I'm sure that he is smiling at the idea of it. 

"We can do it whenever you want" I smile at the thought of him smiling. 

Is it alright to plan to run away with Cyrus when I should be focused on Cloud 10? I'm not sure. I'm excited to keep playing, No Exit's success here in Shadyside is necessary. But we are also allowed to have some fun and disappear for some days. Maybe he needs this more than me. And I will accept without any doubt; on the other hand, can you even believe how far No Exit is getting? This opportunity is good for us. And I want Cyrus to be part of it, to be part of the event that happens in my life because I want him in my life for a really long time. 

Chapter Text

Jonah's POV

We play at Cloud 10 today, so we decided to have a small band practice before the actual show. Paul has been here for almost 30 minutes, he said he needed a break from the university, and my mom needed someone to help her cook. Now I'm just looking at them doing all the difficult stuff. We texted the group chat, but TJ and Marty are five minutes late, which is not a surprise, honestly, but today is the big day. They should be here already. Maybe something happened, and I understand, but they could send us a message. They have been focused on different things, TJ told us that he had to help Cyrus and Andi with totally separate things, and Marty has been focused on Buffy. Apparently, he is going to her dance classes pretty often, well that is what Iris told us yesterday. 

It doesn't take much time for TJ to finally arrive. That's the sign to leave the kitchen and go to our practice room. And since my dad is already home, he will cook with my mom; we start talking about the songs while Marty decides to show up, and the one who speaks the most is Paul. He is really excited about playing at Cloud 10. TJ is glued to his phone, his eyes have not left the screen for about seven minutes straight. We are still waiting for Marty. It has been almost 50 minutes since he was supposed to be here, but well, he is not here. I walk around the room with my guitar in my hands, Paul and TJ seeing how I walk with fear in my eyes and anxiety in my whole body. I stop in front of them but not meeting their eyes. Something comes to my mind, and I call Marty for the tenth time in twenty minutes, only for him to not answer. I finally look up at my friends. 

"Where the hell is he? He was supposed to be here fifty minutes ago" I take a deep breath. "I need some water," 

"We don't know where he could be," TJ starts. "I asked Cyrus, Amber, Andi, Iris, Walker, Blue, Bowie, and even Bex, and nobody knows where he is," 

"We know that he couldn't forget about the gig at Cloud 10. He really wanted to play there," Paul says in a calm tone. 

"Then where is he? We can't play without our bassist. It could be like going out without shoes!" I say, trying to breathe correctly. TJ hands me a glass of water. 

"Maybe he is still sleeping," TJ suggests innocently. 

"Did you text Buffy?" Paul asks him. "Maybe she knows something that can be useful," 

Before TJ could respond to that, Marty enters the room. His look is totally different from what we remember from yesterday. His clothes are very Marty, he does not look like the guy who attends dance classes only to see the woman he has a crush on; we all stare at him for a minute until he turns to us a bit confused by our silence. 

"Where have you been?" Paul asks first, with that deep voice. 

"I was with Buffy..." He starts. "I asked her out on a date," He sighs. 

We share glances. The surprise is not evident only in our faces and our eyes, and now the whole place has a different vibe. I don't know what to say, neither does TJ nor Paul.

"And what she said?" I ask, kind of afraid of the answer. I want my friend to go out with her so much. 

"Well, I went to her class, not to dance, I went to ask her about that" He makes a pause. We take a step closer to him. "And she was talking to Iris, they were laughing, and she looked so pretty, so out of my league somehow..." 

"And...?" TJ says. 

"And then there it goes Marty, asking her in front of Iris, Andi's grandmother, and other students that she has... and she..." He tries to end the sentence. 

"She said no?!" Paul asks, surprised, with a sad look on his face. 

“No..." 

"She said yes?!" TJ and I say in unison. 

"Yeah..." 

"And you have this whole look because..." I say, clearly not understanding. 

"What am I going to do now? I have a date with her!" He says, finally, out loud. 

"You can find the answer later. We have to practice before going to Cloud 10, just focus on the band for a moment" TJ smiles gently at him. 

We start to play the first song. Paul and TJ seem to be enjoying this one so much since they wrote it together. I love this song too, but something does not leave my mind. We saw TJ falling for Cyrus, and now we see Marty totally falling for Buffy, but why does this happen? What is love? What I write in my songs are usually things that I see in movies that Andi wants to watch with me, and they are pretty good, but I really want to know how does it feel that, but at the same time, I have zero interest. That is why I prefer having my friends fall in love and tell me about it instead of living that. But I'm curious. Why does everybody seems to become an idiot when they are in love? Or when they have a crush on someone? 

Cyrus' POV

Buffy and I are at Red Rooster looking for a present for Bex and Bowie. We couldn't think about anything else, and yes, maybe this is not the best idea because Bowie works here, but this was her idea. I only said yes to it. Honestly, I have the feeling that this is something else and not just buying a present. I strongly believe that something happened to her and she wants to tell me but doesn't know-how. I also think that this has to do with Marty. But I won't know unless she decides to talk, so that means I'll have to wait. Maybe this has to do with something else, about the musical... no, she doesn’t know anything about the songs, I need them first before asking her to work with me again. 

And speaking of the musical, CeCe and I have been working so hard on this. We made a list of possible actors we want to play the characters. But we still need to do auditions, and I don't want to be that kind of person who has favorites. Although I have a preferred one, Blue, I can't just offer the role to her. She is talented, but she needs to go to the auditions just like everybody else. 

I try to work a lot. I don't like it when I do not have anything to do. Maybe that's the reason why I write the moment I get home. And I write a lot now that I'm in this phase of my life, where I question my whole existence. 

"Hey, do you think this is a good option?" She shows me one of the ten we have already seen before. 

"Maybe Red Rooster is not the best option to look for a present," I say, shaking my head. "Plus, Bowie works here" I raise an eyebrow. 

"You're right" She nods. "Where should we go then?" 

"Maybe Walker knows about a cool place where we can go," I say as I start walking towards the exit. "But what if we do this later? I have to call TJ to make sure nothing wrong is going on with him" I stop right after we get out of there. 

"Sure" She looks at her phone. "I still have to pick what to wear for the Cloud 10 event," 

"Then I'll text Walker" I smile. "See you on Cloud 10," 

She smiles and leaves me alone. I don't have to talk to TJ. I already did that like an hour ago. I am planning that running away thing. It's not far from here so we can easily come back. Yes, I know that is not exactly what I had in mind, but his parents might need his help, or Jonah might want to do a band meeting tomorrow. But on the bright sight, planning this was entertaining. And helped me to understand how much I need to do things that are not related to my job. Maybe I can do this often, it can be a good distraction. But right now, I need to get everything ready and, I have to be on time at Cloud 10. Andi takes these events very seriously. 

I walk to the café and take a seat outside the local. Taking some time to think and try to answer the questions Iris asked me the other day. How is it possible that it takes me so long to say who I am?

Buffy's POV

I enter Cloud Ten, finding CeCe welcoming me with a basket of products I have to give to the people. I turn to Bowie, who only nods to me as an answer. But I do what she says. I walk around the place, looking for a specific person. But they seem to not be here yet. I spot Andi and Amber talking to Paul's sister and Cyrus. I walk to them with a big smile on my face and offer them one of the products. Paul's sister takes two of them since they were hair products; she smiles and only says: "if it's free, I'll take it," and I agree with her. Cyrus takes one of those too, saying that would be a good present for TJ's mom. I turn to Amber and, she takes one too, saying that after looking at Paul's sister's, Blue, hair, she would probably dye her hair as well, not all her hair, but she is considering it. But Andi says she doesn't need to grab one since this is her mother's beauty salon. I stayed in their circle for a few minutes until I saw the person I was looking for with his bandmates and their instruments with them. I leave them talking about all the benefits Andi has because her mom and her grandmother, I mean, her CeCe own Cloud 10. I approach No Exit and immediately notice how they all turn to me after Jonah smiled. First of all, that is weird, and second, it's too late to go back with Andi and Cyrus and ask for their help. Once I am in front of them, they greet me with big smiles. I offer them some products from the basket I am holding. Marty is the first to say a loud yes and take one of the bottles. I smile at him and then turn to the person I need to talk with. 

"Paul!" I say with a big smile. "Can we talk about our next drum session?" I ask. "In private" 

I see the faces of the other three. They look so confused, even Paul is confused, but he follows me. Now, this is the moment I have been waiting for. This is why I've been so close to him, laughing at everything he says or does, well that is because he is actually funny. He started to talk about drums before I could say something. I don't know what is going on with him, but he talks as if he were an extrovert like Marty. I only get to nod to every word he says. But in my head, I only want to tell him the reason why I wanted to talk to him in the first place. We are close now, so he deserves to know, right? But he does not make this an easy job for me. I sigh as he keeps talking. I watch Iris and Walker coming our way, and yes, this is not a good sign. I smile at them and, Paul does the same once Walker touches his shoulder. I glance at the rest of the band, who are still staring at us. 

"This is a nice event" Walker smiles at us. Now I'm next to Paul, waiting for them to go and greet Andi instead. 

"Beautiful," I say, still fake smiling.

"We wanted to wish you good luck, Paul," Iris turns to Walker. "Now we can go to say that to the rest of the band, come on" She smiles at him. 

"Thanks!" Paul says before they leave. He looks like he actually doesn't want them to go.

"So, there is something I wanted to tell you..." I start once I get his attention again. 

"The drum session! I was thinking that we could change the day of the session this week. I have to study for a test," He says nervously. 

I stare at him, confused by his words. This is not how I planned everything, he is not following my plan. At all. I try to speak, but he starts talking again. And judging by how he talks about the school, you can get how much he hates it, but I cannot listen to one more word. I start walking away from the guys' sight, leading Paul. He is too focused on his story to notice that, then I cover his mouth with my hand, meeting his eyes. He looks at me, eyes wide open. 

"I like your drum stories, and I am sorry that you hate physics so much, but I need to say something to you," I say slowly. "And I need you to be quiet" He nods. 

"Sorry," He whispers. "I freaked out," 

"Why did-" I don't finish my question. Now I get why he freaked out. He thought that I was confessing to him. 

"Yeah?" 

"There is something I need to tell you... and this is freaking me out," I sigh. "I like Marty. I like, like him,"

His face looks both surprised and relieved. And somehow I am too, he is too cool, but we are better as friends. He stays quiet for a few seconds, processing what I just said. Then with red ears, he looks at me smiling.

"I thought, I mean, I'm embarrassed now" He laughs. "But thanks for telling me. I still don't get why you are telling me this," 

"I wanted to tell someone" I smile, sighing. "I couldn't tell Jonah because he's not good at keeping secrets. Same with TJ, he tells Cyrus everything, and Cyrus tells everything to him... and I clearly can't tell Marty... yet..." 

He puts his hand on my shoulder and gives me a soft smile. This guy has this vibe, that no matter what, you can count on him. He will be there, cheering you up when you need it or listening to you if you don't feel like talking. 

"I won't say anything," 

Somehow I trust Paul even more than I do with other people. I didn't tell my best friends because they would make it bigger than it actually is. With Paul, I know my secret is safe. He may be TJ's best friend, but that does not mean we can't have some secrets of our own. We smile at each other for a few seconds before I give him a big hug. Then we went back with the band before Jonah grabbed his phone to call Paul and tell him to come back immediately. Bowie tells the guys that it is almost time to start their performance. I try to find my best friends again. 

TJ's POV

"Why did she say yes, but then she wants to talk to Paul privately?" Marty says, closing his eyes.

"She said it was about the drum session," Jonah says, still looking at the product Bowie gave him and the one he took from Buffy's basket. 

"He will tell us, don't worry" I smile at him. 

I hear Marty sighing. And Jonah, saying: "They are not the same product!". I look for Cyrus between all the people who came to the event, but I end up meeting Amber's eyes. She does a gesture to tell me that Cyrus was talking to her. I smile and grab my phone. I look at the picture of us hugging, the one Jonah took us when we were at the pizzeria the night we got together. It's my favorite one; the band sang his favorite Taylor Swift song. And, he decided it was a good idea to stand up and sing at the top of his lungs with me, hugging me and staring into my eyes at that part of the song. It was pretty romantic. I can't believe that was four months ago. Now I look back at that day and do not believe how much has changed, even if it was just a little. Our lives keep changing. We keep changing, and I think that's a good thing. Because while we keep changing, our feelings for each other don't. That stays there. 

Jonah and Marty are talking about how long is taking Paul to come back. Jonah, with all the intentions to call him grabs his phone from his pocket. Then I hear Paul's deep voice talking to Buffy. She smiles at us and wishes us good luck. Not before asking Marty about their date, taking him by surprise. Before he can say a thing Bowie tells us that is almost time. So we followed our leader to the main stage that Bowie and CeCe prepared for us. Jonah clears his throat before speaking on the microphone. We start to play with Marty's new song. He sings most of it, so I can focus on my keyboard and that nervousness in my stomach. 

We sing two more songs before taking a little break. The people here enjoyed our songs. Even CeCe was singing along to the last one. Cyrus and Iris surprised me with a big hug. Paul only smiles at them before being attacked by Blue. They tell us how much they liked the two new songs. It doesn't take us long for Cyrus and me to walk around the place looking for some privacy to talk. When we finally find the perfect place, he is the first one to speak.

"So, I planned everything," He says. "We can leave as soon as this event ends," 

"Sounds good, my parents know that we are leaving, but they don't know for how long," I smile at him. 

"We can come back as soon as you want. That's not a problem" He intertwines our fingers. 

"Maybe we can wait for a little, like an hour," I say hesitantly. "Jonah wants to go for some milkshakes at The Spoon," 

I see his expression changing. Maybe that wasn't the best idea. He already planned this, and I'm trying to change it. I waited for an answer, but I'm not getting any. He sighs and nods, telling how exciting it is to go for some milkshakes... alright, TJ, you are not doing something good here. He doesn't want to be trapped on this never-ending routine again, and you can change that.

"You know what? We can leave as soon as this event ends" I kiss him on the cheek. 

Jonah’s POV

I see Cyrus and TJ doing all the things couples are supposed to do. So I decide to not go and talk to them. I see around the place, but I don't find any person who could enjoy talking about something not love-related. Everybody talks about Bowie's and Bex's baby. They are congratulating CeCe and Bowie. And that's cute, but I need a different topic. I get out of the local and sit next to a tree. I feel how someone takes a seat next to me. We spend some minutes in silence. Then without realizing it, I let out what I am thinking. 

"I don't get why everybody is so excited about love..." I say, staring right at the store across the street. "What is love?"

"Twice's song?" I hear Blue say. 

"No, not the song" I smile. "I just want to know how it feels. Everybody seems to know it" I sigh. 

Maybe this is something stupid. But I really want to know about that. How does it feel? Why is everybody so excited to fall in love? It does not look interesting from this side. That's why I want to experience that so I can write better songs. But how can I say this to Blue? 

"Actually, that is the same thing I ask myself" I turn to her. She is also staring at the store, nodding to the words she just said. 

"Really?" I stare at her. "That's cool! I want the experience to write better. I'm like Cyrus, who writes stories based on what other people tell him," 

"I want to because I think it might be fun" Blue makes a pause. "And because I really want to have a better method when I have to act angry or sad because of love in the plays" She smiles, shaking her head. "But it's overwhelming. When you don't feel as excited as everybody else or when you just cannot understand anything love related because you have never been in love,"

"I get it," I sigh. "I can't even write a romantic text to help one of my friends" I make her laugh. 

"Oh yeah, Paul told me about that" She smiles. "Maybe we can talk about something else. Tell me about how did you learn to play the guitar," 

I start the story about Bowie being my teacher for a long time. And how that helped me with my anxiety. She makes a lot of questions, she even asked me if I was interested in giving her some classes. This is not a bad idea. I can make something with that free time I have, when TJ and Paul are drowning with homework, and when Marty goes with his mom to those cooking classes. She made a joke about being our competition in the future with Buffy. We keep talking about everything you can think of, she is a funny woman and an incredible singer. The talent must be in the family. Oh, and I finally know her real name! Which is an honor, the rest of the guys still don't know it. That is probably the less relevant thing we talked about. We go back to Cloud 10. So we can finish the performance with six more songs. This gig was better than I could ever imagine. And now I know I have a new friend. Blue was Paul's little sister, but now she is just my friend. 

Chapter Text

Andi's POV

I walk through the gallery with Walker and Libby, trying to think about something else. I tried to call Cyrus several times, but he just decided not to pick up the phone this time. Buffy was not answering either, and that could only mean one thing: I need to think this by myself. And it is scary. I've been thinking about this for days, and when I need my best friends' help, they are not around. I take a deep breath and turn to the sculpture Walker is analyzing. Iris finished it yesterday, and she asked us to give her some feedback on her work, but I guess Walker is taking this too seriously. Libby approved the sculpture in less than 20 minutes. I said that it was amazing. Because it looks incredible, but I didn't stare at it for a whole hour. And right now, all I can think about is this, the thing, the problem, whatever you want to name it. All my ideas include Buffy, Cyrus, or No Exit in them. And it is not funny anymore. Everything I can think about is music shows. But No Exit can't come here and play every time we want. Maybe that is the problem... I think my brain just gave me the best idea. 

I look at my friends. Libby is reading something on her phone, and Walker is still staring at the sculpture. I shake my head before getting their attention with the magical words. They know how much I have been struggling with the idea, although the dance idea wasn't such a bad one. But it was hard to team up with Buffy's class. So I decided to think of a new one, a different one, an original and cool new idea. And now, this is the moment you have been waiting for. The moment I have been waiting for. 

"I have an idea!" I say with a big smile on my face. 

"Tell us," Walker smiles. 

"A battle of the bands" I wait for their reactions. 

"Is there another band besides No Exit?" Walker asks, with Libby agreeing with him. 

"This is the opportunity to know the answer to that question" I make a short pause. "We make the battle here, so people can see a good and professional music battle between the bands. We can ask my dad to be a judge!" 

"It’s not a bad idea" He turns to Libby. She agrees with me. "Let's plan it then," 

A battle of the bands is what we needed. That was the big idea that my brain was sure I would think about. Now I only need to plan this and tell my best friends the good news. Oh, and also tell my parents about this since I said my dad could be a judge, but I know he will be excited to be part of this. And I also need to ask Amber for help. This might change the plans we had. How do you explain to the person you are seeing but are not a couple that you need to cancel that road trip? I need to find better words to explain these kinds of things. 

Walker catches my attention with some ideas for the battle of the bands. He thinks that before doing anything else, we should prepare the rules. And Libby agrees with him. Honestly, I do too. You can't throw an announcement like that without anything for the bands to follow. Libby gives another good point, we need a prize. The winner of the battle of the bands needs something to remember this event. Something as good as the performances they give. But first, we need to know which bands will be part of this. Are there a lot of bands in Shadyside? I am sure No Exit will be part of the battle, but you can't make a battle of bands with only one of them, right?; I keep listening to my friends. They have good ideas, and the best part of it is that we agree with almost everything the other says. This battle of the bands is going to be amazing. 

Cyrus' POV

Do you want to know what happened to our scape plans three days ago? Well, let me tell you... nothing happened. We never left. Jonah stole TJ away to talk to many people at the event. And I waited, I was patient, but we all have a limit. And mine was seeing TJ talking and talking to all these people while he was looking for me. I decided to leave with Andi and Blue. We went to the pizzeria and then to the gallery. Libby was there waiting for Andi, so she was surprised to see us, in a good way. We really had a good time together, but my phone kept ruining the moment. It was TJ texting me. I ended up turning off my phone, as Andi suggested when we were ordering the pizza. Since that day, I've been avoiding everybody except the people I work with. Now I am at the theater with CeCe, waiting for the auditions to start. She is looking at the names on her board and drinking some coffee. I look at the board to find that our first audition for the lead is Blue. Suddenly, I smile. Thinking about her potential for this role. And maybe for the one that I have been writing for the past three days. 

"Cyrus?" I hear CeCe's voice. 

"Sorry," I turn to her. "I will focus on this" 

"Something happened with TJ?" Her tone and her expression... she knows me too well. 

"Maybe..." I sigh. "I haven't talked to him for three days..." 

"Oh, he did not call you?" She asks, surprised. 

"No, I haven't answered his calls..." I say slowly. Her expression changes to a: you have to be kidding me. 

Blue appears on stage, making us turn to her. There is something new about her that draws all the attention to her. Not just CeCe's and mine's but everybody else's. She changed her hair color, and she looks great. Her scene starts. She recites her part perfectly. I can even tell CeCe loves her acting as much as I do. The way she feels the words on that script brings me back to the moment I was sitting in front of my computer writing it. With a big smile and happily sighing whenever TJ crossed my mind. Now, what do I have? I am kind of mad at him, and he doesn't even know that. He keeps texting and calling me, but why don't I answer?; I try not to think about that. I only focus on Blue and her singing. Then we have other auditions for that role too. But Blue is amazing, acting or singing. She is as talented as her brother. 

For once in a long time, I try to focus completely on my job. CeCe and I have been sitting there for so long. We needed a break, so we decided to go and eat something at The Spoon. She is telling me a story from her youth. She had some cool adventures back then; I smile at every single one of her stories. And then I start telling her some of my own, I have a lot of them, but I try to say the ones that do not involve Andi and something questionable that the Good Hair Crew did. She had to take a call while I was in the middle of one of my stories. So I look around the place, just to see the faces, and find a potential story hidden right here. I see a girl eating alone with a bass guitar in front of her. She can be the superhero in a story where she is also in a rock band, and before their big concert, she has to save the world. Would she save the world and be on time for her performance? Who knows?; I see another girl, with an elegant posture. She can be a secret princess who wants to explore the world without being noticed. She falls in love with Shadyside and decides to stay for some months; I turn to find a couple, it is hard to find a story about them. Maybe they just became a couple and wanted to have a date here. But one of them is the villain the rock band girl has to fight. I chuckle at the thought of my short stories. CeCe comes back to the table, and we decide to go back to the theater. This will be a long day, but we have each other at least. 

Andi's POV 

I walk home after a productive day at the gallery. My turn there finished already, and Amber's turn just started. Yes, she is now working with us. Why do three twenty-somethings need extra hands? Because it is hard work. Now that she works there, we can spend more time together, and we both love that part. But today I had to leave early since this whole thing of the battle of the bands was my idea, I have to do more tasks than my friends. And one of those tasks is asking my dad to be a judge. I also have to go to TJ's house and ask his mom if she would like to be a judge with my dad. This event is going to be huge. I enter my house find it quiet as usual, making me doubt if there is someone in the house. Until I hear my dad humming to a song. A No Exit song. Just the usual at the Macks'. 

"Dad!" I approach the kitchen. "I have news! Where is mom?" 

"Taking a nap" He turns to the spaghetti and then me. "Something happened?" 

"Yes!" I smile. "We are hosting a battle of the bands!" I move my hands with enthusiasm. 

"That is amazing!" He smiles, leaving the spaghetti to hug me. "I'm proud of you," 

"Thanks," I sigh happily. "We want you to be a judge," 

"Great, I can be a judge" He nods. 

"We also want TJ's mom to be a judge," I say, still smiling. "And that's it, we need more people," 

"I can help," He winks. "But first, let me finish the spaghetti," 

I nod and go to my room. I want to tell my best friends about this too, but I'll wait. It is not time yet. And as Walker and Libby suggested, we need to have everything planned before spreading the news. If I tell Cyrus, he might tell TJ, and he will definitely tell Jonah, Marty, and Paul. It is too risky. And I cannot tell Buffy because she might ask Marty if they already know about the battle of the bands, and he will run to the guys and tell them, again, too risky. But there is a person who won't say anything, even though she sees No Exit often. Yes, I'm talking about Blue. She is the perfect person to tell the good news, and she knows how to keep secrets. I just know it; I walk around my room and text her. She must be already at her house, her audition was hours ago, and Cyrus probably did not tell her if she got the role, so I invited her to my house.

Paul's POV

I have to study for a test, but Marty decided it was a great moment to call a band meeting. Apparently, it is an emergency. And apparently, he is not the one who needs the help. Honestly, I didn't get what the message said. But just in case I'm taking my book with me, sometimes Marty only wants us to go to his house to talk about Buffy because his three dogs apparently leave him alone. This whole date thing is creating a new Marty. He still does not know where to go with Buffy. And she is the opposite. She is waiting for him to say something about their date, but she already has something planned; I prepare to leave when I meet Blue on her way to the door too. As soon as I smile at her, I notice a big change. 

"What happened to your hair?" I ask. Surprised by her new look. 

"Nothing..." She says, clearly ignoring what I noticed. 

"It's not blue anymore!" What is the point of calling my sister Blue,  if her hair is not blue?

"Oh, that! I wanted a change. I had it blue for so long" She touches her hair. "You don't like it?"

"I like it. It suits you. But... I'm going to miss the blue, Blue" I try not to laugh. That was a good joke, right? 

"Nice..." She shakes her head before heading to the door. 

"Where are you going?" She never leaves the house after coming back from the theater. 

"To Andi's house, she invited me" She turns to me. "We are eating spaghetti," 

Since when is my sister, friends with my friends? Is this what will happen for the rest of my life? Me making friends and then her being friends with my friends. I guess that is what happens when you are only one year older than your little sister. I mean, my older sister would never do that. She just does not vibe with them. Anyway, I leave my house and watch Blue walking away. Surprisingly, I find the guys trying to convince TJ to not call Cyrus again. I do not know what really happened, but they haven't talked in days. TJ is not having a good time.

I approach them, they are sitting in Marty's bed. Him listening to Miss You on loop. And singing, again and again, the line "Shit, maybe I miss you". Why does it feel that I am aware of everything that goes on in the lives of the people I care about as if I didn't have my own problems to fix? I don't know. But right now, I need to convince TJ to actually call Cyrus for the 100th time.

Andi's POV

The moment comes, and we are already enjoying the spaghetti. My parents asked Blue a ton of questions, and she answered happily. My mom tells us some stories of her adventures. I am actually older than Blue, and my mom has a lot of stories. My dad also shared some of his, like that one, where he was touring with The Renaissance Boys. And that makes me think about the battle of the bands. I mean, it could be perfect if they could come to our event. It is the first of its kind here in Shadyside. But is the gallery big enough to host such an event? What if the only band in our battle of the bands is No Exit? How do we know for sure that there are other bands out there? What can we do for this to not fail? I have so many questions right now. And the only three people in front of me are my parents and Blue. And the one who I would probably talk about this is Blue. Well, I will tell her about this whole situation. But at the right moment. I turn to her, she starts with a Cyrus told me, and yes, that is already bad. 

"Cyrus told me about your story with your parents. That is cool" Blue smiles at us. "But it must be weird to change your last name" She eats more of the spaghetti. 

"Actually..." I start. 

"I changed mine," My dad completes my response. 

"Oh..." She says in a surprised tone. "That's even better!" She smiles at my dad. 

We all smile at each other. Blue is as kind as her brother. They are the kind of siblings that I expect to be with my little brother, but the only difference is Paul and Blue were born only one and a half year apart. And my brother and I, 22 years apart. I want to be a good sister to him. Although I work at the gallery and spend almost all of my time there. I want him to know that his sister is cool. I mean, I create art, I even work in an art gallery, how cool is that?, but I also want him to know that I am a serious woman. I don't know what that means, actually. 

"Andi? When will you post about the battle of the bands? I can make some publicity," My mom starts, leaving Blue so confused. "Your dad told me when you were with Walker on the phone" She smiles excitedly. 

I turn to my dad, about to tell him something for this betrayal. I wanted to tell my mom about this. It was my job. But I also turn to Blue, who is completely clueless, waiting for me to say something. 

"I was about to tell you about that," I sigh. "And I was about to tell you too, Blue," I smile. 

"It is a great idea" She smiles. "A battle of the bands is what this place needs!" 

I smile at her. This is what I needed. Now Walker can tell everybody about this. My mom can create great publicity about the battle of the bands. We are ready for this. Well, actually we are not, there are many things to prepare, but you get my point. We finish the spaghetti, and I ask Blue for some feedback on a paint that is still a work in progress. She offers to help me. This is going to be fun. Before we start, I grab my phone and text Walker. 

Cyrus' POV

I had some good ideas at The Spoon, so when I was finally in my room, I started to write them as a distraction. And as a method that will help me write better, or maybe just to write something and try to forget about everything else. Cece had some work to do, and I don't want to talk to anybody else besides her, and maybe that is not what I should be doing. I have some missed calls from Andi and many messages from Buffy. And of course, I have many missed calls and unread messages from the man of the hour  TJ Kippen. Someway I'm glad he is trying to talk to me, but I also think that is not enough. He knew how important this was to me. I am in the middle of a crisis every day. I do not know who Cyrus Goodman is. And I am starting to worry about myself, but I finally felt better planning that thing, and he knew that! Now, I just wish him to be here, face to face, talking to me. But maybe I am asking for too much. 

My phone rings again, and I don’t even bother to look at the screen. I take a deep breath and try to keep writing that short story, Bex likes to read these. Whenever I write a story based on a random person, she asks me to read my creation. She even reads them out loud so her son can listen too. And I consider it so adorable. I take a moment to read all the words on my laptop screen, but the doorbell pulls me out of my concentration. I decide to go and see who it is, and to my surprise is the only person I wished to be right here with me. 

"Cyrus!" He says the moment I open the door. 

"TJ..." I sigh. "Something happened?" 

"Uhm... yes, you have been avoiding me" Now that is the thing I did not want to get into. 

"I have been busy" I try not to go, hug him, and then kiss him. But this is extremely hard. 

"I'm sorry..." He says, staring at me. Face full of guilt. I open my mouth to say something, but he starts again. "I know I had to say something, and I know I had to come here earlier... I thought you were so mad at me, and I guess I was scared... scared that maybe after that you would break up with me or something..." He sighs. "I am not good with apologies, and a song would never fix anything, and I know it. I just wanted to say how much I am sorry and miss you... and... and how much I care about you..." 

"Thanks..." I don't really know what to say. And those words left my mouth automatically. 

"I know I fucked up the plans you had for us, and I'm so, so, so sorry" He has those puppy eyes. 

"I know, thanks" AGAIN. STOP BRAIN. I take a moment to look at what he is holding. "What are you supposed to do with that?" 

"Trying to copy what Monica did for Chandler," He says shyly. 

"Then do it" I try not to smile. That is really sweet. 

He does the thing, and all I can do is smile at the sight of him doing a silly dance with a fucking turkey on his head. I start to laugh, and so does him. But he asks me for help. He can't get the turkey out of his head. I do my best, and after a few minutes, he is free. 

"Does this mean that you are not mad at me anymore?" He asks. 

"No... I'm not mad" I smile at him. "Thanks for doing this" 

"You should try the turkey thing too! It is fun" He smiles at me. 

"I don't think so" I wrinkle my nose, and he laughs. 

"I love you," He says, smiling and obviously unconsciously. 

Did I hear those words? Did he just say what I think he said? Those three words? The three words? I don't say anything else for a second, waiting for him to do something, but when he realizes what he said, he covers his mouth with his hand. 

"You what?" I ask, still amazed. He thinks about it for a moment, then he looks at me, straight in the eyes. 

"I love you..." He uses a tender tone. And a smile appears on my face. 

"I love you too, TJ," 

Chapter Text

Jonah's POV

There is good news around Shadyside. Last week it was announced the very first battle of the bands. Hosted by the art gallery. And yeah, this is our opportunity and for many other bands. This is also the perfect excuse to meet other bands and probably make new friends. I'd be lying if I said that I am not excited about this. The battle of the bands is everything we talk about when we have our band meetings. And I have been teaching Blue how to play the guitar, and she is good. And a fast learner. She is as good as me at this point, and it has been like three weeks since we started. We spend a lot of time together now, but she still has the theater, you can say that I'm helping her with her singing too, but she is too good at it. I do not understand how Blue and Paul are so talented when their parents think they do this only as a hobby. And speaking of parents. My parents are even more excited than we are for the battle of the bands. They are already making plans when (if) we win. They want to throw a big party; honestly, our parents, and Bowie, are the biggest fans No Exit has. 

We have a meeting right now. The pizzeria is the best place to have many of our band meetings. But the news at our table is not about the battle of the bands or the band at all. TJ tells us about how cute Cyrus looks in all of the pictures he took of him on their road trip. And Marty is talking about how much he wants to go out with Buffy, but he still does not have a single plan on that date. The only one suffering with me is Paul. He is listening to the other two guys in front of us. 

"When do you think the gallery will let us sign up for the battle of the bands?" I ask Paul.

"Walker told me once the rules are out, we can visit them if you guys want" His deep voice draws the attention of the other two. 

"Sure, let's do that" Marty nods. 

"Great, do you want to discuss what possible songs we could sing at the battle of the bands or..." TJ starts. 

"Yes!" I say immediately. "I don't want another hour of Cyrus and Buffy" I turn to Paul.

"Yeah, let's focus on the band" He looks at Marty and TJ. 

We talk about the songs, but I feel we are missing something important, but I can't remember it. We have a name, a sound, songs, and even more, songs written, but they are still a work in progress, so I can't really understand what we need. And apparently, the guys are on the same page as I am. We don't stay for a long time in the pizzeria since we all want to ask Walker about the rules. Even on our way to the gallery, the discussion is still about the band. 

Cyrus' POV

Andi and Buffy are in my house, they wanted to know about the road trip TJ and I had, we borrowed his father's car and went on a cute adventure. We saw the most incredible landscapes. Until I had to come back and discuss with CeCe who is the lead. And yes, it is Blue. My best friends really wanted to come, and ask me about everything and tell me that we should make a road trip too. Buffy is already planning it. She is writing on my computer while Andi and I are in my bed listening to her ideas. 

Andi brings up that topic. When I didn't want to see or talk to TJ. I think I was being dramatic, but they consider that he did something wrong. I never told them that we said I love you to each other when he apologized to me, all they know is the apology part, but I couldn't find the right moment to tell them the big news. I am starting to think that the right moment is right now. Andi keeps talking about that, while Buffy types and agrees with her. 

"I was just being dramatic," I say with a big sigh. 

"Dramatic? Cyrus!" Andi turns to me. 

"That must have been a great apology" Buffy turns to us for a second. 

"It is just that..." I try to not smile. "He apologized and all... he danced with a turkey in his head..." 

"Like Monica from Friends?" Buffy asks. That is one of her favorite shows, another thing she has in common with TJ. 

"Yes, and well, he..." I stop right there. I need to add dramatic sparkle to this. 

"And he what?" Andi curiously asks.

"He told me to try it, and I did not want to do that..." I make a pause. "He laughed at my response and..." 

"And...?" They say in unison. 

"He said I love you" I smile, looking at the ceiling. Remembering that moment. 

As I thought, they asked me some questions, but they are as excited as I am. Maybe that was a big moment in our relationship, and it happened as an accident. But it ended as the most beautiful and out-of-a-book/movie/tv show moment. And as cute and exciting as that topic is, we have other things to talk about, one of them is Andi's idea of the battle of the bands and how she kept that as a secret for a whole week. She smiles and starts the story of how the idea came to her mind. 

Buffy's POV

After I left Cyrus' house, I decided to go to Red Rooster. I want to buy an album for my mom, and there is no other place as good as this one. But as I am looking at every single album from every artist my mother likes, I think about my date with Marty. I have everything planned, but I wanted to give him the task to plan it himself. That was Paul's idea. I was ready to tell him everything, but what do I have right now? Nothing, I have been waiting for weeks, and this man cannot decide what we should do on our date. And I only know that because Paul has been telling me absolutely everything. 

I grab one of the albums I was staring at and head out to pay for it. Bowie greets me as always with a smile on his face and starts talking to me about the album I bought. I listen to him carefully for a few minutes before leaving the store, fully intending to get a coffee. Why would I need my third cup of coffee of the day at three o'clock in the afternoon? Well, I have to give a class in twenty minutes. And I did not sleep well yesterday. All because I picked out a great outfit for today because I thought Marty was coming to my class. Today I woke up to a text from him, saying he would be missing class because he had a band meeting. And I get it now. I just want to sink into my coffee for ten minutes. Before I sit down to drink my coffee, I hear someone calling me, so I turn to find Paul's sister, Blue.

"Driscoll!" She approaches me. 

"Hello, Blue," I smile at her. 

"Hi," She smiles. "Can we talk? I have an offer for you," 

"An offer?" My tone changes. "What kind of offer?" 

"You and me starting a band and being part of the battle of the bands!" She explains everything with her hands too. 

"I'm not sure... that is a No Exit thing" Would that be a good idea? I don't know. What do I even know about bands? 

"Look," She sighs. "Andi needs more bands for this thing. She told me about it yesterday" She makes a short pause. "And I thought it could be nice to help her with that" She smiles. "We don't have to be an official band like No Exit. We can be one battle of the bands-band," 

"If it is to help my best friend, then I'm in" I smile at her. "I suppose I am going to play the drums since your brother is my drum instructor, but you..." I don't finish the sentence, waiting for her to do it instead.

"The guitar," She says. "Jonah is my guitar instructor/teacher," 

"Great, then we need a bassist because you have a beautiful voice, you scream vocalist," 

"I am pretty sure you sing amazing too" She smiles. "My best friend is already onboard into this adventure. She plays the bass" I nod to her words. 

"There is one of my students that plays the keyboard. I can ask her to join us" I smile as I try to remember if she is coming to the next class. 

Blue takes a seat with me while she tells me more about her idea. Starting a band only to help Andi? That is a yes from me. This is also an opportunity for me to make more friends and get to know her better. This is an exciting chapter to add to my life. Drummer of a band. I have never imagined such a thing, and to be honest, it does not sound bad. 

Jonah's POV  

We are at my house after passing by the gallery. And finally getting the answers we wanted. TJ is reading the rules while Marty, Paul, and I give him our full attention. It's kind of funny how we all stay silent listening to TJ talk. He goes over each of the rules, and we nod our heads. It seems like an overly serious meeting. My parents went out to do some shopping since my dad will be cooking all this week. So we are all alone, just in case something happens, like crying because we don't feel good enough to enter the battle of the bands. Although I think that would just be Marty, probably TJ tries to find a quick solution to any issue. And Paul takes out his physics book to do some homework while the rest of us are kind of in the middle of a crisis. No Exit at its finest. But just when we thought we had everything under control, TJ reads one of the most important rules, which is just what we were missing as a band.

"We need a logo" TJ turns to us. 

"I never thought we could make it this far" I stare at the floor. 

"I have some ideas for that logo," He starts. "But they are not good," He sighs. 

"I can draw something" Marty stands up and grabs one of my notebooks. 

Marty is not good at drawing, in fact, he's even worse than Paul and I combined, but for the band, he is capable of doing anything. Even try to create a logo in ten minutes. We watch him except for Paul, who tries to solve a page of his homework. Apparently, we have no success with Marty and his poor drawing skills. Paul opens his eyes as if he suddenly remembers something. And immediately puts the book down, we all turn to him.

"I have this" Paul shows us his phone. "I asked my older sister to design a logo for us" He smiles. 

"And you just say that? I've been ugly drawing for like an hour" Marty makes a dramatic pause. "My hand hurts, Paul,"

"It has been ten minutes Marty" TJ turns to him with a disapproved look. 

"I also opened an Instagram account" He starts typing something. "That was her idea too, but I just remembered that... sorry guys," 

"Sorry?" I say to him. "You just saved us, Paul!" I smile at him. 

Now with the logo and Instagram account. We can say that we are ready for the battle of the bands. And to take being a band more seriously. We just have to go to the gallery tomorrow, where Andi will be happy to sign us up for the battle. 

Buffy's POV

I enter the dance studio looking for the person I need to find. But it's hard when almost everyone greets me and wants to chat for a moment about the choreography they suggested for the end-of-the-month performance. Yes, we will have a small one in the gallery. That was all Andi. And I agreed on before her battle of the bands' idea came in, and we were all happy and relieved. I mean, it's not that I wouldn't want to be part of the ongoing events they have there, but that would be a lot of work to do. It is not like I have been teaching dance classes for years. After almost seven minutes of talking to a specific group of people, I find who I was looking for. I say goodbye to that group and start walking towards her.

"Jane!" I smile at her. She was about to go and change her clothes.

"Hello, Buffy" She smiles. 

"Uhm... I know this is super weird, but would you like to be part of a band with me?" 

"A band?" Her face is full of confusion. 

What are you doing, Buffy? Is it even normal to go and ask her that? It probably isn't. It is not like I have time to go and pin up posters like Jonah did when he formed No Exit. I look at her again, and she is still confused but waiting for me to answer her. And I do not know how to answer her. I sigh one more time before I tell her all the details about the band and tell her a little about Blue since I don't even know her friend's name, I guess I'll meet her in a few hours. Surprisingly she accepts. Jane doesn't know my friends, that tells us how kind she is. 

How can I describe Jane Stevens? I met her in my first class. She was so excited to start learning how to dance anything that was not too fancy. Her whole appearance screams elegance. Not everyone knows her very well; she spends her evenings at the Shadyside Music Hall rehearsing the piano. I once tried to convince her to audition to perform a song for a play, but she didn't feel confident enough to do it, so we didn't discuss it anymore. But now, with her, Blue, Blue's friend, and I, we can form a band and help Andi! Something good will come out of this.

Amber's POV

Since I work at the gallery with Andi, Libby, and Walker, I don't have much time to see Iris and TJ. And now that we have the battle of the bands, courtesy of my... Andi, we are busy. We spent three whole days formulating the rules for the battle and, it is more than obvious that TJ and the No Exit guys must be getting ready for this, so both TJ and I have left Iris a bit alone; over an hour ago, the No Exit guys dropped by to get a flyer with the rules for the battle of the bands, and the first thing we did was to prepare everything for tomorrow in case more bands come in for the same thing. 

"Amber, could you please call Andi and give her this message?" Walker hands me a piece of paper. 

"Sure," I smile at him. 

I read what the note says. Apparently, we need Andi early in the morning at the gallery. This whole battle of the bands' thing has turned everything upside down for us. I haven't even been able to talk to her about the road trip that we clearly have to postpone. 

I get out of the gallery for a moment to talk to her on the phone. Our conversation is going normal, in general, everything is going like that with her. That is why I wonder why I'm so afraid to ask her for something formal. How do you say that to the person you have so many dates and cute moments with? I definitely need help, but we are all focused on the battle of the bands right now, so it has to wait. I sigh one last time looking at my phone. Then I enter the gallery to find Libby reading one of the flyers Walker and I were responsible for printing. I smile at her before approaching her. 

I am grateful to be in the gallery. I am now good friends with Libby and Walker, who are just as cool as Andi described them. At this pace, we will be a much larger group. Which doesn't bother me. I really enjoy making friends. 

Buffy's POV

"Hello,  bandmate!" Blue's friend greets me. 

I greet her back with a smile. Blue and she had come to my house to have a meeting. We have some things to think about before we go and sign up for the battle of the bands. Jane joined me at my house after class was over. She is a lot more fun than I thought she would be. I definitely thought she was cool and very classy, but we ended up having a pretty normal conversation. We both learned something new about each other. 

The four of us are in the kitchen, and the first to speak is Blue, who introduces us to her friend, Rowan. I do the same with Jane. At first, there seems to be an awkward silence between us. What do we know about each other? I do not even know Blue properly, but don't worry, it doesn't last too long. Rowan starts asking us about different things, and she even asks us what genre we would feel more comfortable playing. Jane answers with her favorite band, to which we all nod, they have a good rhythm, and it is something totally different from what we have seen in No Exit. That would suit us very well. 

Rowan asks me for something to write on. The hard part for any band has arrived: finding the perfect name. One wrong move and we could end up with a name like The Sandwiches. And we don't want that. Blue keeps coming up with random words to form a name while Jane sits next to her, thinking of one with her words. And I am looking at them, trying to concentrate on finding a good idea. At this moment, we try to build a bond and become closer. Even though we have known the four of us for about thirty minutes. Rowan is beautiful, and she looks so cute when she smiles, she's also funny, and I can tell by the calm way she asks us things that she is very kind to everyone. And speaking of Rowan, her eyes indicate that she has come up with something; she takes the paper I gave her and writes down the name of our band. She smiles at her idea and shows us.

"The Rose Ladies," I nod as I read the name of our one-event band. "I like it," 

"And we are so lucky that Darcy writes songs with Paul," Rowan says, smiling at her friend. Blue turns to her after hearing her name coming from Rowan's mouth. "I mean Blue..." 

Jane and I glance at each other when we hear Blue's name. She has a pretty name, but I prefer not to call her by her real first name. There is a reason why she prefers her family and Rowan to call her Darcy and the rest of us Blue. But leaving that aside, how cool is the name of the band?

"You definitely have more experience with that than me" Jane smiles at Blue too.

"And..." Blue makes a pause. "Rowan always wanted to be part of a band" She turns to her best friend. 

We all smile at each other. And start talking about too many things related to our band and the battle of the bands. It looks like we are going to be good friends. 

Andi's POV

I've been sitting in the Battle of the Bands sign-up booth for longer than I would like to admit. Yesterday, Amber mentioned how important it was for me to be sitting here early. But I have not seen anyone who feels one hundred percent interested in signing up. But I did hand out some flyers. I turn to Amber and Libby, both of them have been trying for a long time to put together the display of the creations people made the other day, which was part of Libby's idea. People really enjoyed that event, and you could see many people letting their talent flow to create their work. It was something magnificent. 

I hear some familiar voices entering the gallery, and yes, it is No Exit. The four of them are talking about something that seems very important. I wave to them, and they approach the booth. Jonah smiles and asks me the question I have been waiting to hear for so long: Where do we sign up? His words are sweeter than honey at this moment. With a smile, I give them the form. Libby and I worked so hard to create it. They are even of different colors and recycled paper. Paul's suggestion. 

Paul, with a warm smile, moves his phone towards me. 

"You finally have a logo!" I loudly say once I see the picture on his phone. "You need to send that picture to my mom, and she will do her magic" I smile at them. "Oh! And please send her some pictures too, she needs those," 

I see them leaving happy, and I am too. Finally, we have a registered band; I look towards Walker and Libby, they are both smiling at me, still encouraging me to continue with this idea. I was about to say something to them when I see my best friend enter the gallery along with Blue and two girls I have never seen here before in my life. I smile at them, waiting for them to tell me what they need. Apparently, they did not just catch my attention because Jonah stops when he sees them, making the other guys stop too, but they look confused. Buffy and Blue ask me for a form, so I give it to them. I watch them fill it out with the other two girls. A few minutes later, they hand it to me.

"The Rose Ladies? When did you become a band?" I ask them.

"We did it for you!" Buffy says. "Now you have another band for the battle of the bands!"

"And when the other bands hear about this, they will come and register," Blue explains. 

"Oh" This is the sweetest thing someone has ever done for me. "Thank you!" I wrap them in a hug. 

I notice that I have not introduced myself to their bandmates. So when I break the hug, I turn to them. 

"I'm Andi Mack" I smile at them. 

"Rowan Lee" She smiles and shakes my hand.

"I'm Jane Stevens" She smiles too. 

TJ's POV  

Jonah looks surprised. He has been watching Buffy, Blue, Rowan, and her other friend. He looks like he just saw something that left him speechless. Marty and Paul look as confused as I do. Suddenly when he sees that they are about to leave the gallery, he leaves too, so we follow him. He waits until the four of them are outside and then says something that none of us understand except him and apparently Blue. 

"I thought it was a joke," He says.

"It was a joke," She responds to his comment. "But it's not a joke anymore" She smiles.

"What is going on?" Marty asks. 

"Yeah, I don't get it either," Paul says, looking at his sister. 

"They are going to be one of the bands" Jonah turns to us. 

"You are going to what?" He sounds surprised. 

"Yes, Andi needed more bands so, I asked Buffy and Rowan, and Buffy asked Jane" She turns to her band. "We are good friends already" She smiles. 

Part of the bands? When did that happen? This will be a good competition. I would be lying if I said I am not excited to see what they sound like; we see them heading off in the direction to Red Rooster, and the four of us share glances. Paul seems to be having a little trouble understanding how he and his sister will be rivals in the battle of the bands. Although, to be honest, I think we all have a hard time believing it. 

Chapter Text

Paul's POV 

I'm late for an important class. My parents have been suspecting that I don't take the university seriously. But studying physics is hard. 

Anyway, I am literally running to be on time, but there are not many people who can see me running, so I do not feel as stupid as I thought I would look. I slow down my pace when I see someone walking to their class too, it is only that person and I; this can be a lot of pressure. 

As we keep walking, I am still thinking about how to tell my parents that I'm about to fail one of my classes... well, not fail, but I am for sure not getting a good grade. And also thinking about the battle of the bands. Suddenly, I do not really feel anything under my feet; that is what I didn't want to happen: I fall to the ground. What should I do? Stand up and pretend that nothing happened? Or... lay in here and pretend that I fainted? Tough decision, the second one is better in my opinion. I close my eyes and hear how the person behind me stopped to check on me. Alright, Paul, this is your moment. If Blue can act, you can do it too. Why can't this person just leave me here? I want to avoid an embarrassing moment. 

"Are you okay?" I hear a woman's voice, but I don't know what to do. "I know you are faking it" I open one of my eyes.

"You could just leave me here, you know" I start to stand up and clearly see who it is. "Jane? Do you study here?" 

"Not in this department. My dad teaches here," You can feel the awkwardness between us. 

"Surely your father is a good teacher," I tell her with a smile. "There are some who can get kind of picky, like Mr. Stevens in modern physics." 

"That is my dad" She nods. 

Oh no, Paul, what did you do? What can I do? 

"He is a good teacher indeed" I try to fix what I said. 

Jane turns to me, holding back some laughter. I do not quite understand why, but my ears may be as red as a tomato at this point. 

"I know he can be... difficult." 

"Difficult is one word for it. I am this close to failing his class" I let out a sigh. 

We continue walking in silence. I do not know if it is a good idea to bring up the battle of the bands' topic, so I do not say anything and keep walking beside her until she says goodbye to me, by walking into an office with her father's name on it. 

It is a little crazy that her father teaches me, and that I said what I said. Really, what was I thinking? A classic Paul thing to do. I sigh before entering my classroom. This is going to be a long day. Hopefully, the guys will have a better one than me.

Buffy's POV

Bowie explains everything I need to know about the drum set I am about to buy. Practicing at Paul's house gave me that freedom of not having to buy one, but now that I am in a band, I have to. I honestly cannot stop him. He is really passionate about everything he is saying, and come on, he is my best friend's dad. I have known him for a long time. So I sigh and get ready to listen to him carefully, and almost everything he tells me I already heard before. Paul guided me into the world of drums, and I must say it is interesting.  

I hear the door ring and someone walking in. It's probably somebody coming in to buy an instrument or an album. Maybe it's Jonah coming for a lesson from Bowie. 

"Dude, we only want the drums," Rowan says behind me. "We need to move this to her car, and then we have to start our first band practice,"

"Yeah, sure, let me help you then" He smiles at us, then we follow him to my car. 

My fabulous car was waiting for us, ready for the drums. Between the three of us, we carry up everything I bought. Bowie says goodbye to us with a smile and heads back to the store. I look at Rowan, who is staring at the large line in the distance, her face is full of curiosity, which can only mean we are going to have an adventure and go see what it's all about. Before I could ask her anything, a person's voice made me turn around. It's Marty. He greets me with a big smile, and I do the same. We get closer to each other to talk better, however, he didn't just catch my attention. Rowan is looking at us as if she knows something we do not. 

"How is it going with your band?" He asks me, slightly nervous. 

"Great!" I give a quick answer. Great move, Buffy. 

"I saw you in the distance carrying your drums. I just wanted to stop by and say hi" He smiles at me, then notices Rowan. "To both of you. Hi Rowan." 

"Hi" She smiles at him. 

"Well, I have to go. Jonah wants us to finish a song," He sighs. "We'll see you, ladies, on the first round" He smiles at us. 

"Sure," Rowan answers him. 

"Good luck," I tell him smiling. 

"See you" He waves his hand in goodbye.  

I look at Rowan, telling her that we should go to Jane's house. So we can start rehearsing as soon as possible, once we install the drums, of course. I feel like it will take us many hours, and I call for backup. I just hope Paul is available to help us. In the meantime, it's all in the hands of Blue, Jane, Rowan, and me. 

Amber's POV

"Do you think it's a good idea to surprise them now?" Walker asks Andi as Libby, and I stare at the computer in front of us. 

"Of course" She smiles at him. "It will give them motivation," 

I'll put you in context. Andi's dad, Bowie, you all know him already. Well, he got something great for the battle of the bands. But, I'm just not going to tell you what it is yet, I prefer it to be, as Andi said, a surprise. But Walker is not a hundred percent sure if it is a good idea to release this small piece of information.  

It wasn't easy to put all this together. In fact, we still have some things we need to arrange. Like, convincing TJ's mom to be a judge along with Bowie, and one person who is part of the surprise. That's the reason Andi and I will be in charge of visiting her, although it was really just her job, since TJ is my best friend, and I've known his parents for a long time, it was a better option for both of us to go. Of course, this is purely for professional purposes and not because I want to spend time with Andi. 

"We better leave now, Amber" Andi grabs her things before we leave the gallery. 

I turn to Libby and Walker, they are smiling at us in support mode. We are not sure how hard it is to get TJ's mom to agree to what we have to propose. I turn around and follow Andi to Walker's car. For this task, he specifically let us take his car and it would be my turn to drive, which I find quite enjoyable. We both get in the car and start the not-so-long but not so short drive to TJ's house. We keep quiet during the ride, there is not much to talk about today, this battle of the bands' thing is consuming a lot of us, not to mention the pressure she is under from the arrival of her baby brother. As for me, I don't have much to say, just the usual, days out with my family that allows us to have time together. Beautiful, isn't it? 

We finally arrive at TJ's house. I take care of parking the car, and we get out. I won't lie to you, we are both very nervous, but I know Mrs. Kippen, we have a good chance she will accept. I glance at Andi taking a deep breath before knocking on the door. TJ's dad opens it for us with a big smile when he sees me. It has been a while since I visited TJ or his parents. We follow Mr. Kippen into the kitchen, where we can find his wife preparing cookie dough. Andi does most of the talking. I only manage to look at her with much admiration and affection. Maybe I am too obvious. 

"Girls, I'm flattered, but I don't know if it's a good idea for me to be a part of that" She lets out a sigh. 

"Please, it would be an honor to have you with us" Andi smiles kindly at her. 

"If the Kippen is a problem, use my last name then," TJ's dad says walking into the kitchen. All three of us turn to him. "Sorry, I didn't mean to interrupt, but I need some of this" He moves over to grab some of the cookie dough. 

"I have told you many times not to eat it like that" She pulls the dough away from her husband. "But what you say may work..." She looks at him and then at us. 

"You know it will work," I tell her. "Remember that time you pretended to be my aunt using your husband's last name?" I smile at her. 

"All right," She smiles back at us. "I'll do it. Although I'm not a fan of using the last name of the man who keeps eating the cookie dough," She looks at her husband. He turns to us, smiling. Andi and I smile at each other. 

Jonah's POV

I decided to buy some coffees for the guys before our meeting today. Marty said there was some huge news regarding the battle of the bands, I'm not sure what it might be, but it's probably about what we should sing in the first round. I walk into the café, and since I don't see much of a line, I head over to order what each of us needs. I stand next to someone else who is waiting. But I can't get out of my head a long list of probable news that Marty mentioned. I start to move my hand without noticing until the door to the café distracts me from my thoughts. I decide to look around the cafe when I notice who the person next to me is, she is familiar, but I'm not sure I remember her name correctly. Would it be wise to talk to her? What can I do? After debating for a few seconds in my head, I turn to her. 

"Hi, Rowan, right?" I say to her. 

"The one and only," She says, smiling. Making me chuckle. "You are Jonah, right? Paul's bandmate,"

"Yeah, the same one," I smile at her. "You come for as many coffees as I do?" 

"Depends on how many are for you" She stares at me. "You don't look like someone who drinks a lot of coffee," 

"You are right about that..." I open my mouth to say something else. 

"Rowan?" We both turn to look at the young woman leaving the coffees on the counter. 

"That's me" She smiles at her. Before she goes to get the four coffees, she turns to look at me. "I have to go, but I hope we can continue this conversation later," 

"Of-" Again, I can't finish. 

"Jonah?" This time a young man leaves my four coffees on the counter. 

"It's me" I look at him with a small smile. Then I look at Rowan again. "Of course, that's what I was going to say" I smile at her. 

"Okay, see you, Jonah," She smiles at me, taking the four coffees in her hand. 

I watch her leave the café heading towards what looks too much like Buffy's car. Rowan is a nice person, I'm sure we will be good friends. But wouldn't it be too weird? Being friends with Blue and Rowan when they're both best friends? It seems like something I'll have to think about or check with Blue. Anyway, I grab the coffees and leave the place, heading to my house, hoping the guys are already there. 

The walk to my house was quiet until I heard someone calling my name. I turn around to see who it is. It's Rowan. I stop to wait for the car she is riding in. That is when she tells me she took the wrong coffees, so we swap them. She also apologizes for drinking a sip of one of them, and from her description, that was mine. I only smile at her, saying that it was no problem. And after a few minutes of a conversation full of sorry and no worries, we both said goodbye. 

When I arrive at my house, I hear Paul and Marty's voices arguing about whether or not it was a good idea to listen to the new Big Time Rush song without me. I walk into the room, and they shut up and smile. 

Buffy's POV

Rowan was the chosen one to go and buy coffee for all of us while Jane would read us the update on the battle of the bands. It took us a bit to get started as Rowan came back a little late with the coffees. We don't know the exact reason. But at this point, it is no longer relevant. Jane starts reading us what was posted on the event account. And I can only think what the No Exit guys will think, well specifically Marty. If there's one thing he has in common with Andi, it's that they're both big fans of The Renaissance Boys. 

I glance over at Blue, she is listening carefully to our keyboardist reading so calmly. While Rowan is smiling so much that I know I don't need to ask her if she is a fan of The Renaissance Boys. Jane continues with the reading to the topic we were most interested in and concerned about: what we have to sing in the first round. And apparently, it will be something simple, or so it seems, first we have to choose which song to play. However, the four of us knew that there was one small thing missing from our band. Yes, a leader. 

"Who should be the leader?" Jane asks, leaving her computer aside.  

"Buffy!" Blue responds. "You are taller than us. That makes you the one who will receive more attention," 

"Thanks... but I was about to say that you should be the leader" I smile shyly. "You have the whole vibe of a leader," 

"We can decide this as grown women" Rowan looks at the three of us as she pulls something out of her pocket. "Let the coin decide,"  

We both nod, while Jane has the honor of deciding which side of the coin we each get. Rowan flips it into the air, letting it land in her hand again. We both lean in, waiting for her to reveal the result. Rowan gives us a smile. 

"Our leader is..." She pauses. "Blue!" 

We all clap our hands. Now to the song thing. Blue gives a few choices, but we can't decide on one. With the style we chose for the band, it would be a bit difficult to modify all the songs. Jane decides to take a break to find something to eat and leaves the room with Blue. 

"So, you like Marty, right?" Rowan asks me once we are alone. I can’t give her an answer. "Come on, I saw you two earlier," 

"Am I that obvious?" I ask her, whispering. 

"Kind of" She smiles warmly. 

I was about to tell her about the pending date with him. But as I try to get a word out of my mouth, Jane and Blue return with a plate full of cookies.

"Dancing Queen!" Jane says excitedly. "I told you guys, I only needed some sugar! The song popped in my head once I ate one cookie!" 

"She is right," Blue says as she grabs a cookie. "And it fits our style," 

"Then let's get this started" Rowan smiles at us. 

"Sorry to ruin the moment, but that" I point towards the drums. "It's not finished yet," 

"Paul should be here any minute. We can just wait," Jane says calmly. 

And that is how a new chapter begins for our band. Having a song decided to play in the first round, and it matches our music style... and waiting for Paul to arrive to help us as he promised. 

Paul's POV

Marty takes time to read the update they made on the battle of the bands. Jonah is staring at him, nodding in agreement; TJ drinks the last coffee Jonah brought us earlier. And I am waiting for them to finish, so I can go to Jane's house like I promised Buffy. I really have no idea how to get there, but Blue gave me some directions about that. I just hope I don't get lost like I usually do. But, now that I think about all of this, won't it be strange to see Jane after what happened earlier? Maybe nothing will happen, but it never hurts to be cautious, so I will bring something for her disguised as something for all of them. You are a genius, Paul. 

"The Renaissance Boys!" Marty finishes reading out loud the new update.

"We must win" Jonah puts his hands on his face. "You know how big The Renaissance Boys are" 

"Going on tour with them will be like a dream come true," TJ says, smiling. 

"To go on tour with them, we need to win first," Marty sighs. 

"Did you all miss the part about what type of song we have to sing in the first round?" I look at their worried faces. 

"Right..." TJ agrees with me. "I never thought we'd have to sing a cover," 

"I wasn't expecting that either" Marty runs his hand to his hair. "Any ideas?"

I smile at the three of them. I have an idea... well, lots of them. And if you were thinking about Big Time Rush, then you are correct. 

"Not Big Time Rush," Jonah looks at me. 

"Oh great, then you guys think of something" I stand up, grabbing my stuff. 

"Where are you going?" Marty asks me. 

"I promised Buffy I'd go help her set up her drums" I grab one of the sandwiches Jonah's mom made for us. "I'll see you guys later," 

It doesn't take me long to get close to the address I was given thanks to my sister's indications. I walk near a flower shop and stop to look at the flowers they have there, and I decide to buy some to give them. It's not my best move, but the flowers are a good apology for being late and saying what I said about Jane's father. I leave the store with different flowers in my hands and continue my way. I find the house with the description my sister gave me, so I approach to ring the doorbell, waiting for one of them to open the door for me. I look at the flowers as I wait, when I hear the door open, I raise my face to meet Mr. Stevens, who looks at me a bit odd or perhaps more at the flowers in my hand. I quickly explain to him that I am not pretending anything with his daughter. His face doesn't tell me much, just like in class, and he lets me in, leading me to where the new best friends are. I thank him before he leaves. 

"Flowers?" Blue asks. 

"They are for you all..." I smile at them. "For being late..." I meet Jane's eyes. 

"Thank you so much," Buffy says, smiling at me. Something tells me that it is not a happy smile. "We need to get to work," 

"Sure," I say, handing her the flowers. I do the same to Blue and Rowan, who follow Buffy to the drums. "These are actually to apologize for what I said about your dad," I whisper to Jane. 

She smiles at me, and we both head off with the others. Setting this up will take a while, so five people are much better than one. Something tells me I will do most of the work here, though. 

Amber's POV

"I can't believe TJ's mom would do that," Andi says before taking a bite of her burger. 

"There are a lot more stories like that one," I smile at her. "She is like a second mom to me. I always felt comfortable with TJ's family,"

It had been a while since we left TJ's house. He wasn't there, but we couldn't stay waiting there for too long, so we went for a walk. Ee stopped at the same swings as the last time, a good memory flooded me at that moment. But now, we are eating hamburgers on the sidewalk while sharing fries and a larger than necessary drink. 

Yes, we could have returned to the gallery earlier than planned, thanks to Mr. Kippen's unexpected help, but we decided to do something together. A decision I made thinking that Andi would need a break from all the work she has and the work that is coming, but also as an opportunity to spend time together. There is so much to come for her, for me, and for everyone, that is why a detour from what has to be doesn't hurt... and especially if we are alone, enjoying each other's company. I am sure I will have to tell my best friends about this, about Andi and me. About how I feel about her. But I'm not sure when to do it. I turn to her and smile as I see her looking up at the sky. 

"Ready to go back?" I say, getting her out of her cloud. 

"Yeah..." She turns to me. "Thank you" She smiles at me. 

"For what?" I ask her, not understanding. 

"For helping me to distract myself" She leaves a kiss on my cheek before standing up. 

I smile unconsciously and let out a small sigh. I stand up, and we both get into Walker's car, ready to head back to the gallery and continue our work. 

Chapter Text

TJ's POV

Can you believe it has been two weeks, and the first round of the battle of the bands is today? You are probably wondering how we are. I mean, if we are prepared, we rehearsed enough, or even if we feel confident. Well, I can't speak for the others but I feel really nervous... and afraid of freezing and running off the stage, or throwing up without even being able to sing a single one of my lines. And after so many shows we have had during this time, that feeling should be decreasing, but the situation we find ourselves in is totally new. I can say that it is easy to play at Red Rooster, at the gallery, at the pizzeria, or at one of Andi's parties, because it is just us. But now we are part of a competition, it's not only No Exit, and that's it, we are part of a list of fourteen bands looking for the same thing. What a time to be alive. 

There was a plot twist in this situation. I found that my mom is going to be a judge with Bowie. But how did I not know? Well, she did not use the Kippen. That was confusing even for the guys. My dad is excited about this because somehow both of us are part of the same event... but in different ways. That leads me to our next topic: my relationship with Cyrus; this whole thing is consuming a lot of my time, and the musical is consuming a lot of his time, but we still manage to do things together. For example, I am on my way to meet him at the café. We both have our own stuff to be stressed about, so having a coffee with each other's company will be good for us. 

I enter the café, looking for Cyrus. I find him staring at the cup of coffee in front of him, as it will give him the answer he is waiting for. He looks kind of lost, so I decide to walk toward him. Yeah, without ordering my coffee first, but my boyfriend is more important. 

"Hello, handsome," I say, sitting in front of him. 

"Hello" He smiles at me. "How are you feeling? Tonight is the big night," 

"As nervous as you can imagine," I sigh. "I don’t know how Marty is so cool about this, while I am freaking out,"

"Hey..." He puts his hand on mine. "You only have to remember how incredible you guys are... and that I will be there for you..." 

Our eyes meet. And everything feels to be getting better. There is nothing to be scared about when I have Cyrus right there. I only need to look at him, and the world disappears as long as I keep playing. Although the song we will sing tonight is not the best one to sing to him, you get what I mean, right? 

We talk about a lot of stuff. He is finally back to write his thriller, and he is doing great at the theater, or that is what he and CeCe say. Blue told me how stressful that place can be. But I know Cyrus, he can handle this... until it is too much and then... boom. I walk him back to the theater since he has some stuff to do before meeting us later. So, I lean for a kiss and watch him enter his place. I smile at the view of my successful boyfriend doing what he loves most. 

Andi's POV

I walk around the place the battle of bands will be happening. We worked hard for two weeks to make everything possible, and tonight is finally the time we all have been waiting for. I'd be lying if I said that I'm not nervous, but you can feel it in the air. We all are. This is bigger than we imagined. We have more bands than we expected. And I can't have favorites, no matter how close I am to Buffy or TJ. But I never thought that would actually happen until now. As you can imagine, we are still trying to make everything look perfect. Amber is reading the list of all of the bands that will play tonight. Sadly, the way we designed the battle, two bands will be out tonight. Leaving us with twelve of them. And again, I don't want to have favorites, but I hope those two bands are not my friends. I take a deep breath before saying some words to Amber. She has been helping me with every single thing on my list. Getting TJ's mom to be a judge too? She was there, you know that. But now it's different, this has brought us closer. I don't know how to explain it. But now I know that if I need anything, she will be there, by my side, helping me. 

"We have fourteen bands! That is pretty cool" Walker smiles. 

"The battle of the bands was a brilliant idea" Amber turns to me. 

"Thanks, guys. But we have to get ready for the big night" I look around the place. "Where is Libby?" 

"Making sure our judges are ready for tonight" He nods as he talks.

"I thought that was your job." I raise an eyebrow. 

"And I'll go and see how she is doing" He smiles. 

He takes his car keys out of his pocket. Amber and I watch him leave, and with a sigh, we return to our job. Everything is actually perfect. But there is this thing that tells me to check everything twice. And, I don't mind spending time with Amber, in fact, this can count as a date, right? Or maybe I want this to be a date since we can't have many of those lately. Yeah, I am not sure if we are still doing those... should I ask her if we are in a relationship now? 

"Please stop that" Her voice catches my attention. I turn to her, clearly confused. "You are doing those expressions that TJ and Cyrus make" She smiles at me. 

"Sorry, it's just that I am..." 

"Nervous?" I nod. "I’ll be here with you... and Walker and Libby too, even your parents, you are not alone in this" 

"Thanks..." We stare at each other's eyes for a few seconds. 

Is this how you feel when you really like someone? I know I like Amber, but this feels like a movie... a kind of complicated one. Oh, Buffy and Cyrus, how I need you right now. 

Cyrus' POV

CeCe and I look at how everything is going with this new musical we are working on. You can say we are taking this really seriously. I know the past one was actually pretty good too. But this time, we want to take it to the next level. Or maybe we have some other people who want everything done by a certain time, but we all know that is not going to happen. And now, with the battle of the bands. We need to make some changes to our plans because our lead is part of one. And No Exit too. I would be disappointed at this point, but I already had so many plays and one musical. All I can do is support Andi. And TJ, Buffy, and Blue too. Honestly, there is one thing that I have some doubts about, and no, it's not TJ or Buffy. No Exit or The Rose Ladies. I am not sure if Blue is the right choice after all. She has the musical and now the battle of the bands. CeCe and I keep walking around the theater, and by one of our stops, I see Blue reading something on her phone and mouthing the words. I end up leaving CeCe talking to Olivia about the makeup Blue will wear in one of the scenes. A great one, by the way, the song that Bowie and Paul helped to rewrite is so good. I approach Blue in a very determined but discreet way, I don't want anyone to know what I want to talk to her about. 

"Are you practicing the song for tonight?" I ask her softly, she smiles at me. 

"Yeah. We don't expect to win this thing, but we also don't want to leave in the first round" She sighs. "You are coming to see us, right?" 

"Of course," I smile. "And I wanted to ask you about the battle of the bands... and the musical" 

"Alright... tell me," 

"Are you sure you can do this, Blue? You have both things on your plate" I try not to draw attention to us. 

"I can, Cyrus... I mean, boss, I am not letting you down." She takes a deep breath. "This is a great challenge," 

"I trust you, but you need to prove that to CeCe... and Joseph" I know how dedicated she is, but that can easily be confused with another thing. 

"I was raised for multitasking, don't worry. I will stay focused" She winks at me. 

I wish her luck for tonight and go back with CeCe. It looks like it will be a long day, and full of work for both of us. At least we are together in this crazy thing that is theater. Specifically what a musical is. Of all, I could imagine spending the day where everyone, major mention of my boyfriend, would be so busy and excited about the battle of the bands. I didn't think it would be checking every aspect of makeup with CeCe since Bex can no longer do it until further notice. I think we will have a great time. 

Marty's POV

Paul and I are waiting for the guys to arrive. There is some stuff to do before the first round of the battle of the bands. Fourteen bands with the same goal. The way the gallery organized this was... different from what I could imagine a battle of the bands would be. There are eight rounds, and tonight two bands will be out of the competition. The first song is a cover from any artist or soundtrack. TJ said this was a gift since the rest of the rounds would probably be more difficult. And from what our leader said, we won't know what topic will be the next until we finish the current round. And to stay alive, we need to play better than we usually do. Nothing is guaranteed, even if we played many times at the gallery. Not even being friends with Bowie and Andi, or TJ's mom being a judge too. This past week has been stressful. We all are nervous and want the same thing. Succeed. An interesting word since we already did that with our small goals, but now we want to upgrade ourselves and our goals. That is why we want to win the battle of the bands so bad. We want the recognition of Shadyside. We want to go on tour with The Renaissance Boys. And on a personal level. I want to have that date with Buffy. But now, with the battle of the bands and with me not knowing where to take her... things got complicated. 

"Finally!" Paul's voice distracts me from my thoughts. 

"Sorry, TJ got distracted outside the theater" Jonah glances at our already mentioned friend. 

"I needed to give Cyrus the book we are currently reading" He smiles at us. 

"Which one are you two reading?" Paul asks him. 

"Do you remember that one I saw at the bookstore the other day?" Judging by the tone he uses, he is happy to talk about it. "We have been waiting to read it for so long and..." 

I clear my throat, and he stops midsentence. 

"Thanks," I say. "There is something we have not discussed yet regarding the battle of the bands" I try to sound as serious as possible. 

"I thought we already talked about every worst and best possible scenario" Jonah analyzes my face for a moment. 

"We have not discussed what we are wearing" Paul helps me. 

"And since we are singing that song, we need something that matches it." They stare at me, waiting for me to keep talking. 

"That's it, we don't know what we should wear" Paul's deep voice is the last thing we listen to before the silence falls into the room. 

The bad ideas were the first ones to come out. Courtesy of Jonah and I. TJ suggested calling Iris, but she didn't answer our texts or calls. Something must have happened, or maybe she is helping with some stuff for the battle. And I didn't want to ask Buffy for help... I mean, ask her if she knew anything about Iris. But as usual, our brain, Paul, had a great idea: calling his sister. At first, we all thought he meant Blue, but no. He was talking about his cool older sister. The twenty-seven woman who lives alone and neither Jonah nor I have met. Yes, that sister. We agree to visit her to ask for help. These four best friends could not have the worst fashion sense. She must be really good at this, to make us match the song. 

Andi's POV

"Now you do your thing," I tell Walker as we both prepare to state the start of The Battle of the Bands. 

"Yes. Are you ready?" He asks me with a smile. 

I nod and take a deep breath. This is the moment and I am happy. This is exactly what I pictured in my head for weeks. But now, everything became real in just a few hours. And it will be real and in history books in a few minutes. Well, not in that way, but this is pretty important for us, for me. And it is at this moment that I start feeling nervous. I feel someone's hand on my shoulder. 

"We will be here." Amber and Libby are smiling at us. "You can do it!" She says softly.  

I take Walker's hand as we approach the scenario. With big smiles on our faces, staring at the people who decided to come to our big event. This is a dream. It cannot be real. Am I dreaming? 

"Hello everyone! Good evening and welcome to the first Shadyside's Battle of the Bands!" Walker's energy is incredible. "My name is Walker, and I am one of your hosts..." 

I take another deep breath. Not listening to what he says. I turn to the left to find Amber there. She smiles at me as if she were encouraging me to do something. To move. To talk. But I already forgot what to say, and Walker practiced this many times with Iris. I didn't have time to practice. I turn to Walker, and he stops talking. Nodding at me. I smile and take the microphone in my hands. 

"And I am Andi Mack. It feels pretty good to be here with you, Walker," I turn to him. "And for what I have heard, everyone here will love the bands," 

"That's right," He starts. "Fourteen bands are looking for the grand four places of this battle..." He makes a pause."But two of them are not making it into the next round," 

Now I start to feel alive. This is exactly what I have dreamed of. My smile is not going to disappear for a long time. This is a dream... but I am awake. And it feels great. 

"These Shadyside band is a bit different from what we are used to seeing... and listening to" He pauses. "They mix two genres perfectly..." He turns to me. 

"Please welcome to the first band performing tonight..." Now I make a pause. "Search!" 

The band approaches the scenario and takes their places behind their instruments. Still smiling, Walker and I go back to Amber and Libby. I saw Amber telling Libby everything we said, and they look happy. We enjoy the first cover of the evening. We did not know the bands who are performing, but they were specific in describing their styles. And this band's style is different... but in a good way. 

Walker and Libby go to tell the next band to prepare. I turn at Amber. The song they are playing is one of her favorites, but the violin adds a unique touch to the song, and judging by the look on her face, it makes her love it even more. I place my chin on her shoulder, staring at her. She turns to me, smiling. Maybe this event was what we needed. We are enjoying this together, and honestly, I would not want to do this with anybody else. 

TJ's POV

Genevieve or Gen, Paul's sister, helped us with our clothes. And now I have to say it, everyone could think we were just out of the music video, and it helps to boost our confidence... now this is getting real. We wait for our turn and listen to Fire Bite, an incredible band. And guess what, before they started playing, Walker told us we were the next ones, after another band, Aura. Nine bands, without counting Aura, already performed, and they are good. But what we need right now is confidence. The same confidence we had when Gen found the perfect clothes at the store she runs with some of her friends. That confidence and joy we acquired on our way to this place. And the support our families and friends are giving to us. 

I turn to the guys once we listen to Andi's voice introducing the next band. That only means one thing: we are the next ones. How scary is that? It looks like three of us are about to escape from this place. I can notice how my breathing changes. This can't happen right now. Not now, please. I feel a hand on my arm. I turn to see who it is. 

"Hey," Iris smiles at me. Then she notices my face. "Are you okay?" 

"Yeah. I am just nervous." I take a deep breath. "I am glad you are here," 

She was about to say something when the guitarist and vocalist of Fire Bite greets her with a big smile. I glance at them, clearly confused. 

"Do you know her?" I ask her as soon as she leaves with her bandmates. 

"Who? Maddie?" I nod. "Yeah, her bandmate, Liz, is my neighbor" She smiles. 

"I do not remember seeing her," Iris laughs. 

"She moved in two months ago... you were too busy to come to my house, remember?" She is still smiling. God, how I love her smile and her energy. She is healing me just by the sight of her. I missed my best friend so much. 

"Sorry, maybe I can stay at your house tomorrow" She nods and then gives me a hug. 

We hear the song end, and she wishes us luck. The guys smile at her. While Walker introduces us this time, we give each other a group hug. 

"This is the first round. Are you guys ready?" Jonah asks us as he takes a deep breath. 

"I am extremely nervous, guys," Paul says, shaking his head. 

"Well, you're not the only one," I say to Paul. 

"Alright, guys," Marty says as he clears his throat. "We are No Exit, an amazing band that can win this round! We are great, and we can go out there and give our best!" He smiles at us. 

We share glances and nod to his words. He is right we can do that. I see the guys motivated now, and I can't help but smile. I was about to join them when I heard my special person behind me. 

"Try not to run away this time, please" I turn and find my boyfriend making a joke. 

"I won't," I smile at him. 

The guys were already approaching the scenario, so I blow him a kiss and leave. 

I look at my keyboard and then at the guys. They smile. Then Marty starts playing the first chords on his bass. I follow him with my keyboard, then Paul and Jonah join at the same time. The show has just begun. I glance at Jonah, and he prepares to sing. 

[Jonah]: Midnight | You come and pick me up, no headlights 

[TJ]: Long drive | Could end in burning flames or paradise 

[Marty &  Paul ]: Fade into view, oh | It's been a while since I have even heard from you  (heard from you)

[Jonah & Marty]: And I should just tell you to leave 'cause I | Know exactly where it leads, but I | Watch us go 'round and 'round each time 

[Paul & TJ]: You got that James Dean daydream look in your eye | And I got that red lip classic thing that you like | And when we go crashing down, we come back every time

[All]: 'Cause we never go out of style, we never go out of style 

[Jonah & TJ]: You got that long hair, slicked back, white T-shirt

[Marty & Paul]: And I got that good girl faith and a tight little skirt 

[All]: And when we go crashing down, we come back every time | 'Cause we never go out of style, we never go out of style 

Since the song is somehow slow, Paul wanted to sing more. We could not say no to him. We practiced this song so much, and now we are finally performing it in the Battle of the Bands. Someone call Marty's mom, we need to check this specific moment on our dreams board. 

Buffy's POV

We are watching No Exit perform their song before it is Action Figure's turn and then ours. They are singing a forever favorite Taylor Swift song: Style. And yes, we are singing along with them because we all are Taylor fans. And I'm not going to lie, their cover is pretty good. I turn to see the girls. Blue looks happy, she is a proud sister; Rowan is dancing next to me, and Jane is smiling so much as if her favorite band were in front of her. And well, I am dancing with Rowan too, her energy is like a virus, a happy virus. 

We hear Andi introducing the next band, and we all have a small reunion before going on stage. Luckily, we all have some experience of being in stages, so this is not as difficult as it seems for us. We don't talk for a moment until one of us breaks the not uncomfortable silence. 

"Some words from our leader, please" Rowan smiles at Blue. 

"Well... we have been practicing for a while. We know what we are doing. I believe in us guys, and please don't forget that we do this for fun," 

"And to help Andi," Rowan adds with her big smile. 

"Let's show them who The Rose Ladies are," I say, smiling at them. 

We put our hands together as a team would. We look at each other and say not too loudly the name of our band. 

"Should we go and watch the current performance?" Jane asks us. 

There is one thing that Blue mentioned when No Exit was performing, and it was their style. They got dressed according to the theme of their song. Smart move. But that is what we did too. And since our song is a 70's one, Jane's mother helped us get the clothes. Who knows, maybe this is good for both bands? 

The guys from Action Figure are really good, and their cover sounds great. But this time, we are not singing along nor dancing to the song. A deep voice catches our attention. No Exit is here. Paul hugs his sister and wishes us good luck. But when everybody is focused on the Kim siblings, Marty and I are staring at each other. I smile at him, the sight of his face gives me some kind of peace. I don't know what it means, but I am not nervous. 

"Hello, Buffy" He smiles. "You look great. I like your clothes," 

"Thanks. I liked your performance so much" Our eyes do not move for a single second. You may think we are playing something, but no. 

"Thanks... good luck with yours. But you don't need it since you are already incredible," He says warmly. "Uhm... about that date..." 

"Yeah..." I try not to smile even more. 

Jane and Blue grab my arm, telling me that it is time to perform. I turn to Marty, but he only smiles at us and again wishes us good luck. I follow them to the scenario where Walker and Andi are standing. I didn't even listen to how they introduced us. I was too focused on Marty to notice a thing. I wait for Blue's signal to start playing. Then she winks at Jane. That is the signal. Jane starts with her keyboard, and we all follow her. It's time to sing... and I am excited. 

[Blue & Buffy]: You can dance, you can jive 

[Jane & Rowan]: Having the time of your life 

[All]: Ooh, see that girl, watch that scene | Digging the dancing queen

[Blue & Jane]: Friday night and the lights are low | Looking out for a place to go | Where they play the right music | Getting in the swing | You come to look for a king

[Buffy & Rowan]: Anybody could be that guy | Night is young and the music's high | With a bit of rock music | Everything is fine | You're in the mood for a dance

[Jane & Rowan]: And when you get the chance

[All]: You are the dancing queen | Young and sweet, only seventeen | Dancing queen | Feel the beat from the tambourine, oh yeah

Singing while you play the drums is not easy. And I had to take extra lessons with Paul to get better at it. It was his perfect excuse to skip some sessions of his study group, so I think it was a good idea to ask him for help. But right now, it does not matter because this feeling is indescribable. Somehow I can feel the energy we have. Blue with her guitar and perfectly singing the lyrics. Rowan dancing while she plays her bass, and Jane happily bounces her head while she plays her keyboard and sings along with Blue. The best feeling in the world. 

But then, we finish the song. And I still can feel the excitement of playing here. We leave the scenario, and the next band plays their cover. I cannot believe this is over. I mean the song. Because Andi and Walker are at the scenario right now, after the last band finished their cover, about to say who is out of the battle. Blue takes my hand and Jane's, and I take Rowan's. We all take a deep breath. 

"What incredible performances we just saw!" Walker and his energy make the people cheer. 

"But two bands will not be part of the next round," Andi adds. 

"And the two talented bands who will be leaving tonight are..." 

"Eyes On," Andi says as she reads. 

"And... Icy Cherry" Walker gives the second name. 

We all share looks. 

"We did it!" Rowan says. "We did it to the next round!" She jumps up and down as we join her.

"The Rose Ladies can win this damn battle!" Jane says, leaving us speechless for a second. 

"What she said!" I smile at her. 

We keep celebrating our small victory alone until the guys of No Exit decide to invite us to the pizzeria. I can't talk to Marty about the date thing, but that can wait. Right now, it is the moment to celebrate. 

Chapter Text

Buffy's POV

Rowan is reading the update about the second round of the battle of the bands. We were so happy when we made it that we had a sleepover at my house. But the reality hit us the next day. We all had things to do. And now it has been four days since that happened. The gallery posted the update an hour ago, so we agreed to meet at my house again. The update says that we have to sing a song from any soundtrack. Jane suggests Mamma Mia since it's from the movie of the same name. On the other hand, Blue chooses a song from The Greatest Showman. But Rowan and I remain silent. Maybe she has too many in mind, but I can't think of a single one. All those years of watching movies with Andi decided to be erased from my mind. The discussion keeps ongoing between them. And all I can do is stare at them. 

"Unsaid Emily!" Rowan says with a big smile. 

"Rowan, take a look at your Instagram bio. You cry with that song. Let's sing something else," Blue tells her. 

"We cry with that song," she responds. "let me refresh your memory from the first time we watched the show," 

They keep arguing about their first time watching it. While Jane joins them on the team: I cried with that song too, and honestly, I am also part of that club, but that is not the point of this whole band meeting. We were supposed to pick a song peacefully. Blue ends their discussion with a reasonable point. And we get back where we started. I am probably their last hope of a different song. 

And when I think I can't help them... the perfect song comes to my mind.  

"I have a song" I smile at them. 

"Please, tell us," Jane turns to me. 

I mention the movie, and they all get which song I am talking about. This is going to be big. It's a great song with a great guitar solo. I grab a notebook to start the line distribution. This is a whole different song compared to Dancing Queen, but I think I can sing some of it and let Rowan and Jane handle the rest. We played it many times. And dance to it too. Then after an hour, you can say we have everything set... we only need to practice the song, and that's it. Ready for round 2. Since we all have other things to do. Each one checks their phone. I realize that I have to give a class today, and no, I am not late, but I need to prepare everything. 

"I have to go. But I guess The Spoon is not an option to stop by before the theater," Blue says as she keeps reading a text she just got. 

"Why not? Is Cyrus telling you to hurry?" I ask her.

"No. My brother is there trying to finish an assignment Jane’s dad gave him" 

"Poor dude. He is suffering so much" Rowan leans to read the text. 

"I have to leave too. I have a class in thirty minutes" I look for my class clothes. 

"And I have a piano class..." Jane turns to us. "I'll see you guys tomorrow," 

Blue and Jane leave my house together. I turn to Rowan, she is standing in my room, looking at my basketball trophies. 

"Do you have any plans?" 

"Yes. Your class. I signed up" she smiles. 

"That's great!" I am impressed. I finally got one of the girls to go to the class. "Then it is time to go," 

Keeping a balance in my life is getting difficult, but it is a great challenge, as Blue would say. The classes and the band are two completely different things, but still kind of related. I need to find balance while dancing and playing the drums too. I am not going to lie, I like it too much. 

Iris' POV

Is it okay to push away my friends when everything in my life seems to be falling apart? In 22 years of my life, I can say that I am reaching that point I never thought it was possible to, well, reach. A few days ago, exactly the day of the first round of the battle of the bands, my parents gave me some news... a divorce.

And my reaction to that was being alone. TJ called me many times, and Amber sent me more than fifty messages. And I know this is totally normal. As it should be. But I do not want them to know this yet. I want to figure out how I feel first. What I can't do if don't tell a person first... and the only person I have in mind is Walker. The guy is basically a new best friend to me. Well, we can say that. We have been friends for a while now. And it was a matter of time for me to catch some feelings for him. It's just a little crush, and it will probably go away. But every action I do is for somehow and someway stay close to him. And that has become difficult since Amber is working with them at the gallery. But now that everybody is so focused on the battle of the bands, I just don't spend the same amount of time with him. 

But back to the main topic. My parents are getting a divorce and a little Iris would be so sad and disappointed, but the 22-year-old Iris is relieved, and somehow a bit sad, I guess. How much longer was that going to take them? My best friends know their relationship was not the best, but still, they managed to keep the friendship and affection they have for each other, but now, I guess that is gone too. I always thought they were just like that song, but it ended differently. And as an only child, this is somehow rough. I don't have anyone to lean on. And with Amber and TJ being all busy, I just do not know how to react to this... and my only hobby is art, in any form, and you know I take classes with Buffy. And maybe I can find another one. One that is more time-consuming, so I can be as busy as my friends. 

You may wonder what I am doing right now. Well, I am on my way to meet Walker. Andi gave him a small task for today regarding the Battle, and I will help him. And I also need to tell someone about my thing. He is the chosen one. 

I see him sitting outside the pizzeria. So I approach him. 

"Hey!" I sit in front of him. 

"Hello, Iris," he smiles. 

"Is this the task? Getting pizzas?" 

"Yes. But we can eat one in the process," 

"I like that,"

"Just, don't mention that at the gallery," 

I nod and smile at him. He ordered the pizza, and while we were waiting, he told me about many things. Mainly about the battle. I can only listen to him with, probably, heart eyes. And that might be a problem. I definitely do not want him to know about my little crush. But I guess this is inevitable. We already finished the pizza, so he asks me where I want to go next since he has some extra time. I did not think about that happening, and the gallery is a big no. So, we go to the only place I know matches his interest, I mean our interest. There is a place where I create most of my art, and it's near the dance studio. He agrees with a smile at my suggestion. And as far as I know, he does not know about this place, so it's a win-win.  

He is amazed by it. And I feel happy every time I come here. We decide to do a sculpture together. There is when the topic is brought into the conversation. 

"You said you wanted to tell me something. What is it?" 

"Right..." I smile shyly. "I am so sorry to say this to you. I really need a person to know this," 

"You don't have to be sorry. We are friends after all" he smiles at me. 

"Thanks," I finally decide to meet his gaze. "my parents are getting a divorce. And I am totally okay with it... I just wanted to tell someone," 

His words were eclipsed by the hug he gave me. I feel better now. I needed that. I mean saying that... and the hug. The sculpture had to be interrupted when Andi called Walker to ask about those pizzas that he was supposed to eat with them. He apologized before leaving. I don't finish it. I decide to go back... home... but right when I was about to look for my keys. Somebody kind of familiar taps me on the shoulder. It's Maddie. The guitarist and vocalist of Fire Bite. With an interesting proposal to me. 

"A magazine?" I ask her. 

"Yes. I want you to be my business partner and co-founder of it" she sounds to be talking seriously. 

I think it for about two minutes before shaking her hand and accepting the proposal. I said I wanted something time-consuming. And this fits perfectly into that description. 

Paul's POV

Since I work better in crowded places and have homework from Mr. Stevens' class. I decided to come to The Spoon to get my assignment done. I tend to procrastinate so much. I get distracted from the tiniest thing. But when I am in a place like this, I try to focus, whether I want it or not. And Blue usually comes with me, but she had a band meeting. And Gen was busy doing adult stuff. So here I am. Alone at The Spoon, eating a hamburger and a milkshake while pretending I do not have anything else to do. But all the books next to me tell another story. I told the guys not to come with me because they wanted to talk about the next round. That is why we agreed on meeting in two hours at Jonah's house. So, I have plenty of time to finish this. And that is what I am not okay with. My brain tricks me, and I end up believing I still have time, and the next second I ran out of time and have to leave. I put my hamburger aside to keep trying to solve my assignment.

"Blue said you'd be here" I look at the person in front of me. 

"Hello to you too, Jane," I say, clearly confused by her words. "are you waiting for your order?" 

"I am helping you" she takes a seat. 

"Helping me?" I still don't understand. 

"To pass my father's class," she smiles warmly. 

"Okay... and how do you think you can do that?" 

"Just trust me," 

"Are you secretly a genius in modern physics?" I ask innocently, and she tries to hold back a laugh. 

No, she is not a genius in modern physics. She has a study method. And that one does not involve studying in crowded places. But it does include a book her father stills uses before every new lesson we have. That is not cheating. In fact, it is being prepared for the classes... something I never do. That is the reason why we are walking to her house. She looks kind of nervous. And I get it, I would be nervous too if I were bringing my friend's brother to my house. I ask her some questions. You know the basics. I can notice how she becomes less and less nervous. And now I get why Buffy says that she is the kindest and nicest person she knows. 

Once we are at her house, the first thing I notice is... her dog. It has been rough since my dog passed away, and I try to play with every dog I see at any place. 

"You have a dog!" I lean toward the little friend who is staring at me. "You are a good..." I pause to check. "girl" 

"She likes you," 

"I think I have a magnet to attract dogs," 

"Well, she is sweet. My mom rescued her two months ago," 

"Really? How many pets are in here?" I turn to her.

"That is not relevant right now. We should focus on your assignment" she smiles. 

I sigh in agreement. She leads me to her mother's studio before leaving me alone there. I look at the books and multiple photos on the desk. Most of them are pictures of Jane with her mother and brother. They look happy in every shot. She comes back and taps my shoulder to get my attention. I leave the photo I was holding with a shy smile and red ears. She asked me where I would like to sit, and I answered the floor. Nice one, Paul. We start the study session with the same one my homework is about. 

Cyrus' POV

Another day at the theater with CeCe and everybody else. Blue arrived earlier for her call. And we were impressed to see her so early. To be honest, she has been more focused than everyone thought... and by everyone, I mean CeCe and me. I told her about what we talked about the other day, and she told me to give her a chance since that is what she is doing. Blue is young, and somehow she reminds me of myself when I came to this place with my very first play. And I made it. I felt so excited about my play becoming an actual something at the theater. CeCe helped me every time I was getting lost. That is how our friendship started. She gave me a hand when I needed it the most. She trusted me when not everyone was sure that I was a good fit. After I told her about Blue and my concerns, I understood how she is still teaching me things. My plan is to guide Blue the way CeCe did with me. To trust in her. To support her. 

Now that I am talking about the good things about my job. I want to talk about how TJ plays an important role in this. I still do not know who Cyrus Goodman is, and thanks to him, I know that it is normal to not know it yet. And also thanks to his mother. I talked about this issue with him when she accidentally overheard what I said. She told me that he looked for some advice. He was not sure if joining the band was a good idea because he felt he was not good enough for them. But then she told him, and me, that we don't need to figure out everything in our lives yet. There is still time, and she is right. I still have time. To plan the musical. To write the thriller, to have more experiences with TJ. There are many things I want to do with him, with my friends, and even with my family. All I know at this point is how much I love them and that they are always in the front line rooting for me. 

"I love working with you, CeCe" I smile at her.

"Where does that come from?" she raises an eyebrow. 

"I feel like it's a good opportunity to tell you that" 

"I love working with you too, Cyrus," she smiles. "but you have to go and tell this to Blue," 

She hands me some indications from our wardrobe team. And I look out for Blue. She was sitting alone, eating a sandwich and reading the script. I walk up to her. She does not notice me at first. Then I sit next to her, and she turns to me. We both smile and start talking about the script. I try to give her some advice about, you know, how I imagine the character. How I wrote it, and how I expect the character to act or the tone they use when they speak. 

"CeCe told me they need you on the wardrobe team," I say before standing up. 

"Thank you," she smiles at me. "not just for telling me, but for the advice," 

"I know I questioned if you were capable of doing both things before... but I realized that I could help you, even if it is just a little" 

"I appreciate it," 

"And good luck with the battle. I hope you guys win" I analyze my words. "please do not tell TJ I said that" 

"I won't," she lets out a chuckle. 

I walk her to the wardrobe station and meet CeCe there. She was looking for me. And apparently, the place where Blue was eating, is a good hiding spot since nobody could find us. Anyway, she tells me that we have an emergency meeting with the music team. That is Bowie. We are at the first stage of the musical, so we will have many of these meetings with him. And with every other team, we have. That is the magical part of working in this place. 

Jonah's POV

TJ was in charge of reading the update of round two. We were not surprised when he said we had to sing a song from any soundtrack. We started with good options, but they are just that, good. We need something better. Something that at the moment we play, we feel it into our bones. I want that type of good. Maybe I am asking for too much. Maybe, this whole thing is creating a different Jonah. A competitive one. But if we were good enough to make it here, we can make it to the final round. I only need everyone on the same page. But if I ever lose the main purpose, I am sure Marty will take me down to earth. And if we both lose it. Then TJ and Paul will take us down to earth. But as you can see, I am totally fine. 

Marty tells us about his choice for the fifth time. It is not a bad song. But as I said, I need something better. Something with meaning. And of course, one we all agree to sing. On the other hand, TJ holds a sign with his suggestion. Paul stares at Marty talking about the song, and how it is the perfect option. I have not said anything yet. The ones I can think of are not good enough. But as we listen to our bassist, I realize the mistake I am drowning in. I turn to Paul, asking him if he has a song in mind. Most of the decisions we make are always the job of only three of us since Paul focuses so much on school. This is the moment, and I do not care what song he chooses. This is his opportunity. His time to shine. 

"Julie and The Phantoms?" Marty asks him. 

"Yeah, but it's basically just Sunset Curve. This song is great," he explains. 

"Then let's arrange everything," I tell him. 

"Really? Just like that?" 

"Yeah, just like that?" TJ turns to me. 

"Of course. We are trusting you with this one, Paul" I smile at him. 

As the leader of this band, I will never forgive myself if Paul ever feels left behind. He writes many songs. He composes with me, and he even has time to assign lines with Marty. But when it comes to who chooses what songs we play at any gig it is Marty, TJ, and me. We try to not put a lot of pressure on him. But his opinion is essential for the band. 

There is also another thing I am about to tell the guys. This meeting is not only to discuss the song. I talked to Paul's older sister. I want to offer her to be our stylist for the duration of the battle. I only told TJ about this idea, and we both decided that it was a good one. I turn to them, preparing to tell them. But my mom and our guest enter the room. I smile at Genevieve. 

"Why is my sister here?" Paul asks TJ. 

"Jonah asked her to come," he responds. 

"But why?" 

"Yeah, I do not know either" Marty joins them. 

"I can hear all of you," she suddenly says. 

They smile at her, embarrassed about that. I only manage to sigh. But TJ and I offer her to take a seat. Paul and Marty exchange glances whenever I talk to her. They clearly have not understood what we are doing here. They end up joining us in the small circle. That is where I start. 

"I offered Gen to be our stylist" I turn to her. She shoots me a small smile. "and it seems that she said yes,"

"Our stylist?" Marty asks. 

"Yeah. What do you guys think?" 

"I am okay with it," 

"Me too. But you already know that" TJ smiles.

We all look at Paul. He glances at his sister. 

"You know that I am capable of doing this, kid," 

"I know" he turns to us. "It looks that we have a stylist. And that is the most famous band shit we have ever done, guys," 

The room fills with laughs coming from us. And a smiling Gen. 

Iris' POV 

Amber and I were watching a movie when TJ arrived. His band meeting got a little longer than expected, but I get it. This is his life now, being a busy man. In fact, Amber arrived late too. I waited for them for thirty minutes. My mom had a night out with her friends, so she left before her daughter decided to cook something for her to make time. I am not a person who gets mad, so I do not have a problem whenever they are late. But with my whole parents' thing, I feel lonely. And I cannot just text Walker and ask him to come over. I cannot go to my neighbor Liz just to ask her if she would like to join me at my rom-com marathon. Because I do not even have the energy to do it. 

But now, my best friends are here. And I feel better. We are making cookies and talking about good things. Their good things. I only listen to them. Amber tells us about everything she does in the gallery. How she has helped with the battle, and how she loves the bond she already has with Andi, Libby, and Walker. Then TJ starts with how excited he is about the battle. Mainly about how they plan their next performance. And how it feels to be on stage. They keep doing that for a few minutes more. Then Amber mentions how great it feels to only work at the gallery. 

"What happened with The Spoon?" TJ asks her about that topic.

"Fired. Weeks ago," she responds. 

Make room for the confessions. Right now, we can say anything. We can confess anything. This is getting interesting. 

"I guess I was too busy to go to your house that day," he sighs. 

"It is fine! You are becoming a rock star, and I am proud of you," 

"Is this confession time? Because I have a good one" he tries to smile. "I am sorry to have been so distanced from you during this time," 

"Apology accepted" 

And just like that, we were smiling at each other. Happy to be only the three of us again. But something does not feel right. I do not feel the joy I thought I would be feeling. Then, that slips from my mind to my mouth. 

"My parents are getting a divorce," 

Their smiles disappear. And for the first time in a while, they have in front of themselves a fragile Iris. I guess it affected me more than I thought.

"Iris..." Amber opens her mouth, unable to say anything else.

"I know this is for the best, but it is not how I thought it would be" I take a deep breath. Trying to control the tears that I know are coming. "I just... I haven't felt myself in a minute. I do not know how my life gave this spin out of nowhere," 

"I am so sorry, Iris," TJ hugs me. And there is when the tears come. 

Amber joins our hug to make it a group one. The Iris, who weeks ago knew perfectly what she wanted to do with her life, is nowhere to be seen. She has been broken. She does not know what it is going to be about her tomorrow. If she will be able to get out of bed. Or if she will be able to maintain her routine. But she knows for sure that she has her two best friends. And they won't leave her side. 

Chapter Text

TJ's POV

Jonah called for an emergency band meeting to discuss important matters about the band. That is what he said to Paul. We have a surprise for him. Since today is his birthday, and also the second round of the Battle. There are many things happening today. We prepare to play and celebrate his birthday. He is not a fan of celebrating it, but we have a plan. And the first part is to make it to the next round... in that way, he will feel confident enough to agree and go to The Spoon. Where his family, our families, and friends will be waiting for him. And then, surprise. Marty wanted to plan Paul a party so that is what we did. 

"We need a car," Jonah says as soon as we sit on the floor.

"And how a car relates to the battle of the bands?" Paul asks him using that tone. 

"If you think about it, it relates so much" I turn to Paul. 

And I am right. We need to stop asking Marty's mom to take us everywhere. What is the point of having a driver's license if you don't own a car? That is the same question we ask Jonah every day. And what they ask me. But I can't take my father's car everywhere. I mean, he needs it. But our meeting does not last long. Or that is what we thought. Before we can make our move. Paul stands up in front of us. He smiles and takes a deep breath. We all share glances. Not understanding what is going on. Did he find out about the birthday cake we bought for him? 

"I wrote and composed a song based on my previous birthday experiences," he starts. "It's called Happy Death Day" he is still smiling.

"Interesting name," Marty says. 

"The style I have planned for this one is way more different than our current one..." he hesitates for a second. "Only if you are okay with it..."

"Let’s see how different the style is..." Jonah nods. 

Paul grabs Jonah's guitar to play with the song. Only to be interrupted before we could even start. 

"Wait, do you know how to play the guitar?" Jonah asks him. 

"Yeah... I thought we all played the guitar," 

Jonah does not say anything else. Letting Paul play. And the song is so good. The style is so... new. Yeah, that is not what No Exit plays daily, but it is great. This song is what we need to expand our musical capacity. And it is impressive that the same guy who is obsessed with Big Time Rush wrote this song. Once he finishes, we tell him how much we like his creation. Because we do. He is a little surprised by our reaction, but the song is amazing. And now that he is completely focused on this topic, we can execute our plan. I turn to Jonah and whisper something to him. 

"And I almost forget about this" Jonah leaves the room for a moment. Marty and I exchange glances now, knowing what is happening. 

He comes back with the birthday cake. We smile at Paul and stand up next to Jonah; he keeps holding the cake while Marty lights the candles. 

"Happy birthday, Paul!" we say in unison. 

Amber's POV

Libby and I are working on the stage while Andi and Walker check again the list of the songs the bands are playing tonight. And the light effects we are using for this round. All thanks to Cyrus and CeCe... and the guy from the theater. The whole event is getting bigger, and we can feel it. But enough of this thing for a moment. TJ, Iris, and I have been hanging out just like we did in the old days, and it is awesome. I forgot how incredible it is to be with my best friends. And maybe now I can tell them how I feel about Andi. Which is a funny thing because she is right in front of me... kind of... with Walker. How can I... you know... tell her, well, ask her if she would like to be a couple? I need a quick answer because my plan is: to invite her to my house. Watch movies or her favorite tv show and then ask her. 

But I don't have time to stop and think about everything. I guess I'll have to stick to the plan. And now that Walker is asking Libby to help him with the light test, my opportunity is here. I walk towards her. But froze once I notice her so focused on that damn list. I take a deep breath, hesitating on what to do next. But I am impulsive sometimes, you know. 

"Want to stay at my house for the weekend?" I end up asking her, smiling once she stops checking her list to look at me. 

"Sounds great" 

"Great. I was thinking of..." 

"Andi! We tried the lights, and everything looks good" Walker appears again, interrupting me. 

He offers her to go and see it by herself. So, they can have full approval. He even tells me to go with them to see. Clearly, I agree, even though I can't finish talking to her. This event is so important to her, and I will do whatever it takes to make everything perfect. So I go with them, it won't be long before the bands start arriving, and the people too, so we have to rush some things. 

Buffy's POV

Being in a band is a great thing, but at the same time, it is difficult. And not only for the time this consumes, but taking decisions, or in our case: writing lyrics. Blue had a class and a call at the theater, so Jane and I decided to try to write one. The process is long, and it took us a few hours before Rowan appeared. She sit with us and added good parts to the lyrics. The song, in general, is about love. You will see it later. It seems almost finished, there is a thing that is missing, but we don't know what it is. That is why we decided to take a break until Blue arrives. She said it won't take her long. 

And we were eating a box of chocolate someone sent to Jane's parents when she finally entered the kitchen, asking for the lyrics we wrote.

"Are you all in love or something? These lyrics are... great, actually," she says as she reads what we wrote. 

"Is there anything you want to add?" I ask her. 

"Yeah, maybe I can add something to the chorus," 

"Oh, and we only wrote the lyrics. So, we all can compose together!" Rowan pats her on the shoulder. 

We sat around the table, waiting for Blue to finish the chorus. While she's focusing on that, Rowan grabs her bass and starts playing a catchy rhythm. Jane asks her to repeat it. I look at her, not fully understanding what is going on, until across the table... Blue sings the first lines of the song. Making both me and Rowan understand what crossed the redhead's mind. It didn't take us long to figure out the rhythm of our song. Thanks to our bassist. And as she keeps repeating the beat we keep singing the same lines trying to find the perfect way to start it. Blue finishes with the chorus, showing us the complete work.

"And the title?" Jane asks. 

"The Feels," I say out loud. This has been in my mind for a few minutes. 

"The Feels... I like it" she smiles. 

Blue proposes to take advantage of the inspiration. And go compose some more of the song. So we head over to where the rest of our instruments are to come up with some ideas. But this is where my mind goes blank. The song sounds already good with the bass and what Jane proposes on the keyboard. What can I add to it? What does Paul do in this situation? I must learn more from him. I keep listening to Rowan's proposals and how Blue says the guitar could follow the rhythm in a specific way. So we agree among the four of us that the bass will lead the way. 

"I don't want to ruin this moment, but we have somewhere else to be," I tell them once I check the hour. 

"The battle!" Jane's eyes get bigger after saying that. 

We are not late, but you do not want to be late for the next round. Each of us grabs our things before heading out of the house. Rowan and I carry the clothes we will be wearing, but we almost fall over when Blue stops in front of us. 

"Wait, can we stop by my sister's store? I haven't bought anything for my brother," 

"Why?" Jane asks her. 

"It's Paul's birthday," I say. 

Paul's birthday. For that reason, I didn't want to call him and ask his advice about songwriting when you don't have any experience. But I got him a nice present, so when I see him in battle, I'll give it to him. Jane tells us to wait a moment as she goes inside to get something from her house quickly, so we go ahead and get in my car. 

Cyrus' POV

I was supposed to see Andi at her house twenty minutes ago, but she had to head earlier to check something related to the battle. So, I texted Iris to meet her at the café. It has been a crazy week, and I wanted to spend time with her. I like to think that we are similar, that is why we are friends, but these days she is as busy as I am and having a coffee before we go to see round two, felt like a good idea. 

I am waiting at a table with a donut that CeCe invited me. I see her approaching me. I didn't order a coffee for her because I do not know which one she prefers. I mean, I still question TJ for his decisions over this specific topic. But if I believe Iris and I are similar, she might order the same one as I did. 

“Hello, Iris!" I wave at her. 

"Hello!" she smiles, sitting in front of me. 

I take a look at her coffee. Yes, we ordered the same one. We could be siblings, you know. 

"How are things at the theater going?" 

"As stressful as you can think," I sigh. "I haven't seen you at the gallery lately," 

"Yeah, I... I am working on something with a friend” she looks down at her drink. "But I don't want to tell everybody about it, so..." 

"I won't say anything. I don't even know what you are working on," 

 We shared a few laughs before moving on to other topics. She told me about her parents, and I tried to give her encouragement or advice. I'm not sure which one she needs right now. But now we are on our way to see the battle of the bands. She seems excited about this, and I am excited too although I keep thinking what the heck will I do with the songs from the musical if No Exit has their full attention on this. CeCe suggested we go on with just Bowie and Paul while I continue with the final details. Jonah had volunteered as well, so I guess the three of them will make a great team. Though I would love to work with TJ, I don't think it's possible at the moment. 

As we get closer to the place, I see Andi and Libby talking in the distance, but we both do not want to disturb them, so we keep walking until we meet Buffy. She tells us about her gift for Paul. Yes, we all bought him something, and in this case, I am sure he will get a lot of Big Time Rush stuff. 

Andi's POV

After having a serious conversation with Libby about the light effects that will be used for this round, we join Amber and Walker in what looks like a conversation about which movie is better. I keep listening to them, thinking about how long it has been since I enjoyed one with CeCe, my parents, or my best friends. I've spent so much time busy with different things that I forgot something important. Enjoying the simplest things with my loved ones. I need to take a break from whatever I have at the moment. Being an adult is so hard. When you focus on something, everything else gets out of control, and you put it aside without realizing it. What should I focus on? That is a question I haven't asked myself in a while. And one I don't think I will answer anytime soon. 

Walker and I are getting ready to go on stage and kick off the second round. Once again, two bands will be eliminated, and yes, I hope it won't be any of my friends. I have no favorites... but I do not want them to be eliminated in the early rounds either. And I know Amber feels the same way. We have talked about it quite a bit lately. Or at least I do, and she listens to me. She really is an angel, she is always there listening to my complaints about the slightest inconvenience that happens in my life. 

"Round two!" Walker says before we head to the stage. 

"Let's do this" I turn to him. 

"Great. Now is your turn to start" 

I try to process his words. What does that mean? He is the one with the charisma to talk first. He is literally the leader, and I only follow his lead. But what can I do? This was my idea after all. So I nod and put a smile on my face before actually walking on stage. We stop in the middle of it, and I take a moment to appreciate the people who came. I take a deep breath. 

"Welcome back to Shadyside's Battle of the Bands!" I try to sound as happy and charismatic as Walker. "You already know them. You probably love them. Tonight the twelve bands are here again to rock this place..." 

"But remember, two of them are going home..." there is the voice I was waiting for. "But do not worry, they know how talented they are!" 

"Please, let's welcome our incredible panel of judges!" 

"Bowie Mack, known and loved by everybody in Shadyside!" 

"Rafe, Micah, and Guthrie from the super band The Renaissance Boys!" 

"And our music expert, and piano teacher, Cristel Marin!" 

Our judges appear on stage, smiling at us. After some inspiring words, they take their places. Now the show is about to start. I meet Walker's eyes with a smile. I take the microphone in my hands again. 

"Please welcome our first band of today, Love Loop!" 

We both left the stage to meet Amber and Libby. They congratulate us. Both think we did even better than last time... although I doubt it a little. In the end, we each let the bands know the order they would be playing in tonight. That was Amber's idea, not to tell them who is playing first, so they can feel less pressure... or maybe more, but the plan is good. 

Buffy's POV

"Your father's last name is Marin?" I ask TJ who is standing next to me. 

"Yes, that is why my mother does not like it. It does not sound good, TJ Marin" he shakes his head.

After a short chat with TJ, Cyrus, and Iris, I go to find my bandmates. We haven't seen Paul yet, so I couldn't give him his birthday present, which, surprise surprise, is a Big Time Rush sweatshirt. I also haven't seen Marty yet, and I could have sworn I heard his voice a few minutes ago. But I guess he must be watching the performances with Jonah and Paul. Surprisingly, we will be playing before them. We are the last two bands to perform today, and if that means any kind of ranking, my head is going to explode. I cannot believe, nor could I stand, to be last on that imaginary list. 

"I cannot believe we still need to wait to play," Rowan sighs. 

"Save the best for the finale," I tell her. 

"You know, this is great. We can enjoy the covers. I mean, I loved the Mulan one" Blue turns to us. 

Jane had not said anything for a long time. But she had to speak up when we heard the whimpers of a puppy coming from her purse. The three of us looked at each other in wonder and decided to ask her. She looked a little pressured and eventually revealed that it was her birthday present for Paul. I looked at Blue a couple of times to analyze her reaction. I'm not saying anything could happen there, but a puppy is an important gift.

Not much happened. Because we all focused again on the Palm Bay performance. But I find it hard to concentrate when I hear Marty's voice again. I decided to look around for him, but without any success. 

"Buffy? Are you listening to me?" I turn to find Andi next to me. 

"Sorry. I was thinking about my dance class..." 

"Oh, sorry to interrupt" she smiles. "But, you are next, 24hrs are about to finish their performance," 

I thank her and follow my bandmates. We hear Walker introducing us, he uses new words to describe our style. But I have the feeling that they will be surprised tonight. Our song is nothing like Dancing Queen, and I like that. We walk to our instruments. We wait for Blue's signal. And then, a few seconds later, she starts with her guitar. 

[Rowan]: Yeah! | Yeah!

[Buffy]: Get up, get out | Move 'em, move 'em, there's no doubt | I'm all wrong, you're right | It's all the same with you

[Blue]: I'm too thin, too fat | You ask why | So why, so why? | So why, so why?

[All]: On and on | And on and on | On and on | And on and on 

[All]: Don't wanna grow up | I wanna get out | Hey, take me away | I want to shout out | Take me away, away | Away, away, away 

[Rowan]: Round and round, here we go again | Same old start, same old end | Turn my head and turn back again | Same old stuff, never ends

[Jane]: Do this, do that | Can't deal, can't deal with that | I tune in, tune out | I've heard it all before 

[Jane & Rowan]: Hello, goodbye | Never asking me why | Goodbye, goodbye | Goodbye

[All]: On and on | And on and on | On and on | And on and on

[All]: Don't wanna grow up | I wanna get out | Hey, take me away | I want to shout out | Take me away, away | Away, away, away 

And the grand moment is here. Blue walks a few steps and starts with that killer solo. Just like the movie. She practiced this for so long, and she is killing it. I dare to say that this is even better than our first performance. Our voices keep singing. I get why Paul moves so much when he plays. You can feel the energy through your whole body. Blue and Rowan often walk around the stage. And sing in the same microphone. We finish the song with smiles on our faces. But we see No Exit waiting for us. So, I give Paul his birthday present, and yes, he loves it. I turn to Marty and wish him good luck before following the girls. 

Paul's POV

The end of The Rose Ladies' incredible cover was the meaning of me getting presents. I do not enjoy that part of my birthday, but I was excited for this one. I have more friends than I could ask for. Buffy gave me a Big Time Rush sweatshirt, and I love it. Blue, on the other hand, gave me a shirt we both saw at Gen's store last week, so I appreciate her effort. 

"Happy birthday, Paul!" Jane unexpectedly appears in front of me. Somehow, I am frozen just by seeing her. 

"Thanks... how did you know that?" It is clear from my tone that I am confused. 

"Blue mentioned it today... and Buffy just gave you a Big Time Rush sweatshirt" she smiles at me. Now I am embarrassed. "I could not buy something for you. But I thought you might be interested in this gift," 

She pulls something out of her purse. 

"A puppy!" I smile at the cute animal she is holding. 

I am not going to lie, this is a great gift. A new puppy will never replace my dog, but I can give this little one a lot of love. And of course, I need to take it with its mother. So, I think I will be seeing Jane more... and her father too. This could be the start of a cute friendship, right?

"Good luck! You guys are next, but I can hold the puppy while you are performing," she offers me her hand, smiling gently. 

"Thanks... this is a lovely present," I analyze what I have just said a little. 

What did I just say? 

I smile awkwardly at her and then go with the guys. Why do I have to be so... weird? I mean, I am weird, especially around people in general. But with her is different. And I know it because I grew up with two sisters, why would I act so awkward around a woman? 

Jonah's POV  

We approach the stage, and Marty looks at our judges, well, at The Renaissance Boys. I cannot even talk or breathe. They are a big deal, and I feel nervous about it. I probably changed my shirt more than ten times because my sweat was out of the ordinary. But now, I am ready. We will have a great performance and make it to the next round. I am not only Jonah Beck, tonight I am Jonah from No Exit, leader, guitarist, and vocalist too. I sing a lot in this song. And two hours ago, I thought it was a good idea to let TJ sing those lines. Then I realized that I needed to overcome this terrible feeling. So, that is what I am doing. I start the song, and the guys follow. It is now or never.

[Marty]: Take off | Last stop | Countdown till we blast open the top

[TJ]: Face first | Full charge | Electric hammer to the heart 

[Jonah]: Clocks move forward | But we don't get older, no | Kept on climbing | Till our stars collided

[Paul]: And all the times we fell behind | Were just keys to paradise

[All, Jonah]: Don't look down | Cause we're still rising | Up right now | And even if we | Hit the ground | We'll still fly | Keep dreaming like we'll live forever | But live it like it's now or never!

We smile as we keep playing. This is the feeling I love. Walking around the stage, Marty and I playing so close to each other. Jumping, and being one to my guitar. This. This is what I adore. When I feel like a real rockstar. Like The Renaissance Boys or my favorite band, 5 Seconds Of Summer. I feel that No Exit is just like them. Playing in front of a large audience and everyone cheering and singing with us. And even though this is just an event the Gallery created, I definitely sense that excitement from my best friends too. 

[Jonah]: Hear the noise | In my head | It's calling out like a voice I can't forget

[TJ]: One life | No regrets | Catch up, got no time to catch my breath

[Marty & TJ]: Clocks move faster | Cause it's all we're after now

[Jonah & Paul]: Won't stop climbing | Cause this is our time, yeah | When all the days felt black and white | Those were the best shades of my life

[All, Jonah]: Don't look down | Cause we're still rising | Up right now | And even if we | Hit the ground | We'll still fly | Keep dreaming like we'll live forever | But live it like it's now or never!

[Paul]: We ain't searching for tomorrow | Cause we got all we need today

[Jonah & Marty]: Living on a feeling that's been running through our veins | We're the revolution that's been singing in the rain

We finished the song and gathered for a group hug. Now comes the hard part, figuring out who will leave this round. Again I feel the nervousness running through my body, so I look at the guys. Marty and Buffy are finally talking. TJ is chatting with Blue about the Cyrus musical. Paul and Jane are both speaking as they look at the puppy in our drummer's hands. And me, well, I am standing here... waiting for the results which shouldn't take too long. 

"You will make it to the next round" Rowan stands in front of me with a friendly smile. 

"Thanks... I am sure you will make it too," 

"So, what is the plan? Are we going to be enemies if we make it to the final round or something like that?" her words make me smile. Where is the nervousness now? 

"Absolutely not. We are good friends," 

And then it happens. Andi's voice interrupts all conversations, and a hush falls over the whole place. The bands are announced: Palm Bay and 1º page are the eliminated ones of this round. And I feel like I can breathe again... not holding back my excitement that we are all through to the next round. I hug Rowan tightly, she looks a bit confused. But friends hug, that is normal. 

We all leave to The Spoon to celebrate Paul's birthday. But he does not know that. Today was a day full of good things, and we made it to the next round. Paul had a great day too, impressive for the guy who disliked his birthday so much. But, personally, I feel this is just the beginning of awesome stuff coming our way. 

Chapter Text

Andi's POV

Buffy and Cyrus offered to look out for some things we need for the battle of the bands. There are many things to prepare, and we are also busy at the gallery. That is why the Good Hair Crew is going out of town. I left Amber's house this morning, and let me tell you how it was. We watched a lot of movies and some of our favorite tv shows. And that's it. Nothing different happened. Even though I wanted to ask her that question, I just couldn't. There were moments, the perfect time, but I am a coward. I do not know for how long I am going to keep this. I need to tell her, but it is so hard. I even haven't had the chance to check my phone since I decided no phones on this trip. Or at least for like two hours. This is a great chance for us to update each other. By that, I mean finally telling them about Amber. Now that is what I call a plan. 

It went well. Cyrus said he suspected it, but Buffy told him it was a lie since not even she saw that coming. At least we know that we are good at saving secrets... and at hiding from others. And in Cyrus' words, we make an adorable couple. But we are not a couple. Yeah, before I could even do something like that, Buffy encouraged me to take my phone and ask her to meet once we go back... so that is what I am doing right now. I take my phone only to find out that it has no battery. I sigh and give it to Cyrus. He is in charge of ensuring our phones have enough batteries. While we wait, Buffy tells us about her secret now. She does like Marty, but she did not tell us before. This is what I missed. Being with my best friends, talking about anything. 

Cyrus passes me the phone, and I excitedly turn it on. I have many messages, but I read my dad's ones first. He sent me like two hundred. As I finish reading them, I shake Cyrus' arm. 

"We need to go back," I say. 

"What happened?" Buffy asks, so softly. I can't even process what is going on.

"I'm about to become a big sister..." I make a short pause between each word, taking a deep breath. "Or I don't know. You know that my phone died and I just read this message," 

"Yeah, we need to go back," she nods.

"Let me text TJ to get any update about that" Cyrus uses a calm tone to talk to me. I get it, I look terrible and anxious, and now I cannot breathe properly. 

"Thank you, Cyrus," 

I try to focus on the fact that I am not a bad person, daughter, or sister. I was just too busy with the person I really like and my job, and I couldn't even look at the messages my father sent me. I feel Cyrus' hand on mine. He tells me that everything is still normal, or whatever is normal in these situations, and that Bex is at home, but yeah, my brother is about to come into the world. I take a deep breath, closing my eyes to try to relax, but a noise coming from Buffy's car distracts me right away. 

"What is going on?" I ask, clearly terrified. 

"I might be afraid that my car decided to stop working" her tone is alarming. 

"I am going to text TJ again..." Cyrus looks at his phone, worried. 

I close my eyes, trying to calm down. What am I supposed to do in a situation like this? 

Walker's POV

Iris stopped by the gallery. We are having lunch alone. I am glad to be here with her, so I can finally ask her out on a date. It has been a while since we became friends, and her whole person makes me smile like a fool every time I see or think about her, I know she is not in her best moment, but I want to be there for her. I stare at her for a few seconds, she looks so pretty looking at the sushi in front of us, but some voices distract us both. I turn around to find none other than No Exit. The guys must be coming to see Andi, but she is out, as are Amber and Libby. 

"Guys?" I say to Jonah, Marty, TJ, and Paul. 

"Walker! My friend! My man!" Marty starts.

"What the hell is he doing?" Jonah asks TJ. He was about to respond to him when we see how Paul covers Marty's mouth and, smiles at me.

"Hello, Walker, we need your help with something... important" he spots my lunch date. "Hello, Iris," 

"Alright. Tell me" I smile at them. 

"Could you please come with us to help Andi, Buffy, and Cyrus? In your car, of course," Jonah tells me a little embarrassed.

I analyze his words a bit, but I am still confused. I ask them to explain everything to me, and when I hear the full version, I look at Iris, who tells me to go with them. My car is not that big, so we cannot all fit in it. Initially, it would just be me and TJ, but Marty insisted on going with us too. 

The three of us get in my car. TJ tells me the location Cyrus sent him, and it is a little far, and for that reason, Andi didn't want to go alone to pick up the stuff. But ten minutes into the drive, I realize this is going to be a long ride, and we will get to know each other more, I think it's good. 

Jonah's POV

TJ, Marty, and Walker left in the car. They told us to stay here and check on Bex and Bowie. I still think Marty didn't need to go, but he insisted on going just to see Buffy. Now, Paul and I are outside Andi's house, debating if we should actually check on them. I need to go and ask for a job at Paul's sister store. I need the job because I dedicate too much time to the band... and because my parents want to buy something for our house and we need more money. That is why I need to leave, but I do not think it is going to be soon. 

"I can't believe we need to check how Bex and Bowie are doing. I mean, they are adults," I complain a little.

"It is not that bad," he says, ringing the doorbell of the Macks' house. "And she is about to have a baby, that is big," 

I sigh as a response, wishing they do not open the door. But there is Bowie, and he receives us with a smile but a tired face. He let us into his house, and I already feel bad for not wanting to check on them. Paul looks at me, gesturing that I should speak. So I explain to Bowie why we came to see him and everything that happened with Andi. 

"If you need our help, we are always available," I say with a smile. 

"Actually... I need your help" Bowie takes us by surprise. "With Red Rooster and Cloud 10. Do you think you can give us a hand with that?"

We exchange glances. This is bigger than I imagined. What do we know about running these places? 

"Of course," Paul shakes his hand. A little old-fashioned, but it's fine.

Well, now that I have to go to Red Rooster I won't be able to make it with Paul's sister. So as I leave the Macks' house, I take out my phone to send a message to Gen, while Paul asks me how we are going to take care of both places at the same time. I stop and sigh before I tell him the plan. 

"You go to Cloud 10. And I take care of Red Rooster. I see you there once you close in about three hours, okay?" I explain to him before we both head to our assigned places. 

The walk to Red Rooster was quiet. Actually, my phone didn't ring as many times after Gen told me there was no problem and that I could stop by any day. That made me feel better, but now I have to concentrate on the store I have to take care of today. I start setting up records and cleaning instruments. Everything seems to be going smoothly until I get a message.

"He needs backup?" I read the text. "It has been thirty minutes," 

Jonah: Call Amber and Iris

Jonah: But I need you here at Red Rooster

Paul: Got it

I put the phone aside and continue cleaning a guitar for someone named Sam, who I know, I have seen this guitar before in the battle of the bands. It belongs to the leader of Search. 

"Interesting..."

One noise makes me alert, I don't know where it is coming from, but I'm here alone. I move around the store, looking for something strange to sound again, but I only manage to hear the front door opening. 

"What are you doing?" that deep voice...

"Nothing. I need your help, please, clean those drums," 

Buffy's POV

Cyrus and I are drawing on one of the papers I have in my car, while Andi keeps pacing back and forth. It's been a while since Cyrus called TJ for help. And if my calculations are correct, they should be on their way here by now. It took us thirty minutes to convince Andi that everything was okay. But it is hard to change this woman's mind, especially when we are talking about her family. And that is what I admire most about my best friend. I know she is not having a good time, that she is worried about her mother and brother, not to mention that we couldn't pick up the things she needed. But I am sure the guys are coming, and from what Cyrus told us TJ, Marty, and Walker are the ones in the car. 

I was not expecting to see Marty, but after talking at the battle I felt a lot better, I just know I will still have to wait for that date we agreed on a while back. I have no problem with waiting, but if I had planned everything we would have had that date weeks ago. 

"Is the help actually coming?" Andi asks Cyrus for the tenth time. 

"Yes. I called TJ, and he said they are coming," 

"It took us some time to get here. We just have to wait," I say, still drawing. 

I hear her complain and then continue to walk around. I look at Cyrus, we may be thinking the same thing, but most of the time, I always have another idea. 

"We need to do something. Look at her," 

"What can we do? She said no to draw," he points at our, somewhat, pieces of art.

"There has to be something to do," 

We both turned to look at Andi. Now she stood still staring at her phone while pouting. We have no idea what we might do. Everything changed so fast that we had no time for anything. We just talked about a few things until my car decided to stop, and here we are. 

Cyrus stands next to her, trying to ask her some questions, but she just stays quiet. I get on the other side of Andi and give her a hug, and so does Cyrus. At this point, I don't know what is going on in her head, I don't even know how she feels. So my best idea is to give her a hug. She does that when I feel bad, for example, when I felt really stressed before the first round because I didn't feel ready. Andi was there and gave me a big hug, no need to say anything. We are best friends, and a hug says it all. We stayed like that for a few minutes, without saying a word, even though Cyrus tried to speak on more than one occasion. Nothing a pat on his back wouldn't fix. 

"Why do I feel like a terrible person right now? why do I put my job first?" she finally says. 

"You are an adult. You need to take these kinds of decisions," Cyrus tells her in the softest way possible. 

"Well, being an adult sucks," 

"Of course," I say. "That is why nobody wants to grow up, but we cannot be thirteen forever,"

"I suddenly want to remember what we used to do when we were thirteen," 

"We have time..." Cyrus makes us smile. 

TJ's POV

Traveling with Marty is not the best experience in the world, but it is not the worst either. He prefers to sing the entire ride, no matter how many hours it takes. That was a warning his brother gave us that we eventually confirmed. But for Walker, this is his first time dealing with it, and after what seemed to be a date with Iris this must be the last thing he would want. Yet he looks so relaxed, with no hint of wanting to get Marty out of the car and make him arrive on foot, which I appreciate. As annoying as he is, I couldn't leave him walking around alone back to Shadyside. 

"Marty, shut up, please," I tell him, turning down the volume of the radio. "We need to focus" 

"Focusing on this does not mean not enjoying the trip" he sounds annoyed. 

"This is not exactly a trip," I sigh. "they..."

"Called for help, I know. I won't sing anymore," he looks out the window at the landscape.

The silence doesn't last long because he starts making sounds with his mouth. I really feel like that scene from Shrek 2. I take a deep breath, trying to concentrate on the road. I do not feel like we have made much progress. I don't even feel like we are almost halfway there, so I pull out my phone to text Jonah and see how he and Paul are doing. Fine, we didn't give them the best job, and that certainly didn't make them happy, especially Jonah. But we chose them because of their closeness to Bex and Bowie. I couldn't stay with Bex without knowing her as well as Paul. Nor could I give words of encouragement to Bowie without being as close to him as Jonah. The jobs were split nicely. It was a smart decision... well, almost. If Marty had not insisted on coming. But he came to see Buffy. We all know that. 

"Have you talked to Cyrus?" Walker asks me. "I would like to know how is Andi doing," 

"I'll ask him," I unlock my phone again and start to write. 

"Thanks..." he keeps his sight on the road. "And Marty, I do not mind if you sing, but could you please stop making those noises?" 

Those were Walker's first words in a long time of driving. I think we can talk more until we get to the Good Hair Crew's location. This will be interesting. 

Paul's POV

Iris was the only one who showed up. Amber said she had something else to do with Libby at the gallery. I did not know what to do at first, but she told me to go with Jonah. Apparently, she knows someone who can help her at Cloud 10. But when I arrived at Red Rooster, Jonah was acting a little off. It looked like he was looking for something. It reminded me of Blue and me when we used to act as detectives. But that is not something I could expect from him, so I did what he told me. Clean the drums. And I am about to finish, but some noise makes both of us stop what we are doing. He walks up to a door, where the noise is coming from. 

"What if this place is haunted?" I say, following his steps. 

"What? Paul, you need to stop watching horror movies with us if you hate them" he shakes his head. 

"Tell that to Marty," 

Another crashing noise makes both of us shut up. And take a few steps away. I do not want to say that I am scared, but I am scared, and Jonah looks so determined to find whatever is behind that door. In a horror movie, that is always a bad idea, and I cannot help but think about the one person who I know would walk in the first second she hears something suspicious, and yes, I say that out loud. 

"You know if my Jo were here, she would be heading right to that place" I point to the door where the noises are coming from. "And kick that ghost ass," 

"You can't kick a ghost ass, Paul" he sighs. "And who is Jo?"

"What do the Ghostbusters do then?" I turn to him. "And she is my long-distance best friend. Josephine. She practices karate, and she is the best. She almost wins the All Valley Under 18 Karate Tournament," I say, visibly proud. And I can't believe I learned the full name. 

"Under 18? How did you become friends? You are twenty-one," 

"Big Time Rush" 

"Yeah, there is it," 

Again the same sound is present. We look at each other, not knowing what to do. We cannot call Bowie for evident reasons, and we have no one to ask for help. The guys are not here, nor the Good Hair Crew. Blue and Jane are not available either, and Rowan is working. Amber and Libby are at the gallery, and Iris is already helping us with Cloud 10. We are alone in this, and one of us is really scared, and I won't tell names, but it's me.

"Jonah?" I whisper. 

"Yeah?" he responds slowly. 

"Can we call CeCe? She is a responsible adult," I place my hand on his shoulder, looking serious. 

"We are adults," he frowns. 

"I said responsible. Look at us! I just turned twenty-one a few days ago," I lower my voice tone, so the ghost doesn't hear us. 

If this were not a near horror movie experience, I would find it entertaining, but it is not. Jonah and I walk away from the door and sit behind the counter. But not before placing the closed sign on the main door. We both try to find a solution to our problem or an explanation. Whichever comes first. How much longer will it take for the guys to come back?

Chapter Text

Cyrus' POV

Do I need to say everything we talked about? I don't think so. This was the perfect occasion to go down memory lane, and I never expected it to feel this good. You can tell how Andi forgot about what made her feel so anxious and worried. And Buffy did not mention Marty for nearly two hours, and the same goes for me. I didn't talk about TJ or the theater. We were thirteen again. Just the Good Hair Crew and their adventures. I even forgot our rescue team was heading this way until we saw Walker's car approaching us. We wait for them to come out. And to our surprise, they all get out of it at the same time. 

"The help is here!" Marty walks up to Andi. 

"Finally!" she says, trying to hide a smile. 

You can say she does not look nervous or anxious, but she is. That is how Andi Mack is. She might not have a panic attack at the park and then meet the person she is in love with... instead, she keeps a straight face and takes deep breaths constantly. We are different, and that is why we are best friends. We complement each other. Yes, we are all into an art form, but we are not the same, and that's great. 

Andi and Buffy stop to stare at Walker's car. But I walk up to TJ. He has been staring at me for a few seconds. While I was thinking about what to say to Andi on the ride back to Shadyside. He smiles at me and kisses my head. You can hear some ew coming from our friends... and Andi telling us to hurry. We get in the car, waiting for Andi and Walker to do the same. 

"Thank you so much for coming" she hugs Walker.

Buffy tells them to hurry this time, and they do it. Her car was taken away a while ago, so she should also be back in time to teach a class. And of course for her band meeting. Same for TJ, he has to meet with the guys. And me, well, I have to go and take CeCe's place at the theater so she can go with Bex and Bowie too. This will be an interesting trip.

Iris' POV

What is a good distraction from the current situation in my house? Paul asking me to help him at Cloud 10. But I can't do everything alone, and Amber had something to do with Libby. That made me reconsider why I said yes in the first place. But then, a name crossed my mind. The only person who has been helping me with everything... and no, it is not Walker. While I waited, I looked at every single thing they had in there. Half of these things are only in my dreams. This is actually a place I dreamt of for years, but now I have different goals. Yeah, I am talking about the magazine. We still have nothing, but we are working on it. 

I stand in front of a mirror, looking at my tired face. No one said living the divorce would be an easy thing, but never said it would be this tiring. I turn to the place's door to find that person entering.

"Thanks for coming," I tell Maddie. 

"No problem" she smiles. "So, what do we need to do?" 

"I am not sure. But maybe we can offer the make-up and styling service. Paul said we have to close in about two and a half hours," but he said that several minutes ago.

"I can do the make-up work then. I always style Liz for the performances," 

"And I love your job. You two always look great with that make-up!" I smile at her. Her make-up is one of my favorite things about her style.

"Thanks... I really like how you style your hair!" the honesty of her words is what makes me feel less miserable today. 

With smiles, we both wait for the not-so-long list of people to arrive. It is a relief that they had appointments. It makes this job easy, and I am sure Paul could do a good job too, but he is with Jonah, selling instruments and albums. 

And just like that, our first customer on the list enters the store, confused about seeing two twenty-something women instead of Bex, but she does not say anything mean, instead, she offers us a smile and some chocolate she had with her. She only wants the two services we are offering today. I hope she likes the final result. We get everything ready and start with the instructions the woman gave us. But I cannot stop thinking: How are the guys doing in Red Rooster? 

Andi's POV

Who determined what makes you a good person? Am I a good person? These questions have been in my head for a while now. We can search about it, and it will probably say that kind of person is kind, helpful, honest, polite, with good manners. They can even say that they call or visit their family often. Here is where my mind starts to do its thing and makes me think that I am a bad person. But at some point in our lives, we all are bad people. And I do not have to guide myself on what I can find on the internet and try to figure out what my parents think about me. I am Andi Mack, and I am still learning. We never stop learning... but somehow, I do feel like a bad person. A bad daughter and sister... but why? 

Marty's voice brings me out of my thoughts. Apparently, he wants to play something to help me with my nerves, and that's nice of him, but I don't think I can play anything right now. Which doesn't work for me to tell him. Because by midsentence the rest has already agreed to do something. I don't know if it's to get me to calm down or just to shut Marty up.

"We can all sing a song that starts with a random letter," he says, excited by it. 

"I like the idea," Cyrus adds. 

"Yeah, let's play that" Buffy turns to us. 

They agree that Walker will start. He finally says a song with the letter g. I look at my best friends, they are as lost as TJ and Marty, but I have one in mind. Actually, this just gave me an idea for a round at the battle of the bands. I take a deep breath before singing. 

"I solve my problems and I see the light. We got a lovin' thing, we gotta feed it right. There ain't no danger we can go too far. We start believing now that we can be who we are.  Grease  is the word" 

They all smile at me. Maybe they got what they wanted. I haven't felt like a bad person for a few minutes. And based on how I have been doing this day... it is a personal record. I keep singing, waiting for them to join me, and I am grateful that TJ is the one who sings along with me, making the rest sing too. That is how I expect the ride to be. Full of songs. I do not say this often, but... thank you, Marty. 

Jonah's POV

Paul and I have been behind the counter for more time than we would like to admit, waiting for the noises to stop, but surprise, they haven't. And now we are so scared. I still want to go and investigate, but he refuses to do it. So we decided to solve this like a responsible adult would do, with rock, paper, scissors. But we have been playing for a while until we agreed to do one last round to finish it. 

"Remember, no matter what happens, it was an honor playing this game and in the band with you," I say, nodding to my words. 

"I could not ask for a better opponent and bandmate," he raises an eyebrow.

And it begins, our last round. He chooses paper... and I choose scissors. I celebrate my victory by standing up and doing a happy dance, but he only stares. I was about to speak when a crashing noise gives us one hell of a scare. I won't say anything, but a panicked scream almost comes out of my mouth, and all I manage to do is open my eyes wide. 

We both look at each other, knowing it's time to get in there and see what is causing us so many scares. So, before we do anything. We both grab some weapons in case they are needed. And approach the door. 

"What are you waiting for?" Paul asks. 

"I am not mentally prepared," I blink a few times, not wanting to face him. 

"How long is that going to take? I do not want the ghost to kill us," he sounds more scared than I expected him.

I turn to him with a serious expression. Well, I may be scared, but I'm sure it's not a ghost.

"It's not a ghost, Paul," 

His eyes go wide, and he points me towards the door. Confused, I follow his gaze... yes, someone is trying to open the door.

"It's the ghost, it's the ghost!" he whispers. 

We both take a few steps back and hold our weapons as we watch the door continue to be forced open. I won't say Paul is right, but... what if it is a ghost? This would be like in a movie or some Halloween episode of a TV series. 

Paul and I move closer. Well, we hug each other once the door opens, letting out some terrifying screams. Until we hear a familiar voice telling us to be quiet. It's Bowie's co-worker, the one he said wasn't going to work today. We exchange glances, and a two-second awkward silence falls.

"Oh! There was another person here the whole time!" he turns to me, as surprised as I am. 

"What were you doing there?" I ask.

"Therapy," she responds. 

"So you are working right now?" Paul sounds unsure to ask that. 

"Yeah... you can stay here, though. I still need to have lunch" she takes her things before giving us some instructions, then she leaves. 

We left our weapons where we found them. They were drumsticks with which we intended to attack a non-existent ghost.

"Not a word to anybody," I tell him. 

"Yeah. This is going to be our secret" he nods. "But this now feels like a Big Time Rush episode, so it's not that bad," 

We both laugh and head off to arrange everything Paul wanted to use as a shield. The store went from tidy but not so tidy, to completely tidy, and finally to messy. So now we have to rearrange everything all over again. At least we have a story that we won't tell our friends, but we can laugh about between the two of us.

Marty's POV

How can I explain the ride? Well, the first one wasn't the best, but on the second one, I was able to get everyone to sing. And that is what makes me happy. Especially when Andi started smiling genuinely. It makes me feel like I can give this to my friends every time, I mean those moments when a smile seems like the hardest thing to do. Also, this trip may have helped me clear my mind about that one thing I didn't feel ready for, but finally, it all happened, and I have the idea I needed. And yes, I'm talking about my date with Buffy. Which has not happened because of how insecure I am with my ideas. And I really want to impress her. I want her to have a good time, to see that I'm a good option, not just as a boyfriend. Which I do want to do. But as a person, she can hang out constantly, as she does with Iris, or me with the guys, especially Jonah.  

This trip also allowed me to bond with Walker. I learned that we have many things in common. So we agreed to go and eat some pizza. After all, driving all those hours made us hungry, and it was TJ's idea since Cyrus had to go back to the theater, and we did not know where Jonah and Paul could be right now. 

"So, we have been friends for a while, but I never thought you also played the guitar," I say, mouth full of pizza. TJ looks at me with a disgusted expression. 

"Yeah, but I could never be in a band like you guys. What you do it's impressive," he grabs another slice. 

"Thanks. We like your paintings as much as we like eating in here," TJ tells him before I could even open my mouth. 

Walker tells us about when he made shoes for his cousin's wedding. Now I get why he is friends with Andi. They are similar. In the middle of his story, someone catches our attention, she looks familiar but can't exactly remember where I have seen her before. 

"I thought we were not allowed to talk to you" she has red-dyed hair, big eyes, and looks confused. 

"I am not part of the panel, so there is no problem," Walker responds. 

"Hey, Paige! I have news. Fire Bite and No Exit are unavailable to play tonight, and we will take their place! If we do this right, we might earn a chance to play here often too." A tall guy with curly hair approaches our table, not noticing our presence. 

"Those are great news, Sam," she smiles at him, then she turns to us. "Enjoy your food... and our show... and sorry about that, I just want the battle to be as fair as possible,"

They leave for another table, where the rest of their band is. Now I know who they are. Paige is Search's drummer, and Sam is their guitarist. Now, I realize how important the competition is getting. How big the battle of the bands is. For the next round, we have to sing an original song. Here is where this gets real. It is not another cover, we need something impressive, personal, and outstanding. And I might know which one we can play. 

Andi's POV

"I am here!" I open the door, wishing I am not late. 

But maybe I am. I slept at Amber's, and then I disappeared for the whole day. What if the baby is already here? That would make me feel like the worst sister ever. I check the house, but nobody is there. Did CeCe convince my dad to go to the hospital instead of doing the whole thing at home? That seems like a possibility. I text CeCe. She had to go to the theater, but she gave Cyrus permission to go with Buffy and me. I take a deep breath and walk around my room. Wishing with all my hope that the baby is not here already. Wishing my parents don't hate on me for being selfish these past days... or months. 

CeCe: I am leaving the theater, Cyrus just arrived. Where have you two been?

Andi: Long story

Andi: They are not here

CeCe: Try calling one of your friends... maybe Jonah.

"Jonah!" I call to his phone. Waiting for him to pick up as my hands keep shaking. 

"Andi! You are back!" he sounds relaxed and happy. A weird mix. 

"Yeah... I wanted to ask you if you know where my parents are" I sit on the bed, playing with my feet. 

"Of course, he knows. Bowie called us a few hours ago to drive them to the hospital" Paul's deep voice gives me the strongest feeling of relief I have ever felt in my life. 

"Thank you, guys! I’ll be there soon!" 

"And-"

I hang up the call and grab some things from my room. As I approach the door, I text CeCe again, but when I actually get outside of my house, she is right there in her car, telling me to hurry. I tell her everything that happened today, and she only manages to smile at the crazy story I just told her. Apparently, nobody noticed that we called for help. But she mentioned that someone told her about two girls in Cloud 10 and Red Rooster closing up early. And I know I will have to ask my friends about it. 

She parks the car outside the hospital, and we enter running. She takes a moment before we ask a nurse about my mom... she suddenly got a flashback to when I was born. And it is sweet, but we don't have time for that right now. It only takes the look for her to understand what our priority is. And we keep walking around the hospital, only to find Jonah and Paul at our last stop. As we greet them, they tell us what I did not want to hear... the baby was already born. I cannot describe how my face looks right now. But my heart felt as if it was punched by a million fighters, and little by little it broke into pieces. What did I do wrong? I thought we still had time. 

We were invited to enter the room where they are with my brother. CeCe enters first, with a big smile on her face. I hesitate in the doorframe but decide to follow her because that is the right thing to do, even if we missed the most important part of this. I hug my dad and kiss my mom on her head. CeCe and I lean on to finally see the new little Mack. My mom smiles at us. 

"Meet Chandler Mack" 

"Chandler?" CeCe and I say in unison. 

"You named your child Chandler?" CeCe uses her judging tone. 

"This is TJ's or Buffy's fault" I turn to her. We both share the same expression.

They look to be serious about it. So, we talk to Chandler, with difficulty saying his name. I suppose TJ talked with my dad, and Buffy with my mom. That is the only explanation I can think about. After a few minutes, and many, you have a terrible name, my baby, from CeCe, my parents start laughing at us, and we clearly don't understand what is going on. 

"We are kidding," my mother smiles. "His name is Kai Mack," 

"It was my idea" the look on his face... my father really loved choosing the name. Now I do not even care about not helping them with that. 

"Kai Mack..." I look at the small baby in my mom's arms, holding back some tears at the sight of the most beautiful creature I have ever seen. "I love it," 

CeCe, my father, and I leave the room to give my mom her space to feed my brother... Kai... how great does it sound to say it? I cannot wait to pass time with him... to see him grow up. I can teach him many art-related things. But right now, I exactly know what I am doing to celebrate. CeCe and I go for some coffee for everyone. When we go back, Jonah tells us how they heroically drove my parents to the hospital. 

"I still don't get how you got my mom a private room" I put my coffee down. 

"My mom is a doctor. She works here, and she appreciates your parents so much," Paul says. "But in case somebody asks... we are related," 

We all let out a few chuckles at Paul's words. But we still have a mystery to solve.

"What about Red Rooster and Cloud 10? Who were the two women working there? And why the music store closed early?" 

"You closed Red Rooster early?" my dad asks the two guys, surprised. 

"Yeah... because we had to check on you two again..." Jonah turns to Paul for backup. 

"And... we drove you here... and talked to my mom..." he adds, not so confidently. 

Maybe it is the bad lies they told. Or the fact that Paul's mom made such a gesture for us. Or just the bliss of having Kai with us, but the smiles do not disappear. The happiness my family feels right now is not comparable with anything else. We freaked out about this for so long. We were counting the days and planning every single move. My father looked up for everything so my mom could deliver Kai at home... but things happen. CeCe got stuck at her job, and I lived an adventure with my friends, but at the end of the day... we are all here, welcoming with joy and a full heart my baby brother... Kai Mack. 

Chapter Text

Buffy's POV

"I have news," Paul says, entering my house as he is used to these days. 

"What news?" I ask, closing the door. 

"Alright, I talked to the guys like twenty minutes ago..." his eyes follow me as I walk in another room's direction, so he walks behind me. “And TJ said a stupid inside joke the band has, but that's not relevant right now" I turn to him. He gets what my glance means. "And... then Jonah asked Marty about you know what..." I open the door where the girls are waiting. They all turn to us once we enter the room. "But he was so nervous about it," He finally notices who is in here. 

"What are you doing here?" Blue asks him. 

"I came to visit Buffy" he turns to me. "And I suppose I am interrupting something important..." 

"You can still finish your news" I raise an eyebrow. 

"Okay..." he looks at the girls. Then leans in to whisper. "He finally has a plan for that date," 

I don't know why but a smile appears on my face. Confusing the girls. It doesn't take him long to leave. They don't say anything at first. Instead, we focus on the song we will sing at the round tonight. Our first original song... there is some pressure on this since we don't play our own songs every day. One band will be leaving, and we don't want to be that one. That is why we practiced this song more than our previous covers. We want it to be perfect. We want them to not forget about The Rose Ladies. 

After some time, they ask me about that thing with Paul, and I did not expect anybody else to say it. 

"Please tell me you are not dating my brother" Rowan lets a big laugh come out of her mouth, and Jane laughs nervously with her. 

"I am not dating your brother. In fact, I have a date with one of his bandmates" I smile at her. 

"Jonah?" Jane innocently asks. 

"Marty," 

"But would it be such a big deal if it was your brother instead?" she suddenly says. We all turn to her. "I wouldn't mind if any of you were dating my brother..." 

"It's not a big deal, but you can't date my brother..." Rowan puts a hand on her shoulder. "Because he is five," 

She smiles at her, and Blue shakes her head. We change the topic to the battle of the bands and again to our song. To be honest, The Feels is our only song at the moment, but we have plans to write more. In case we make it to the next round. For now, we have to get ready for this one. 

Andi's POV

Leaving all the work to Amber, Libby, and Walker, with the extra help of Iris did not end as the end of the world. I was busy taking care of Kai with my parents... and sneaking to Cyrus' house to get some sleep. A newborn is exhausting, but somehow, it is helping me with my art. I can feel those creative juices, or rivers, flowing in my head, but at the same time, I do not have time to create a single piece of art. This consumes time, and since my parents are basically new to this world, things are getting complicated. That means: CeCe almost lives in our house, and I almost forget what privacy feels like. But the Goodman's are always happy to welcome me in their house when I have a virtual meeting with the team. And don't worry, the battle of the bands is looking incredible for this round. This time, only one band will be out... oh! And I won't be hosting with Walker. 

I hold a folder with all the songs the bands are performing today while following Libby around the place, seeing the bands arrive. Eyes full of dreams, excitement, and hope. I never stopped to consider how important the battle of the bands is. Starting this gave the bands a place to play and get people to know them. And I know this round is their chance to finally show us, the people, and especially the panel what they are capable of. The next thing I see is The Rose Ladies, so we walk up to them, and they greet us with smiles. Libby gives them one of the programs we printed, they are not the last ones performing tonight, but they are not the first ones either. I stay with them to talk with my best friend but seeing Amber walking nervously near the stage was my sign to leave the guys alone, talking about their performance. 

"Hey... are you alright?" I touch her arm for a few seconds. 

"I don't know how you did this twice..." she takes a deep breath. 

"You know, you should listen to the words you told me" I smile. "I’ll be here, but if you feel so nervous, I can go and mix with the people in front of you," 

"How is that going to work?"

"You can find me in the audience and don't look another way," 

A smile finally appears on her face. She takes my hand and stares into my eyes. 

"You are an angel, Andi Mack," 

Walker approaches us, and he asks Amber to practice what they will say before they go out there. So, I go back with Libby. She is explaining Search the program. And I love seeing how the five of them are understanding her perfectly. I guess the sign language program we fought for together years ago did a good thing. 

TJ's POV

"You can try remembering the moments you felt genuinely happy," I tell Cyrus, as he gathers all his stuff before going with us to the battle of the bands. 

"That is not a bad idea," Jonah says behind him as he takes one of the sandwiches his mom made for us. 

"Does that actually works?" he asks me with those furrowed eyebrows. 

"Yeah, we do that all the time," mouth full of sandwich, he quickly responds.

"I do not think the panic attack memory will work," he sighs. 

"Panic attack?" Marty and I say in unison. 

"I am trying to remember what makes me happy," 

"And a freaking panic attack made you happy?" I ask him, completely confused.

"No. Meeting you made me happy," something goes on with my face, a smile appears and my cheeks are probably red by now. I can't explain how much happiness I feel at this very moment.

Actually, meeting him made me the happiest person, and even now, I try to remember everything about how we met. The coffees, us using other names, and then finding out our real ones... it was a crazy ride. I give him a short kiss. Followed by some ew and aw from the guys. And I am sure the aw was from Paul. But we need to leave if we want to play our song. So we all get in the car. 

I know we should have a car by now. But after we tried to get Buffy's help, she was focused on her own. And we couldn't ask Marty's mom this time, so I had to ask my father if we could take his. It is not a big car, and definitely, we were not prepared for Cyrus and Gen to be included. And of course, Paul offered as the DJ this time, and all we listen to is Big Time Rush. Honestly, I thought we would be nervous about playing his song at the battle tonight, but he seems to be chill about it, and that is good. We are ready to do what we do best: play our own songs. We picked Paul's song after Marty advocated for it. Even Paul was surprised by it. We all had different options, but Marty did a good job convincing us. And now, I know this will be one of our best performances... all thanks to him and Paul for writing such a great song. It is different, personal, and in Marty's words: outstanding. It has everything we needed for this round.

"Hey..." Cyrus puts his hand on my shoulder. "I think the panic attack worked after all. I got an idea,"

"That's great" I smile without taking my eyes off the road. 

We are finally outside the place, and the guys get out of the car as fast as they can while Cyrus and I walk at a slow pace holding hands. He wishes us luck with the performance before joking about hiring Gen to work with him at the play. I shake my head and kiss him on the cheek, then I see him walking in Andi's direction. I am so happy to have him in my life. 

Iris' POV

After the Cloud 10 thing, Maddie and I became closer. We have many ideas for the magazine, and she keeps saying that we need a photographer, but neither of us knows one. So, we created a plan to find one. There are many of them at the battle of the bands. I know it because Amber told me about it, and I told Maddie. She has to perform with Fire Bite, but I can do the job while some bands are playing. She offered to drive me to the place. And meeting their drummer was fun. The three of them make incredible music. 

But now, they are preparing for when their turn comes. I walk up to the stage, seeing:m (mind)  perform. And they are great. They have the potential to be one of the finalists or at least to make it to the last rounds. Someone stands next to me, but I don't turn to them. Until I hear the click of a camera. There is a girl who is part of one of the favorite bands in the competition.

"Hello?" I say, hesitant. 

"Hello..." she says, putting down her camera. 

"I see you are a photographer" where does that come from? Come on, Iris.

"I will be one..." she nods. "I am studying it at Shadyside's University," 

"That is great! Actually, this might sound crazy, but would you be interested in having a coffee and talking about an offer? I am looking for a photographer... or a future one," 

"Sure... why not? I am Emma, by the way," she smiles as she extends her hand to me. She has a pretty smile. 

"Iris," I shake her hand. 

She gives me her number and leaves with her bandmates. Now, I cannot believe how easy that was! I was nervous, yes. But I managed to talk to her without making it weird. Or I think so. I see Amber and Walker getting ready to go on stage, but I do not want to distract them. So, I make my way to No Exit, giving TJ a hug. He is happy to see me. Now I have been missing these days, but Maddie and I have a lot of work. Starting a magazine is hard work, but it will be worth it once we see the final product. 

Paul's POV

We will play my song in a few minutes... and I don't know why I am so nervous about it. We played my songs many times at other places, but this is different. If Happy Death Day is not good enough, we are out. And I know we practiced this so much, but if we don't make it to the next round, it will be my fault. And I cannot function under that kind of pressure. How I need Jo, she would tell me exactly what to do. Just like when she tried to teach me karate, but we gave up and ended up watching Big Time Rush... maybe that is what I need. I need Kendall to give me a motivational speech. But where do I get a Kendall to do that? All I do is dance to myself. I do that when I am nervous. The random dances do not appear often. That is proof of how high m nervousness is at this point. I hear Amber's voice announcing the next band. What am I going to do? We are the next ones. And here it comes more dancing... where are my sisters when I need them? 

"Nervous?" Jane's voice makes me turn around. 

"Am I that obvious?" I try to smile, but my face gives her a strange grimace. 

"Well, you are dancing... I thought it was a possibility" she looks at me with the prettiest and warmest smile. 

"You are smart. I do that when I feel nervous..." I sigh. "I am nervous. We are playing one of my songs," 

"I bet it is a good one," 

"I hope so. I would not want to be out because my writing and composing were not good enough" wait... what are you doing, Paul? 

Her smile disappears the second I finish my words, but she does not leave... or try to do it. Instead, she places a hand on my arm. Looking up at me. 

"I believe in you and your talent. Now, go there and rock out this place" there is that smile again. 

I stare at her blue eyes, smiling, but before I can say a word. My sisters appear behind her. Ready to wish me luck. Blue takes her away since they go after us. But Gen has to fix my hair again. I touched my hair many times as I was dancing. We see the guys approach us, ready to do our, now, traditional motivational speech. They are my Kendall. Actually, Jane is my Kendall too. I always wanted to be like him, but I might be a mix of Carlos and Logan... but is that even relevant right now? We are about to play! And the guys are already waiting for Amber to announce us. I take a deep breath, ready to join them, but my older sister stops me for a few seconds. 

"You will be great, kid" she smiles. "Do not be afraid of anything. You are brave enough to do this. And I am proud of you," 

"Thanks, Gen" I hug her, holding back a few tears. Maybe I want my whole family's support, but right now, hearing those words coming from my sister's mouth is enough. 

Walker's POV

"What do you mean that there is a mistake?" I whisper to Amber, covering the microphone. 

"Yeah... Fire Bite is next," she says, barely moving her lips because of the big smile she gives to everyone in front of us.

I sigh. But turn to them also with a smile. Andi told us before to announce No Exit as the next one. This is a small new mistake. But I am sure this would never happen if Amber were the one helping Libby with the programs. 

"Please welcome the incredible band, Fire Bite!" I use my already-known tone. 

With a confused look, Fire Bite walks up to the stage. Taking place with their instruments. Amber and I leave the stage smiling. But once we meet Andi and Libby, they disappear. We try to find an explanation for what just happened. And I do not want to say it, but this has to be something Andi did. I exchange a glance with Libby, and she shakes her head. That is her way to tell me to not mention this might be Andi's fault. I turn to Amber and Andi. They are still checking the programs she printed and the list we gave her. 

"They are about to end the song. We better prepare, Amber," I tell her, trying to keep a neutral but usual tone in my voice. 

"Yeah..." she follows me. 

We stop at the right stage. Watching Fire Bite continue with their, apparently, long song. I don't want to look like the mean guy who said it was Andi's fault when she had to do so much in her personal life. Her brother being born, taking her of him, her sleepless nights, and going to her friend's house to sleep at least four hours. Yeah, that is what I mean. But at the same time, I wish she could focus like that with this. After all, this was her idea, and the past two weeks felt like it was my battle of the bands, and not hers or ours. 

"You know how much she cares about this," Amber says. It almost looked like she was reading my mind. I turn to her. 

"I know, but she could be a little more careful with that. You saw the list mixed at the end. That was not our thing," even if I actually want it to be our thing so we don't blame Andi.

"Maybe you can tell her that" there is no way for me to do such a thing. I don't want to be or sound mean.

"There is no need..." we turn to find Andi behind us. "I figure it out now. I am so sorry for messing this up,"

"It is okay. Anyone can make a mistake" I smile at her. 

I do not have the nerve to say mean things to her. To talk to her with the absolute truth. I am too nice for my own good, but the battle is our priority. Our friendship is our priority. This was just a small mistake and we took care of it. Everything is fine.

Buffy's POV

We prepare to go out on stage. Fire Bite finished an amazing song that everyone liked. But we do not look nervous. Being a band for as long as this keeps going has its perks. Although, we still have not talked about what comes next. We are not sure if we want to be an official band like everyone else here. And honestly, I have so much fun with them. I enjoy our practices and writing sessions so much. We are more than a one-time-thing band, but we do not seem to want to talk about what if. I still have things to do. The dance classes were my number one thing for a while until I met these ladies. Until Blue asked me about joining a band with her and her best friend. They truly changed my life, and I do not know if I want to say goodbye to that. 

We stand next to each other as we listen to Search's performance. Their songs sound good with the violin. We know we are the next ones, so we hold hands, preparing for Blue to tell us some words before going out on stage. She smiles and takes a few seconds to say something. Since we knew there will only be one band out tonight, things changed. I cannot tell if it was a good or bad thing. But from this side, it looks like she is nervous. 

"Well, ladies. I am not telling you to not be nervous, but... it is alright if you are... because I am" we don't say anything. "But let's have fun. Let's enjoy our song and sing it to whoever you wrote this for..." she winks at the three of us. 

"We never said we wrote this for someone," Rowan tells her holding back a laugh. 

"I know, but come on, it's obvious," 

"Fine, you all know who I will be singing this for," I say, smiling. 

"What about you two?" She asks our bassist and keyboardist. 

Rowan smiles, she knows her best friend knows, she wrote this for no one, but Jane looks kind of scared. She opens her mouth, but Walker's voice announcing our band saves her from having to answer our leader's question. We head to the stage after a group hug. This is it, this is the first time we will sing an original song. Our only song. No pressure, of course. We make it to the instruments and get ready for Rowan's sign. I do not sing much in this song either because this one is fast. I still don't have Paul's ability. The bass starts and the rest follow it.

[Buffy]: Boy, I, boy, I, boy, I know | I know you got the feels | Boy, I, boy, I, boy, I know

[ Blue & Rowan]: Uh, I'm so curious | 'Bout you, boy, wanna keep it cool | But I know every time you move, got me frozen |  I get so shy, it's obvious  (get ya)

[ Buffy & Jane]: Catching feels like butterflies | If I say what's on my mind | Would I hit bulls-eye? |  Shoot, I'm ready, aim and fire  |  Baby, I

[ Blue & Rowan]: Feel like cupid's alive | Alive tonight, yeah, tonight |  If your heart beats the same way, let me know  |  'Cause I'm boom-boom-boom from head to toe, and I 

[Blue, Buffy & Jane]: I know, love, it is such a funny thing | A mystery allure, gotta get to know you more | 'Cause I, I can feel a real connection | A supernatural attraction-ah |  I got the feels for you, yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah

[ Jane & Rowan]: You have stolen my heart, oh, yeah | Never let it go, oh, oh, no | Never let it go, oh, oh, oh |  Lightning straight to my heart, oh, yeah  |  I got all the feels for sure  |  Yeah, I got all the feels for ya, oh 

[Blue & Buffy ]: Boy, I, boy, I, boy, I know | I know I got the feels |  Boy, I, boy, I, boy, I know  |  I know you feel it too 

[ Jane & Rowan]: Sway in the moonlight, dance in the dark | I know that I caught your eye |  Are we on the same vibe?  |  I wonder what's on your mind

[Blue  & Buffy ]: 'Cause you got me good and I wanna be ya boo | If it's dumb, well, I wanna be a fool |  Underneath the neon lights, baby  |  Electricity tonight, baby

Eventually, we finish the song, feeling better than ever. I never felt prouder of any creation than I am right now. This is our song, and we just sang it to many people. This feels great. 

Marty's POV

The Rose Ladie's performance was incredible. I don't have words to explain how much I loved their song. The rhythm, the lyrics, everything. The guys enjoyed it so much, especially Paul, he is so proud of his sister. But the end of their song means the start of ours. Jonah calls for a short band meeting. We place our hands on each other's shoulders as we used to lately. We hear Amber and Walker talking to the audience. They have to do some time before our turn, we are the last ones and our song is nothing like the past ones, so that has to be a good sign. I catch Buffy and the girls talking, and we even meet each other's eyes. She smiles and waves at me. I am too distracted seeing her walk away with her bandmates that TJ has to bring me back to the real world. I apologize and let Jonah speak.

"Now, guys, this is our time. Are you ready to rock out this place?" he asks us, smiling. "We are one step closer to our big dream... let's enjoy the ride meanwhile," 

"Wise words," TJ tells him. 

"I am ready, guys," I say, patting their shoulders. 

"This is our someday, guys," Paul says, with a confident look on his face. Maybe that is a Big Time Rush reference. 

"No pressure, alright, Paul?" Jonah looks at our drummer. 

"No pressure" he nods. 

We prepare to go to the stage. Jonah and TJ are still talking about the girls' song and how nice the rhythm was. I grab Paul by his arm, making him stop. There is something I have to tell him. And this feels like a good moment. 

"Hey, we are about to sing your song because it is good, remember that. I did not tell you guys to do it if I was not sure this was the song," 

"Thank you, Marty" he smiles. Somehow he manages to still be a bit shy around us, we've been playing a band together for months.

We follow the rest to the stage. And look at each other before playing. The song starts slow for a few seconds, then the real rhythm comes next. We wait for Paul to indicate to us that it is time. I turn to him and nod. Hoping it can boost his confidence now that we are on the stage. He takes a deep breath, and the song becomes a bit too real for him. 

[All,  TJ ]: Na-na-na-na-na-na-na-na-na | Na-na-na-na-na-na-na-na-na-na | Na-na-na-na-na-na-na-na-na | Na-na-na-na-na |  I feel like “whee”  

[All,  Marty ]: Tra-la-la-la-la-la-la-la-la-la haha | Happy death day | Happy, Happy worst day |  Feel  like  | Tra-la-la-la-la-la-la-la-la-la haha | Happy death day | Happy, happy worst day

[ Marty  & Paul]: I’m a birthday clown tonight | Though my lips are smiling |  I’m not getting in the mood  |  Everybody looks the same like me  | It’s boring, boring, boring, boring

[Jonah &  TJ ]: Inside of a room full of stuff | At the sound of empty applause |  Blow out the candles  |  One, two, three  

[Marty &  TJ ]: Everybody’s missing a thing | Celebration with no feelings |  Even when the candles went out  |  Would they wear the same expression 

[Paul &  TJ ]: Birthday, it’s your birthday | The sound of the song silenced by the fireworks | Worst day, it’s a worst day | The clown’s laugh echoing softly  (The clown’s laugh)

[All,  Marty ]: Tra-la-la-la-la-la-la-la-la-la haha | Happy death day | Happy, Happy worst day |  Feel  like  | Tra-la-la-la-la-la-la-la-la-la haha | Happy death day | Happy, happy worst day

[All]: I’m so sick of the fakes, I’m so sick of the fakes | I’m so sick of the fakes, I’m so sick of the fakes | Run, run for your life, run, run for your life 

I am not going to lie, this song was different, but the feeling did not change. We felt the power this song holds and brought it with us for almost four minutes. We go back to the place we were waiting for our turn, smiling at each other and praising Paul and his ability to make songs on his own. His sisters come to congratulate him. And a: I did not know you felt like that comes from his older sister but the attention goes back to Amber and Walker once they are ready to announce who is eliminated from this round. We take Paul's hand since we know how nervous he is right now. Even The Rose Ladies are grabbing his arms. 

"We had excellent songs tonight!" Walker shouts, making the people cheer. 

"But, here it comes the bad news..." Amber adds. 

"The panel has decided which band is out of the battle," 

"And... the band is..." 

"Action Figure!" both say in unison. 

We made it to the next round again! And Buffy too! I mean, and her band too. I approach her to congratulate her, and she does the same. We smile at each other, and then, I say the magic words, taking her by surprise. 

"I see you tomorrow at 5 pm for that date,"

Chapter Text

Jonah's POV

Marty called for an emergency meeting, and we all are in his house. His date with Buffy is today. In two hours, actually. Why are we here? We are not sure. He has been avoiding the topic for a while. But TJ had to leave his father alone with a new Lego set; Paul had to bring his whole homework with him, and I had to ask Rowan if she could cover my turn at the store. Yeah, I have the job at Paul's older sister's store, and what a coincidence is that Rowan works there too. We are good friends now. But leaving everything to come and see our friend and then he does not say a thing, it is not what you always have in mind.

The silence in the room appears to last an eternity. TJ keeps moving his feet as he stares at the floor. Paul is writing in his notebook, and Marty is making sounds with his mouth. I only look at them. I want to tell him to speak already, but it does not seem like a good plan since he might not take it well. Instead, I sigh loudly, staring at my shoes, thinking if it is a good idea to leave them here and make it to the store and actually earn money for my family but I am a good friend, so I guess I will stay here and wait for my best friend to say something. 

"I told you to come because I am nervous..." he finally says. 

"You will be fine, do not worry," Paul tells him, eyes glued to his notebook. Almost seems automatic.

"Your clothes look nice... but they could be better..." TJ turns to me, expecting me to follow him. 

"I like these, and they are my lucky ones," he takes a look in the mirror.

I remember the sachet of jam I took from The Spoon this morning. I have an idea, and this might not be Marty's favorite, but it will be TJ's. Even Paul's since I am pulling this off of a Big Time Rush episode he made us watch the other day. I stand up, walking up to him. 

"Let me give you my lucky sachet. It has been with me for a while now," I tell him. 

TJ looks at me in confusion, and even Paul stops writing to look up at us. Great, nobody got the plan. Everything has to be done by me. How am I supposed to make this work?

"Okay..." he says, eyes full of curiosity. 

"Here it is" I take out the sachet, pressing it hard enough to let some of the jam come out. And it lands straight on his clothes. "Oh, Marty. I am so sorry," 

"You should change. You cannot go looking like that to your date," TJ says, finally getting my plan. Or that is what I think.

"You are right. I better get ready. There is another outfit I thought of..." he scans the place to find a better outfit. 

"Yeah, and good luck, you will be great!" Paul stands up. "We have to go, but if you need any help, you can text us," well now I don't get the plan. 

But Marty nods and takes out some clothes from this closet. Paul, TJ, and I decide to help him with his date without him realizing it. Maybe that is what Paul meant when he literally made us run out of the house. But, I get it, Marty is not ready for this, and we do not know what he planned, but we can always follow him and Buffy. But we need backup. This is not a job for only three guys, where the smarter one is actually the youngest. Paul called this the Big Time Rush operation Marty as Carlos. TJ and I disagree with the name, but we can work on it. I text the only people I know who can help us with this whole thing... the rest of The Rose Ladies. Minus Buffy, of course. 

Cyrus' POV

"So, you will text us everything that happens on your date, right?" Andi asks Buffy for the tenth time in twenty minutes. At this point, I guess she just wants something to do.  It's not like we'll crash her date just to ensure it goes great.

"Yes, I will text you everything, Andi," she grabs a t-shirt just to throw it at her.

"I am so excited. It was about time he asked you that," I say, smiling at my friends. And trying to prevent a clothes fight. 

"But don't ruin it. This guy could be your future boyfriend," Andi unnecessarily says. 

"Shouldn't you be confessing your feelings to Amber?" Buffy smiles widely, blinking slightly fast. 

"Oh, that was a good one," I say, enjoying my friends' expressions. 

"Shut up, Cyrus," they say in unison. 

"I love you too," I place my hand over my heart, exaggerating the moment a bit.

"Shouldn't you be with your boyfriend right now?" Andi asks me. 

"And miss this? No way!" I smile. "And he was building a Lego with his father. I cannot mess with their bonding time," 

Buffy keeps trying on different outfits once we end the discussion. She wanted us to come to her house to rate her choices. But we are talking about Buffy Driscoll, she was born with great style. After we finish this, Andi will take me to visit Bex and the baby. And I am excited. I like to play with babies. I just hope she does not become the bear sister again. The first time we met the little Kai, Buffy and I wanted to hold him so much, but Andi seemed to not like the idea as much as us, and after arguing with us for about twenty minutes, we did nothing. So this time has to be different. But right now, we have to focus on Buffy and her date with Marty. This took us all by surprise since he told her yesterday, but she looks happy, so if she is, then we are too. 

Andi and I vote for the same outfit, which could only mean that our best friend is ready for her date with No Exit's bassist. I am not worried about her, this will be a great date. Even though I do not know what they will do, TJ does not know either. Marty didn't want to tell any of the boys, so my boyfriend could not tell me anything. And it's not like we are going to follow them. She will tell us later how the date went. 

"I'm ready" she smiles, showing us the final result. 

"And you look beautiful," I add. 

"You can text us if you need it..." Andi smiles at her. "Good luck with your date," 

We leave her house, in the direction of Andi's. We haven't been together since the day Kai was born and it was not her best moment. TJ is not the only one with bonding time today. But I wonder how he is doing with that Lego set, it seemed hard to build. 

TJ's POV

"That is not the name of the plan, Paul," Jonah tells us best friend for the fifth time now. 

"It's not a bad name," I say, checking if Blue and Jane are near. 

Jonah turns to me while Paul makes a happy dance. He believes this is exactly like one of Big Time Rush's episodes, and Jonah thinks he is wrong. I don't take sides, so I stick to our plan, which is: to wait until the girls arrive at The Spoon. Marty still has forty minutes before this date starts, and we need a new name for the plan and a new plan. There is nothing wrong with ours. It is just that it does not exist. But come on, how are we going to help Marty? It's not like we are super friends that will know exactly what move he will do next. And for the record, we consider the girls are better with plans. 

When Blue and Jane approach our table, we argue about the name of our plan. There is no better one besides Paul's suggestion. They don't do anything, just stare at us either confused or disappointed. Jonah tells them to sit with us and starts explaining what we have to do and that we need a plan. Paul interrupts him to say the unofficial name of it and celebrates his victory once his sister says it is a good one. Now we have no choice but to make it official. 

"How do we know where the date starts? Did he mention anything?" Jane asks Jonah. 

"No, he did not say anything. But we can always ask his mother," he takes another bite of the hamburger he ordered. "And by we, I meant TJ," 

"TJ? Why TJ?" I turn to him. 

"Because our parents love you. Ask Blue, our mom adores you," Paul tells me as he shoots a glance at his sister. 

"You have something that makes parents love you so easily" Blue nods. 

Well, I do not have a choice if that is what my friends think. I only hope his mother does not tell anybody about what I am about to do. 

"Great, let me text his mom," I shake my head. After all, is this still a good plan?

I grab my phone, ready to ask Marty's mom if she knows anything about the date. To avoid those places, of course. But we all know the truth. We do not want to ruin his date. We want to help him not screw it... maybe Paul is right, and this can be like the Big Time Rush episode... but let's not lose focus. It takes her a few minutes to reply, and we have a new location: the pizzeria. We are lucky that he tells everything to her. 

Andi's POV  

Cyrus and I have been in my house for about thirty minutes, in complete silence. Kai is sleeping, and so is my mom. And, of course, we had to come home right at this specific time. We have been texting each other. And there is not much to talk about... or that is what we thought. I asked Jonah if he wanted to hang out, and he told me about a mission. I didn't understand what he said. But I suggested Cyrus ask TJ what he is doing right now and he said the same thing. 

"What do you think it means?" I ask.

"I do not know. It can be anything," he says, loudly enough for me to let a shh come out of my mouth. 

"Do you think this is about Marty? Maybe the date is not going well," I sound more worried than I wanted to.

"The date has not even started yet! But it can be, you know how the guys are" taking that from the guy who has been long enough near that band, he really knows what he is saying.

"Should we do something? Like going and stopping them," I do not know where I keep saying these things, maybe it's my lack of sleep. 

"No. If they ruin the date, Buffy will ruin them" he smiles. 

And he is right. They waited so much for this date, we did too. Nothing will be strong enough to stop these two from enjoying it. And we can enjoy our day too. I turn to Cyrus, he is typing something in TJ's chat. If we are not in, he can be our eyes and ears. I tell him how smart the move is, and while we are celebrating this small victory, my mom and Kai surprise us in the kitchen. I swear Cyrus' soul almost left his body when he screamed, but I had to put my hand in his mouth to avoid him making my little brother cry. Once that kid starts crying, only my dad can calm him. And he is busy at Red Rooster right now. 

We follow my mom to the living room. Cyrus is fascinated with how small Kai is. And how much he looks like me when I was younger. I prepare some tea for them and a strong coffee for me. These have been rough days... I could use a break... and a nap. 

Jonah's POV

"Jonah is James, TJ is Kendall, Blue is Katie..." Paul starts. 

"But I am your sister," she responds, as confused as us. 

"Focus Blue!" he shakes his head. "So, I'll be Logan, but in the episode, he has a date... Jane-" he shuts up. "Sorry, uhm" 

"Jane and I will be a team, and you three will be together," she says. 

"What if we all are one team? All of us... together?" TJ suggests, closing his eyes and taking a deep breath.  

We are already at the pizzeria, waiting for the perfect time to start with the plan that we do not have. I spot Buffy and Marty at a table, probably deciding what to order. And if I am not wrong, he is thinking about that one he asked the place to add. He is almost like the man in the movie Read It and Weep. We need to do something, but I just cannot come up with a plan. And I always do that... well, that is a lie. TJ always does that, and now it is time for him to do it. I look at him, he is texting someone. Blue and Paul are still arguing about her being Katie and him being Logan. But Jane and I share glances. Somehow, I guess my eyes ask her to come up with a plan.

"I have a plan," she says, making everybody turn to her. 

"Which one?" I ask her, doubting a little. 

"Just wait right here" she walks up to a guy sitting alone at a table.

They seem to know each other. Two minutes later, she comes back with the guy and tells us they are siblings. He works here, so her plan is for one of us to dress in uniform and attend our friends' table. TJ and I are as tall as Jane's brother, but he just dyed his hair brown since the red, in his words, draws too much attention. 

"It's up to you, Jonah" TJ gives me a pat on the back. 

"Good luck" Blue smiles at me. 

All I have to do for my friends. This plan better work. Now, I follow Jane's brother, ready to swap clothes. I hope not literally, it would be weird if he just wears mine. 

Marty's POV

Buffy and I are at the pizzeria to start with the incredible date I planned for us. We have many things to do, but having the magnificent pizza I suggested this place to add is at the top of the list. Then we will go skating for many hours until she feels like having a milkshake, so we will probably end the date at The Spoon. My perfect opportunity to ask her on a second date, but first, I need to order the pizza. I see our waiter approaching, so I give him a big smile. He is using a mask, which is weird, he might not feel well. 

"Have you decided what to order? We have many delicious pizzas today, and don't make me start at our special" his voice also sounds weird. 

"Oh, actually..." I look at Buffy and then back to him. "I-"

"Would like to check our menu? Of course," He places the menu in my hands.

Buffy smiles at me, and I do not want to ruin this. The is a post-it added to the menu. I tell him about the strange thing, and he asks me to read it. This is probably something a person left by accident. 

"Why don't you order for us?" I say, frowning at the handwriting.

"Great idea," he says, taking away the menu and turning to Buffy. 

"A classic one. I do not like new combinations when it comes to food" Buffy wrinkles her nose.

"One classic pizza coming!" he leaves as soon as he can. 

Well, the pizza idea did not work out. And it could be a disaster if she didn't like my pizza. I think it is better this way. I ask her about her dance classes and the band. The guys told me to not ask her about it, but I can't stop my tongue now. She takes a few seconds to answer, but she tells me how great she is doing. Our waiter comes back to ask us what we would like to drink, and yeah, we order different things. But again, there is a post-it on the drinks menu. 

"Would you like to go for an ice cream later?" I read the new post it. I don't know why I keep doing it.

"I would love to!" she says, smiling at me while I look a little confused, but I still smile back at her. 

The pizza arrives, and we start to eat. I do not know what to say. Should I talk while I eat, even if my friends have told me a million times to not do it? I guess I can listen to them this time, even if they're doing their own stuff. It seems that our next stop is to buy ice cream. 

TJ's POV

We watch Buffy and Marty enjoy their pizza while Blue and I are starving. Jonah comes back to our hiding place with his usual clothes, and Jane's brother goes back to work. We tease him about all the post-it ideas he came up with at the last minute. He closes his eyes, trying to avoid everything we say to him. 

"You looked handsome as Dominick," I say as I hold back my laughter. 

"Yeah, yeah. Why don't you text Cyrus about everything I did?" he looks at the empty plate of free bread. As I said, Blue and I really want to eat something. 

"I will," his face tells me everything, and I cannot help but smile. 

Blue, Jane, and Paul chuckle at my response, and Jonah ask me to not do it, but it's too late. I already texted Cyrus everything while he was saving our best friend. I check my messages, and I have many from him. He sent me a picture of him and Andi with little Kai. 

TJ: How cute you three look! 

Cyrus: I might want a little brother now...

TJ:  Are you sure? Have you seen the Kim siblings?! They were arguing because I am Kendall and Paul is Logan! 

Cyrus: You still need to tell me about that 

Cyrus: But I think I do not want a sibling anymore...

I smile at the screen and turn to my friends. Jonah tells us to leave since Buffy and Marty are about to walk out. I don't want to imagine how difficult this will be at the park. 

Buffy's POV

How would I describe this date? There is this strange feeling that this is not going as planned, but I am having fun. And even though he asked me about the only two things I tried not to think about today... everything is alright. We are in the park, sitting on a bench as he tells me about the cooking classes he attends with his mother. I even know why his bass is named Sandwich. 

"I like your stories," I tell him. 

"Thanks... some of them are crazy and unusual," he nods slowly. 

"That is what makes them so enjoyable!" I smile, trying to hide the fact that I am so nervous around him now. 

If you told me six months ago the guy who started a band with one of my friends and I would have had a great date, I could have laughed in your face. But now, the possibility of getting closer is not so unlikely. In fact, I can even think there might be something else. One date is cool, and I hope we get a second one, even a third. Cyrus has a boyfriend, and Andi has whatever she is with Amber. Maybe it is time for me to give myself an opportunity with these things. 

Marty asks me what flavor I prefer and walks up to the store to get them. I look around the park and find someone familiar near a tree. She seems to be looking for someone and having a discussion with herself. I approached her quietly, hoping to surprise her... but I hear something I wasn't supposed to. And I do not know how exactly I should react.

"You like Paul?!" I say in surprise. Jane covers my mouth with her hand. 

"Do you want Blue to kill me?" she whispers. "I thought you were with Marty," 

"I was, but I saw you, and he went to buy ice cream..." I scan her face a bit. She looks different... worried. "There is nothing wrong with liking him. But now I get why you asked that the other day," 

"Please don't say anything... I have to go back..." she sighs. "Good luck with your date,"

I return to the bench, thinking of many ways to help my friend with this new discovery, but Marty and a vanilla ice cream steal my attention. He sits next to me and starts with another story. This time it involves his brother and his dogs. But I can't stop thinking about what would Blue and Jane be doing here. Of course, they don't know about this part of the date, so maybe they really came to do something else, I guess. 

Paul's POV

"Did Buffy say something? Does she know we are here monitoring their date?" I ask Jane as soon as she approaches me. But she does not seem aware of that. 

"Uh? No... she..." I wait for her to continue. "She wanted to say hi. She probably thinks I am here with my mother" she smiles. 

"What a relief!" I hug her. "Thank you, Jane,"

She doesn't say anything since TJ interrupts us. Blue and Jonah are closer to Buffy and Marty than expected, and we need to help them. If they see the five of us here... things will look suspicious. And we don't want that. But in the end, they don't need our help. Buffy and Marty walk away from us, and we can tell their date will survive without the super friends and their friendship powers. Another thing in my life that feels like a Big Time Rush episode! And this time without an inexistent ghost!

Marty's POV

After the ice cream, we went to Red Rooster. There was an album she wanted to buy, and that I promised to listen to later. Actually, we stayed there for like an hour. Looking at the instruments, some more vinyl, and talking about everything you can imagine. But now, I am walking her home, and judging by the great time we had. It is time to ask her that. 

"Thank you for today. It was fun," she says, smiling and looking so pretty. 

"Maybe we can do it again... if you want it..." I am not telling you how nervous I am. 

"I would love to," she waits for me to say another thing, but my tongue won't cooperate, so she just smiles and enters her house. 

Do I have another date with Buffy? Yes, I do. And I am so happy right now. But I don't want her to look out the window and see me doing a happy dance. So I wait until I meet the guys at Jonah's. They all are in the kitchen eating ice cream and trying to guess what the next round will be about. I even hear Paul mentioning one of Jonah's favorite bands. I approach them with a smile on my face. 

"Looks like your date went well," TJ starts. 

"I don't know, you tell me. You were there too," they look at each other before turning to me. 

Maybe they did not notice how terrible Jonah is at acting. And how the handwriting looked exactly like TJ's. Or when I saw Buffy talking to Jane. They all were there. I can even bet Paul and Blue were there too. They always plan stuff. 

"You really think I would not notice Jonah dressed as Dominick and Buffy talking to Jane?" I finally say the words. 

"In our defense... yeah, we thought you wouldn't notice that," Jonah responds. 

"But you two looked happy... and that makes us happy!" Paul smiles awkwardly at me. 

I look at them with a serious expression. I don't know what to say, they did everything I did not want them to. But, they helped me at the end of the day. So, I take a few steps forward. They have this guilty look on their faces. 

"Thank you, guys" I pull the three of them into a hug. 

Chapter Text

Andi's POV

I get ready for another day at the gallery. Today Walker has some news for us, he did not say much about it, but he said it was related to our main event. Libby and I tried to figure it out, but he is good at keeping secrets. Amber's luck was not better than ours, but she kept trying for a few days, only to lead her to the same place we all are. I might have some ideas about what that surprise is. But all I can think about is food. My dad is cooking lasagna, and you can smell it. I leave my room, walking to the kitchen to find him singing a song we all know well. My mom is with Kai sitting at our table, trying to eat some ice cream as my little brother is being fed. I smile at them and then turn to my dad. 

"Singing a Fire Bite song? That's new," I tell him, trying to sound as neutral as I do in the gallery. 

"Well, it is a good song. And I do not have favorites" he smiles. 

That is true. We can't have favorites, especially him and TJ's mom. How do you separate both things? I thought it was easy until I found myself celebrating that No Exit and The Rose Ladies were still in the competition. He stares at me for a few seconds as if he wants to say something else, but he does not know how. And at the end, he turns back to the lasagna. When I tell him I have to leave, then he turns to me again. 

"I wanted to talk to you" he hesitates for a second, then he finally meets my eyes. "I am stepping out of the jury. I need to be here for your mom and Kai,"

"You can't leave us. TJ's mom is also leaving. She just told me. How are we going to fill up two missing spots?" I try not to sound mad... or scared. 

"You can survive. You have The Renaissance Boys they are enough to be the jury," 

Is he right? Can the Battle survive with only them on the jury? Things will look different, and we need to tell the bands about it. I need to talk with TJ too. It took so much to find our perfect jury, and now our two fan-favorite judges are leaving. Did their feeling toward two specific bands play a role in this? I get why my father is stepping out of it, but I still don't know why Cristel decided to leave us too. I take a deep breath, meeting my dad's eyes. 

"I get it. You have responsibilities. And I will feel better if you stay at home with them," and I truly mean it. 

"Thank you for understanding" he leaves a kiss on my head before returning to the lasagna. 

I still have to go to the gallery, so this does not give me another option. I have to text TJ about this. Does he know his mom is leaving the jury? Did he react well to this? I will never know if I don't ask. So I take my phone, typing a message while I walk to my job. 

TJ's POV

I have a reunion with the guys in about an hour. Marty wanted to talk about the song for this round of the Battle. And Jonah wanted to show us one he has been working on. We had to adjust the hour of our meeting to match Jonah's new schedule now that he works in Gen's store. At first, he did not want to tell us, but one day Paul and I had to give her some cake their mother prepared, and that is how we found out about it. But right now, I have enough time to spend with my mom. She wants to invite Cyrus to have dinner this week since my grandparents want to know him as soon as possible. We have been dating for some months, but they make it look like we are already engaged. I enter the living room, find her with some boxes, and I am sure this has nothing to do with the Battle, so I surprise her with a hug and a kiss on the cheek. 

"What is all this about? Did Andi send you something for the Battle?" I take a look at the clear mess in front of us.

"Oh no, honey. Actually, I am leaving the jury... I have to help your grandparents. They are moving out of Shadyside" she sighs but still manages to give me a warm smile. 

"Out of Shadyside? Why? What is wrong with this place?" what could possibly be wrong with our home?

"They don't want to be here. This place reminds them of... of your uncle," 

There are those words... almost a year later, and it still hurts. I can feel how my heart breaks a little whenever I remember it. I recall everything so well... how my father told me about it. How much it hurt seeing my mom like that, and of course, how my first panic attack felt. Sometimes you think you are finally over it. And then things like these make your heart race, and breathing correctly becomes impossible. But I won't say that to my mother... I only nod to her words and offer to help her, even though I don't want to do it. I don't want this to be true... I don't want them to be away from here because that still hurts them. I only want to help everyone to feel better. 

"Is it Cyrus? What did he tell you? Your grandparents really want to meet him before... you know..." she says the moment my phone indicates a new message. 

"He wants to meet them too. We only need the date" I let a weak smile and a white lie come out. But I read the messages, and they are not from my boyfriend. Apparently, Andi wants to talk to me at the gallery. 

Cyrus' POV

The tragic life of Cyrus Goodman, a man who wanted to become a playwright but didn't enjoy staying the whole day at the theater, planning and rehearsing with the entire team... I'd be lying if I said that I hate this. I love it, actually. But sometimes it becomes tiring. CeCe and I have been here for more hours than we would admit. And the poor Blue had to come here right after school. We decided to take a break... a long one. So, I am sharing some carrots with Blue. She is curious about all the papers I have in my briefcase. There is nothing to hide. Except for the original lyrics I wrote for the musical. The ones I promised Joseph to change. That is why Bowie and Paul have been helping me. 

"What are these?" she shows me those papers. 

"Those are the original lyrics of your main song, I wrote it when I made the script, but it's not a good one. That's why your brother and Bowie fixed it," I say as neutral as I can. I don't want her to see me freaking out because of this. 

"If this is the original, then it is great. You should believe more in the songs you create," 

"Do you really think they are great?" there is something in my voice and I know she noticed. She always notices. 

"Yeah, you have a talent for writing too. Maybe you can come and write with The Rose Ladies..." she looks at me with a playful smile. 

"Thanks for the offer, but I think I'll stick to what I have right now," and that means writing my little songs for my not-so-little musicals. 

"If you insist... but I was not lying, Cyrus. This song is great,"  

And just like that, our break is over. Blue goes back to the stage to rehearse a song with the woman who will play her best friend. A period drama musical is what we have right here. And yes, it is a possibility that Pride and Prejudice influenced me. But I could not resist the idea of it. CeCe and I take a seat to appreciate the performance, and they start. I can imagine the beautiful dresses they will wear and the makeup. How great the choreography will fit everything. And of course, the story. The romance in every word Blue recites after this song with her character's best friend. This musical is getting better. And now, thanks to her, I might want to not change the song she read a few minutes ago. 

Jonah's POV

Another day in the store is about to end. Rowan and I are preparing everything for the next day since today we can leave early thanks to Gen. She has an important meeting and does not want us to stay more than planned. But between all of this and what I talked about with Marty. There is something that I still cannot get out of my mind: why does Rowan look so surprised every time I hug her? Well, I have some theories, but the one we both agree on is that she might have a crush on me. And that is something I don't want. She is a good person and an incredible bassist, but that would probably not work. But I don't want to have that awkward conversation with her. So we have a plan. I'm going to keep hugging her and see her reaction. If it does not change, I will say something discouraging to her. 

She comes back with some clothes we have to fold, and I smile at her. If she actually has a crush on me... I don't know what we are going to do. I sigh, knowing it's time to start with the plan. I asked her about the Battle and what kind of coffee she would like to drink tomorrow morning. When she responds, offering to bring the coffee herself, I hug her, thanking her for being so nice. And yeah, there is that expression again. But before I can even open my mouth, she starts.

"Jonah... there is something I have to tell you..." am I scared? Maybe. 

"What is it?" I think I just let my nervous voice tone out. 

"The thing is... I don't like hugs... that is why I look so surprised when you do it," 

"Oh, I thought..." now I can't even... I want to hide. Am I wearing clown clothes? 

"What? That I had a crush on you?" she jokes. 

"Actually, yeah..." 

"Oh, uhm... that is awkward" she smiles. "You are handsome, but not my type..."

"Oh, that's great... you are not mine either," we are better off as friends anyway. 

"Great" she looks back at the clothes. 

Well, I was wrong. But I don't have a type either. Well, she could be my type, and I wouldn't even notice. But at least we could clean everything. She does not have a crush on me. Now I definitely won't hug her the way I used to. I start folding my section, thinking about the song we prepared for this round. And how wrong Marty and I were. 

Andi's POV

At the gallery, we brainstorm how to replace my dad and TJ's mom. But as you can imagine, we do not have a single idea. I texted TJ thirty minutes ago, and there is no sign of him. Maybe he had a practice with the guys, or he just wanted some time alone, I don't know. I know nothing about him or the jury of the Battle. We need a solution quickly, the next round is in a few days. How are we passing this test? We have no idea. Amber keeps sharing glances with Libby, and Walker stares at his hands. This team has a lot of work to do. I was about to stand up and walk around the place when one decides to speak. 

"Why not work only with The Renaissance Boys?" Walker says hesitantly. 

"Are you sure that will work?" Amber asks him with a tired look on her face. 

"Yeah. They are the ones taking one of the bands on tour around the country, right?" 

"That is actually a good point," I say, looking at three of them. "That would be their choice. Only their choice," 

"Right..." Amber looks at us in confusion. 

"Let me tell The Renaissance Boys" he grabs his car keys. "Libby, do you want to come?" 

She nods, and then they both leave the gallery. Amber approaches me with a smile. I stare at her, she is so beautiful... and I know I have to tell her. My best friends have been telling me to finally ask her for something formal. And right now I want to do it. I feel confident enough to ask her. I take a few steps forward, seeing her face perfectly. We are really close to each other. 

“Amber...” I start, almost whispering. 

She nods, slowly when I call her name. We can feel each other's breaths. Her eyes go from meeting mine to my lips. I try to speak, but nothing comes out. Her eyes go back to mine. And I could get lost in this moment just by seeing that gorgeous blue. 

"Andi? I got your text" TJ's voice breaks our moment,  and we both turn to him. He does not seem to get what happened. 

"TJ..." I smile at him. "Yeah, uhm, I wanted to talk about your mom, but we already figured out what to do with the jury. You can... go back..." 

"That is great... I guess I'll go to Jonah's..." I have never seen TJ as confused as he is right now. 

Thank you, TJ Kippen. For ruining my moment with the woman I want to have a relationship with. Amber checks her phone after that awkward conversation between TJ and me. Now I know the moment is gone. Or maybe it was not the right time yet. 

Jonah's POV

"I am an idiot, and you are an idiot too," I say as soon as I see Marty sitting on the floor with Paul. 

"What? What did I do now?" he puts Sandwich apart.

"She does not have a crush on me" I know there is that look on my face. The one they never like to see. 

"Who?" Paul asks us, clueless about the situation. 

"Rowan," Marty responds. 

"You thought Rowan had a crush on you? Dude, you could just ask me... and I could ask Blue about it," his words, and deep voice, made me realize how I could manage the situation... instead of speculating with Marty. 

"Thank you, Paul, but I do not want to talk about it" I sigh. "I don't even like her in that way. And when I thought she had a crush on me... I panicked," 

We don't say another word since TJ enters the room, and judging by the look on his face, he is not having a good day. He stands behind his keyboard, so Marty grabs his bass, Paul walks up to his drums, and I grab my guitar. Without saying a word, we wait for him to start. But he seems to be waiting for one of us to do it instead. I turn to Paul, and he gets what my glance means. We end up playing the song we have prepared for the Battle. And it turns out to be better than I imagined. I hope we can play like this when we have to... I don't know what happened to him. But if this energy makes him play and sing like that, we have a place earned for the next round. 

When we finish the song, he still does not say a word. Marty starts talking about Buffy, and Paul does not get his eyes off his phone. I am the only one who is actually listening to our bassist. I don't want to be mean, but I interrupt Marty to ask TJ if he is alright. Then he tells us the news he received almost two hours ago. And I have no idea what to say to him. 

"What are you planning to do?" Marty asks him. 

"I don't know. Maybe stay at Amber's until I digest this whole thing," he does not sound convinced. 

"You can text us if you want our company too," I tell him, meeting his eyes and giving him a tiny smile. 

"And if you need it, you can also stay at my house" Paul finally pulls his phone away. 

"Thank you, guys" he tries to smile. 

And for the rest of the hour, he wanted to practice the songs we prepared for the pizzeria. And I can tell you we have pretty good ones. 

Cyrus' POV

I walk around the place, trying to get everything done before starting another scene with Blue and her love interest. It has been a tiring day, and we are not even close to ending this. My body asked for some coffee, so I offered Blue to come with me as CeCe kept talking to Bowie. That is how we are now waiting for our coffee. I tell her more about the characters, but she is more interested in the other songs I wrote. Don't get me wrong, I want to tell her everything but I am not sure if that is actually a great idea... one song can be good and the rest not. So what Cyrus Goodman does in this situation? I avoid it with another question. And in this case, I ask her about her new hairstyle. She dyed her hair again. But this time, she did it for her role. 

"I am sure they did not have a mix of black and blonde hair back in that day" she nods to her words, making it sound like a serious matter. 

"You are right" I smile. "But I'll miss that style," 

"Well, I am sure my parents love this new style. This is the Blue they always wanted," she raises her eyebrows. 

Our coffee is ready, and we take a seat for a few minutes before going back to work. She had a band practice twenty minutes ago. But since the rehearsal extended a little, she had to text her friends to wait for her. But I think we are almost over for today. I was about to show her another song when someone caught her attention to them. When I turn to see who it is, I find my boyfriend standing there. Blue takes her coffee with her and gives us some time alone. I do not want to ask him what is wrong because his face clearly tells you something is wrong. But just like we did before we started dating, I wait for him to tell me instead of asking. 

"My grandparents are moving out of Shadyside," he finally speaks. "I don't know what to feel... they lived here for a long time... but now..."

"It's okay to be confused about it," I keep my answers short. 

He sighs loudly before laying his face on the table. "By the way, they want to meet you," 

"Oh..." I did not see that one coming.

That is the only word I manage to say. I want to meet his grandparents, but it does feel strange. They are moving out of this city, and I will meet them before they leave... I know this is important to him, so I run a hand through his hair. 

"It sounds great" I smile unconsciously and am aware that does not see me.

Buffy's POV

Rowan and I play a game on her phone to kill some time before Blue arrives. But I cannot stop thinking about Jane and her secret. She did not want to talk about it, and I asked her a few times only. But I get it, I didn't tell anybody about Marty before I was sure of my feelings. And now I am. Jane's case is different since she knows she has a crush on him, but what stops her is Blue. Our friend,  our guitarist, and his sister. 

"Buffy, you better know what you are doing because you are missing many notes!" Rowan says as she tries to get back her phone. 

"Sorry, I'll focus" I won't let that phone go. I like to win, it feels great and this game is so easy, but my thoughts are getting in my way and distracting me.

"Jane, do you want to play a song? I swear this is the easiest game" she smiles at the redhead sitting in front of us. 

"I am not good at games," she replies shyly. 

I was about to say something when Blue enters the room, stealing looks. She looks the same... but with black hair... all black. Rowan is the first to stand up and take a closer look at our friend. Jane and I exchange glances before following her. Once we are in front of Blue, she stares at us confused. Does she know how her hair looks or...?

"What happened to you?" Rowan is the first one to talk. 

"What do you mean?" Blue responds. 

"Your hair..." Jane says softly. 

"It's black!" I add. 

"Oh... yeah, it is. Do you guys like it?" she smiles at us. 

"Sorry, I don't get it. Is this Blue or Darcy Kim?" Rowan is still shocked by her best friend's new look. 

"Probably Darcy, but still Blue" she nods, still smiling. "Are we going to practice the song Rowan picked since you waited so long for me to come, or do you prefer to keep talking about my hair?" 

"Practice!" the three of us say in unison. 

We walk up to our instruments to finally play the song. But before we actually started, I tried to ask Jane about the Paul thing, but she told me that we would talk about it later. So, I waited until Blue started with her guitar. The song turned out pretty well. I never thought The Rose Ladies would play this kind of song... but I like it. Just wait until the next round. I grab my phone after the song, and I find some interesting messages from the Good Hair Crew chat. I guess this will be a long night. 

Chapter Text

Cyrus' POV

After a day at work with CeCe, now I am on my way to the battle of the bands. Buffy and I have been talking about some serious issues with Andi. She looks too tired and could use a break from the battle and sleepless nights courtesy of her little brother. But there is only one little thing that stops us from our plan, and yes, it is Buffy's schedule. She is so busy with her classes and the band. So I need to look for another person to help me with this. Honestly, we all have many things to do, but I always manage to make time for the stuff I want to, and I can only think of one person to ask for such a favor. I walk up to Amber and Walker. They look so focused on their job, but still, take some time to greet me and ask about the musical. Apparently, Walker has a big surprise for the battle. We don't know what it is, but he says it will be incredible. 

I look around the place and find the person I was looking for. She is standing next to Fire Bite's and Search's guitarists, looking at something on her phone. I walk up to them, hesitating to approach, but as soon as she sees me and I smile awkwardly at her, she excuses herself with her new friends and meets me not so near them. I ask her first how are things going on with her parents. This might not be my best idea, but I have a plan. She is honest with me things are not well between them. Maybe this is the opportunity to tell her about my idea. 

"What if I help you to not think about that?" I say, hoping she does not take this the wrong way. 

"Well, you just asked me about it... but tell me what you have in mind," 

"I want to organize a party for Andi. She just looks so stressed out" I make a short pause. "Not a party, party. Something not that big,"

"And you want me to organize it with you?" she looks surprised. 

"Yes. This could be good for you too, you get to spend time with your friend and not think about you know what," I say the last part barely audible to anybody around us.

"I don't know, Cyrus. Are you sure Andi wants a party-no-party?"

"Come on, Iris. She loves parties" I give her a small smile. "But if you don't want to, it's fine. I'll ask Paul instead" 

"No, it sounds great. Can I ask my friends..." she turns to the guitarists. "To help us too?" 

Is it a good idea? I do not know them, but I like making new friends. And that will help Iris to feel better and welcome to our big friend group. She has been too occupied with her stuff that we barely see her... I meet her eyes and with a smile, I agree with her. She smiles at me and then asks me to go with her so I can meet her two friends. And that is what I do. 

Buffy's POV

"Please, Blue just hurry. Buffy wants to be there in ten minutes!" Rowan says for the fifth time. 

"I never said that..." I turn to Jane. 

"I know..." the redhead meets my eyes. 

Blue has been in the bathroom for about twenty minutes, and Rowan really wants to get to the battle early. She keeps her discussion with her best friend through the door. Jane and I give them their space now that they are both using a foreign language to communicate... or fight, I am not sure. I follow Jane to the stairs, and we both take seats on them. I check my phone and find some messages from Cyrus. He wants to throw Andi a party that is not a party. I wanted to help until I remembered my schedule, and the illusion broke right in front of my eyes. But in the messages, he tells me that Iris and some of her friends agreed to help him with it. And that is great. Now I do not feel guilty for not having time to do this for my best friend. 

"Hey... do you want to talk about that?" I put my phone in my pocket, turning to Jane. 

"No..." she stares at her shoes. "Maybe... I do not know what to say about it. It just happened" 

"Yeah, I get that. But why do you think it's the end of the world?" I truly want to get what is going on with her feelings. Damn it, I feel like Cyrus and TJ now, wanting to help others with their romance stuff. 

"His sister is my friend and bandmate... it does not feel right," 

"Well, Pau-" I lower my tone. "Paul is a great guy, a weird and super fan of Big Time Rush one, but he is great,"

"I know that. I think it's cute how much he loves that band" she smiles. "And he is so smart and fun to be with. And his laugh is-"

We hear Rowan's steps approaching us, so Jane does not say anything else. I was so close to finally trying to understand her feelings for my friend. Our bassist sits between us and lets out a big sigh. I put my head on her shoulder, and Jane passes her hand through her hair. We hear Blue's voice calling for us. We walk up to the door again, waiting for her to come out. 

"Sorry, I had an accident..." she finally opens the door. "I might need a new pair of pants," 

"The blood will give them the look for the song," Rowan tells her, smiling. 

"Shut up, Rowan" Blue playfully pushes her. 

"I have a pair, come on" Jane takes her hand. 

Rowan and I end up getting everything in the car. We wait for our friends while we play some games. After everything that had happened in these last thirty minutes, I did not notice the text Marty sent me. Now that we agreed on another date, the responsibility is on me. I have to decide where to go, and I already did, but I want to give him some time to focus on the battle. 

TJ's POV

Jonah, Marty, and I are checking up on some of the stuff we brought for today's round. Gen told us she'd be late, and we don't want to start without her. I start singing my lines from the song. I don't want to forget them all. As Marty joins my little practice, we see Cyrus and Iris approaching us. Looking a little suspicious. I smile at the sight of my boyfriend. He looks tired but still handsome, and Iris looks as beautiful as always. Actually, I have not seen her lately. She told Amber she had a project to work on. We wanted to meet her at my house and bake something, then watch a marathon of Amber's favorite movies. Marty greets them, and Jonah joins us as soon as he listens to the hey! coming from our friend's mouth. They start telling us about a plan they have that involves Andi. We carefully listen until we can finally ask some questions. 

"A party?" Jonah and I ask in unison. 

"It's not a party! And you don't have to play if you don't want to. Fire Bite is also going... and Search too!" Iris explains. 

"We can take turns," Jonah suggests. 

"Oh, that is a great idea" Cyrus turns to Iris. 

"It sounds like a great party already" Marty nods to them. 

"It’s not a party!" they now say in unison. 

"A get-together!" Paul says, standing next to Iris. 

"Or a social gathering" Blue stands next to Cyrus. They share glances knowing what they did. 

"Stop quoting Big Time Rush, guys" I stare at them, trying not to laugh. 

"It's not my fault! He made me watch that episode last night!" 

"You love that episode, Darce," 

Blue turns to him, opening big her eyes. As if she wants to tell him to shut up and stop trying to say her real name, but Paul looks kind of distracted these days, so he keeps messing this up. At this point, we all pretend we never heard her name. Well, they do that. I already knew her name. Once again, we see the Kim siblings having a small argument but letting that go a few seconds later. The whole band agrees on playing at the party, sorry, the social gathering they planned for Andi. So, Cyrus and I walk around the place holding hands. He is telling me about his week at work. He talks with so much passion about it, and I love the way his eyes sparkle every time. I could listen to him for the rest of my life and never get bored. 

"Do you want to match our outfits tomorrow?" I ask him. 

"Do you read minds now?" he lets out a small laugh. 

Andi's POV

Walker keeps talking about the lights for today's round. And I have to listen to every word while my head is clearly in another place. Since I am staring at Cyrus and TJ holding hands and looking so cute together, making me want to be in that place with Amber, but I couldn't. Maybe that is a sign to keep waiting. Today I need to focus on the battle. I give this my whole energy, and I don't regret it. This is the biggest project I ever had, and that is too much to say. I had made stuff before, but nothing like a battle of the bands. I want to be proud of myself for pulling this up. 

Once I finish checking up the lights, I walk around the place to find Amber and Libby talking to Iris. I was about to approach them when Amber walks up to me smiling... and taking me away from greeting my friends. She leads me near the stage and asks if I checked this place. I won't, so she offers to do it with me. This is not strange at all. She likes to spend time together, even if that means doing all of these tasks with me. Now you get it? I have to confess, properly, to her. 

"What are you doing tomorrow after work?" she asks. 

"Probably stay at home with my mom and Kai..." I take a deep breath. "Or help my dad at Red Rooster. I haven't decided which one is funnier," 

"Do you want to go and watch a movie? If you think that is funnier," there is something in the tone she uses that makes me smile as I shake my head. 

"I like that idea. Which movie would you want to watch?"

"I'll leave that up to you" she takes a few steps forward until we are face to face. 

"Great..." I say, nodding and with my mouth unable to say something else. 

We are interrupted by one of the bands. They were looking for Amber, so she can help them with their instruments. I leave them alone and walk away from the stage. Once I am alone, I close my eyes and let out a big sigh. We can't have a single moment. Now a band asks me for my help, well, they said advice. So I listen to their concerns. Apparently, the news of the changes we made for the judges spread too quickly. I try to find Walker, but when I see him standing by the stage, he asks me with that smile where I have been, and then he hands me a microphone. For how long have I been looking for him? I don't say anything and try to fix my hair as soon as I can before walking up with him to the center of the stage, announcing the changes on our panel and our first band of the day. 

Iris' POV

Our plan looks better and better every time we finish talking to someone. Or at least when I do it. The last time I saw Cyrus, he and TJ walked around the place. So I do not know if he talked to anybody else about this. I meet with Maddie and Emma before Fire Bite goes on stage. They were totally on board to play at the party, and now No Exit will also play. And who knows? The Rose Ladies can also play if they want it. But that will be Cyrus' job since he works with Blue. I look at my phone and check the messages my best friends sent almost two hours ago. I have not met with them for weeks, but in a video call, Amber told TJ and me that she has a big crush on Andi, what a surprise. She has been asking us for help all the time since then. And she is determined to confess to her, but it seems to be interrupted every time she tries. I am not the best one to give her advice, I'm still in the same place with my small crush on Walker. 

"So, let me see if I get what you said" Emma wants me to repeat the plan, again. "The party-not-party is tomorrow night, and you want Search to play, right?" 

"Yes, that is what I just told you" I smile at her. 

"Sorry, I am nervous because of the round" 

"You'll be great," I tell her, placing a hand on her arm. 

"Oh my, it's our turn" Maddie blinks a few times, and then she meets our eyes. "I'll see you at the party tomorrow. We can use this as an opportunity to find people to join our magazine project," 

We both nod to her words and wish her good luck. Emma has to join her band, so I go and watch Fire Bite's performance. They picked a great song: Power by Little Mix. And one of my favorites, I must say. I feel someone's hand on my shoulder. I turn to find Cyrus. He tells me that The Rose Ladies also said yes to play at the party-not-party, or as Blue called it: social gathering. I have the feeling that tomorrow night will be great...

Buffy's POV

"We can sing that new song we wrote the other day," Rowan says excitedly. 

"That is not a bad idea" Blue smiles at her best friend. 

Cyrus just asked us to play at the party he told me about. Rowan was the first to say yes, so the rest could not say no. But we are already attending it, so it was kind of obvious that would happen eventually. And we are excited about it, the songs we wrote recently are good. But now, we are waiting for our turn to play. Every band played incredible songs. But there is no pressure since we are not an official band... and we don't have any hopes of making it to the very last round and winning this thing... or getting second place. Blue draws our attention once again, this time to tell us some words before we go and play the song. 

"Let's have fun as we always do," she starts. "And no matter what, I am proud of you, guys," 

"I can't believe it. We will play a different version of the Pretty Little Liars' intro," Jane says, looking excitedly at us. 

I smile at Jane while Rowan avoids hugging her, and Blue puts an arm around her. Then we walk to the right stage to get a better look at the band playing right now. And to be prepared when it is our turn. As I enjoy the song they are playing, I hear Andi's voice behind us. She is about to go on stage to introduce us. Walker is next to her, so he waves his hand as he shoots us a smile. Amber and Libby are behind them, making sure that everything is in place. Once the band ends their song, they walk away from us with smiles, ready to continue with their work. I turn to Jane, who is looking for someone before we enter the stage. But without any luck, we have to go and perform our song. We follow Blue as always and take place with our instruments. I am in charge of starting, so they wait for my sign this time. I start the song, and Jane is the first to follow me, then Blue and Rowan join us. With a strong start, Rowan leans into her microphone. 

[Rowan]: Got a secret | Can you keep it? | Swear, this one you'll save | Better lock it in your pocket | Taking this one to the grave | If I show you, then I know you | Won't tell what I said | 'Cause two can keep a secret | If one of them is dead 

[Jane]: Why do you smile | Like you've been told a secret | Now you're telling lies | 'Cause you have sworn to keep it | But no one keeps a secret | No one keeps a secret 

[Buffy]: Why when we do our darkest deeds | Do we tell? | They burn in our brains | Become a living hell | 'Cause everybody tells | Everybody tells

[All]: Got a secret | Can you keep it? | Swear, this one you'll save | Better lock it in your pocket | Taking this one to the grave | If I show you, then I know you | Won't tell what I said | 'Cause two can keep a secret | If one of them is dead 

[Blue]: Look into my eyes | Now you're getting sleepy | Are you hypnotized | By secrets that you're keeping? | I know what you're keeping | I know what you're keeping 

[All]: Got a secret | Can you keep it? | Swear, this one you'll save | Better lock it in your pocket | Taking this one to the grave | If I show you, then I know you | Won't tell what I said | 'Cause two can keep a secret | If one of them is dead 

Honestly, dressing up for this song was a challenge, but there is nothing The Rose Ladies can't do. It had to go with this theme, and Rowan found the perfect clothes. She is the one who chose the song since she is a big fan of that show. And adapting this to a rock version was a difficult job, but we made it. And now the result is something I adore. As we keep playing the song, I don't lose focus on the drums, but the second I look at my friends, a smile slips from my mouth. I never imagined how important they would be to me. When Rowan hits the last If one of them is dead, we finish and hear the applause. 

Andi's POV  

The bands pass and pass to play. Walker and I keep the smiles just like the first time. The energy is still there, and Libby and Amber keep getting excited every time we finish introducing the bands. But I cannot help but feel worried about my family. They are in my mind the whole time. I can't even pay attention to the songs. Walker tries to get my attention because we are about to go and announce the next band. I stared at him for a few seconds before understanding what was going on. I shake my head, trying to snap out of whatever is happening to me, and walk next to him on the stage. 

"Are you guys enjoying the bands?!" Walker is the first one to speak, as usual. 

"You better wait because we have three bands left," I say, following his energy. But I am not sure what I just said. 

"Exactly, please welcome Aura!" he makes this intervention the shortest we ever had. 

We leave the stage once the band takes its place. Amber and Libby are there, looking at us with worried expressions, and I know it is my fault. 

"Sorry, I will focus... I'm just a little tired," I say, closing my eyes for a second. 

"You know, Amber can finish this round with me if you prefer taking a break" Walker places a hand on my shoulder. 

"I'm fine. Let's go, we have another band to announce after this" I smile. 

The one trait you can say is typical of the Good Hair Crew is being stubborn enough to work even when you are too tired and clearly need a break... and a nap. But as I said, we don't do that often, so I look for something to drink and get ready for the next band, even though I want to tell Amber to finish this for me, but I can't do that. This was my idea, and I had to stay there. 

Paul's POV

We wait for our turn, Marty and Jonah are doing some breathing exercises while TJ lets Gen fix his hair, and I am staring at my sister's band. They had been doing a great job these rounds, and today's song was a total surprise. I never thought I could be this proud of her. I mean, we fight, like every sibling out there, but I always thought she was only focused on her acting, but now she can add music to it. With our parents, you needed to find your thing. Something to make you stand out. Gen practiced figure skating for many years, and she even went to some competitions when she was younger. She is my parents' greatest pride. Blue had her acting since she was a child. And yes, she admired Sharpay from High School Musical. She loved her love for plays. That did not make our father happy since he wanted her to become a doctor, like my mom. And well, when it comes to me, I always loved the drums. Music is what I am good at. And my mom loves it, but my father prefers his only son to follow in his steps and study physics. Sometimes thinking about this makes me want to leave Shadyside and live with my grandparents instead, where I can be close to my Jo. But I can't do it, I love this place so much and the band, my best friends, and the life I already built here. 

Jonah catches our attention with the magic words: band reunion. We leave everything we are doing and join him in a small circle. 

"Another round and another opportunity to get closer to our dream, guys" he takes a moment to look at us. "Please, don't forget how far we are right now. This is what matters,"

"Let's enjoy the song" Marty nods. 

TJ pulls us into a hug before we head to the stage after listening to Walker's voice. I am the last one in our line. I was about to follow Marty when a well-known voice called my name. 

"Good luck, Paul!" Jane is there, waving to me with a smile. I almost tripped over my own foot before answering her.

"Thanks, Jane!" I tell her, quite sure that my face is red. 

I finally make it to the drums, getting a look from Jonah. I apologize, and we wait for Marty to start with the bass. The song, one of Jonah's favorites, has the kind of rhythm we want for our next songs. Marty wanted to work on a series of Halloween-themed songs. We don't know why. I prepare my sticks right when the intro starts. 

[Jonah]: Some days you're the only thing I know | Only thing that's burning when the nights grow cold | Can't look away, can't look away, beg you to stay

[TJ]: Sometimes you're a stranger in my bed | Don't know if you love me or you want me dead | Push me away, push me away, then beg me to stay

[Marty &  Paul ]:  Call me in the morning to apologize  |  Every little lie gives me butterflies  | Something in the way you're looking through my eyes | Don't know if I'm gonna make it out alive

[Jonah]: Fight so dirty but your love so sweet | Talk so pretty but your heart got teeth | Late night devil put your hands on me | And never never never ever let go

[All]: Fight so dirty but your love so sweet | Talk so pretty but your heart got teeth | Late night devil put your hands on me | And never never never ever let go

[Marty]: Some days you're the best thing in my life | Sometimes when I look at you I see my wife | Then you turn into somebody I don't know | And you push me away, push me away

[ Paul  & TJ]:  Call me in the morning to apologize  |  Every little lie gives me butterflies  | Something in the way you're looking through my eyes | Don't know if I'm gonna make it out alive

Playing the drums to this song feels good. I try to follow the guys' voice when my, not many, parts end. Jonah sings the most, so I do not have to worry about him forgetting a line as TJ usually does in our practices. We reach the end of the song and return to wait for the eliminated band of tonight. A few minutes later, Andi and Walker are on the stage, ready to say which band is out. And it takes us all by surprise.

"Aura!" they both say on the microphones. 

Jonah turns to us, clearly relieved. "We made it!" 

"The musical journey continues," I tell them with a genuine smile. 

"We will never make you stop quoting Big Time Rush, right?" TJ asks me. 

"That is part of his personality," Marty smiles. 

"Hey, who wants pizza?" I tell them, trying to change the subject, but knowing perfectly how much Jonah wants to celebrate. 

Chapter Text

Marty's POV

So, today is the party/get-together/social gathering for Andi, and we still cannot decide on the two songs we plan to play. TJ and I finished a song a week ago, and Jonah suggested playing that one. That song is not romantic, so it can be a good surprise coming from us, without counting Paul's one that we sang at the battle. The problem here is the cover Iris wants us to play. We have different ideas about it. TJ wants to play a Taylor Swift song. We all know he wants to do that for Cyrus, but Jonah wants to play a 5 Seconds Of Summer song. Do I even need to say who Paul wants to cover? The answer is easy, Big Time Rush. And I want to play one that reminds me of Buffy. I am not planning anything, but it can be nice doing that. 

I close my eyes once I hear Jonah and TJ arguing over the same topic. Paul is sitting next to me, holding a sign with Big Time Rush written on it. I take a deep breath before standing up from my seat and giving my friends the look, same one Jonah uses. And it works. They shut up for a solid minute. Then Paul opens his mouth just to tease them. 

"No, Paul," TJ turns to him. 

"We can think of another cover..." Jonah smiles. "A 5sos one," 

"Confetti Falling is the correct one. Come on!" 

I'm not sure what I should do. And it's too late to ask someone for help. The party starts in a few hours. Well, with Cyrus you never know what is going on, and the party might have started. The arguing appears again, and now I do not have enough patience to keep listening to them. So, I try to decide on one of the covers in my mind. Using my old one: the first one to get to eighteen. 

"Fine, we will sing Confetti Falling," I finally say, staring at their faces.

"Yes!" Paul hugs me as he kisses my cheek. "Thank you, Marty!" 

"I guess we can sing that one. To make the kid happy," Jonah shares glances with TJ.

"The kid is already an adult... but yeah, we can sing it,"

Paul now wants us to get everything ready for the party. He walks around the room, taking everything he thinks we can use. As for TJ, he's texting Cyrus. While Jonah tells us a story from work. When he finishes, I start with something funny that happened to me in cooking class.

Buffy's POV

As Cyrus asked us, we arrived at a reasonable hour. But we are clearly not the first ones. And no, I am not talking about him, Iris and Andi. This looks like a party that started like two hours ago, and we just made it. I turn to Rowan, but she is as confused as I am. We try to mingle, just in case we see a familiar face. A guy asks me to dance in a small circle he created, and well, who am I to say no to such a thing? Dancing is my thing. So, I do what I have to. Dance. My friends stay close enough to see me, but not too much to be the next ones. Between the music and my, not to brag, ability to do it, I get out of the circle soon, joining my friends. 

"I thought it was a social gathering," Blue says as we admire the party. 

"Yeah... I don't think it is a social gathering anymore," I tell her before I spot my best friend talking to some people I haven't seen in my life. "There is Andi!" 

I turn to the girls, and they agree to go and find Paul. I just need his advice tonight. There is a stupid thing I want to do, and I don't want to actually do that, so I need his wise advice... and Andi's. I wait a few seconds until I finally see how safe it is to get close to her. She is listening with a smile, but when she hears my voice, she looks at me like a fairy godmother who just appeared to save her. She excuses herself and follows me to a table with lots of food. There we find Paul, about to eat a very suspicious brownie. Which he puts down after Andi warns him what it might contain. 

"I was looking for you two... to talk about something... important," I start. 

"What is so important?" Andi asks me, clueless about why I would need her help. 

"Marty... and a..." 

"Midnight kiss!" Paul says, completely excited about the idea. 

"Actually... yeah, a kiss," 

"I knew it! Do you want me to buy you some time alone? Where are you taking him?" he starts as he again takes the brownie. 

"Paul, those have..." Andi turns to him. "You know..."

"Who would bring such a thing? I just wanted a normal brownie!" 

"Guys, I need your help, remember?" I say, using that tone. 

They nod and start to give me some ideas. Is it a good plan to kiss him tonight? I am not sure, but I really like him... and I have been waiting for this.

Cyrus' POV

There are more people in this place than planned. And I am freaking out. I spent twenty minutes looking for Iris... and Andi. I wanted to know if she was having a good time, and she is. Now Iris and I are staring at the not-a-social-gathering-anymore. And I'm not going to lie, this could lead me to a panic attack... and we don't want that to happen. We have Iris and, of course, me as your hosts; Andi is the woman of the hour. This is for her. We also have Gen as the DJ tonight, well, actually she and a friend. And Maddie worked on a playlist while the bands are not playing. Even CeCe is here with some people from the musical. And I don't even remember inviting them. Now, do you understand why I am freaking out? 

I turn to Iris. She looks as worried as I am. I mean, this is her house. And I can't think of saying anything better than... "Where did all these people come out?" the fear and confusion in my eyes are evident. 

"I do not know. I invited a few friends, and that's all!" 

"Who could it invite these many people?" 

We stare into each other's eyes, trying to find an answer to this. But the more we look at each other, the more we freak out. There is nothing worse than not knowing what is happening. Iris takes a deep breath, convincing herself that this is not so bad. 

"Did you tell anybody else?" I might know where this is going. 

"Yeah, I told my... mom..." there is the answer. "Great..." I close my eyes, taking a deep breath. "It's alright... at least Andi is having fun," 

Cyrus Goodman and his big mouth. Why did I even tell my mom about this? I could just say I have rehearsal. Nice, Cyrus. I close my eyes again. Now I need to convince myself. This is great, it is a cool party. Party, not a social gathering. Oh, Cyrus. 

"Why don't you go and look for TJ?" she suddenly says. "I'll take care of this for a few songs. Just go and dance with your boyfriend... you deserve a break too," 

"Thank you, Iris. You are an angel" I give her a small kiss on her cheek, leaving her alone in the kitchen. 

Amber's POV

I have been in this place for a few minutes. TJ is next to me, listening to every detail of my plan. I had a good vibe from this party, which means I am confessing. But it's not exactly that, since we had some dates before, and we almost kissed too. This is different. This is me telling her how much I like her and, you know, asking her for something formal. And to do that, I have to find her first. I spot Walker and Jonah talking near where the DJs are. And Paul is talking with Blue and Jane. Buffy is standing next to Rowan, clearly looking for someone else. But there is no sight of her, my Andi. 

It is funny how mentally I call her by many names, like my Andi. But I barely say her name when we are face to face. That is her effect on me. She leaves me speechless. But now, I am determined to tell her everything. Every little thing that I feel for her. Even if I end up saying something different... like a word... or a simple sentence. But I will tell her. 

"Tonight is the night," I tell TJ as we keep walking. 

"Good luck! I'll try to give you all the time you need" he smiles. "The band will help too," I'm not sure if that is a great idea, but I appreciate it.

"Thanks..." I let out a sigh. "I better look for her. I can't see anything from here," 

"Do you want me to go with you?" 

"No, I guess I have to do this by myself. I don't want you to be obvious if we find her," I chuckle. 

"Obvious? What do you mean by that?" I am not going to lie. He looks offended. 

"Yeah, you are terrible at acting," 

 Before he says anything else, Cyrus appears with his pretty smile and hearty eyes once he sees his boyfriend. I smile at them and leave them alone. I stop in front of some people dancing to one of my favorite songs. So, I join them. I mean, yeah, I'm looking for Andi, but I can still have fun... this is a party, after all. 

Paul's POV

Fire Bite performed their two songs already. And they were amazing. Blue was with Jane and me, but she had to leave because Buffy needed her. It looked like a beauty emergency or something like that. So, I had to think about topics to talk about with Jane. Let's just say she barely answered my questions. But I do not blame her, talking about Big Time Rush is not for everyone. I was about to ask her about her pets. The only thing my brain can think of. But instead, she asks me to dance with her when the first five seconds of one of Cyrus' favorite songs, Paper Rings, starts. And I cannot say no, so I follow her to the dancefloor. At first, I thought I was doing a great job until I turned to look at everybody else. 

"Is this how you dance to Taylor Swift?" I'm genuinely confused.

"No, but it's not about that. You dance what you feel" she smiles. "Buffy taught me that"

"She is wise, just like you," 

"You are pretty smart yourself, you know?" she takes a moment to look at me. "Don't stop dancing, Kim,"

I twirl her a few times as we laugh. And I never noticed how pretty her smile is, I can admire how she is singing and just having a good time. And by now, I already know the chorus. All I have to say is Taylor Swift is a genius. Every line of this song wants me to actually fall in love with somebody. And of course, Cyrus and TJ dancing to it, looking so in love with each other, does not help. They are the ideal form of a relationship, like my parents. 

The idea of falling in love is something never crossed my mind, even though that is the topic No Exit sings about the most. I never had the time to think about it since all I have done in my life has been study to become just like my dad. But is all of this relevant right now? We are at a  party,  and I am dancing and enjoying a good time with a great friend. So, I keep laughing and dancing with Jane until the song ends. 

Buffy's POV

"We are about to play. You know that, right?" Blue asks Rowan and me. We nod in response. "Where is Jane?" 

"I saw her dancing with..." Rowan starts.

"Someone!" I cut her words. 

Maybe those were the magic words. Because Jane appeared a few seconds later, embarrassed for being late, but with the biggest smile I have ever seen on her. This party feels like an opportunity to give us all a little bit of romance no matter what is going on. If it is unrequired, if they like each other but won't say a thing, or if they are already together. This is finding a way to pour that romantic rain and make everybody have their moment. Or did I just turn into my best friend trying to find something beautiful for this? Anyway, I follow the girls to the instruments as Iris smiles at us and asks for all the attendants' attention. With a different personality than our beloved hosts of the battle. She introduces us. I get close to the microphone to start the song. 

[Buffy]: I'm hearing all the alarms ring-a-ling | They go off every time that we're face to face

[Blue]: Why is it so hard to resist? | Temptation sweet as honey, I know it's too late

[Jane]: I feel it deep inside, I'm gonna lose the fight | Eventually, I know that I'll be crossing the line

[ Blue  & Rowan]: I try warning myself 'cause I’m in need of help |  Can't hold me back, already standing at the edge  |  Out of control 

[All &  Rowan ]: Oh, I been caught under the spot, spot, spotlight | I wanna cave in to the dark side calling to me | The ending's obvious, I know it's not right |  I can't stop me, can't stop me

I have to say how proud I am of all of us for writing such a song. This one took us a little longer than the previous one, and the rhythm is different but in a good way. We end up with it, and eventually the cover. Chosen by Jane, we sing an ABBA song, Lay All Your Love On Me. Once we finish our whole performance, I can find Marty there, smiling at us. So, I take the chance and walk up to him. 

"Hey, Marty" 

"Buffy! You were incredible as always" he is still smiling. 

"Thanks. It was just our second original song, but..." now I am smiling too.

"A great song. You guys have good ones," 

"We only have two" I do not understand why I said that. Now I want to run away from this conversation to find Andi and Paul. 

"Yeah, but they are great..." 

I was about to leave. But then, I remembered why I wanted to see him so much, but I am impulsive sometimes, and now, surrounded by these people. I walk a few steps forward. We are close enough to feel each other's breaths. I stare at his eyes for a few seconds, and he never leaves mine. The song played by the DJs is Paris In The Rain. But before I can even think about kissing him, I ask him to dance with me. And he does it. We are on the dancefloor, dancing and smiling at each other. Only following our own steps. It feels to be only us in this place. And before the song ends... and this whole feeling fades away, I do it... I put our lips together, and he does not pull me away. 

TJ's POV

It has been a while since Cyrus and I got our much-needed time alone. We danced to a few songs, one of them was Paper Rings, then we heard The Rose Ladies, and again, more dancing. I lost the guys a long time ago, and we are the next ones to play. And I even tried to text them, but I guess they are having too much fun. I turn to admire Cyrus. He is singing along to Paris In The Rain. But as soon as it ends, he comes back to earth, looking worried and with intentions of leaving me here, near the dancefloor. But I don't want him to go, so I try to catch his attention. 

"Can I please have some time alone with my boyfriend?" I try to pull him into a hug. "Before I have to go and play? Please?" 

"We just danced," he says, smiling at me but not trying to go away. 

"Well, I want to dance a thousand songs with you..." I look into his eyes. "No, I want to dance with you for the rest of my life," 

We both smile as we stare into each other's eyes. And I lean closer, looking for a kiss. As if I have never kissed him before. We were just centimeters from the other's mouth... when a well-known deep voice interrupts us. I close my eyes, giving up, and turn to him. We find the guys standing there. That is how I understand our turn to play has come. Cyrus leaves a small kiss on my lips before heading with Buffy and the rest of The Rose Ladies. 

When we finally make it to the instruments, Jonah introduces us, one by one. Then he goes to the point. The title of the two songs we are playing tonight. And like the other bands, we wanted to start with the original one. The melody starts calm and slow with Marty's voice. I try to find Cyrus between the many faces... and when I finally meet his eyes, he blows me a kiss, making me smile. 

[Marty]: I don't even know how I can talk to you now | It's not you, the you who talks to me anymore | And sure I know that sometimes it gets hard | But even with all my love what we had | You just gave it up 

[Jonah]: Thought we were meant to be | I thought that you belonged to me | I'll play the fool instead | Oh, but then I know that this is the end 

[TJ]: Congratulations, glad you're doing great | Congratulations, how are you? Okay? | How could you be so fine? I can see it in your eyes | The same look the you gave me | That kills me inside, oh 

[Jonah]: I don't even need to ask, yeah | I know you too damn well, yeah | I can see that smile and can tell that you did more than move on 

[All &  Paul ]: I hate that you're happy | I hope that you can't sleep |  Just knowing that I could be with somebody new  |  That I'd be just like you 

No Exit singing a breakup song? That is not new. But it is impressive... I mean, we don't sing a lot of these since we mainly focus on the romantic ones because half of the band is in love. So, this is a surprise for all of us, but everybody seems to be enjoying the song. And that is a good sign. 

Andi's POV

I looked for Amber the whole night and found her before No Exit started their performance. We talked about the party and how crazy it was that many people showed up when Cyrus promised it was just a small thing. Jonah said some stuff before they started. And now, we are listening to the most heartbreaking/post-breakup song you can listen to. But it is a good one, and I am not the only one who loves it. I turn to Amber, smiling at our friends' voices singing. Then I realize how much I like her. The way she looks tonight is... breathtaking. And for a few seconds, I freeze. I don't know what to do. But when she turns to me, all I can do is smile. Somehow my body tells me exactly what to do in just a few seconds. I take her hand and stare right into her eyes. 

"Are you alright?" she asks me, still smiling. But I can see it is 'a someone can see this' smile. 

"No, I just wanted to take your hand... because... I really, really like you, Amber," I start. "I like our dates... but I also want something more..." 

I tried to say something else, but the way her expression changed made me want to run away from this country, as Cyrus would say. The guys keep going. I know the song is getting to a better point for how their voices sound so great, so hurt. I try to let go of her hand, but she holds it tighter, meeting my eyes. I open my mouth when we hear TJ rapping. This song has everything. 

"I like you, Andi Mack. In all your gorgeous colors" she smiles warmly. Her beautiful hair is surrounded by party lighting. While No Exit plays the most nonromantic song making me smile a bit. 

I'm not sure if this is a sign. Our story has not been the most romantic one in the whole world. But it's ours, it's our style. And with those words, she told me how much she wanted this as much as I did. She gets closer to me, and I can feel the electricity coming from us. We are only one kiss of distance from the other. And I am the one who breaks it, feeling her soft lips with mine, smiling in the middle of it. We stare at each other once the song ends... and our kiss too. 

"This truly is a magical night..." I say, holding her hand and laughing with her. In the same way, I saw Cyrus with TJ, Buffy with Marty... and my dad with my mom. 

Chapter Text

Cyrus' POV

There have been some weird days since the party, I have not seen Andi and Buffy lately, nor talking to them. The musical is consuming all my time. And TJ is visiting me at home more than I want to admit. He is still in denial about his grandparents moving, but I cannot do anything. We didn't have that dinner he invited me to because of that. I am trying to help him as much as I can... but I also have a life. CeCe and I barely leave the theater. She is often on calls with Bex and little Kai. And today, when I finally have some free time before the next round of the battle of the bands... TJ has plans with the guys. So, I called my best friends. They were happy to meet me at my house. Andi grabbed one of my books, sitting on my desk as she only reads the notes TJ left on it. As for Buffy, she is sitting in my bed, staring at the pictures I have on the wall. Many of them are from when we were younger. I also have some with TJ and the rest of No Exit. And well, I walk around the room, waiting for them to say something. Andi texted me she had important news to share with us... and Buffy said she had some too. 

I take a deep breath and ask them to start talking about it before Andi has to leave and prepare the place for tonight's round. Buffy tells her to go first and we both give her our undivided attention. And her story did not disappoint us. Same for Buffy's... they had a great time at the party. Kissing their crushes and having their main characters' moments. But I am Cyrus Goodman. I need to say something else... to add a bit of drama or spice. 

"I can't believe you two kissed your crushes, and I could not kiss TJ once in the entire night," 

"He is already your boyfriend. Let us have our moments," Buffy says as she throws me a pillow. 

"Alright, go and have your moments. That way I can have something to write about," I take the pillow and place it back where it belongs.

"After all these years, you still write about us?" Andi asks me. 

"Of course I do. You two are my biggest inspirations," 

"I am waiting for the day you write about our friendship and not our love lives" Buffy looks at the pictures. "Who knows, maybe you can write about all of this" 

I know she is right. But somehow, those words made a click in my head. I tried writing a thriller when that could not be my thing. Suspense and making people feel scared while they read are not my thing. I like to make people feel stuff but not those. I like the simple stories. I like how TJ and I met and then became friends... and boyfriends. I like those stories, like my friendship with Andi and Buffy. I like that. I can try writing every different genre out there... but I will always come back to this... I wanted so badly to not write about romance that I did not see other possibilities. Like writing about friendship. Now I have an idea, and I don't think I will let this one go. 

Paul's POV

I am not sure if school is going better now. All I know is how much I enjoy my study sessions with Jane. We usually meet at her house or the library. Places where no one can actually see us. I don't know how that could be a problem. But she says it feels better that way. We actually just finished one of our sessions, and now I am walking to Jonah's house. After the party, everyone had their moment,  except for Jonah and me. Or maybe I had one... I am not sure, and that is not relevant right now. Jonah's father is the one who invites me to enter the house. I quickly walk to our practice room and find the guys, already waiting for me. It was five minutes late... they cannot say anything about it. I sit next to TJ, and Jonah starts the band meeting. But it is not an actual meeting since we only talk about the song we are playing tonight. And we use this time to say encouraging words to each other. A healthy band is a healthy friendship, right? 

Suddenly, I remembered something important my sister told me. Which involves the guys. You can say she likes to take care of us as a band, and she wants us to have a professional look. Before the guys leave the room, I catch their attention. 

"Something happened?" Jonah asks. 

"Yeah, Jane... Gen, Gen told me to give you guys this. She made us a Twitter account" I nod between every word after saying her name instead of my sister's. I know I said it because I was with her at the library earlier. 

They all take one of the post-its in my hand. Jonah and Marty leave the room as soon as they hear a voice telling us the food is ready. But TJ stays in front of me. He asked me about the small mistake, and all I can say is: the names are similar. What an idiot, Paul. It is not possible that I, might, have a crush on her... but I need to know something before I deny it for once and all. So, before TJ leaves too. I shoot him a question not even I was expecting. 

"How did you realize that you had a crush on Cyrus?"

He looks so surprised. But after a minute, without saying a word, he meets my eyes. 

"I don't know, you tell me. You knew it before I did" He smiles.

I smile at his words because he is right... I knew it the whole time. He pats my shoulder and tells me to go and have some food with the guys. I nod in response and see him walk away. 

"The problem is that I do not know either," I say to myself, before joining my friends in the kitchen, ready to eat some of the food Jonah's father prepared for us. 

Buffy's POV  

After leaving Cyrus' house and telling my best friends about what happened with Marty, I am on my way to Blue's, and this is the first time I am at her house with her parents there. And you might wonder why you are meeting there? Easy, Jane's parents had a party with their friends, Rowan's little brother had a soccer team reunion at their house, and my parents said no. I don't even know why but they did. So, we are stuck at Kim's house. I knock on the door and find Mrs. Kim opening it. With a smile, she tells me to come in. As soon as I enter the house, I try to find my friends, but all I get to see is Mr. Kim holding a newspaper as he walks toward the door. He smiles at me and then leaves. When I consider giving up, a familiar voice comes to save me. 

"You're here!" Blue approaches me, waving her hand. "I told my parents that we'll be in my room. Come on, the guys are waiting," 

"Sorry, I was at Cyrus'. You know. An emergency," I try to sound as neutral as possible. We go upstairs.

Once we enter her room, I see Rowan and Jane sitting in the bed. They are watching something on Rowan's phone. I greet them, making them lose all focus on whatever they were seeing. We already have everything ready for tonight, but we still need to get dressed to impress. That is why Jane brought with her the outfits her mom provided us. Blue and I are in charge of the hair and makeup. At the same time, Rowan is finding a good playlist. 

"So, were you with your boyfriend?" Rowans asks me as she plays the first song. A Harry Styles one since she is a big fan of his. 

"He is not my boyfriend..." and that is actually true.

"Yet," Blue adds. 

"We just kissed. It's not like we are getting married," 

"Still. I find it so romantic the way everything happened..." Rowan sits in front of me to start with her makeup. "You were having the moment while Blue and I ate almost all the food. A magical night, truly,"

"It could have been worse..." I start. "You could have eaten the brownies," 

"Oh my, those damn brownies!" Blue says as she styles Jane's hair. "Who even brought those?"

"I have to admit I was about to eat one of those" I am about to laugh. "But Paul appeared to save me of the humiliation that could have been," 

"And talking about Paul..." Blue turns Jane around to meet her eyes. "Why were you dancing with my brother?" she directly asks her. I see how Jane's eyes seek help, but she can't stop staring at Blue. "I noticed since then, but we were focused on Buffy, so I didn't ask," 

"We are friends too..." she finally says, barely audible to Rowan and me. 

"We have to hurry," I interrupt them. 

They nod. I notice how Rowan looks at me... she knows I know something, but I won't say a word. We have a job to do, and I have to talk to Marty. We do that a lot lately... since the kiss. But he does not seem to want to do it again. However, I finish her makeup and go to Jane's place. 

Amber's POV

Finally, the round starts with an original song from 24hrs. And it's surprisingly good. Or am I seeing everything prettier since Andi and I are dating? It even feels surreal to say it. We are finally a couple... and of course, all of our friends know about it. Iris was so excited for us, and I am sure TJ was about to cry with joy. I can even have dinner at her house and play with Kai. Her parents were not surprised at all and mine was happy about us. But we still have to be professional here, so we try to not act like a couple when we are at the gallery or at the battle of the bands. 

"Hello..." I feel Andi's hand holding mine. 

"I thought you said professional. Are even allowed to hold hands?" 

"Well, this is a small price to pay... I am dying to kiss you," 

"You are so romantic, Andi Mack," I say between small laughs. 

As we keep talking and laughing, the band finished their performance. And I have to see her leave with Walker to announce the next one. Tonight we go back to our regular schedule. And yes, that means two bands out on this round. We are getting closer to the grand finale... but first, we have a surprise for the bands. Courtesy of Walker and the great idea, he refuses to tell us until the end of tonight. So, get ready for the big news later. 

Marty's POV

We are getting ready to go on stage. Gen is fixing Paul's hair while Jonah and TJ practice their lines from the song. My song. A song I wrote before that date and then kissed Buffy. It says many things I wanted to tell her, but sometimes I am not brave enough. And the guys told me it was a good way to express my feelings. I don't know why everything feels like a mess right now. We hang out, and I definitely want to kiss her, but I do not know if she wants that. Even though she kissed me first at the party. Who knows? Maybe she regrets doing it. 

I take a deep breath before telling the guys I'll be walking a little. They don't look interested, so I accept their indifference and start walking away from them. Meeting her in the middle of my short walk. She looks so beautiful, and I want to tell her, but the right words do not find a way to come out of my mouth.

"Hey, Buffy... good luck" yeah, I said that. 

"Thanks... good luck too" she smiles as always. So beautiful, so unreachable. 

I can't say anything else because Jane approaches us hesitantly, but I let Buffy and her go. Closing my eyes once they are with the rest of their band, I put a hand on my head, trying to make my brain wake up now. Then, I feel a hand on my shoulder. 

"Are things weird between you two after the kiss?" TJ says, standing next to me. 

"No. I am making it awkward," I sigh and turn to be face-to-face with him, Jonah, and Paul. 

"I don't think I get how relationships work" Paul looks at us, confused by my words. And honestly, I am too. 

"We are not dating... that is the thing... how do I even look at her now? Should I ask her if I can be her boyfriend?" I try not to look at her. I don't want it to be obvious we are talking about her. 

"Emphasis on boyfriend!" Paul says, almost cheering. "You can sing it for her since someone did not want to the last time," 

"Paul... it's not the right time" Jonah gives him a knowing look. 

"No, it's fine. This song is basically a Boyfriend... even if she does not know that" they don't say anything else, and I don't want it to be awkward with them. "Let's go. I still need Gen to fix my hair," 

We found Gen behind us once we turned around. She smiled at us and tried to give me some advice. Should I listen to her instead of the guys? I am not sure. All I know is that we have to go and sing this song. 

Andi's POV

Walker and I get ready to introduce No Exit as the next band of the night. We are almost over this round, and I haven't been happier. He will finally tell us that surprise. I tried to make him talk earlier, but he knows how to keep a secret. Anyway, Amber and Libby left us alone as we waited for the current band to finish their song. We like to do similar sounds and movements as Sharpay and Ryan in High School Musical. And yeah, we always end up laughing. But this time, after the whole thing, he stares at me in a certain way, and it is one that I can't describe, but it makes sense the second he decides to speak. 

"So, now that you two are a couple... do we need to pretend we don't know anything about it?" he has that smile on his face. The one he makes every time I ask him to lie. 

"It does not affect how we work, right?" My facial expression starts as a serious one, but the moment I finish it, a smile makes its way to my face. 

"Alright. I was just asking," 

And I thought Amber and I were being subtle about it. What if everybody in Shadyside knows we are dating? I have no problem with it, but we can be professional too. I take a deep breath and put the biggest smile on my face as we are about to enter the stage and do our job, but before I can give step forward, Walker takes my arm. 

"Teams," he says, staring at me. 

"What does that mean?" I am genuinely confused. 

"That is my surprise. Teams" 

He takes my hand, and we both walk to the stage. In the same place, and with the same enthusiastic voices, we announce No Exit. 

Jonah's POV

We listen to Andi and Walker introducing us. And hug each other, then we get ready to play. I look a Marty. He is nervous about this, and I am not as good with words as I would like to be. So, the best I can do is pat his back, and smile warmly at him. As warm as he did to TJ when he confessed to Cyrus and when Paul was nervous about a test. He smiles and follows Paul to the stage. I stay there for two seconds more since Rowan wishes me good luck from their place. We are good friends with each other. Between smiling at her and the rest of the band. I realize I'm being left behind, so I walk as fast as I can. 

We get behind the instruments. I nod to TJ, and he starts with the keyboard, followed by Paul's drums and my guitar. I turn to Marty, he takes a deep breath, and his bass joins the melody. He leans to the microphone to start singing. 

[Marty]: Sorry that I like you, I'm sorry | I'm sorry for liking you | Sorry that I like you, I'm sorry | If liking you is wrong 

[Paul]: Sorry that I like you so much, I'm sorry | I tried to hide my feelings, but I guess it was too obvious | I'm sorry, I'm sorry that I like you

[Jonah]: I can't, I can't hide my feelings for you anymore | I bravely take a step closer to you | but this step was never easy | I made up my mind long ago, but I still need more time 

[TJ]: But maybe I took too long | Our timings were off, I feel like I'm being punished | What I did to get closer to you was rather building a wall between us, I'm speechless 

[Marty]: I blame myself, I blame you | I don't know whom to blame, my resent grows | Trying to break down the wall between us just breaks my heart | While making my mind up, I missed the most important one, you 

[Jonah]: When I gave you a movie ticket, you were just so happy, but now I'm unintentionally pressuring you | I just wanted to be with you, the two of us, together | The tickets were just an excuse 

[ TJ  & Paul]: To be just friends | You're too beautiful to just stay as friends |  I know I'll regret, so end this 

[Marty &  Jonah ]:  I know I'll regret, so I decide to express my feelings  | I want to be more than just friends | I like you   too much  

[All]: Sorry that I like you, I'm sorry | I'm sorry for liking you | Sorry that I like you, I'm sorry | If liking you is wrong  

The song ends with Marty almost tearing up. This one is too personal, but he wanted to play it for a reason. Maybe he wanted Buffy to listen to it, or he thought it was a good idea to show another side of No Exit. It could be a mix of both. We leave the stage with somewhat of a smile on our faces and pull Marty into a hug once we are back at our place. 

"The song is beautiful, Marty," I say, smiling at him. 

"I cried... do you think people notice?" he asks us. 

"No," TJ and I say in unison. 

"Yes," Paul says. We turn to him. "I mean no..." 

"As long as we make it to the next round, it'll be fine" he smiles. 

We make a group hug and wait for The Rose Ladies' performance. And this time, I wish Rowan good luck, getting some confused looks from the guys. 

Buffy's POV

"Who wrote that song?" Rowan asks. 

"Marty," Blue says as she checks her hair on her phone. 

Jane and Rowan turn to me and meet my eyes. I play with my hair as I try to ignore them. Did Marty write that just for fun or... you know, is it for me? I don't want to get distracted right before we play our song. But it is impossible to not remember how hurt he sounded and the tears falling from his eyes, making me want to cry too. But I had to pretend to be unaffected by it. 

"Buffy, are you ready? Andi already called us" Jane shakes my arm. 

"Yeah... let's go" I smile at her and walk together behind Blue and Rowan. 

As I said, I cannot get distracted. 

We make it to the instruments, and Blue makes a small joke before we start our song. Like No Exit, we try different styles without losing our main one. So, this time, Blue starts with her guitar, and at the same time, Rowan does it with her bass. Jane and I join them a few seconds later. Rowan leans to say the intro and name of the song. This one, as I said, is new. 

[Rowan]: Loco

[Blue &  Rowan ]: Walked in, smooth operator hit your mark  (I'm gettin' loco, loco)  | Oh gosh, pure shot of poison to my heart  (I'm gettin' loco, loco)

[Jane]: I'm trapped and there's no way out | Surrounded by my thoughts of ya | I think I'm a little obsessed | I feel like I was born to love ya 

[ Blue  & Rowan]: SOS for this kitty | Fresh like rain when I'm thirsty  (Gon' lock you down, I got my eye on you, yellow)  | Feeling the fuego tonight, come fan the flame

[Buffy]: It's too late, want you so bad, I decided not to fight it | Can't contain it anyway 'cause you got me blinded 

[Jane]: Such a rush, you're making me lose my mind | You got me like cray-cray-crazy in love | What you doing to me 

[Rowan]: Can't get off this bad roller coaster ride | You got me like cray-cray-crazy in love | I'm addicted, outta control 

[Blue &  Buffy ]: I'm gettin' loco, loco |  I'm gettin' loco, loco

[Blue]: So tell me what's your intention | I'm tripping when I know you playing with my emotions 

[Jane]: I keep on going back and forth, it's hell then heaven | Pushing me right to the edge of broken 

[Rowan &  Buffy ]: So dangerous, so, so, so dangerous |  Ain't the type to risk it all  |  But you got me acting irrational

We are also proud of this song. And somehow, it sounds like a response to Marty's. I don't know. The idea popped into my head. We are the last band of the night, as usual. So, when we go back to our place, we wait for Andi and Walker to say which bands are leaving tonight. 

"That was great," Rowan tells us as she tries to get distracted from the nervousness. 

"I personally love this song. It makes me want to dance," Jane admits. 

"I like it too. But we make great songs, so it was predictable," I say, smiling and taking Rowan's hand. 

"You are right. Sometimes I forget we are not a real band," Blue says. At the right moment, our hosts ask for everybody's attention. 

All the bands gather together, staring at and listening to them. Paul and Blue are holding hands. I put my head on TJ's shoulder. The same nervousness I saw on Rowan before, you can feel it now in everyone. Every band wants to stay. They want to win this thing and go on tour. But unfortunately, 24hrs and wipe out the water are out. That is followed up by an announcement about the next round. 

"I guess we are a team," I say to my friends and the guys of No Exit after listening to our names. This whole battle of the bands is taking a different way.

"Yeah... we are a team now," Jonah shares glances with me.

"But why us?" TJ asks. 

"Maybe because the rest of the bands actually know each other so well," Blue adds. "They all are friends, guys," 

"Let's look at the bright sight. We have the Kim siblings by our side" TJ smiles at them. 

"How is that supposed to be positive?" Paul looks confused. 

"You guys have written songs together," I respond.

"How are we so sure we have to write a song?" Jane appears next to Paul. 

She is right. No one can assure us that we will not have to write a song. Maybe it will be another cover. 

"Even we don't have to. We need to be prepared to act as a team," I look at them. Making a short pause at Marty when our eyes meet. This might be the hardest round of all. 

Chapter Text

Andi's POV

Yesterday we announced what the teams should sing in the next round. 70's or 80's songs. Libby's choice, we all agreed on that. But to Walker's surprise, now things are getting a bit tense. We had everything planned and the flyers made. Well, Amber, my precious girlfriend, had everything ready, and now she had to do it again. So, she is not the biggest Walker fan right now. In fact, we are still planning the next round since we will need more instruments. Six bands left, and no one will leave this round. I sigh loudly as I listen to Walker talk about his plans. As Libby yawns, we hear Amber's shoes making their grand entrance. 

"I hope you are right about the teams' thing" Amber leaves some of our flyers on the table we are sitting on. 

"Why do you think it is such a bad idea?" he asks, taking one and reading the changes. 

"Maybe because it messed up the whole schedule" she lowers her tone, trying to not yell at him. "This was supposed to end after this round" 

"It's not that bad," I interrupt them. "People still like the battle." 

"You are not getting it, right? Neither of you." her expression not changing a bit.

The three of us share looks as Amber waits for us to finally understand what she is talking about. And no, at least for me, I don't have any idea of what it could be. And apparently, nor Walker nor Libby know. We stare at her in silence. She takes a deep breath and takes something out of her jacket. 

"Cyrus' musical" she puts the flyer on the table. "Remember how he tried to choose a different date from the finale? What are we going to tell him?" 

"I am sure he can convince CeCe to move the date," I start. "Blue is still in the competition. What if she makes it to the last round? She can't be in two places at the same time." 

"Fine, you..." she looks at me. "And you..." now she turns to Walker. "Go and talk to him and CeCe," 

How am I going to tell my best friend to change the date he clearly chose because he knew how important the battle of the bands was for me? I'll probably sound too selfish. But maybe he can do something about it. But even if I have to speak with his scary boss, I won't give up. I tell Walker to get ready while I text Cyrus. 

TJ's POV

With the news about the cover we have to sing next round, we wanted to pick the song as soon as possible. So, we agreed to meet at Jonah's house to discuss it. When I arrived the guys were already in the practice room. Jonah and Marty were talking about our next gig at the pizzeria, and Paul was doing homework. Then ten minutes later, The Rose Ladies entered the room together. Now we have not said a word. Jane sits next to me while Jonah and Rowan sit near our instruments. Blue and Marty are in front of each other, and Buffy and Paul sit together, sharing some smiles. The awkwardness is evident. So, Jonah decides to walk to the center of the room. 

"Burning Heart," he starts. "It is an all-time favorite song, and it also features in the Rocky movie," 

"Well, Material Girl might be the one" Buffy stands up, meeting Jonah's eyes. "It is an iconic song, such as its singer." 

"Actually, Blue and I thought we might go with a song everybody has to know because the movie is just a family favorite" Paul also stands up. "Ghostbusters!" he turns to his sister, and they both smile. 

"No, Paul," Buffy and Jonah say in unison. 

This is different from how we all pictured picking a song to cover. I feel some arguing coming. 

"Oh, because your songs are better?" he suddenly says, taking all of us by surprise. "You are not even considering our option. Just think about it. We can dress as ghostbusters," 

"It will be his dream come true," I tell Jane, who stands next to me. She smiles at the words, and then we both look at Paul.

Our friends are still arguing about the song. But what started as dialogues are now turning into yelling. Marty is defending Jonah's side and Blue, her brother's. Buffy tells Jane multiple times to tell Jonah why her song is the best option, but poor Jane looks too overwhelmed by the discussion. Now is the moment to be the mediator of this mess. 

"What if we all calm down a little" I try to get everybody to stop their fighting. But no one listens to me. 

"Oh my... everyone shut the fuck up!" Rowan yells at them. 

I open my eyes in surprise. I never saw her yelling at anyone. But it works. They are as surprised as I am, minus Blue, she only raises an eyebrow at her best friend. 

"Thank you, Rowan," I smile awkwardly at her. 

After that, no one wanted to stay in the practice room anymore. So, Paul was the first one to leave. He said he had to finish an assignment. Blue had a musical rehearsal. Jane said she needed to help her mother. Jonah and Rowan's shift at the store was about to start, so they left too. Buffy and Marty walked away together but without saying each other a word. And now, I am walking to the theater. I need Cyrus' help. I don't want to have another panic attack this week. 

Buffy's POV

Once I left Jonah's house, I knew someone was behind me. And I could see Marty in the reflection of a car. We stay closer to each in complete silence. But Marty is the last of the things I have in my mind right now. First, how are we even going to play together, both bands, if we can't even choose one song? I know, maybe the fight was a dumb thing to do. But I know I am right, Material Girl is a great song, and I know they know it deep inside. Burning Heart? I mean, I love it. And the movie, but is it The Rose Ladies' style? I don't think so. I am about to turn to the right, in the direction of the dance studio, when I feel someone's, Marty's, hand grabbing my arm. 

"Can we please talk?" there it is. That voice. The one I won't admit drives me crazy, so I sigh, rolling my eyes. 

"Sure, let's talk" I turn to him. "Tell me, why are things so weird between us?" I am not mad, but my face might say I am. 

It Is obvious how the question takes him by surprise. But I deserve to know if this has any future or if I am wasting my time. He stands in front of me, trying to find some words. I can tell it just by looking at his eyes. I put my hair behind my ear and stare at him. 

"Patience is not my specialty, Marty. But here I am, waiting for you to decide something I didn't even know you needed time to" I don't know why I said that, but I cannot do anything to change it. 

"Buffy..." my name leaves his mouth more as a whisper than a clear word. Barely audible. 

"I have to go. I have a class to teach" I cut whatever he was about to say. "Call me when you make up your mind. I'll be waiting... as always" I try to leave him alone when his voice, better said, his question makes me turn back around. 

"What do you mean by always?" 

"You don’t know?" I face him now as I take a few steps forward. "Try asking your friends..." he realizes how close we are, so I take two steps back. "Oh, and maybe that will help you guys to pick our song instead." 

"Are we arguing because of the song or because of us?" he takes one step closer.

"What about both?" I stay still.

"I prefer not arguing with you at all," he sighs. "But I don't get it. I don't know what you expect me to know,"

"That I like you, you idiot!" I say loud enough to be heard by three stores ahead of us. 

But I don't say another word. Actually, I left as soon as I could. Leaving Marty outside the bakery with wide eyes and mouth almost open. But I never thought I'd say those words out loud. Or at least to him. Now, I am trying to look like a functional human in front of my class. That is just great, Buffy. 

Cyrus' POV

"Andi, what you are asking me is..." do I even have a word for that?

"Please, Cyrus" she has that puppy look on her face. 

"I am not sure I can do such a thing..." I tell her. Honestly, this is her worst idea. "Ask CeCe about Joseph and..." 

"I know he is creepy and all. But Cyrus, this is important," 

"My musical is also important" I stare at her, surprised by how she says those words. 

"Exactly, and that is why I don't want to interfere with it." 

Moving the date of the musical? I made everything I could to pick a date that couldn't, possibly, ruin her battle of the bands. We have been working on this thing for so long. And if it wasn't for one of the many fairs Shadyside has, she could have that final round on any other day, but the gallery decided to add teams and change their plan. And am I supposed to make changes because of that? I am speechless but not disappointed. We keep discussing the possibility of looking for a new date. But as I told her, it is not my decision. But I don't want her to deal with Joseph either. She was about to object again, but Walker and Blue appeared. Amber needed Andi's opinion about something. And Blue told me TJ is looking for me. 

I tell Andi to leave this business for another time and go to find TJ. He was in the back door, so it took me a while to finally see him. He was sitting on the floor, trying to control his breathing. I know what it means, he had another panic attack. I sit next to him, holding his hand. 

"What happened? What made you have a panic attack this time?" I ask once he puts his head on my shoulder. 

"The bands" he sighs. "There was a big fight because of the song. They just cannot decide." 

"I'm sorry" I kiss his hand. "We can go for an ice cream... or tea," 

"No, I want to stay right here with you," 

"As always?" I smile. 

"Yes, as always" he finally meets my eyes, leaning for a kiss. 

For a few minutes, we could forget about everything. What Andi asked me to do and what the bands did to him. We got lost in the tender kiss we shared. His kisses always have a vanilla flavor and leave me wanting more. But this time, one was enough. 

Iris' POV

Want to know about the magazine project? It is taking a great form. We have many things already done. It has been weeks of hard work between the three of us. I haven't met Walker since I told him about my parents' divorce. Oh, and if you were wondering, I still feel like crap. But not as I did when I got the news, so that is some progress. Right now, I am waiting for Maddie to arrive. She said she had something important to tell me, and all I could think about was the font we had been looking for. You know we need one for the name. We picked it up three days ago. Emma was listening to a song Maddie and I are not the biggest fans of. But it was not the song... it was how she defended it. There was a word she repeated multiple times in different arguments. 

My eyes go to the door as soon as I see that pink strand of hair entering the place. Maddie is with two people I am sure I saw before but can't remember where. 

"Meet Gus and Kira," she says with a smile. "They will be part of the team from now on." 

"Hi..." I smile at them. Trying to pretend this is how I am supposed to greet them. Then I turn to Maddie. "Uhm... can I talk to you alone?" 

"Sure..." 

We enter her office. She lives alone, and this place is not as big as I am sure she wanted, but it's good to start with our magazine. I take a seat in front of her. 

"Where did you meet them?" 

"At the party" her smile does not go away. She looks pretty when she smiles. "I told you guys it was a great opportunity..." she realizes something. I can tell it by how her eyes scan the room. "Where is Emma?" 

"She had a thing at school," 

She nods and continues with the story of how she asked them to join the project. She is a social person. 

"Well, now that I told you everything. We can't leave them waiting... we have to show everything we have done," she claps to herself a few times.

"Yeah, you are right" now I am the one smiling. 

We go back to Gus and Kira. I start explaining every area we have covered in the magazine. Maddie tells them how she began working on it for two years until she decided to add more people when she had almost everything covered. She says how happy she is about finding me as she takes my hand. I can't help but smile. Her touch makes me feel similar to Walker's. While she keeps talking, my head imagines a thousand scenarios about it. Is it possible to like two people at the same time? 

Paul's POV  

My modern physics homework was the only company I had for the rest of the day. I went back to my house and spent it in my room. The only interaction I had was with my mom since she cut me some fruit. But the whole time, I was thinking about the fight we had earlier and how guilty I felt. Well, I still feel guilty. That is why I am watching my comfort TV show. Big Time Rush. My parents are sleeping, so I can't laugh out loud since it's 3 am. But now that I had some time alone and watched multiple episodes of the show, I want to talk to someone. I feel much better after recharging. And watching how the guys in the TV show always overcame their problems and fights made me realize we need to do that if we want to succeed in the battle of the bands. I look at my chats and open TJ's, seeing his last connection was two hours ago. And nobody has talked at the No Exit group chat. Then my eyes go to the only one with messages besides the Kim family one. 

Jane: Hey! I don't know if it's a good idea, but I am here if you need anything... 

Jane:  Even if you want to talk at 3 am

I smile at the screen and consider texting her. She always worries about me, and I was an idiot for not sending her a simple message after the fight. She was not even involved in it. My computer distracts me when a scene of Jo and Kendall appears, and it makes me think about her, Jane. The smile is still on my face, and I look at her chat again. I start typing something, but my brain does not know what I should write. 

"Watching Big Time Rush at 3 am?" Blue's voice makes me jump, and I can see her smile after realizing she scared me.

I notice the bowl in her hands. "Eating ramyeon at 3 am?" 

"I asked first" she sits in my bed. "You want some?"

"Always" 

I pat the spot next to me, and she makes her way to it. I pass her one of the earphones so she can watch the series with me as we eat her ramyeon. We watch one of the episodes before Jo gets the movie deal, and they sing Worldwide at the airport. I am too focused on the scene when my sister turns to me to talk about what happened earlier. 

"You know that it wasn't your fault, right?" I turn to her as the episode keeps playing. "The arguing" 

"As always, you know what I am thinking, right?" I give her a little shove with my shoulder. "But I showed a side I did not want them to see," 

"You are a human, Paul" her expression remains the same. "You can be calm and nice to everyone. Introverted and once you get comfortable, talk as much as you want... but can also get mad and tell people what you are thinking, and what they are wrong about." 

"How come you are so smart?" I smile. I only needed my sister to feel better. At the end of the day, she is also my best friend.

"I am Katie for a reason. Right, Logan?" she raises an eyebrow, and I give her a playful shove. 

"Hey! Be careful. I have the food, remember?" 

"Right. Sorry" I take the bowl in my hands to shove her again. "Better?" 

"You are the worst, Paul Kim," she says between small laughs. 

"Well, Darcy Kim, I learned from the best" I have a genuine smile across my face... the same one I had when I danced with Jane at the party. I know it because I feel the same, safe and with a full heart. 

"Genevieve Kim," we say in unison, holding back some laughter. 

We have to rewind the episode to the part we stopped paying attention to. Between eating ramyeon and some of my secret unhealthy snacks, we end up watching a marathon of Big Time Rush. And yes, we both cried at the airport scene. 

Buffy's POV

After a rough night, thinking about what I said to Marty. And about the song. I am now on my way to Jonah's house again. We still need something to practice, and I am sure that choosing one is the least complicated job. Last night, when I told the girls what happened, we moved to another topic. Rowan mentioned the inevitable struggle... how are we going to pick who sings? And, of course, she also said how difficult will be to play all the instruments together. So, I canceled a class this morning and texted Jonah, hurting my pride to ask him to meet me at his house. All the bands. Once we all are at No Exit's practice room, the peace and quiet do not last long since the fighting starts again, but this time it's Blue who defends Ghostbusters instead of her brother. Rowan has to yell again, and we all shut up as soon as we hear her voice. 

"I have the song, so please stop fighting. It's not going to be Burning Heart nor Material Girl or Ghostbusters," she says, glancing at the rest of us. "It's not about following The Rose Ladies' style or No Exit's. It is about finding our own one. Something we can share but not copy or force the other to follow... so, last night I found the song we were looking for" she takes a breath before continuing. "It's going to be this one" we all see Rowan's phone. 

"That's a good one" Jonah nods. 

"Yeah, I like that song" I finally agree with him. 

"It is a great choice," Paul says in his deep voice, taking everyone's attention. 

"Perfect" she smiles. "Now, the hard part. How do we choose who sings?" 

"And who plays what" TJ adds. "Yes, I thought about it too," 

"Now I understand why everybody said this round would be the hardest one," Marty comments as he takes a cookie. 

"I have some suggestions..." Jane takes us all by surprise. She is between the Kim siblings, holding a notebook. "After you all argued yesterday, I thought we might want to know who could sing more lines and who could play instead of sing..." 

"This is great," Paul says after leaning to read what she had in the notebook. "You are a genius, Jane!"

"Is this based on a study, or do you actually think these are the best singers?" I ask her. 

"It is based on a period of observation. I guess you can call it however you want it, but this is not just my opinion," 

"Well, I like the list of the main singers," Jonah says, reading next to me.

"Of course you like it. You must be in the first place," Marty teases him. 

"Actually, second place," TJ corrects him. "Rowan is the first one." 

"Really? Thank you, Jane" Rowan smiles at our friend. "That makes me want to hug you, but you know..." 

"Alright, guys. I have a rehearsal in three hours. We better start this thing," Blue says. 

The rest of her ideas are actually good. Even if that means some of us will not be able to play the instruments for a long time during the song. This may be the biggest challenge we will face. Now I understand why they did this round and why no one will be eliminated from it. But our team, even though we did not have the best start, will be a complete surprise. The topic gives you lots of songs you can choose from, but as Rowan said, we don't have to copy or follow the styles we already have. And this might not be a mix of them... but for sure, this is something we would sing together. 

Oh, and about Marty. Well, let's say we can't concentrate on our feelings. Not in front of everyone else. 

Chapter Text

TJ's POV

Things with my parents and grandparents are getting better. I still can't believe nor fully accept the fact that their moving. But, as always, Cyrus has been the one who made me realize it's not a bad idea for them to move and that at some point, I will also do that. So, the dinner is finally happening, but I have not told him about it. I wanted to wait until everything was not weird between him and Andi. They still hang out and everything, but the musical and battle of the bands are dangerous fields, and you do not want to cross them. That is one reason he is at my house right now. He stares at me while I prepare some tea for us. I told the guys I'll be arriving at the battle with Cyrus, so they did not make any questions or objections to it. Cyrus takes the mugs, and we make our way to the couch, letting our bodies relax once we move closer to each other. He puts his head on my chest. 

"What are you going to do with Andi? You have to talk to her," I say as I play with his hair. 

"I do not know," he sighs. "I wish I had the answer," 

"Have you talked to Joseph about it... or CeCe?" 

"Not yet. I am scared, Teej," 

"I know you are... and you don't have to do it just because she is pressuring you" I leave a small kiss on his head. 

"If only she had that idea in mind..." he looks up at me. "Enough of Andi and me. Tell me about the song you have been practicing," 

"I can't tell you, and you know that..." I smile once I see the pout he makes. "Buffy would kill me... and you know she scares me sometimes," 

He tires guessing the song, but without any luck. He even tries to get me to say it with many kisses, and I love you's. I focus on my tea, shaking my head every time he thinks he finally knows the song. We listen to my parents opening the door, and he gives up. They ask him about the dinner next week. He turns to me, confused but responding to my mother's question. I tell him to go to my room. And after my father told us to keep the door open, we go upstairs. 

"I was about to tell you..." I start. "But you have been so stressed, and I did not want you to worry about another thing," 

"It's fine... it just caught me by surprise" he takes my hand, giving me a recomforting smile. "What should I wear for it?" 

"Do you know how much I love you?" I say, staring into his eyes. 

"I have an idea of it" his smile grows bigger. 

We kissed in the middle of my room, and with the door open as my father requested. After a few kisses, we decided it was time to head to the battle of the bands. 

Jonah's POV

Marty's mom let us take her car since TJ had a date with Cyrus. I was at their house because Marty had been teaching me how to cook a specific dish for my parents. I still need more lessons, but we have fun together. When I got a text from Blue telling us they were already in the place for the battle of the bands, we left his house. We are now outside Paul's house. He specifically told us to not ring the doorbell. We are not sure why but he said that. As we wait for him, we talk about food. And no, we are not hungry, but the situation demands us to do it. Whatever Paul's mom is cooking smells delicious. We hear the door open, and our friend appears. Marty and I were ready to hug him, but he had other plans. 

"Who knew physics was so entertaining?" Paul says, and we stare at him in confusion. He closes the door behind him. 

"Who are you and what did you do to our Paul?" Marty asks him. 

"Sorry, my dad was on the other side of the door..."

"So, it still sucks," I say, walking to the car. 

"Not that much, but I don't love it as much as he does" he follows us. 

"Welcome to your real world. Let's go to the battle of the bands and hope this whole team thing ends well," Marty tells him, turning to the backseats where he is sitting. 

Marty puts a song and sings it at the top of his lungs. We all love the song playing, so we sing along with him. You might not know, but No Exit has a playlist with songs we like individually and collectively. This is to keep everyone happy during our car rides. But this time, singing as loud as we do right now is relieving. This round is crucial, and it does not matter that no one is leaving this round. But I have this idea, maybe they are looking for two bands to match so they might take them on tour... Marty and Paul yell the lyrics of a 5sos song at me, making me concentrate on them instead. I see them happy and not worried about what Buffy could tell us for being late. So, I text the only person I think can give us a hand with that.

Jonah:  We are on our way! Please don't let Buffy kill us.

Blue:  I'll try. Nothing guaranteed. 

"Jonah! Your favorite part," Marty tells me. 

I won't lie, I am scared we might crash the car with him driving, but we cannot do anything to stop him. So, I join them in my favorite part of the song. 

Andi's POV

We are about to start this round, and I can't find Walker. He said he'd be late, but I did not think it was this late. If he does not appear in ten minutes, Amber will join me on the stage tonight. Honestly, I think that is pretty cool. I always hold hands with Walker, so I'll do that with Amber. Libby is trying to reach our friend, and Amber is getting ready just in case. I tell them I'll walk around the place to help my nervousness. Libby takes Amber by the arm and explains to her what has to be done this evening. In the middle of my walk, I find Cyrus. We smile at each other. Things go smoothly for one minute until that topic slips from my mouth. 

"I told you I'd think about it. I never said I was changing the date," he says with a straight face. 

"Come on, Cyrus! You know how important this is... not just for me but for the gallery... and TJ. What if No Exit makes it to the finale? What about The Rose Ladies? Are you even thinking about Blue? Your boyfriend? Your best friends?" would he like to have to decide between his job and TJ? We are talking about Cyrus. I am just being realistic.

"Why?" he lowers his tone so no one else can hear us. "Why are you using that against me?" he thinks about what to say next for a few seconds. His mouth is half-open. "Why don't you think of your best friend, grandmother, and father?" 

"It is different!" 

"No, it is not" 

"Cyrus..." 

"Look, Andi, I already told you once. You know the answer. I will think about it... but if I were asking you to do such a thing, would you do it?" 

Somehow, I am not able to say anything else. My brain can't process the question correctly, and he knows it. TJ approaches us, telling me Amber is looking for me. Cyrus takes his hand, and they join the rest of No Exit. I let a frustrated sigh out and joined Amber next to the stage. At this point, I don't even remember why I was so nervous. But the show must go on, right? 

Iris' POV

I watch Fire Bite and Search, perform together as the first team. I spent many hours with them between their rehearsals. They even invited me to some. And now I know almost every band left in the battle, but most importantly, we have huge advances with the magazine. Having a five people team is so much better than a three-one. Gus and Kira offered to stay and work on the design of the very first cover we plan to launch at some point. So, Maddie picked me up in her car along with Liz and Chris. They were in the back seats, so I sat next to her. I'm not going to lie to you. After feeling that the other day I called Walker for lunch and tried to hold his hand... the feeling was the same. I have tried to compare the touch of both of them, day to day until today. With both of them, there seems to be the same chemistry. I swear my head cannot handle that much. Sometimes it looks like they both flirt with me, and it's not a bad thing since I like it, but it just leaves me more confused. 

The sound of applause takes me back to the real world. Just in time to see Emma approaching me with a big smile. I compliment her performance and sweet voice. When the rest of Search starts passing by us, she thanks me and follows them. Liz and Chris have a small talk with me, and then they leave to look for a snack. Maddie looks excited when she is in front of me. She pulls me into a hug and holds my hand when she breaks it. 

"You were incredible," I say, smiling and trying to ignore how her touch makes me feel. 

"Thanks. It's good to have you as our supportive Iris" she stares right into my eyes. 

"Iris... not friend?" I try not to smile awkwardly, but it simply happens.

"If you want me to call you friend, I can do it. Whatever you wish..." she smiles.

Can you feel it? The electricity? Maybe, it is obvious what this looks like, but is it the same for the others? If Amber and TJ see us right now, would they get it? I am not sure since all I can do is look her in the eyes. I hear a man's voice calling my name, interrupting this moment. 

"Walker? Hey!" I smile, trying to hide the massive panic I feel right now. 

Cyrus' POV

TJ and I are still holding hands while the rest of No Exit and The Rose Ladies chat about the first team's performance. Whatever is going on between Andi and me has to end now. We have been friends for so long, and these two events will not change it. Am I being dramatic? Maybe. I love the drama, but I had enough of this one. And as I see both bands talking and laughing, I reconsider changing the date. I don't want to ruin this, and plus, I can be here to cheer them if they make it to the last four bands. I feel TJ's eyes on me. I know I am doing my classic expressions. He leans close to my ear, and I don't move. Whatever he is doing is because he wants it to be private. 

"That looked intense," TJ whispers.

"It was" I meet his eyes. "I don't like fighting with my best friends," 

"I know, but it's not your fault" he runs a hand through my hair.

"I'll talk to Joseph tomorrow..." I start. "Is it okay?" 

"If you feel it's okay, then it is Cyrus" he smiles. 

"He scares me so much, but I'll do it. I have to," 

"You look so precious when you are determined" I roll my eyes smiling. "I love you so much," 

"I love you so much, Teej... but let's watch the next performance. They need you focused on the song," 

"Right. But I know we'll do great because you are here" he takes a few seconds to admire me. "You are my safe place," 

We lovingly smile at each other. There could be rainbows and flowers all over the place just by it. But I am sure they are only in my mind. Jonah tells us to join him near the stage where Amber and Andi are holding hands with the biggest smiles I have ever seen on them, ready to introduce the next team. TJ does not let go of my hand. It feels like we are glued until it's his time to play. And I like it. 

Andi's POV

Amber and I step off the stage, letting the next team do their thing. This is probably the shortest round we ever had. She kisses my cheek in an attempt to get my attention. I smile at her and look at our hands. We have not let go. It feels great to hold hands with my girlfriend at the biggest event I planned. It gives me freedom and peace. But even in such a great and happy moment, Cyrus' words are still ringing in my head. I probably sounded too selfish asking him to move his premiere date, but that was never my intention. Now, I don't know how to fix this. How can I say to him I'm sorry? 

"Hey, are you alright?" Amber squeezes my hand, catching my attention. 

"No..." I place my head on her shoulder. 

"Is this related to Cyrus?"

"Yeah..." 

"Do you want to tell me more about it or...?" 

"Am I being selfish? For pressuring him to change the date?" I bury my face in her neck. 

"You are just doing your job, and he is too. You can try setting a deal" I am not looking, but I can picture the expression right now, her pouting as she watches the current team perform. 

I let go of her hand and give a step back. She stares at me in confusion, but once she looks at my expression, she gets I just got an idea. The music fades away, and we have to go back to the stage. We share looks once more before walking to the band, getting ready to announce No Exit and The Rose Ladies as the next team. I am not going to lie. The song they chose took all of us by surprise. In a good way, though. I put the microphone close to my mouth and say the genius introduction Libby wrote for them. 

Marty's POV

The moment is almost here. Search and Fire Bite already finished their cover, same as love loop and :m (mind). We are the next ones, and we are totally not freaking out. Jonah is standing next to Buffy, Rowan, and TJ, our main vocalists for today. They seem pretty chill, even though they are literally carrying the team and making us sound good. You don't have such pressure when you only need to play the instruments. We had divided practices for a whole week, and then we practiced together for a few days... and we sound great. But I know how nervous Jonah and TJ can get. I don't know much about Rowan, but Buffy is pretty confident when she is dancing, driving, talking, walking, playing, and singing. But as I said, it's totally different for the rest of us. Blue and Paul talk with their older sister. And Jane moves her hands as if she were already playing the keyboard. 

"Do you guys have a minute?" Jonah catches our attention with that tone that characterizes him. "So, as the leader of No Exit. I want to thank you for not killing each other when we picked the song..." we let out some laughs. "And I know it has been hard to get used to this... playing and singing with other people... but at least we all are friends. This is the last task we have. Let's go and sing as if our life depends on it!" 

"So inspirational," Rowan jokes, but she puts her hand to the center, gesturing us to follow her. 

"You better sing as you have ever sung in your entire life, Rowan Lee," Blue tells her best friend and places her hand over hers. 

"This will be fun" TJ nods before putting his hand over Blue's. 

"This really makes us a team. You know that, right?" Jonah glances at Rowan before imitating the move. 

"I love when we do this" Paul smiles excitedly. 

"For a great performance," Jane places her hand over his. 

Buffy and I are the last ones to do it. I waited for five seconds, and I am sure she did the same because we placed our hands at the same time, meeting our eyes, unable to say anything else since Rowan yelled at the top of her lungs:  let's go, team maravilla. Being questioned by her best friend and interrupted by Andi's voice announcing our names... and song. We walk up to the stage, standing behind the instruments and microphones. A band of eight people... wonderful. Blue and Jonah, as leaders of both bands, talk first about our song, telling the judges to enjoy the show, and praising the other bands' covers. I get ready to start with the bass. One reason to love this song. You know the rest... we do our thing. 

[All]: Do, do, do, do, do, do, do, do, do | Do, do, do, do, do, do, do | Do, do, do, do, do, do, do, do, do | Do, do, do, do, do, do, do

[Rowan]: Tonight | I want to give it all to you | In the darkness | There's so much I want to do

[Jonah]: And tonight | I want to lay it at your feet | 'Cause girl, I was made for you | And girl, you were made for me 

[All]: I was made for lovin' you, baby | You were made for lovin' me | And I can't get enough of you, baby | Can you get enough of me? 

[TJ]: Tonight | I want to see it in your eyes | Feel the magic | There's something that drives me wild 

[Buffy]: And tonight | We're gonna make it all come true | 'Cause girl, you were made for me | And girl I was made for you 

[All]: I was made for lovin' you, baby | You were made for lovin' me | And I can't get enough of you, baby | Can you get enough of me? | I was made for lovin' you, baby | You were made for lovin' me | And I can give it all to you, baby | Can you give it all to me? 

The order of our vocalists continues. Rowan uses her incredible vocals for the next lines of the song. And my time is already here. My bass solo. I take a few steps forward and make it to the center. The rest join me eventually, but the feeling of having a solo is at another level. I jump as I play. Later, I walk around the stage and face Blue as we play our instruments. I even come closer to Buffy as she sings the chorus. When the song ends, we hear the applause... the best feeling ever. 

As we go back to our place, Andi and Amber finish the round with even more applause. For the first time in a long time, we are not worried about being eliminated, and you can tell it by our faces. I decided to talk to Buffy and tell her how much I like her. But she is dragged away by Rowan when we are finally facing to face. 

"Get your stuff ready. We all are celebrating at the pizzeria!" Search's bassist, Liam, tells the rest of the bands. 

"I guess we are celebrating..." TJ says, standing next to me. "Let me call Cyrus first," 

Paul's POV

Everyone started packing their things after a member of the band Search invited us to celebrate at the pizzeria. But I wanted to do something else before joining my friends. So, I told them I had forgotten something on the stage, walked up to the drums, and played a part of a song. When I am in the middle of it, I notice someone standing next to me. At first, I thought it was Blue, maybe she wanted to tell me it was time to go, but no, it was not her. It's Jane. I am sure she recognized the song. It's the one we danced to at the party the other day. She tells me to keep playing, but I already invited her to play with me. I don't know why I just say it. We share the seat, and I lend her the sticks. I try to explain what she has to do, but I know it can be confusing at first. I am not quite sure how Buffy learned so fast. 

"I'm not sure I can do it. I better go and help the others," she is about to put the sticks down. 

"Come on. This is funnier than that... let me help you, we play another song" I place my hands over hers, making sure she grabs the sticks well. "You take the sticks like this, and just do this" I help Jane. And with my assistance, she played a part of the song we had just sung. "See? Now you are a drummer who knows how to play Kiss," 

"Thanks. Now I can delete playing a Kiss song on drums from my bucket list" her smile... I mean, it could light the whole stage. 

I stare at her for a few seconds, smiling at her joke. I am not sure if it's her makeup, not like the one Kiss used to wear back then, but her eyes look bluer than on other days. But it can be the moonlight too. I can actually see Jane, not as I always do, something feels different, but I don't know what it is. She blushes and turns her face away, telling me we have to join the guys. 

Buffy's POV

Cyrus and TJ tell us we should already be in the pizzeria. But we are waiting for Jane. And I have not seen Paul in a few minutes, so basically, they can't leave either. So, as we wait for our friend to appear. I tell Blue and Rowan the dilemma I am in right now. I don't know if it's a good idea to ask Marty if we could have our second date in three days. Does he even want to look me in the eyes? I confessed in the most messed up way possible, and now I want a date. I need to stop listening to Rowan and the dramas she watches at weekends. Anyway. After a discussion, I sit with the girls, waiting for their response. 

"Just tell him, as he did," Blue starts. "You like him and already told him that. What can you lose now?" she takes one of the left snacks she found. 

"Blue is right. You have to just say it" Rowan nods to her best friend. 

"I'll do it... at the pizzeria," I sigh. 

Is it scary? A little. Do I feel confident enough to do that? Of course not. But I have to do it. 

Jane and Paul walk up to us, and I can tell by Rowan's look that she knows, as she knows something her best friend ignores because she barely looks at him when he turns to her to ask her something. Or maybe not, but she is not as oblivious as Blue. The five of us go to the pizzeria in my car. The ride is quiet since the girls don't know I asked Paul for his opinion on this case first. When we enter the place, it already looks like a party. Kind of the one Cyrus and Iris made the other day... the one where I kissed Marty. 

Unconsciously, I try to find him. My eyes scan the place and see him next to the guy who invited us. They are talking and sharing some pizza and drinks. This is not what I pictured him doing. 

"Go and talk to him," Cyrus whispers next to me. 

I nod and move my feet in his direction. He does not even notice me approaching them. But the other guy does and smiles at me, telling me how much he liked my singing in the song, making Marty turn to me. I join their conversation and say how much I like his bass skills and that he should do a collaboration with Marty since they both are great at it. The guy, Liam, leaves us alone once he notices our constant glances at each other. Now it is my opportunity. 

"Hey..." I say, for the first time, unsure. 

"Hey," he dedicates me with a small smile. 

"Are you free on Tuesday?" I ask, taking a napkin between my hands. 

"Yeah, my cooking class is not every day," 

"Great. Then let's have our second date," 

He looks at me, confused for a few seconds, but then he shakes his head with a smile. I suppose that is a yes. So, it's official, we have another date. 

Chapter Text

TJ's POV

Have I ever mentioned how much I want to go with Marty to his cooking classes? No? Well, now I have. My mother left me to supervise the kitchen while she went upstairs to ask my father something. Today we have that dinner, but it is actually just a day for the Kippens and Cyrus to hang out in the house. I still need to change my clothes to something less TJ from No Exit and more TJ Kippen. Yeah, I wear the clothes of the previous battles often, and since they have not seen me in action yet, I don't want to ruin the surprise. They told me they'd come to the next round, and I am excited about it. We have to sing a song from the Grease movie. We had a long discussion about it, but we agreed on the same one. 

"Teej, are you even paying attention to the food?" my mom stands next to me, not looking happy. 

"Yeah, I just... I got distracted," I sigh. 

"Let me check if you didn't burn it" 

"Oh TJ, did you burn the food again?" my father enters the place, holding a box of cookies. 

"I did not!" I say, opening my eyes. "Right?" 

"No, you didn't," she fixes my hair. "Your hair is so long, TJ..." 

"He is in a rock band. That is normal" he leans to take a full view of the food. "Are you sure Cyrus likes all this stuff?" 

"You think I don't know my boyfriend's likes?" I say, clearly funnily offended. 

The doorbell interrupts our small talk. My parents play the typical Kippen game of who's going to answer the door. I stare at them and laugh at my dad's face when he loses. My parents have a best-friend relationship, and it took them some time to get back to it since my uncle's death. Like any other couple, they have had their highs and lows. I am just preparing for it when Cyrus and I start getting those. My dad comes back with my grandparents behind him. We share some hugs, and they ask me how I am doing in therapy, and, of course, they ask me about the band. I look at my phone and see some of Cyrus' texts saying he is almost here. 

"I have to go to my room" I turn to my mom. "Cyrus is almost here." 

"Go and get handsome for him. Don't worry, darling." My grandmother squeezes my cheek. 

I wrinkle my nose and nod to her words. They let me go upstairs. I have about six minutes before Cyrus gets here, so I have to do this quickly. I want to be the first person he sees as soon as he enters the house. My parents are excited to introduce us as a super-official couple to my grandparents. And that means they plan to do something embarrassing. I take the clothes Blue helped me choose from my closet the other day. I add the final touch, which is a jacket Cyrus' father gave me. I take a final look at my outfit in my mirror, fixing my hair, just in time to hear the door. 

"Stay away from the door!" I go downstairs as fast as I can. When I make it to the door, my whole family is waiting for me. I take a deep breath and open that damn door, finding my boyfriend standing there smiling. "Hey..." 

"Hey..." he says, with some nervousness. 

"Cyrus, please come in," my mom tells him, poking her head over my shoulder. 

"I want to see the cute guy!" my grandmother makes her way next to me, staring at Cyrus for a few seconds. "Nice job, Teej!" she turns to me, smiling in her typical way. 

"Oh my..." I close my eyes, already blushing. "Cyrus must want to take a seat. Come on," I tell everyone and take my boyfriend's hand, guiding him to where the reunion starts... the kitchen.

Paul's POV

Have you ever been in some big confusion over a person you like as a human being? I mean, you, questioning your true feelings towards them. The possibility of liking them in a romantic way. Well, one person is making me feel just like that. But I still don't know if this is something like TJ for Cyrus or Marty for Buffy, so I haven't done anything. And of course, I don't want to tell my friends yet, but the feeling is becoming different. I am talking about finding her in everything I do. Even simple stuff like staring at the sky or seeing a dog in the park, even when I am at The Spoon studying or watching Big Time Rush. Is it a crush? Or am I just making up things? I still have time to figure that out. 

I enter my house looking up for my sister since she wanted me to help her with her lines from the musical. I won't say this is the most entertaining thing I have done this week... but it is... and it is only Tuesday. I like pretending to be somebody else, a person who can be their true self; I call her name many times and decide to check our shared bathroom. And yeah, there she is, still doing her hair and the toothbrush trying not to fall from her mouth. I clear my throat, and she turns to me with a smile that tells me I need to help her with the hair. 

"You need to organize your time better," I say.

"I will" I barely understand her. 

"Which lines are we rehearsing today?" 

"None," she finally spits and rinses out her mouth. "The guys are coming. We are writing a song... minus Buffy." 

"A song... that's great. You have the talent for that." I don't really know what to say, she will be here at my house.

"Yeah, because you are my brother... Logan" she smiles. 

"Oh my, Darcy, just forget about that!" I hold back my laughter. I can't believe she still remembers it. 

The doorbell interrupts our small fight, and she tells me to go and see who it is before running to her room and closing the door, knowing she won. So, I go downstairs, ready to open the door. I don't even check who it could be. When I open it, I find her there. Her. The person I talked about earlier. 

"Hello, Jane" I blink a few times. She smiles at me, greeting me back with her hand. "Blue is getting ready." 

"Thank you," she says, trying to not meet my eyes. 

"And how is the writing-"

"How is the class-" 

We say at the same time, stopping once we notice it. And smiling after some apologies. We share a moment. Or that is what I thought until Rowan joined us, asking for my sister. I do not have to answer since Darcy's voice catches our attention. I see them leave for her room. And before I enter the kitchen, I look back at Jane. 

Buffy's POV

Do you want to know where I am taking Marty today? That is an easy question. We will go to Adrenaline City. It is full of fun games, and it's better than my first plan, which was just playing a friendly basketball game and then going for some milkshakes at The Spoon. I have to admit I wish I had everybody's help again. But they think I am better at planning dates... but they might be wrong about that. Anyway, Iris helped me to choose Adrenaline City. Honestly, I couldn't have a better idea. She saved me from asking TJ for help, or worse, asking Andi and Cyrus. They had a small fight at the battle of the bands, and they had not talked in three days. And I do not want to cross that line. But now, I check my phone once I make it outside Marty's house. 

The Rose Ladies: greatest stars of the galaxy

Rowan:  Buffy, do you prefer a romantic or a (finally) angry breakup song? 

Blue:  She has a date to think of! 

Blue:  Don't answer, Buffy. Enjoy your date

Jane:  Do you guys know she gave some of her ideas for this song, right?

Buffy:  What Jane says. But the angry breakup song sounds pretty cool

I get out of my car and walk to the door. Taking a big sigh before knocking, I start playing with my hair as I wait for someone to open it. To my luck, Marty's brother, Jason, does it. We don't share many words, but he does make a few jokes when Marty finally shows up. Once he leaves, we go back to my car.

"Sorry about that. Jason is... well himself" he shakes his head. 

"Don't worry..." I smile. "You look great, by the way." 

"Thanks," he says with a sigh. "You look beautiful..."

"Thanks..." I can't say anything else, but I manage my mouth to say other words. "We better go. Adrenaline City awaits!" 

I hope the awkwardness goes away once we get there. He keeps talking, and I answer everything. I have a great feeling about this date. And now I am glad I did not let Paul use his friendship powers and crash our date. With every word coming out from us, I feel comfortable doing this with him. I totally understand why I like him so much. 

TJ's POV

I had to leave Cyrus alone with my family to have a quick break from all the food we ate. My grandparents absolutely love him. And knowing how the Kippen family is... they are planning in their head the wedding and names of our pets and, probably, kids. And I like it. But somehow, it feels surreal. They wanted to meet him just before they had to leave Shadyside... and it all turned out great. I let out a sigh of relief and look at how my phone's screen illuminates with new messages. I was expecting some texts from Cyrus, asking me to save him from my family. But instead, I find some unusual activity in No Exit's chat. 

"TJ? I have to use the bathroom." My dad says behind the door. 

"Just a minute!" I say, reading the messages. 

No Exit (Marty, stop changing the name, please)

Marty:  You all know I am on a date

Marty:  BUT I JUST LOOK BACKED AT BUFFY 

Jonah:  We all know you like her. What is your point?

Paul:  Look back? 

TJ:  Something we learned from Amber

TJ:  She said that if a person looks back at someone, it means they like them

TJ:  And Marty, you already like her wtf 

Marty:  The group chat was too quiet...

TJ:  I'm in the middle of something here

Jonah:  Yeah, practicing the guitar right now

Paul:  Watching Big Time Rush

Marty changed the subject from "No Exit (Marty, stop changing the name, please)" to "space otters united" 

I am sure Marty wants to tell us about his date so badly. But he has to wait a bit more to do so. I finally let my father enter our bathroom. And go back to my seat. My mom tells Cyrus some of her stories about teaching the piano. And then, my grandparents tell him how much they wanted to take me from them the first time they heard my full name. I try to not look embarrassed at all, but I feel Cyrus squeezing my hand under the table. I feel relieved when my father offers to go and watch the movie my grandparents brought. Cyrus and I stay at the table for a few minutes more. 

"Now, you know more about me than anyone else. You are stuck with the Kippens from now on." I tell him, trying my best to not blush again. 

"I don't mind. Maybe we can tell this story to... Taylor?" he says, leaving confused. 

"Who in the world is Taylor?" I am clearly confused. 

"If I recall what your grandmother asked me... our future daughter." 

I close my eyes without holding back my laughter, and he does the same. I put my face on his chest, embarrassed by my family occurrences. But deep down happy that he didn't hate that idea. But we can still discuss the name. I look at him, just appreciating his face. 

"I love you so much, Cyrus,"

Andi's POV

This is one of those days when I have nothing to do. No planning for the next round or the next small event at the gallery. Not telling others what to do or arguing because we have different ideas. Even though I have nothing to do today, I still think about my fight with Cyrus. I tried calling him a few hours ago, but Buffy told me he had plans with TJ and his family. Actually, it seems like everyone has plans. So, I stayed at home with my mother and Kai. We are in the kitchen eating pizza. While my little brother sees how we take bite after bite and talk about the first thing it comes to our minds. One of those was my plans to save my friendship with my best friend since we were kids, his musical, and my battle of the bands. 

"I don't get it," she says, putting down her slice of pizza. 

"I will not change the date, nor will Cyrus. I thought to change the hour the finale starts."

"And are you sure that will work? Doesn't Cyrus need Blue super early at the theater?" my mother makes this too hard to explain. 

"Mom! It won't be that close to Cyrus' premiere" I turn to Kai. He has not cried in an hour; it is a Mack house record. Then I look at her again. "The musical starts at 9 pm. I will do this thing at 2 pm. It gives him enough time, right?" 

She does not look convinced of my plan, so I continue with more details. Like if The Rose Ladies make it to the finals, Blue will have everything to be able to get to Cyrus on time.

"Have you talked to him about this?" 

"No, he is at a family thing with TJ." I sigh. 

"Oh, they are serious" I look at her in confusion. "That is basically being engaged." 

"It kind of looks like that... in no time, they will move in together... oh my... I have to spend more time with him!" I add some dramatism to my voice. 

"Yeah, I get it. I exaggerated a bit." 

"Do we believe that, Kai?" I say in the voice tone he laughs at every time. "Yeah, we don't believe you." 

She throws me a napkin, and we both laugh, listening to the door open. My dad came home early to eat some of the pizza we had almost finished. 

Paul's POV

After those texts and knowing about the look back. It looks like I like Jane. What am I supposed to do with that information? I can't tell TJ. He is on a family reunion with Cyrus, and Marty is on the date. Jonah must be busy with his guitar. Yeah, my sisters are not an option... and honestly, the guys either. As Buffy told me, they might say something. And I am not sure about telling Buffy. I mean she is friends with her... and she is with Marty. I walk around my room, unable to think of anything else. All I have in my head is her and how I did that. I grab my phone, hoping it gives me a sign... and somehow it does. I have a message from Jo. I reply to the pic she sent me and then write my ultra-serious alert. 

Paul:  Jo, we have an emergency. Please, call me whenever you have the time. 

As usual, she requests a video call. I accept it and find her in the backseat of a car, looking worried about me. She clearly is with her boyfriend, Robby, since I hear his voice asking her what's wrong. I clear my throat and finally decide to speak. 

"Hey, Jo..." I try to smile as I always do, but my awkward smile comes out instead. 

"Hi, P. Are you okay? You look worried." 

"I talked to the guys. Marty mentioned something about a look back... and I did that... I looked back at Jane..." I take a deep breath, lowering my voice tone, not even caring if she gets any of what I am saying. "And well, I think I actually like her... in a romantic way," 

"But that is so cute, Paul! Why all the worry?" she asks me in confusion. I can't say much, but a glance is enough for her to understand. "Tell me, how is she?" 

"She is so smart and fun to be with. She makes me feel this inner peace every time we are close. Her father scares me, and he is my teacher, but she is nothing like him. She gave me my puppy... and before you ask, yes, I called him Johnny as you suggested" I see how Robby joins her to look at me. "I need some advice, please." 

"You could..." 

"Leave it to me, darling," Robby interrupts her. "If you need good advice, it better be from me." 

"I won't let you make Jane hit Paul," 

"Not all women have your temper, Jo." He looks at her. "If you want her to be interested in you, all you have to do is to become her best friend. That way, she'll feel comfortable around you. And you will spend more time together, and everything will take place." 

"I think you should be romantic. Write a song for her, or even better... give her roses. But always be yourself. That is so important and will make her fall for you." 

"Alright... I think I get what you two say. But I am so awkward around everybody." I close my eyes. "If science has taught me something, is you can try different hypothesizes, maybe I can apply it to this." I smile at my favorite straight couple. "Thank you, guys. Enjoy Mexico! I hope you can make it to Shadyside before the battle of the bands ends." 

"Good luck, P!" she says excitedly. "Everything will be great with Jane and the battle. I hope we can meet soon" she blows me a kiss. "I'll take Robby with me so you can meet him properly." 

"Bye!" they say in unison. 

"See you, guys!" I end the call. 

I’m not going to lie. I still feel worried, but somehow the advice gave me an idea. I still need to find a way to get closer to Jane. I mean, besides our study lessons. Maybe I can invite her to, actually, drink a milkshake at The Spoon or go to Red Rooster. Maybe to play with Johnny too.

I hear voices coming from Darcy's room. I take Johnny in my arms and go downstairs. These days I've been taking medicine. Again.

Cyrus' POV

Spending the evening with TJ and his family has been my favorite part of the week, and it just started. His grandparents are the sweetest people. And I kind of loved when they suggested the dame for our future daughter... even though we have never talked about something like that before. All the food was incredible, and I enjoyed the movie so much. We also had a music break, where everybody had to sing a song. And it was my opportunity to sing a Taylor Swift song to him. I don't consider myself the best singer, but I did my best with my performance of Lover. And I guess it turned out great since the rest of the Kippens were so excited during it.

But right now, TJ and I are sitting on the couch while his family is in the kitchen discussing the ingredients for the special Kippen cookies. A recipe I can't hear a word from since I am not one of them. So, we are just listening to the music his father choose. Holding hands and my head in his chest. 

"TJ..." I move to face him. 

"Yeah?" 

"Thank you for today. It has been magical." 

"Magical?" he asks, and a small smile shows up. 

"Yes. I found out every day is magical if we are together... but meeting your full family made this ten times more of it." 

"You know... my favorite part of this magical day was when you sang Lover" he caresses my cheek. 

"I told you I would do it" I smile at him. "I love you, TJ, so much." 

I make sure no one leaves the kitchen and move closer to his face. With a smile from both of us, we press our lips together in a sweet kiss. I let myself be carried away by TJ's familiar vanilla taste. And I can almost feel how we are both not here, on the couch, and we are transported to a place only the two of us know. That place his kisses take me to. When we pull apart, I stare into his eyes.

"I'm so lucky to have you," I tell him, intertwining our fingers. 

Marty's POV

Buffy and I are competing in the same game. That is how our evening has been. We ride many games, and yeah, I tried not to cry in some of them. But seeing her so happy and free made me take some time and appreciate her more. I had been looking for the best moment to tell her my feelings. And this time, no one will run away. I know she's been patient. Now I am ready. We've been about twenty minutes trying to see who wins first. Although we both finished the game, she did it first. We pick some stuffed animals. I stare at mine for a few seconds before giving it to her. She smiles and gives me hers. Do you want to know something? I think we are one step away from becoming a couple... but who will make the question? 

"Buffy..." she turns to me, a bit confused. 

"Yeah? You don't want to eat nachos?" 

"No, no. I want to eat nachos..." I smile. "But there is something I wanted to tell you."

"Then tell me," she says, as usual, confident. 

"I know it's been a while since we had our first date, and when you said you like me..." I take a deep breath before meeting her eyes. "And I... I wanted to tell you how much I like you... but I think that is pretty obvious" I smile. "I just want to be with you. We are a good match, a good team. And I like you so much every person in Shadyside can confirm that..." I make a short pause, analyzing my words. "So... is there any chance we can be a couple?" 

She does not say a word. And that makes me want to cry. Did she get over me? But if she did, why are we on a date? Or did my words leave her speechless? I need answers. 

"Yes..." I finally hear her voice. "I thought it was obvious I wanted to be in a relationship with you since I yelled at you, I like you, you idiot." 

We both smile at each other, and then I take a few steps forward, holding her hand. Feeling every little Marty in my brain throw a big party for this moment. She looks at me for more seconds than she would like to admit and pulls me close enough to kiss me.

Chapter Text

TJ's POV

We hang out at Jonah's house before heading to the battle of the bands. Marty and I are helping Jonah's father cook some special Becks' spaghetti since his son is terrible at it. There is still some time until the next round, so we can eat and talk peacefully. Before we take the car. Jonah stares at us cooking while he eats some of the ingredients on the counter, like the tomatoes. Paul had an important meeting with some of his professors. He is determined to get the best grades possible. So his dad doesn't make him quit the band. But he should be here any minute by now. 

I tell everybody how excited I am about Cyrus' musical. I know I talk too much about him. A bit more than a year since we became friends. And I still talk about him like the first time. He has been busy these days, so we have small daily dates. They are thirty-minute ones, but they are as great as the others.

A well-known deep voice draws our attention. Paul is finally here and with good news, judging by his smile. He asks us to have a short meeting in the practice room, and we all follow him. Once we are there, he shows us something written in one of his school's notebooks. And as we read, he speaks. 

"Love comes in many forms. You inspired me to write this. Love Parade celebrates love" Paul has this smile on his face. 

"Why are you such a genius, Paul?" Marty pats our friend's shoulder. 

"But for real, how do you even find the time to write songs?" Jonah asks him. 

"Yeah... it's worth it... this song is incredible!" I smile, seeing his face illuminate with our words. 

"I assume you like it as much as I do," he says, sounding shy as we meet him. 

"There is no need to be shy. We have known each other for like a year" I pat his shoulder. 

"You know what will make you feel confident? Spaghetti. Come on, we are almost finished" Marty leads us back to the kitchen. 

We finish the spaghetti between laughs and every kind of story we have to share. Then we prepare to go to the battle of the bands. We chose some interesting clothes for today. As you know, we have to sing a Grease song. So we wanted to match ours... and we dressed similarly to one character. But I won't tell you about it. You have to wait and see the song we picked. 

Amber's POV

Iris and I wait for some coffee. She seems to be working a lot. But she looks happy. Whatever she is doing, it's working. Today is the seventh round of the battle. Know what it means? We are almost over. There is not much left to finally see who will win the event. So, this is basically the round we get two bands out, and the last one is only a way to rank the last four bands. Whoever gets the first place will go on tour with The Renaissance Boys. And I know I should not be saying this, but really want No Exit to win. But first, they need to make it to the last round. With the fair coming up, we will have plenty of time to make everything perfect. 

Andi found a way to not interfere with Cyrus' musical. But she has not talked to him... yet. She planned a whole dinner after today's round to discuss it with him. But the rest of the team is not invited, and I get it, I mean, they are best friends. Just like Iris and I. I don't even know what she is up to lately, but now, noticing her expressions as we talked about tonight's round, I know something is going on. So, I put my coffee down, doubting if I should ask her, but after a sigh, the words start coming out of my mouth. 

"So... is there any news about your life? Probably something going on? Something you might want to talk about... or ask about?" 

"Actually, yeah..." she nods as she puts her coffee down. "I am working with two members of Fire Bite and Search respectively... we plan to launch a magazine..." 

"Iris! That is awesome!"

"Yeah? I wasn't sure about telling you... or TJ... I wanted it to be a big surprise but..." we stare at each other in complete silence. "But I kind of need your help..." 

"I am always happy to help." I encourage her with a small smile. 

"Do you have an idea who are the favorite bands or possible winners? We have a great idea for our first cover. And it involves the last four bands..." she awkwardly smiles. 

"I hate breaking the illusion, but not even Andi knows that. Only the guys of The Renaissance Boys know since they are the judges," I wrinkle my nose. 

For the rest of the hour, the conversation was about her and this new project. She didn't tell me about the cover, but we share the same wish. We both want No Exit to win the battle of the bands. We can't help it TJ is our best friend. And we are No Exit fans for life. Even if my job does not let me have a favorite band. 

Cyrus' POV

Andi wanted to have dinner after today's round. But I am so busy these days, so I had to cancel. CeCe and I have an emergency meeting with our leads and the wardrobe department. The premiere is only a few weeks away, and we start to have some little problems, just like in my past musical. That means panic attacks are unpredictable. And with TJ being focused on the band. I have to deal with those by myself most of the time. But tonight is his night. We will know if No Exit makes it to the last round. And yes, we all are nervous about it. I am a supportive boyfriend, so it means I have to be extra positive around him. 

I make it to the battle and see Andi talking to Walker. They are the only ones here, so I suppose Amber and Libby are somewhere else doing different tasks. I walk up to them, cautious but confident. Walker notices me, and he greets me with a smile. Andi does not look surprised to see me there after I canceled our dinner. We end up walking to the stage so we can have some privacy. 

"Sorry, I had to cancel because..."

"You have an emergency, I know. CeCe told us in the family group chat... she is not making it to babysit Kai" she let out a weak and almost unnoticeable sigh. 

"So you have to babysit him instead," she nods. "Good luck with him," 

"Thanks... I guess I won't sleep that well tonight," 

"You barely sleep, Andi," 

"That's right!" she chuckles. "Anyway, I wanted to show you this," 

She hands me a flyer. Her face is full of hope, curiosity, excitement, and worry, at the same time. I stare at the folded paper for a few seconds, confused about it. But when I finally decide to read it, my eyebrows raise in surprise, and my mouth is unable to let me say any words, so it remains open. Any insect can land in there, and I won't be able to speak. 

"So... what do you think?" she asks, showing me a big smile. 

"Uhm... I am not sure what to say. I am impressed... in a good way. But... are you sure of this?" 

"Absolutely. Changing the hour won't hurt the battle..." she meets my eyes. "And we all can go and support you in the musical, which is so important," 

"The battle is also important! And I'll be here, I promise. Even if that means leaving CeCe in charge, and with so much stress..." 

"We can make it up to her, right?" she looks worried. 

"Yes, we can. We must think of a way to do it," 

We both laugh after a few seconds. I can't believe she made this for me. I mean. She is my best friend, but I never thought she would give up her initial schedule for me. I pull her in a hug and tell her how important she is to me. And how much I love her. Because I do. I love her, and I love Buffy. Their friendship has been everything to me for years and after feeling a bit, not in the spotlight. Now, we are sharing it. And it feels great. 

Buffy's POV

We are finally ready for this round of the battle of the bands. We have made it so far we can barely believe we are about to sing a Grease song. We already have our costumes on, courtesy of Jane's mother. Her parents are happy for her but have not come a single time to see us, same with Blue's parents. But Rowan's and mine are the ones who come to every round to support us. Even Rowan's little brother made a sign for his mom to use. But maybe that is not what you all want to hear about. Should I talk about Marty instead? We are doing great as an official couple. We are even Twitter and Instagram officials. We are slowly becoming the annoyingly cute couple Cyrus and TJ are. 

"Hello, precious girl..." I feel Marty's hand taking mine. "Are you ready for tonight's round?" 

"Hi, pretty boy..." I smile, leaving a kiss on his cheek. "I am so ready," 

"One couple was annoying, but now we have two?" Jonah's voice draws everyone's attention. I raise an eyebrow at him. "I mean. One couple was lovely, and now we have two of them!" 

"Smart save, Beck" Rowan looks playfully at him. 

"This is a nice No Exit and The Rose Ladies reunion we have going on here," TJ says, looking at the seven of us. "But if you all don't mind... I need my bassist so our stylist can do her magic," 

Marty gives me a small kiss and returns with the rest of the guys. I smile at him for too long, but as soon as I hear Rowan's voice giving us a motivational speech, I turn to my band, focusing on tonight's round. Then we hear Walker and Andi introducing Search as the first band, we gather with the other bands to watch them perform Grease Lightin' dressed as the T-Birds in the movie. Their leader is dressed as Danny, and their other guitarist is dressed as Kenickie. The rest of them are dressed like the ones fixing the car. 

"They are so talented..." Blue tells me, pulling me away once they finish their song. "Like so talented," 

"And so we are! Our song is great, and our costumes are incredible! We will make it, Blue" I place my hand on her shoulder. 

"Don't worry, Darcy. We will be one of the fantastic four" Rowan stands next to her best friend and presses their heads together. 

"It's too much pressure for a one-time-event band..." Jane starts. "But it does not mean we are less talented for being new to this world... we are standing right here because we are as talented as the other five bands, don't forget it," 

"And your brother is here. He hypes the band so much... it's kind of embarrassing, but if he sees our talent... we should do it too," I add. 

We pull Blue into a group hug. I am nervous as hell too, but I try to stay positive. Andi and Cyrus wished me good luck in our group chat. 

I spot Marty and the rest of No Exit passing by. But they don't interrupt us. Once our bonding time is over. We prepare to watch love loop's performance. 

Paul's POV

Fire Bite just ended their performance with We Go Together. There are only three bands left. The Rose Ladies, :m (mind), and us. We all gather near the stage, and when Andi and Walker start complimenting them, every band minds their own business. Well, kind of. TJ is talking to Cyrus; Marty and Buffy are taking some pictures, Jonah and Rowan are playing some game on her phone, and Blue is telling Gen everything that has happened at the theater. And yes, that leaves Jane playing with her hands standing next to me. And me not knowing what to say to her. I've been trying to follow Jo and Robby's advice... but I just don't know how actually make them function. 

I grab my phone and text Jo. Hopefully, she is having a break from her trip around Mexico. That girl has a life ten thousand times more interesting than mine. I stare at the screen seeing my message has not been delivered, so I do what my brain thinks she and Robby would tell me. 

"Are you ready to play?" I ask her, showing my awkward smile. 

"Yes, I love this movie, so... I am excited to play..." she stops staring at her hands, and our eyes finally meet. "What about you?"

"Oh, well, it's a slow song... I will sing too. Honestly, I am somewhat nervous," 

"You have a pretty voice... you'll be fine" her eyes move quickly, looking for someone else after she says that. 

"Your voice is also pretty... and your... your hair... it's looking pretty cool tonight, and every night... and day!" great Paul.

"Thanks..." she smiles. "I'll see you later... it's almost your turn," 

"Absolutely! Good luck too!" I give her finger guns... why did I do that? Paul, what are you even thinking of? 

She nods and joins the rest of her band. I close my eyes, sighing at my terrible decision. But trying to focus on our upcoming performance. I take my Pink Ladies jacket, ready to walk with Jonah and Marty when I hear TJ's voice behind me. 

"Did you just give Jane finger guns? Why?"

"I don't know, Teej," I say, again closing my eyes and taking a deep breath. I do know why. I am terrible at flirting or whatever I tried to do. 

Luckily, he was the only one to see me doing that, so I can continue my life the way it was. He pats my back before we join the guys. Andi and Walker are also waiting for the current band, :m (mind), to finish Summer Nights... this is it. This is the last round before one of us makes it to the tour. Before the real battle starts. I squeeze my drumsticks a little, trying to make the nervousness disappear. 

Andi's POV

Walker and I wait for :m (mind) to end their performance. We are both dressed as cheerleaders from the movie. While Amber and Libby are dressed in the typical dress and skirt of the 50s. The stage is decorated like the gym in it. It took us two days to finish it, but we had some help from Iris and my dad. The place looks good, and we look great. The bands have been incredible, and we still have two more left. I can't believe we are almost in the final round... but most importantly, Cyrus and I are on good terms and supporting each other's project. We even had a great idea to work together. It was inspired by this round of the battle. Can you guess what it is? 

I take a deep breath and put a smile on my face as we do our Sharpay and Ryan thing. Amber stares at me for a few seconds before I grab the microphone. She wraps her arms around me and leaves a kiss on my cheek, giving me enough energy to go and introduce No Exit as the next band. Walker taps my shoulder, telling me it's time to work. Amber wishes us luck and joins Libby. I take Walker's hand, walking into the stage. 

"How amazing that performance was?" he shouts to his microphone. "I have to admit, all these songs are my favorite ones..." 

"I hope you have more to that list because we have two songs left..." I say, facing him. 

"Who is ready for a nostalgic and heartbreaking song? I know you know which song comes next" he makes the people cheer. 

"We know the song... but who is the next band?" I add a mysterious tone to my voice. 

"You know them, and they know this stage so well... please welcome..." 

"The talented..." 

"No Exit!" we say in unison. 

"Singing to all of you Hopelessly Devoted To You!" I am the one shouting this time.  

Walker takes my hand, making me dance with him as Born To Hand Jive plays. 

This has been probably the best idea we ever had. This round has been so dynamic, fun, and unforgettable. We are not the only ones dancing to it even the people sing and dance too. We also have prepared to play Grease once the last four bands are announced, but before considering it, we need to let No Exit perform. 

TJ's POV

We take the chance for a band reunion when Andi and Walker start dancing on the stage along to a song and cheering people. Jonah gives us a motivational speech full of beautiful words to each of us, including himself. We give each other a long hug before Marty opens his mouth, making all of us laugh between something that might look like teary eyes. 

"Why does Paul have to wear a Pink Ladies jacket, and I don't?" 

"Low budget, now shut up and sink into the hug," I say without thinking about my words much. 

"How can it be the low budget? You are dressed as Sandy..." 

"He is blonde," Jonah responds. 

"Are we really arguing about the clothes? Because Gen might hear us, and she will not be happy..." Paul's deep voice makes us all stop talking. 

"And he only will wear these for like twenty seconds, he has the PJs after all... like the rest of us..." I smile.  

Genevieve appears a few seconds later, and we all hold back our laughter. She is confused by our behavior and only tells us to get ready since the song is about to end. We put our hands together and shout No Exit before waiting for our sign to walk into the stage. Cyrus stands in front of me and gives me a good luck kiss, telling me he will be right there watching my performance and rooting for us. Blue also wishes us good luck, and she hugs Paul. Buffy only takes Marty's hand and stares into his eyes as she tells him encouraging words. Jonah has his eyes glued to the stage, just in time to turn to us. 

"Let's go! It's our turn, guys!" he claps his hands as we walk toward him. 

We make it to our instruments, smiles on all of our faces, mixed with fear and nervousness. Once Andi and Walker leave the stage, Paul starts with the drums as Jonah follows him ten seconds later. Marty and I are the next ones. I lean to the microphone, ready to sing. 

[TJ]: Guess mine is not the first heart broken | My eyes are not the first to cry | I'm not the first to know | There's just no getting over you. 

[Paul]: I know I'm just a fool who's willing | To sit around and wait for you | But baby, can't you see there's nothing else for me to do? | I'm hopelessly devoted to you

[Jonah &  Marty ]:  But now there's nowhere to hide  |  Since you pushed my love aside  |  I'm out of my head  | Hopelessly devoted to you | Hopelessly devoted to you | Hopelessly devoted to you

[TJ &  Paul ]: My head is sayin', "Fool, forget him" | My heart is sayin', "Don't let go | Hold on to the end", that's what I intend to do | I'm hopelessly devoted to you

As we get close to the end of the song. I feel like I am dreaming. We decided to perform this song when we all went to band practice at Jonah's. His dad let us borrow his movie to check on the songs, and we loved that scene. And now, we are here, singing the last line of the song, with the people singing along to it. Jonah ends the song with his guitar, and we gather at the center of the stage, as a team would do, and thank everyone, including us, for the experience. When Andi and Walker join us, they continue with their happy energy as they introduce The Rose Ladies. I spot Cyrus and walk where he is, taking his hand and giving him a warm smile. I don't care if we don't make it to the last round because he has been here the whole time. And that is enough. 

Buffy's POV

As we see No Exit leave the stage. We have our own band reunion, but we don't say much. We hold hands and only stare at each other while waiting for Andi and Walker to do their thing. I am nervous... we all are. You can feel it. We are afraid of not making it. But... why are we feeling like that? We were supposed to not take this seriously since we are not an official band... and here we are... getting worried, doing exactly what we planned not to do. Rowan is the first one to speak, as always. She takes a deep breath before continuing. Her words are what we needed to hear. This has been her most motivating speech. Blue squeezes my hand a little, probably telling me to stop Rowan for a minute. She is our leader, and she might want a few words. I turn to our bassist and clear my throat. She apologizes for talking too much, but Blue runs a hand through her hair, thanking her for the beautiful words. 

"Thank you, Rowan, for such a speech." she starts. “Ladies, we have a job to do... let's just forget how big this is... and have fun... we have a great song with a danceable rhythm. We can enjoy it," 

"Also, the mix we have of T-Birds and Pink Ladies it's our greatest idea," I add. 

"There is no pressure. We don't have to win this thing..." she smiles. 

"I think even if we don't win the battle of the bands... we won our friendship," Jane says, taking one step forward. "We were basically strangers... and look how far we have made it," 

"Look at us... being so emotional..." Rowan jokes. 

"As if we were never going to see each other after this..." I say, with teary eyes and everything. 

We give each other a big group hug, just in time to hear our band name in Walker's voice. So, we walk towards the stage, still holding hands. Jane is wearing a T-Birds jacket, and I am wearing a Pink Ladies one. Rowan is dressed as Sandy in that scene, and Blue as Danny. Any clue about our song? You're The One That I Want. An easy choice if you ask me. I made a choreography for this song once, and Rowan already knows how to play it on the bass. It took us about two minutes to pick this one. 

I take place in the drums, waiting for Jane to start playing. She takes a deep breath before starting, then we join her one by one. Seconds later, once our intro is done, Blue takes her sweater away and leans closer to her microphone. 

[Blue]: I got chills, they're multiplying | And I'm losing control | 'Cause the power you're supplying | It's electrifying

[Rowan]: You better shape up | 'Cause I need a man | And my heart is set on you 

[ Blue  & Rowan]: You better understand | To my heart I must be true |  Nothin' left, nothin' left for me to do 

[ Buffy & Jane ; Blue & Rowan]: You're the one that I want  (you are the one I want)  | Ooh, ooh, ooh, honey | The one that I want  (you are the one I want)  | Ooh, ooh, ooh, honey | The one that I want  (you are the one I want)  | Ooh, ooh, ooh | The one I need  (the one I need)  | Oh, yes indeed  (yes, indeed)  

[Rowan]: If you're filled with affection| You're too shy to convey | Meditate in my direction | Feel your way

In this song, Jane's keyboard is the instrument that shines the most, along with my drums. Reason why we don't have many lines beside a small part in the chorus. This is an energetic song. We have to focus on what we are playing more than singing. Instead, Rowan and Blue make a perfect duo, singing and playing the bass and guitar. When we reach the last seconds of the song, and the people cheer, we smile at each other. We are a true band now. 

Andi's POV

There is absolute silence as Amber, Libby, Walker, and I wait for The Renaissance Boys to give us the envelope with the bands. The fantastic four, as Walker started to call them. I'd be lying if I said I am not nervous. Every band worked hard to be part of it, the last round. I cannot even imagine how Buffy and Jonah are doing right now. Amber tells us to keep waiting as she and Libby go to see the bands and play some music as the audience awaits. I play with my hands and make some noises with my mouth. When three guys appear in front of us, holding that piece of paper we want to read. 

"It was a tough decision," Ralph says, nodding as he hands me the envelope. "You better hurry. The bands are waiting... and I wouldn't want to be in their place right now," 

"We will, thank you, guys" I smile at them one last time before taking Walker's hand. 

"Are you ready?" he asks me as we approach the stage. 

"Nope," I take a deep breath. 

We share glances and grab our microphones, walking to the center. The bands are now on the stage, waiting for the results. I smile at my friends before turning to Walker, who is already joking with the audience. I let him continue until things get serious. 

"And the first band to be in the last round is..." he starts. "Search!" 

"Congrats, guys!" I see how they walk almost to the edge of the stage. "Now... the second band to be in the last round is..." I take off the sticker on the paper, revealing a name I was hoping for. "No Exit!" 

"Our third band to join us is..." he takes a second to read the name. "The Rose Ladies!" we turn to them and their surprised faces. 

"And our fourth finalist band is..." I have the biggest smile on my face. "Fire Bite!" 

"Please, let's hear it for our finalists!" Walker has his usual energy back. "And don't forget about love loop and :m (mind), they worked hard to be here, keep an eye on them!" 

"And don't forget..." I start. 

"Grease is the word!" we say in unison.

Grease plays as we leave the stage, and the bands stay there, dancing to the music and chatting. And as soon as I see Amber, I give her one of my most passionate kisses. This is what happiness does to me. She is surprised, but she follows my lead. Now things are getting bigger. The last round is around the corner. 

Chapter Text

Buffy's POV

It's the week of the fair Cyrus and TJ will be definitely attending. And I am in my room with the girls. Rowan sits in my bed with Jane while Blue and I write options for the last round. After the fantastic four were announced, Iris, Maddie, and Emma invited us to be part of their magazine's first cover. We did not think twice and said yes. We had a great time along with women from the other bands. They also said we were seeing the whole thing soon before the last round. And now, Rowan complains about it since she already wants to read her interview and see her pictures. Oh, and of course, see herself on the cover. 

"You know. I hate not being able to tell people we are on the cover of a magazine" Rowan takes another apple slice. "They said it will be out today... and well, it's been fourteen hours in the day, and I don't see any posts about it..." 

"Rowan..." Blue calls her best friend's name. 

"Yeah?" 

"Shut up," she smiles. "We are trying to choose a song for the last round right here," 

Jane lets out a small laugh and joins us on the floor. Rowan sighs and keeps eating while we say our options clear enough for her to keep saying no to all of them. We are not sure what song we want, but we know we want something different, not our usual topic to sing about. I was thinking of a song that captures our friendship, but we have one obstacle. There is no song. And writing a new one would take us days since Blue barely gets a break from the musical, school, and the band. Jane started to help her parents with the animal shelter. Rowan has been babysitting her little brother, and I have more classes than before. So, writing a song is not the best option now. At this point, we are about to give up everything and just sing another love song. I let out a frustrated sigh, moving my neck a bit. Blue is still playing with her pen, making some noises with it. Rowan is almost done with every apple I have in my house. And Jane takes her phone because it was ringing nonstop three minutes ago. 

"It’s out, it's out, it's out!" Jane shows us her phone screen. The Rocking Shadyside Magazine account finally posted about their first issue and our cover. 

And there is our cover, our group interview, and individual ones. Our group picture looks incredible, and it captures a calm vibe of us when we are the opposite in our reunions. Maddie and Iris did a great job with the whole thing. The Rose Ladies is now a band who appeared in a magazine. How cool is that? 

"I can't believe how great we look. Emma is an incredible photographer." Rowan says, staring at our section. "And Jane, you look flawless, I'm sure that guy from your tweet will definitely fall for you after seeing this" 

"Agree. Even if we still don't know who this mysterious guy is..." Blue adds, looking up from her screen. 

"Yeah... who is the guy? I don't see you interact with many guys," 

"Uhm... is it relevant to know his identity when we are talking about the magazine?" she responds, letting out a fake and nervous laugh. I don't say anything, but Rowan keeps insisting on knowing who the guy is. And we know very well she can't just say it's Paul. But I have a plan.

"Oh my... I got it!" I turn to them. 

"What? Who the guy is?" Rowan asks. 

"No. The song!" 

"Speak, please" Blue put her phone down. 

"The one you wrote when I had my date with Marty," 

"The breakup song?" Jane looks confused. 

"Yeah. Think about it... it's a topic we don't sing often... and that song was a masterpiece" I smile. 

It took them a few minutes to start linking the idea, but in the end, we all agreed to sing our newest song. I check my phone while Rowan keeps suggesting how we should assign lines to find Marty fanboying over our cover and interviews. Especially mine. I smile as I read his texts. Then I join the girls in our ongoing discussion about the lines. 

Paul's POV

I was doing a group project when TJ sent me a tweet. My little sister, you all know her. Her name is Darcy Kim. She is nineteen, part of The Rose Ladies, and is the lead in Cyrus' musical. We also call her Blue. Well, she is on the very first cover of Rocking Shadyside Magazine. With the rest of her band, the women from Fire Bite and Search. But she is there, and I am sure my parents will be happy about it... or at least my mom. Because I am happy and proud. I am so proud I can't describe it with words. But I took my things after reading the post and invented an excuse to get out of class. I need to meet with her. I am about to enter The Spoon when I receive her reply. 

Blue:  I'm with the band, sorry. I'll see you at the house later. Prepare for a mini Big Time Rush marathon, let the ramyeon to me

Paul:  We are about to start the third season. YOU prepare for the Lucy VS Jo fight 

Blue:  I see, you are still team Jo... well, I'll give you a good fight this time 

Paul:  I'm sure you're only team Lucy because of her hair 

Blue:  SHE IS AN ICON!!!! 

I stop at the window, preparing to leave right to my house when I see my band eating there. I forgot they were to stay here waiting for me. Now, they don't have to wait another hour. I enter the place and contain my laughter when I see their faces. I explain to them why I left and take a seat next to Jonah. Marty talks about which song we will sing at the last round. TJ gives some options, and two, written by TJ and Jonah, appear to be our finalists, but we take a break from it when I order my milkshake. They keep talking about the finale when I remember the song I wrote in Jane's father's class. I almost choke on my strawberry milkshake, but seconds later, I show them the notebook. 

"The Dreaming?" Jonah looks up from my notebook. 

"Yeah... do you guys like it?"

"How much free time do you have? You go to school, have a million assignments, and still write songs" TJ stares at the lyrics. 

"Great songs," Marty adds. 

"The inspiration just kicks in when I am in class..." 

"Maybe we all should take your classes,"  

"No." TJ turns to him. 

"It looks like we just found our song for the last round..." Jonah smiles. 

"What?" I ask, surprised by his words. 

"Oh, I like it. The Dreaming is the perfect song," TJ adds excitedly. 

"Are you sure? You two have great songs and..." I take a deep breath. "We'll have to work so much on this one," 

"It'll be worth it," Jonah winks at me. 

I slowly nod as they keep talking about the song, my song. I thought one was all right, but this is the next level. Again, I have the pressure of not making it, but now we win or not. I bring my milkshake closer to my mouth and drink it. All I think of is texting my best friend, Jo. So I grab my phone while Marty and TJ order some hamburgers for all of us. 

Paul:  The guys liked my song. The one I talked to you about... 

Paul:  We will sing it in the last round... I AM FREAKING OUT  

I spot a text from Jane too. She asked me to move our study session to another hour since Buffy decided to meet early with her and the band. I end up inviting her to Tony's once she gently rejects meeting at my house. I guess this is some kind of date, right? I have a "date" with her. Well, a study date. But still a date. Now, I need some more advice from Josephine and Robby. I open our group chat, explaining to them what just happened. When an e-mail catches my attention... a grade from an exam I had the other day... and it's not what my parents expect... this one will be hard to justify.

Iris' POV

Amber and I wait for TJ at her house. She wants to bake some cupcakes for Andi and her family. They invited her to a family dinner, but this time it looks like something serious. I arrived late since Maddie asked me to celebrate with them with at least one ice cream. Our magazine is out! And everybody can read it now. It is basically a welcome to Rocking Shadyside Magazine. Every article mostly written by Maddie has a deep meaning of how much it took us to create it. These past weeks have been confusing to me. I spent so much time with her, and it all felt great. She is still as flirty as before, maybe more. But Walker has been so nice to me lately. He invites me to beautiful places, and we create art together, all the time. And well... I think I already have an answer to that question, but I want to hear it from my best friends. Spoiler? I like both of them. Maddie and Walker. Is that even possible? 

TJ enters the kitchen seeing the mess we already made. I am not good at baking... and neither is he, but this is Amber's way of spending time with us. He follows every step she tells him as they talk about their relationships. I tell them about the magazine, and they congratulate me. TJ is still surprised by it. Everything feels like the old times... except I have to open my mouth... just like the last time. 

"Is it normal to like two people at the same time?" I turn to my best friends. "Like having a crush on both of them... with the same intensity," 

"You have a crush?" TJ asks in surprise. "I mean... two?" I nod, worried about their reaction. 

"Now that is a surprise!" Amber keeps holding the decorations. "Who are they?" 

"Uhm... well, I have a crush on Walker. That was pretty obvious, I guess, and the other person is..." I try to find a way to say it, but this will probably mess up everything I thought I was... if that is possible. "Maddie... Fire Bite's leader and my coworker at Rocking Shadyside," 

"Do you want to make a decision?" Amber asks softly. 

"I don't know... I feel lost, actually... I mean, how can I like both?" 

"Maybe you have to decide... do you think they like you back?" he puts the cupcake mold aside. 

"I am surprised by how clueless you are, TJ Kippen" Amber turns to him. "Walker's crush is obvious! And I don't know Maddie that well, but I noticed something going on between you two," 

"This is not helping, guys," I say. 

I prefer not to touch the topic again. But made clear the fact I have to decide. But I'm not sure if I want to do it. I don't know who I like the most. As the hours keep passing, my phone keeps illuminating with new messages from them. 

Buffy's POV

Blue and Rowan left my house earlier than we expected, but they had to attend some business at the theater and the store. Now with the song and our lines prepared, we don't have much to do. Except for the clothes we will wear. I told them to meet tomorrow to discuss it with Jane's mother. She agreed immediately but seemed worried somehow. So, once they left and I finally got to stay alone with her, she told me what happened. She had plans with Paul tomorrow, at the same hour. They ended up changing everything. Everything.

"Is that considered a date?" Jane asks me as I read the messages Paul sent her earlier. 

"I don't know, Jane. Paul is difficult to read sometimes," I give her back her phone. "But now I know who he is meeting every day!" 

"It's not every day, but yes, it is me. It started as me looking for a new friend... but it ended in this," she sighs. 

"You know what? You have to choose what to wear... he mentioned first Fire Bite's performance before his studies" I can see a sparkle of hope on her face. "And someday you will have to tell Blue how you feel..." 

"I know... it's just... I'm afraid," she looks at her shoes. "It's scary to think of her hating on me or something," 

"Come on, we are talking about Darcy Kim. She adores you... and I am sure she'd be surprised someone has a crush on Paul," I joke, hoping to see her relax. 

"That's true... I guess the inevitable is happening... I'll tell her soon," she smiles, taking her stuff. "I better go. I don't want to ruin your date with Marty," 

That's right. I had a date with Marty, but he canceled to help his mom cook something. And thanks to that, now I can go and help Cyrus at the theater. He didn't specify what he needs me to do, but I don't care. Stay occupied is what I need right now. So, I take my things and look for my keys. After the musical and the battle of the bands, I'll definitely take a vacation. Even from my classes. 

Jonah's POV

I am outside Gen's store, waiting for someone to open the door. It was awkward to even get a message from her the day we closed early. She knows how stressed we are with the battle of the bands... but the more I think of it... this could be related. What if she found some cool clothes for us to wear in the finale? It's a possibility. But this probably ends up being something different and not-related to No Exit. I grab my phone and text my parents. We have a movie night, and I'm in charge of getting snacks... and food from The Spoon. I hear Rowan calling my name from afar. 

"Do you know what the emergency is?" I ask her as she gets closer to the store. 

"No, I thought it was open... we closed, right?" her doubting makes me doubt. 

"Yes, you did," Genevieve says, opening the door. "I need you two to help me with something," 

We enter the store behind her. The perfect place we left two hours ago was a mess. It looks like someone entered and played a clothes fight... without Rowan and me. So disrespectful. I turn to Rowan, who is still impressed by what this place looks like. I try to not say anything inappropriate, but Rowan clearly is the opposite. She stops in front of a pile of clothes. 

"Do you have a date or something? Why is the place looking like this?" she takes a skirt and turns to us.

"Focus, kids. We have to find this" Gen shows us a picture of an engagement ring. 

"Why would a ring be in this place? Who lost it?" I shake my head in confusion. 

"I did..." she says. Rowan and I exchange glances. Out of everybody in Shadyside, Genevieve Kim was the last person we thought would be interested in marriage. She notices our expressions. "I was engaged to a guy before. He is a total asshole, and I was young. That is why I left figure skating," 

"You used to practice figure skating?" I ask in surprise, and she nods. 

"Oh yeah, I remember how great you were..." Rowan seems to realize something. "Is he..." 

"Yeah, he wants this c... thing back... and I can't find it," 

"We better start looking for it," I say, glancing at them. 

Rowan nods, and Gen mouths a thank you. I smile at her. Then move some of the clothes near the cash register, but nothing seems to be there. I don't ask any questions. Like why would she put the ring here? Rowan understands how delicate this is and does not say a word. 

It looks like we are spending many hours here. I guess the food has to wait. 

TJ's POV

Cyrus and I are finishing some muffins I bought for our date. He took a break from working on the musical right when Buffy appeared to save him again. We left her with CeCe to do a general inspection of every department and went to the park. So, now we are on our bench. He is telling me every detail of the musical and how has been preparing for it. All I can do is smile at how cute he is. Cyrus Goodman truly owns my heart... I love everything about him, I could hear and see him for hours. But in the middle of my observation, he said something I was hoping for him to suggest. 

"We are going to the Renaissance Fair tomorrow!" he says excitedly. 

"What? Cyrus, do you really want to go?" I try to act clueless. 

"Of course, I love the Renaissance Fair. And you do too, Teej. You are such a history nerd, Mr. I study history!" 

"I know..." I smile, taking his hand. "I was just messing around," 

"Great. Now, I planned the whole day. But if you want, I can invite the rest of the crew" he takes his notepad out of his jacket. 

"I prefer it when it's just us," 

"Then we are on the same page" he leaves a kiss on my cheek. 

I wait until he lists every little thing he planned for tomorrow to kiss him properly this time, without everybody else in the theater staring at us. Specifically, CeCe. She just tries to ignore us, but the 'Cyrus, we have a job to do', can still be heard. But somehow, we have privacy here. People are not telling us to get back to our jobs, right? So it's basically heaven. Cyrus deepens the kiss, but I smile in the middle of it when his phone interrupts us again. 

"Sorry..." 

"Hey, you are a busy man, and I like it" I run a hand through his hair, letting him respond to CeCe.  

I admire him as he speaks over the phone. This is where he tells me they need him back in the theater... and our date ends. But we have the Renaissance Fair tomorrow. So, when he finally hangs up his call, I walk with him back. 

Paul's POV

I'm waiting for my parents to finish everything they have to say about my grade on that test. The classes are complicated, and they want me to be the best. My mom will not be mean about it, but my dad won't like the result. it's so difficult for my brain. Although I'm getting better thanks to Jane. Genevieve is the real genius in my family. But I suppose being the only man between their children comes with a lot of pressure and sleepless nights with four cups of coffee to keep functioning. It's not that bad when I'm with the guys, especially when we play. They are my safe space. But right now, at home, I am waiting for my parents to say something.

"Your grandparents didn't come to this country for you to not like university, Paul," my father says as seriously as always. 

"I never said I did not like it... and..." I say too loud. Making my parents stare at me in surprise. So I lower my tone. "I am trying, but you are the physics genius, dad," 

"I'm not asking you to be a genius, Paul," he looks at my mom. "But can you try harder to not get grades like this?" 

Silence fills the room. I know I have to say something, any word. But I can't. All I do is nod, making my dad clear his throat. That is his way of telling me to speak. My mom takes a few steps forward to take my hand. I know she wants to say it does not matter if my grade was not the best, but she has to agree with my father... as their parents did with them. It feels like a pattern they can't change. My father again does the throat thing. This time louder. 

"Paul, please answer. You are following your father's steps, son," she says in her sweet voice. 

"I don't want to follow your steps, dad... I want to make my own steps," I take a deep breath. "And that includes not getting perfect grades all the time," 

"Is this because of that band's thing?" his tone turned extremely serious. "I knew we shouldn't buy you those drums... you could be invested in the school by now!" 

"But we are good! You only went to one gig, dad! How can you know if it was worth it or not? You could see us in the competition, you could get invested in your own kid's interests. Even pretend you care about it!" 

"Paul Kim, go to your room. We will talk about this later," he says, even before my mom could say something else. 

Did I make the best decision of my entire life... or did I just fucked up the chance to go to the battle of the bands' finale? 

I go upstairs and sit in my bed. My phone keeps receiving messages, so I read some of them. TJ sent a picture to our group chat. It's him at the theater trying on a wig. I also have some from Jo and Robby, giving me advice on my date-not-date with Jane. Blue also sends me a picture of Kendall and Lucy, so I reply to her with a Kendall and Jo one. And finally, I have a text from Jane. She sent me a photo of her with some dogs from her family's animal shelter. Since I am not grounded, or so I hope, I'll be able to see her tomorrow without any problems. I'm sure my mother will find a way to convince my dad, as she always does. 

Chapter Text

Andi's POV

So... maybe changing the schedule wasn't my brightest idea. Everybody is freaking out, trying to get everything ready. This is it. This is the finale. What we were waiting for. In a few hours, we will know which band is going on tour with The Renaissance Boys... will it be Fire Bite? No Exit? The Rose Ladies? Search? We have no idea. Not even my dad, who is friends with them. But, the spectacle will be incredible. This has to top the Grease one. And I find that hard, but not impossible. After all, all these people come for the bands. And probably because of Walker's energy. Speaking of him. I haven't seen him in a while. I am teaming up with Libby and him with Amber. Oh, my Amber. The other day, she made us cupcakes for a family dinner, and we all loved them. She also helped my dad with dinner and CeCe with a phone problem she had. And, of course, played with Kai so my mother could take a shower. Also, we had some time alone to watch a movie. It all was perfect. 

"Hello, stranger," Amber says, hugging me from behind. 

"Hi, I thought you were with Walker," 

"I was. But we already finished" I pull her arms aside to be face-to-face. 

"You could say that first!" I smile. "We don't have much left..." 

"Do you feel happy or sad about this ending?" 

"A mix of both..." 

"You know we can make this an annual thing, right?" 

"Yeah..." I let my side smile come out. "Libby mentioned that the other day,"

"You made history, Andi Mack," she takes my hand. "I am so proud of you." 

"You know what comes after this?" I say softly. 

"What?" 

"Our so long-waited road trip" I smile. 

"I almost forgot about it!" she lets out a laugh. "But I'm looking forward to it," 

We share a long moment of only smiling and staring into each other's eyes. I've been so busy with this and the family that I forgot about our road trip. But we can do that now. We just need to plan the whole thing and find a car. If I ask Buffy, maybe she'll let me take hers. As long as this does not becomes a friend group road trip. Everything will be fine. 

TJ's POV

I am at Marty's, getting ready for the finale of the battle of the bands. It's been a week or so since Paul's parents decided to ground him after they found him at Tony's not studying with Jane. We all were shocked. Not even allowed to visit him, and we were only able to rehearse the song via video call. Yesterday Blue stopped by to tell us that his parents won't let Paul perform in the last round. I slept over at Marty's house to figure out a solution... but it's not going well. And Jonah's been missing for two days. Only texting us and never calling. It's not like I enjoy calls, that's Marty, but he can at least do that. I sit on the bed, letting out a sigh. Not knowing what to do is ending with me. We can't miss the chance to go on tour. 

"We have to leave now, TJ," Marty says, taking his stuff. 

"And how are we supposed to play if our drummer is grounded?" I turn to him. 

"Yeah, I don't know. Paul's parents scare me," he sits on the floor. "And we still don't know anything about Jonah," 

"Why is this happening today?" I close my eyes, falling into the bed. 

"I have an idea,"

"Trick Paul's parents to come over and lock them in your basement so we can play?" I glance at him. 

"No... but that can be our plan B" he smiles. 

"Just tell me what you have in mind," 

"I need to text Jonah... he is the closest to Gen," 

"And...?" I say, clearly not getting it. 

"Right, I forgot Paul is the brain of the band" I look at him, offended by his words but totally agreeing. "Jonah can ask Gen to go and convince her parents... Paul said they love her" 

"I like it..." 

We see the screen of his phone. Writing the perfect message for Jonah. He replies almost instantly, adding he'll see us at the battle. He also tells us to be prepared for a surprise. But it does not sound like a good one. This time, I tell Marty to get ready, bring a clothes change for the musical, and leave. We get into his mom's car. She is excited about the finale, even Marty's brother is coming, so you know how much impact this is getting. My parents are also on their way to meet us there. I just hope our plan works. 

Buffy's POV

Blue, Jane, and I are already at the battle. Getting ready for our performance. Seven, guys. It took us seven rounds to be the ones to open the round. We still have about an hour to play, but Rowan is nowhere to be seen. She said she'd be here at any minute. But that was twenty-five minutes ago. And we are getting impatient... or at least me... and Jane. Blue is clearly used to it. I spot Marty and TJ finally arriving, but I don't care that my boyfriend is right there... all I think about is Rowan being late. But when I think about grabbing my keys and looking out for her at her job, her and Jonah's figures are visible. I let out a relieved sigh, and with Blue by my side, we meet with them. I ask her why it took so long, but she refuses to answer. Blue also asks her, and nothing happens. She and Jonah exchange glances, and then she speaks... reveling... something... worrying. 

"Please, tell me what happened to your voice," I say, trying to breathe well and not feeling that this is the end of the world. 

"Jonah," she turns to him. "He sickness me... literally" 

"You sound fine to me," he responds.

"No, she does not sound fine..." Blue shakes her head. 

"I guess it's up to you three to sing," 

"Thank you, Jonah," I say before taking Rowan by the arm. "You two are spending too much time together," 

"I'm sorry," she says. 

"Oh my, Rowan, don't speak. Your voice is making me tear" Blue closes her eyes. 

"It's fine... we just need to rearrange the song," 

"Let me bring Jane" Blue is about to leave but turns to our friend. "And please, use the mask," 

Rowan does what she's been told. She takes out the mask and keeps apologizing to me. But I don't blame her, not even Jonah. Still standing near us. I don't want to look mean, but I take my proper distance from them. When Blue and Jane join us, we start with our discussion about what to do. We split Rowan's lines to the three of us, but Blue and I seem to be singing more. That was Jonah's idea. He said it was the least he can do to make up for ruining the day for Rowan and him and of course, the rest of both bands. And I don't have the heart to tell him to leave, so we talk about anything else but the last round. Even though I am trying so hard to stay calm in my head, it kind of looks like that scene in Sponge Bob where all the mini him are freaking out and the place is on fire. 

"So, is Paul coming?" Rowan asks Jonah. The rest of us turn to him. 

"I don't know. Gen does not answer my texts," 

"I can't believe he is still grounded," 

"Well..." Blue says, turning to Jane. "I still want to know about that," 

"Why don't we focus on learning Rowan's lines?" I suggest. 

Jane mouths a thank you when Blue takes out the paper sheets. She said soon, but still Blue has no idea of her friend's feelings towards Paul. But we have to put all our energy into the finale and song. All I hope is that this turns out well. 

Cyrus' POV

I left the theater early, I thought of helping Andi, but I realized it was too late when I saw Buffy with Blue and Jane. I gave them their space, so I went directly with Iris and talked about the magazine. Yes, the people are still talking about it, and the perfect group photos. But when I saw TJ and Marty arriving, I excused myself and joined them. They were worried about Jonah, who already is here, and Paul. We don't know the full story, but his parents grounded him because of a grade... and Jane. TJ couldn't tell me more about it. CeCe is constantly calling me to ask my opinion. So, I gave her my phone and came to the battle. This can also work as a break from all the stress that place is giving me... and with Blue here, everything is a mess. But at least I am holding TJ's hand. We saw the girls and were about to interrupt their conversation and steal Jonah from them when we accidentally heard everything. Then we walked away. 

"I don't get it... are they dating?" I turn to TJ after eavesdropping on Buffy's conversation with Blue, Jonah, and Rowan. 

"I'm sure they are only friends," he smiles. "She made it clear she's not into him," 

"When did that happen?" 

"Months ago, I guess you were busy with the musical"

"I am still busy with the musical" 

"And that's why I'll fill you up once the premiere ends," 

"Thank you, but... what are you doing now that Jonah sounds like that?" 

"I have no idea, Cyrus," 

"You could split the lines too." I make a short pause. "If Paul makes it" 

"Let's hope he does..." he squeezes my hand. "I want to know how you feel," 

Those words. I don't want to talk about the musical now... that's why I'm here. But I can't tell him that. So, I sigh, thinking about my words. How do I feel? I don't know. I guess I am scared, nervous, and thinking about leaving Shadyside. All at the same time. CeCe said she'd be sure nothing goes wrong, but now I start regretting leaving my phone to enjoy the show. But I had to. I am a supportive boyfriend and best friend. 

"The truth?" I say almost in a whisper. 

"Yes" 

"I'm considering moving to another country and changing my name..." he looks funnily confused. "With you, obviously" 

"I'm sure you'll be fine... but just in case, I want to choose my name, please," 

"Don't worry, you'll do that, Thelonious" I smile. 

"I knew I shouldn't leave you with my mom for too long!" he shakes his head, embarrassed. 

We keep walking around the place. He said it would help me to not think about what is freaking me out. It does not work, but being with him is as distracting as walking, so it wasn't a waste of time. I hope everything goes well for him and the guys. 

Paul's POV

Much has happened since I had that small fight/discussion with my parents. I went to Tony's with Jane but did not expect to find them there, buying some pizza. They never do that. Well, however. I really messed up my chance of attending the finale. I'm not allowed to see the guys, not even Jane. I explained how she helped me get better at school, but they simply ignored it. So, my days are now on going to school, coming back home, practicing the drums, secretly rehearsing our song, texting Jane, watching Big Time Rush, and video calling Josephine. Oh, and let's not forget all the homework my dad gives me. But today is the day, and I can't leave my room. Sneaking away? Not a chance. I can't hold conversations with Blue for more than twenty minutes since she is so busy with the musical. The only place I can go... and with my parents. Let's just say I am... stuck in this place until they decide it's time to give me my freedom back. Nice, right? 

Besides complaining about not going to play with my best friends and having the opportunity to go on tour with The Renaissance Boys, I have my best friend on my phone screen. Jo doesn't know it yet, but she will have to help me come up with a plan so I can go to the battle of the bands, she and Robby must have lots of ideas... as long as it doesn't involve me jumping out the window, we have lots of bushes and Gen will kill me if she sees me not presentable for the event of a lifetime.

"Hi, Jo! I see you still are in that car. How is Mexico going?" I try my best to act normal. I'll let her talk first. 

"Hello, baby. Mexico is crazy, we had difficult days. But looks like everything is solved. How it goes the Jane thing?"

"At least that is solved. And about that... good, I guess. We talk every day, but she still feels guilty for me being grounded," 

"Strict parents are the worst. Believe me, I can give you a lot of advice about that. I'm in trouble for sneaking off to Mexico." she sighs. "You should go to the battle, you can't miss it... Robby says it is better to ask for forgiveness than permission," she turns to the camera. "But don't listen to him."

"In that case, any idea how I can get to the battle? I can't seem to develop the master plan I need."

"I say..." 

"All you have to do is tell them you'll be studying somewhere else because your room is not good enough to do so," Robby interrupts her. 

"Or you can tell the truth," 

"Telling the truth in this scenario does not help," 

"Don't take Paul with your bad influences." 

"Climb out of the window. Or go to the supermarket to buy snacks for your study hours."

"Okay, P, don't listen to him. Talk to your parents and make your opinion heard. They can't hold you back."

"Or do what I told you," Robby says. "It's easier, and you have the chance to make it to the battle," 

"I'm not sure... they have me, literally, trapped in here," I let out a big sigh. "But I remind you how afraid I am to climb out of the window... it would be great if someone came to my rescue."

"Paul, you have to set your priorities," Josephine says. "Look, Johnny on this trip told me that I can't be the co-pilot of my life, that I have to take the wheel and drive into my future. That's exactly what you have to do." 

"Unless you want to be the co-pilot," adds Robby. "Which is totally valid. But you don't seem to be one of those." 

"You are more independent than you think. And when you realize the only approval you need is your own, you will be happier. So... do you want to be the co-pilot all your life?"

I think about what to answer. But nothing comes to my mind. I pat Johnny on the head and then turn to the screen. They are still waiting, but Jo shushes Robby's father when he is about to say something important. However, they mute themselves to talk. I ask myself: what are you going to do?

"I can take you out of the house," Gen says, standing in the door frame. 

"Weren't you supposed to be at the battle already?" I stand up from my bed.

"Jonah called. Apparently, it was an emergency... the drummer is missing... now let's go. I'll see you in the car. I'll convince dad to go and see you" she is about to walk away when I take her arm. 

"You don't have to do that..." 

"No, I must do it, kid," she nods. "Come on, you better be in the car in ten minutes," 

"Only ten minutes?" I frown, confused. 

"That's all the time I need," 

"It's your chance!" Josephine's voice takes us by surprise.

"It's now or never," I look at my screen, finding Robby there.

"Be the pilot of your own life!" they say in unison. 

"You should listen to them," my sister smiles. 

I take everything in my hands before leaving for her car. I also ended the call with Jo and Robby, they looked tired, and I don't want to take away their time to nap. They must have been driving for hours. I hope we can meet soon. But for now, I need to do what my sister tells me. When going downstairs quietly, I can eavesdrop on the conversation. Genevieve is good. She knows what she is doing. My father is still hesitating, but my mom accedes to let me go. I know I should be in the car already, but I want to know what they say. I hold my breath when I think they are leaving the kitchen, but my dad, after my sister's words, agrees and lets me go and play with my band. I mouth an excited yes! and go to the car. It's time... the finale will know who No Exit is. 

Iris' POV

People are still congratulating us on the magazine. It feels great, and the whole team is happy with the results. Working not only with them but the bands, was incredible. I personally loved The Rose Ladies' group picture. It has been some crazy weeks. I even started helping Amber at the battle. It means seeing Walker often. I still haven't decided who I like most... I mean. All those years of reading and watching these situations in fictional worlds needed to stick in my mind. But I don't remember how they solved their problems. However, we are here in the grand finale, the last round. I better focus on that instead of them. Even if it's hard when I have Walker and Maddie, talking a few steps away from me. 

I spot TJ and the rest of No Exit talking near the stage, so I join them. If I don't have an answer to those two, at least I can run away from my problems. Like most people do. Once I greet the guys, they don't seem exactly happy. 

"Did something happen?" I ask. 

"Yeah. Paul is still not here," Marty responds. 

"We're trying to reach Gen out... but she keeps ignoring our calls," Jonah adds. 

"We suspect it has to be related to her talking to their parents about letting Paul come," TJ explains. 

"And if they don't let him come?" 

"Then she helps him to sneak out," Marty starts. "Because she wanted to do things the right way. Whatever that means" 

"Then I guess I'll leave you guys alone. I still need to check out Search," 

"Thanks, Iris," TJ smiles. 

When I walk away, I find myself almost making Walker fall. I apologize many times, but he keeps telling me to not worry. Soon, we talk about the finale and how Fire Bite's bassist, Liz, is still nowhere to be found. From what we know, she is still in class. If you read her article, you must know she is a kindergarten teacher. Which answers our question about her not being here yet. I see Maddie walking in our direction... and my heart seems to skip a beat when my eyes go from her to Walker. 

"Chris said Liz is trapped at school. Like a reunion or something," she says. 

"And no one can take her place?" Walker suggests. 

"Yeah, she asked another teacher. But still, her car does not work," 

"And what are you guys going to do? Do you want me to go and pick her up?" I place my hand on her shoulder. 

"That would be great, Iris" she lets out a relieved sigh. 

I take Maddie's car and drive directly to the school. Why is it that all of the bands have something going on today? On the grand finale day? Emma had trouble with her guitar, and Sam had to drive to his house to get one of his. Everything looked great two days ago... and now, it's a mess. Paul's missing, Rowan and Jonah can't sing, Liz is trapped at a reunion, and Emma's guitar basically died. This is not what we all expected. 

Marty's POV

We are only minutes away from the start of the finale. TJ and I organized all the new lines. This shouldn't be difficult for Paul. I mean, he wrote the song. The Rose Ladies are opening the round. Then Search will sing, then us, and Fire Bite closes the show. It's supposed to be fast, but everything feels like going slowly. Maybe it's because Paul is not here yet or I'm nervous. But this is big. We have the chance of going on tour, for more people to acknowledge us. For this band to be the band... there's no pressure, right? 

Jonah and TJ sit on the floor, talking about our performance. They even asked Libby to help us with the exact lighting we had in mind. But all that matters when the one who completes us is not here? I'm not saying we're not good, but Paul is the last piece of our band. He makes us sound better, and you know how much it took us to find a drummer. To find him. I turn to them, hopeless and defeated, when Jonah's expression makes me turn. There he is. There is Paul, wearing many layers of clothes, with Genevieve next to him. 

"Where the hell have you two been?" I ask once we all gather in the same place. 

"You know, saving my little brother was difficult" she raises her eyebrows. 

"But I'm here! And as I can see just in time for The Rose Ladies," he moves his eyes around the place, looking for his sister. 

"Glad you could make it," Jonah speaks with that voice. 

"Why do you sound like that?" Paul looks concerned. 

"Long story... but you'll sing some of Jonah's lines now" I pat his back. 

"We are not the last ones, but you still have time to memorize the changes" TJ smiles comfortably. 

"I need a minute to process everything," 

"Yeah, while you do that, here are the changes we made" I hand him a paper sheet. 

He reads how we split Jonah's lines while Gen fixes his hair. We explain all the changes and try to get information about his parents, especially his dad, for letting him come. But we're not lucky enough to get a single word from his older sister. And not much later, we hear Andi and Walker's voices coming from the stage. We take a look at it. It is happening... this is the last round. 

I take a deep breath and squeeze my phone once they announce the lineup for today. It's too early compared to other rounds, but it's worth it. Even if we don't win... it was fun sharing this experience with my best friends. The band will not fade if we don't make it. 

Buffy's POV

And there it goes... the last round of the battle starts now... Walker and Andi talk enthusiastically with the audience, and after a while, we memorize the song, excluding Rowan, she feels so bad for being sick, but we can't blame her or Jonah, they just spend a lot of time together, and that's how it happened... but I don't want to bore you with all that stuff, so, I'll keep it simple, we prepare to go and finally open the show, Jane is next to me, staring at her shoes, Rowan plays with her phone, or as she likes to call it, letting the stress go. Blue is peeking onto the stage like a kid. And well, I'm trying to remain calm and be able to sing... I  have many, many lines this time. You know Rowan is our main vocalist... but now we have the responsibility to do so. I can't even think of going and talking to my boyfriend. And I know he gets that. Both are focused on our bands today, but we will catch up before Cyrus' musical premiere. 

"When are they finishing? I don't know why it feels like an eternity when you're the opening act," Blue sighs. 

"Band reunion?" Rowan tries her best not to sound so bad, but still, I see Blue closing her eyes.  

"Yes, please!" I nod. 

We do our usual circle, taking each other's hands. We take a moment to enjoy the silence right before Andi starts her actual presentation to us. 

"We did a good job, guys," Blue starts. "And I don't even want to win. I just want to have the time of our lives," she softly smiles at us. "That and I'm ten times more nervous about the musical" 

I have to help her with all of these nerves, so I do what I never thought of doing... something No Exit does all the time. 

"The Rose Ladies," I place my hand in front of them, indicating for them to do the same. "We may not win today, but know we know we are a pretty cool band," 

"Let's finish this," Rowan says, gaining a look from Blue, but she only smiles. 

"Thank you for the bests months of my life" Jane places her hand above the rest. 

Saying goodbye to this is going to be complicated. The band is a part of all of us now... but we agreed to it to be a one-time thing, and here we are, probably, at the end of our musical career as The Rose Ladies. 

We move closer to the stage when we hear our name, but Amber tells us to wait. They must have a sign or something. I see my best friend smiling and owning the stage like anybody else. I can't help but let a smile escape from my lips. Rowan laughs with the audience, and Blue tells her to be quiet. We all want to listen to what they have to say about us. 

"And to start the day, we have this talented group" Walker turns to her. 

"They made their debut here. You all know them very well," 

"Please welcome this four-member band singing their original song Cry For Me!" 

"Welcome to this stage... The Rose Ladies!" 

And that's our sign. We follow Blue to the stage. Rowan keeps wearing the mask, which confuses some people in the audience... but don't worry, our leader explains everything in a matter of seconds. I take a seat and grab my drumsticks, ready to start. I have the feeling you'll like this song. It's one of my favorites. I turn to Jane, and she nods, starting with her keyboard, followed by Blue. Rowan and I start five seconds later. And as she can't sing, I lean to the microphone next to me, ready to start. 

[Buffy &  Blue ]: I know our love ain't anything to fight for | But I'll never break out the cycle | I don't really wanna let you go ( Never let go )

[Jane]: You don't know me | L-O-V-E or hatred | Hit you with a smile, not goodbye | All the while I'll be sure to leave you wonderin'

[Blue,  Buffy  &  Jane ]: Oh, on the outside I'll be all calm |  Baby no more real love  | Imma pretend we're going strong |  Then at the end, break your heart  |  Bad boy, bad boy  |  Yeah, you really make me a mad girl, mad girl

[Blue,  Buffy  &  Jane ]: I want you to cry, cry for me | The way I cried for you, baby, cry for me | Make your rain fall, cry for me | But again |  Somehow you keep me goin' round and round  |  All the walls I built around me come crashin' down  |  Makin' excuses, gotta drown 'em out  |  I want you to, I want you to, I want you to cry for me 

[Buffy]: I don't know if I'm just in too deep and I'm confused | All my friends hate your guts | But I'm still defending you | I can't seem to cut you loose 

[Blue &  Jane ]: Ooh, don't know how you keep on laughin' everyday | Just a single tear from you I'd be okay |  Cry for me, let me please forgive you

[ Blue, Buffy &  Jane ]: Oh on the outside I'll be all calm |  Baby just like real love  | Tellin' myself we're going strong |  If it's the end, break your heart  |  Bad boy, bad boy  |  Yeah, you really make me a sad girl, sad girl 

[ Blue , Buffy &  Jane ]: I want you to cry, cry for me | The way I cried for you, baby, cry for me | Make your rain fall, cry for me | But again |  Somehow you keep me goin' round and round  |  All   the walls I built around me come crashin' down  |  Makin' excuses, gotta drown 'em out  |  I want you to, I want you to, I want you to cry for me

[Blue &  Buffy ]: If love is a game | Don't want to play | You poison my veins | Then take it all away |  I'm chasin' that taste  |  I   want your kiss, yeah, yeah, yeah

[Jane]: I want you to cry, cry for me | Can you at least pretend, baby, cry for me | Make your rain fall | Fall and fall now, yeah 

[ Blue,  Buffy  & Jane]: I want you to cry, cry for me | The way I cried for you, baby, cry for me | Make your rain fall, cry for me | But again |  Somehow you keep me goin' round and round  |  All the walls I built around me come crashin' down  |  Makin' excuses, gotta drown 'em out  |  I want you to, I want you to, I want you to die for me  

There were moments when I spotted No Exit near the stage, smiling and moving their heads with the rhythm of the song. When we finish, our favorite presenters come back. We let the feeling stay, the applause, the cheering, everything, and I like it. It feels similar to when I'm dancing, like my recital almost a year ago. 

Blue gestures for us to follow her along with Walker and Andi almost to the edge of the stage. And the crowd cheers even louder. When Walker, with his typical infectious energy, says our name.

And in his words, our performance was the most memorable he had ever seen as an opener, something worthy of the grand finale. 

After we leave the stage, we meet with the rest of the bands and get compliments from Fire Bite, Search, and No Exit.... all of this makes it feel like we are a real band, born to perform together...

Chapter Text

TJ's POV

After The Rose Ladies performed, Andi and Walker announced Search as the next band. We watched for long enough, and they're good. Like good. We are not hoping to actually win this, it would be incredible. But all we want is to enjoy this last round, still, you can feel the nervousness in the air... not only from us but from every band. It's hard when you can't just go and talk with everybody else because of the situation. So, No Exit is sitting next to each other on the floor. Cyrus offered to bring us some drinks with Gen's help. But I'm sure they only wanted to give us some privacy... so, when they returned with it and shared a few words with us, they ended up leaving. And with all the time in the world, since Search is giving the performance of their lives, words don't come out as easily as you can think. Even if we want to say something or if we open our mouths. And knowing how much Jonah and Marty talk is impressive. I take a deep breath and turn to Paul, he is staring across the place as if it were giving him an answer. Jonah is playing with his coffee, and Marty is whispering something to himself, probably his lines. I try to speak and tell them what they want to hear, but our favorite deep voice makes a presence. 

"If we don't win, can we still make a road trip and attend a Big Time Rush concert?" Paul asks us as he takes another sip from his iced tea.

"Let's stick with we will win hopes, please" Marty turns to him. 

"And speaking of that..." Jonah starts, and we wait. And wait. And wait. 

"You have nothing?" I ask.

"No..." 

"The words will come eventually. I think it'll help if we just don't think about it until Andi and Walker announce the band" Paul smiles as he gestures for us to follow him. 

"You know. It does not mean we can go to a Big Time Rush concert, right?" Marty tells him. "It was difficult to bring you here," 

"Thanks, guys," 

I pat his shoulder as we walk near the stage to watch the last part of Search's incredible performance. I feel a hand on my arm, it's Cyrus. He wants to talk, so I follow him a few steps far from the guys. We can still listen to the song clearly. I don't let go of his hand... and I won't admit it that easily, but I needed him to give me a few encouraging words. We still have time, so Andi and Walker have planned a special presentation of The Renaissance Boys. It's not a concert, but it's a three-song performance. Maybe that is why Cyrus wanted to talk to me... or just spend time together. Both are great plans. Cyrus stares at me for five seconds, then he smiles. 

"We really do the expressions like our lives depend on it," he jokes.

"In my defense, I started doing it because of you," I smile. 

"I guess it is my fault... but it's cute when you do it," 

"And it's cute when you do it!" I pull him closer. "Paul says that is what couples do," 

"Well... we do it... and we are a couple... he is not wrong," 

"No, he is not" I leave a kiss on his forehead. 

"I hope you guys win," 

He runs a hand through my hair and brings our faces closer. He gives me the most delicate smile before kissing me. At this point, he doesn't need any words. All the strength I needed was in this kiss. When he breaks it, it ends this motivational Cyrus' time with the old "don't run away from the stage this time", I can't believe how long it has been since that happened... look where No Exit is now. 

Amber's POV

Libby and I wait for Andi and Walker to finish introducing The Renaissance Boys. A performance we all were waiting for. And it was not planned at all until two days ago... it was Libby's idea. We tried to come up with something impressive for the finale. Our last round needed an impressive performance, not just by the bands. Andi thought of her dad, and Walker joked about bringing Big Time Rush, as Paul suggested, but Libby told us her plan, and we liked it. Now we are here watching them sing three of their most-known songs. 

"How I love this band" Walker approaches us. 

"There is a reason they are here," I smile. 

"Also, that is one of your favorite songs, right?" Andi puts her arm around me. 

"You have a great memory," 

"If you excuse us, we need to tell No Exit to get ready" he walks away behind Libby. 

Right. It's No Exit's turn. My best friend is about to go on stage and sing one more song to impress our jury. Whatever happens next, he will need Iris and me there. This is his chance, and if he goes on tour, I know things will get pretty serious for the band. Andi takes my hand, staring at my serious expression. 

"What is going on?" her voice brings me out of my thoughts. 

"I was thinking about TJ," I sigh. "Is it normal I feel so nervous?"

"Well, he is your best friend... so yeah..." she smiles. "What if we go for a drink before going and listen to the next song?" 

"I like that... and remember, no matter what, we agreed on celebrating," 

"How can I forget about that?" she shakes her head. "Also, we have to babysit Kai next week," 

"I have no problem with that," 

Being closer to the Macks comes with a lot of different family activities. Most of them are babysitting Kai and helping CeCe with her plants. Lots of movie nights too, it's great. After all these ends, I hope we can enjoy more just-us dates and not many family dates. I like them, but it's just not the same. We also need to plan the road trip, and I promised Andi to help her to finish a painting she's been waiting to show everyone at the gallery. It looks like we're back to our same routine, and I don't dislike it at all. 

Buffy's POV

I tried to talk to Marty, but he is too focused on his song. So, I'm staring at Rowan singing at the top of her lungs. She is a super fan like Marty. Blue is next to her, pretending to sing, and Jane can't keep her eyes off No Exit. I know she wants to talk to them, Paul, and wish them good luck, but if I can't do it, there is no other way for her. This does not feel real somehow. I mean the band splitting since we finished our purpose: giving Andi another band in the competition. We haven't talked about it yet, and I'm not sure we will be able to do it today. After this ends, Blue has to go to the theater, and I have a class before Cyrus' musical. This time Marty is joining us at the dance studio. I missed seeing his terrible dance moves there. 

"Do you know which song they'll sing?" Blue asks. 

"One Paul wrote," Rowan answers and then covers her mouth with her hands. 

"That does not work... he is always writing" Jane turns to her. After realizing what she said, she opens her mouth again, but nothing comes out. Blue glares at her, with a feeling of wanting to tell her the truth. 

"I don't understand why we can't talk to them," I say. "I want to give Marty a good luck kiss..." 

"Go and steal him from them," Rowan suggests with an eye smile. 

"Rowan, your voice makes me tear up. Please don't speak" Blue closes her eyes.

"You better go to the doctor after they announce the winner" I look at her, concerned. "You can't come to class today. I won't let you come in," 

She nods at my warning, and we all laugh. I probably sounded too serious. But I care about my friends. I was about to say something else, but Andi started announcing No Exit. We move closer to the stage, catching them on the other side. I smile at Marty and mouth good luck, followed by a kiss, and his answer is a smile and a wink. I can feel my heart rate accelerate. And not because of him but because of his performance. This means everything to them, to him. No Exit and this event are all they worked so hard on these past months, and all I can do is watch. So, I take Blue's hand and squeeze it a little. 

Jonah's POV

We enjoy The Renaissance Boys' last song. After it, we have to go on stage and play. The guys did a great job with the lines. And yeah, it hurts not to sing with them in this round... but I know they'll give an incredible performance. I still can't believe we have made it this far. It feels like we were celebrating getting a logo yesterday. Life keeps going, time does not stop, and this is proof of it. Or at least to me. There are many things I want to say, but I don't know how to start. I never imagined getting into a band with these guys, with my best friends. And that we will have the chance to go on tour. A small one around some places in the country. But it is still a tour. It's been a year since we've known each other. Since I asked Bex and Bowie for help. Since I met Marty and then TJ and a shy Paul joined us. 

I ask the guys for our last band reunion of the battle. There is a memorable speech coming up, even if I sound weird. Marty pats my shoulder as TJ and Paul approach us. I take a deep breath and clear my throat as much as I can. I take a second to look at them one by one. Then I hear Andi’s voice. I know this is the moment. 

"Guys..." I clear my throat again. "I can't imagine doing this with... anybody else. This is... our someday, right?" I smile at Paul. "Our halfway there. This is our opportunity... not to just win, set that aside. This is our chance... to show everyone what No Exit is..." I make a short pause. "A family, more than a band," 

"I know winning would be great... but we have each other. It's been that way since a year ago," TJ adds. "And no matter what happens after we go to that stage, we still have each other" 

"And Tony's, The Spoon, Red Rooster, and the Gallery," Marty lists. 

"I think we all get it, Marty" Paul turns to him. 

He apologizes, and then we give each other a group hug, just in time to hear our band's name in Walker's voice. 

"It's time to become legends," I say, taking a deep breath and walking into the stage. 

I take the guitar in my hands and nod to Marty to introduce us and our song. This is why he is our second leader. TJ's keyboard plays an important role in this song since it's a slow song with great lyrics. So we wait for his sign to start. He plays the first notes, and we join seconds later. I take some distance from the microphone in front of me and turn to see him sing the first lines.

[TJ]: Go out and get it | Give it all you got | You'll never get over the view from the top 

[Paul]: Just reach the finish | Just ring the bell | You'll have trophies to show | Stories to tell, yeah 

[Marty]: It's hard not to believe it | But don't you get the feeling 

[Paul]: Finding the gold is losing the rainbow | The colors are there | They're not the same though | Maybe you know the moment you have it | But getting to hold it, let's go of the magic 

[TJ]: If touching the sky is why we're all reaching, oh | Are we missing the point? | And missing the meaning 

[Marty]: Is it the knowing? | Is it the seeing? | Or is it the dreaming | Is it the dreaming? 

[TJ]: Remember that moment | It turned on like a light | You had nothing on paper | It was all in your mind 

[Marty]: You saw it all perfect | It gave you a rush | And I'll bet you right now | It probably still does

[Paul]: So if you're halfway through it | Would you even want to do it

[TJ]: If finding the gold is losing the rainbow | The colors are there | They're not the same though | Maybe you know the moment you have it | But getting to hold it, let's go of the magic

[Marty]: If touching the sky is why we're all reaching, oh | Are we missing the point? | And missing the meaning

[Paul]: Is it the knowing? | Is it the seeing? | Or is it the dreaming | Is it the dreaming? 

[TJ]: If you're still smiling | With one mile to go | If you've got the answer | Let us all know

[Marty]: Is finding the gold worth losing the rainbow | The colors are there | Are they the same though? | Maybe you know the moment you have it | But getting to hold it, let's go of the magic

[Paul]: If touching the sky is why we're all reaching, oh? | Are we missing the point? | And missing the meaning

[TJ]: Is it the knowing? | Is it the seeing? | Or is it the dreaming | Is it the dreaming?

I smile at them finishing our song. This is a performance I will never forget. This moment will last in my memories for a long time... the song was just perfect for us. It has No Exit colors in a different way and a new sound. Paul's lyrics tell much about how hard it has been and will be. If we ever become a famous band like 5 Seconds Of Summer, this will be the song to talk for us. To describe us. The Dreaming is just perfect. But I had to stop the actual dream. TJ pulls all of us into a group hug before we leave the stage. Walker and Andi thank us for our last performance. And we go to our waiting place. 

"Well... does anybody else feel like..." Paul starts. 

"This is a dream?" TJ adds. 

"Yeah, it felt so different from our other performances..." he smiles. "Even that one where Marty cried" 

"And you had to bring that one up, right?" Marty turns to him, smiling. 

"He is saying it was... emotional," I say. 

"But this one is special," he says. 

A minute of silence falls upon us, but it does not feel strange. We work well with silence. I know something is missing, our signature. 

"No Exit?" TJ smiles. 

"No Exit," the three of us say in unison. 

No Exit... our super band. The reason for our friendship... the reason for our happiest moments. If I had the chance to go back in time, I would choose the moment we became a band, just to see how happy we were, and then come back to see how far we have come. 

Iris' POV

Seeing TJ sing with No Exit made me all emotional. He is my best friend, and I am always rooting for him, even if right now I'm with Fire Bite while Liz tells me about her cat and the birthday party she planned for it tomorrow. And guess what? I am invited. Actually, my cat was invited, but we come as a package, and she knows that. Anyway, I listen to all the party details, but my eyes keep moving along with Maddie and her nervousness. She has not stopped pacing back and forth. At this point, I might think she's actually practicing for a modeling career. We hear Andi's voice clearly calling for them, so I do what I have to. 

"You'll be incredible!" I place my hand on her shoulder. 

"Thanks, Iris," she smiles warmly. "Let's do this, guys" she turns to Chris and Liz. 

"I'll text you more about the party" Liz wrinkles her nose. 

I give Maddie a thumbs-up when she turns to look at me. When they finally enter the stage, I head to Amber and TJ. I think we're about to have one of our moments. They smile as soon as they see me and ask me about the magazine. We still have some time before we release the next volume, but by far, it's looking good. Kira gave us the idea for the cover. We have been following this competition since day one, even before that. So, she suggested our second cover be Andi, Amber, Libby, and Walker. An interview of how they created it all. And no, we are not forgetting about the winner. Whoever wins this will have a special cover. So, basically, there will be two covers with different interviews. But we are still discussing it since Gus thought it was a great idea to have Cyrus and CeCe as our cover too. 

"Now, I want you to remember how talented you are, and your new friends too," Amber tells TJ and me. "But now I have to go with Libby the song it's almost over..." 

"Good luck, TJ," I smile. "And to you, Amber," 

"I already want this to be over, so we can go to Cyrus' musical," she sighs. 

"He did a great job," I say. 

"Are you writing about him for the next volume?" TJ asks.

"Yes, that is Gus' job, I can't say much"

We part ways, TJ joins the rest of his band, Amber meets up with Libby and Walker, and I stay and watch the Fire Bite performance. This battle of the bands is coming to an end. What will I have to do? If No Exit wins, I'll be more than happy for TJ, but if it's Fire Bite or Search well, I'll be happy too, but my best friend will need me. I take a big breath and smile at Maddie, who turned to look at me from the stage before her song ends. I think it's time to find out who the winner is.

Andi's POV

As Fire Bite ends their performance, and Walker sends Amber to be a kind of DJ for the time The Renaissance Boys take to give us the envelope with how the bands ranked, I play with my rings scanning the whole place. Who will be in first place? Is it Buffy? Is it Jonah? I have no idea. But all of this just makes it real. This is ending. Our first big event is about to end, and as Amber told me, we are making history. The gallery did something no one could think of before, and that is awesome. Walker stands next to me, trying to get my attention, but I can tell he is as excited and nervous as I am. I turn to him, but Rafe's voice, followed by Micah and Guthrie's smiles catches our attention. We walk to where they are and see the envelope in Rafe's hands. 

"Here it is," he smiles. "It took us a while, but we made a good choice," 

"Thank you so much, guys" Walker takes the envelope. 

All I manage to do is smile at them in gratitude and follow Walker afterward. We make our way to the stage, and I can see my dad in the audience, in the front row. I take a deep breath before continuing with the show. We called for the bands, just like the last time. The four of them appear one after the other and take place a few feet behind the two of us. Walker seems so relaxed doing his typical banter, making even the bands smile. But the moment comes, and he shows the envelope to everyone. We both take turns to thank the effort of all the bands. From the ones that left in the first round to the ones standing on the stage today. 

"In fourth place, we have..." I say into the microphone, helping Walker to pull off the piece of paper covering the name. When I read it, something inside me jumps in celebration. 

"Search!" we say as enthusiastically as possible.

The five Search members come up to us to say a few words and take the fourth place trophy that Amber encouraged us to award. Their leader, Sam, takes the microphone in his hands, smiling at me.

"We want to thank everyone who supported us along the way. This has been an unforgettable experience. As Search, we are proud of this journey that would not happen without the gallery. So thank you, Andi and Walker, and everybody else who was involved in this," 

Applause and cheers of support are present when he finishes his short speech. Now it is time to announce third place in the competition. Walker speaks first this time.

"The glorious third place goes to..." he makes his dramatic pause as I take the piece of paper out of the way. The name in Micah's handwriting almost makes me smile. 

"The Rose Ladies!" we say in unison, turning to them. They look so surprised. 

The four of them approach us and Walker passes his microphone to Blue. She smiles at him and faces the audience.

"There are many things we want to say, but we don't want to make it long," she lets out a nervous laugh. "But we want to thank you all for the support and to everyone who believed in us. To Andi, Walker, Amber, and Libby. This event happened because of you..." 

The audience repeats the same action as with Search, but this time I can catch a glimpse of Paul clapping proudly for his sister and friends. While Jonah, Marty, and TJ look at the four of them in admiration. I look over at Walker. We both know what's next...

"It has been a wild ride," he starts. 

"But we are about to find out who is the winner of the very first battle of the bands of Shadyside!" I smile. 

With trembling hands, I take the paper covering both names. Walker nods in support, and after a deep breath, I find the courage to remove it, exposing Rafe and Guthrie's handwriting. With serious expressions, we both turn to the audience.

"And the winner of the first edition is..." I start, adding some suspense to it. 

"No Exit!" We both say in unison, clapping as we watch Fire Bite applaud them with a smile. 

Walker takes the second-place trophy and hands it to their leader, Maddie. While I hold up the first-place trophy and leave it in Jonah's hands. Marty gestures for Maddie to speak first, so Walker hands her his microphone. 

"I can't say how grateful we are for all the support and the opportunity the Gallery gave us to play our songs to you. We are so proud to have the second place... so please make some noise for our winners No Exit!" 

Marty is the one who takes my microphone and looks at the guys before facing the audience. 

"We at No Exit would like to thank everyone, actually, it's a very long list. But we will start with the gallery. Without them, this would never have happened. We also want to thank all who danced to our songs and covers, and to the bands, Fire Bite, The Rose Ladies, and Search. And, of course, I want to emphasize the great team that is No Exit. Every song, every beat, every lyric, and every instrument... it's all thanks to Jonah, TJ, Paul, and, me, Marty. No Exit is this. These four guys standing right here, still shocked they won... we dreamt of it, but now living it... it's... surreal... simply, thank you," 

We all gather around No Exit, and even The Renaissance Boys stand next to them and congratulate them. This marks the end of the battle of the Shadyside bands. This stays in history.

Paul's POV

We won the battle of the bands! Just as Marty finished his speech and everyone congratulated us, I noticed Gen standing next to my parents. I hadn't noticed that they had actually come to see the band. I'm not looking forward to what that did for them. The truth is that I carefully approached them with Darcy at my side. They congratulated my sister and were happy about the musical. They may realize that this is not just a hobby for her. But as for me, my mom hugged me tightly and congratulated me for winning the battle and the song we sang. My dad, on the other hand, did not disapprove of us winning. In fact, he dedicated some words to me. They weren't exactly "yes, son, go on tour," but it was a big step. Now I'm with the guys waiting for Jonah to finish talking to Andi and Rafe from The Renaissance Boys. As Marty explains everything we can do in the different places we will be touring, I can see The Rose Ladies coming toward us. Buffy gives her boyfriend a kiss on the cheek, a good technique to shut him up. Blue and Rowan ask TJ about Cyrus since we haven't seen him since Iris and Amber had to talk to him about something important. While they discuss different matters, Jane stands in front of me with that smile that characterizes her so much. The sweet one. 

"Congrats, Paul," she starts. "Your song was incredible, very emotional," 

"Thanks, I loved yours too. I mean if I ended a relationship, I would like to sing that one" I smile. 

"How did everything go with your parents?" 

"It was not that bad, actually..." I let out a little sigh. "We still need to discuss the tour thing," 

She smiles at my words, but before we can continue our conversation, I hear an all too familiar voice, or rather a pair of them impossible not to recognize. I turn around and see them. There are Josephine and Robby, with who I presume is his father. I can't help but smile in surprise. By the time we're half a meter apart, I'm still frozen. Like Kendall in that episode with Lucy. 

"I can't believe you two are here" I hug Josephine as if it's been years since the last time we saw each other. 

"I am happy to be here" she smiles once we share the hug. "You are a rockstar, Paul!" she pulls apart. "You have no idea how happy I am to be with you. I missed you so much," 

"And I missed you. Did you see our performance? I was so nervous," 

“Of course! I could not stop talking about how excited I was" 

"She can never stop talking, don't believe her," 

"Right... Paul, this is Johnny, Robby's dad, we wanted him to stay in the car, but he wanted to come. And yes, he is who inspired your dog's name" she smiles excitedly. "And this is Robby. You already know him because he is the mastermind behind some of our conversations," 

"It's nice meeting you two. And I know how Jo is... it works to me that she talks too much" I shake hands with them. But I feel that I am forgetting something, so I turn behind me to find Jane... still there. "Uhm... this is Jane... my friend... and Blue's bandmate,"

She steps forward to stand next to me and smiles at Jo, Robby, and Johnny.  

"I must go... I have to get ready for the musical... but it was great meeting you" our eyes meet now. "I'll see you at the theater," 

I look at her a bit wonderingly, but by the time I want to open my mouth to say more, she has already joined the rest of her band. So I turn to Jo and Robby.

"Well, that was Jane..." I nod. "Do you want to eat something? The Spoon is one of our essential places to visit here in Shadyside," 

"I was about to ask where can you find something to eat in this place" there is something in how Johnny talks and moves that makes him so... him. I mean, the way Jo described him. 

"And that is my dad," Robby smiles, shaking his head. 

"Let's go, P. I cannot wait to try the famous milkshakes" Jo takes me by the arm. 

I nod, and we set out on our way to The Spoon. I learn new things about Jo and Robby as a couple, not to mention that I'm getting to know the man behind the name of the puppy Jane gave me. But it all makes more sense now, he's funny and equally talkative to Josephine. Now I understand why she looks up to him. They also agreed to go to Cyrus' musical for my sister and to the party to celebrate No Exit and the musical. That will be the perfect opportunity for them to get to know the whole band and Jane better. 

Cyrus' POV

I spot TJ surrounded by the other bands, his parents, and people I have not seen in my life. After Amber and Iris talked to me about celebrating at Tony’s, both things, No Exit's first place and my musical. I have to be honest, I'm nervous about the musical. I don't know how it will be, but I can imagine many things that can go wrong. I trust my team. I really do. But overthinking is probably in my blood. I loved using the finale as a way to not think about it, but the show must go on... now, my head is full of the thing I have worked on for months. Sometimes I don't trust completely in myself. Something silly. 

During my internal debate, TJ manages to appear in front of me. He looks so happy, and I am happy for him. We hold hands as we walk a bit away from all the noise of conversations.

"So, now that you will leave for tour and become a famous band..." I smile. 

"We are not sure about that," 

"Of course we are! Who could not like your music? You are No Exit, super band,"

He stares at me for a few seconds without saying a word. I can't read his mind, but I can imagine what he is thinking. I break some of the space between us with a kiss. It might be spontaneous or just to bring him back to the real world and talk to me. 

"We have to celebrate!" am I too excited or do I only want a distraction from my stuff?

"First, let us get ready for your musical," 

"Right... then I guess I have to go back to the theater" I kiss his cheek this time. "Let me find Blue," 

"Oh, she is with Buffy," he smiles.

"Then you just made my job easier" I squeeze his hand. "I'll see you later," 

To my fortune, Blue was also looking for me, so we left the place together. She had a word with her parents before, but nothing serious. I could even swear I saw Mr. Kim smiling at the idea of his daughter in my musical. Bowie was there too. Actually, he is the one who drove us back to the theater. And now, we discuss with CeCe the version of a song we know too well. She thinks it's better to use Bowie's instead of mine because that is what Joseph asked for. But when she leaves to answer her phone, Bowie gives me some surprising advice. 

"Cyrus, if you consider the original version suits the musical better, then you should use it," 

"That would make someone upset," 

"Yeah, so what? It is your musical. It was your song first, not Paul's and mine" he makes a long pause. "You know this better than anyone in this room. I trust your gut," he nods. 

What is the right choice? Do I change the song and risk everything? Or do I keep playing my boss' rules? 

Chapter Text

Cyrus' POV

The disaster and nervousness of the opening day. Everyone is moving from one side to the other, concentrating only on what is assigned to them. Actors move from department to department, holding their librettos for a final rehearsal with others. Bowie is here to help with the music, and I from not escape from talking in front of everyone. I am still thinking about his words but haven't decided whether to use my version or leave it behind. And I don't have much time to consider it since I follow CeCe and Blue through the place. CeCe explains to us where our families and friends will be sitting. I got seats for TJ and his parents in the first row, next to Blue's parents. And next to them will be Andi, Buffy, and Jonah. Still in the first row but in another section will be my parents, Paul, Marty, Rowan, Jane, Amber, and Blue's older sister. I also got seats for Iris, her magazine team, Libby, and Walker. This is a big event. Even more, since our actors did not just practice their songs and dialogues. They had the extra task of learning everything in ASL. Libby helped with that. This is why I am so nervous about this. 

"Cyrus, please go with Blue so she can have her make-up done," CeCe says, staring at me behind those big glasses. 

"Sure. You'll take care of-"

"Bowie, yes" 

"All right then, we'll go," I nod.

Blue and I walk in complete silence. I don't know what to say when we're both nervous. I trust her and want to tell her, but my brain doesn't seem to give in to my lack of words. So all I do is place my hand on her shoulder and smile warmly. She doesn't have to say anything. We seem to understand each other without the need for words. This is what we became after going through a play and a musical together. So we keep walking to the make-up department. She sits down and lets them start with everything she has to wear, which isn't much, honestly. 

"Are you that nervous?" she asks. I see her expression through the mirror. 

"Yes. You don't add ASL to every musical and have a magazine team here to write an article about it every day" I smile. "But I trust you. I know you'll be great," 

"One step closer to Broadway, right?" 

"Absolutely, we'll leave Shadyside together. Straight to Broadway!" 

Laughing, she hands me her libretto and asks for help to review some things. Who better than Cyrus to do this job? The answer is simple, no one. I start with the part where she doesn't feel completely confident and give her some tips on that scene. The next thing we do is go in and get her costume put on and be fully into character. We walk around the place before noticing some people waiting to come in. It's almost time, and I haven't decided which version to use. 

Blue's POV

The opening day is as scary as the previous one; how am I supposed to feel with my entire family in the audience? I have to do my job and pull the performance of my career as if it was my last show ever. I have to act as if life were a musical. Feel every word coming from my mouth and perform it with my hands. All those months working with Libby will finally show tonight. Am I nervous? Yes, as hell. But I also know I can't let anyone down. What a great way to put pressure on me. But it's all right. That is how my parents raised me. And now they are expecting too much from me. I can handle it. 

"Blue!" my best friend's voice makes me turn in her direction. 

The whole band is here. My girls are here. I greet Rowan with a hug while Buffy and Jane wait for us to finish. Then I wrap them both in one. I didn't expect CeCe to let them come in to see me before the show, but apparently, Bowie worked some magic. 

"This is a nice surprise!" I tell them. 

"Bowie helped us. We wanted to wish you good luck" Buffy smiles.  

"Well, thank you. I need it," 

"Also, Jane wanted to tell you something," she adds. 

"Really?" Rowan asks. 

"Yes," she turns to her. "Now, let's find Cyrus, okay?" 

They both look at Jane, trying to encourage her and leave us alone. I think I know what it's all about. It's probably about what I already know or have my suspicions about. But I'll finally get to hear it from her. I look at her smiling, waiting for her to start talking, but she is very nervous. Maybe more than how I am with the musical. 

"I like Paul..." She meets my eyes. "In a romantic way," she says. 

"I'm not judging your taste... and I am not going to lie, this is a complete surprise," 

"Are you being sarcastic?"

"Totally. You were subtle about it, but that study date  at Tony's sold you out,"

"It was a study date! We have had many of them," 

I raise an eyebrow laughing at her response, and she apologizes many times. But I'm not angry, not one bit. It's great that she likes someone, even if that someone is Paul. They still make a cute couple, although I'm not sure he fancies her back. I'm not going to interfere. That's obvious. I have other things to do than try to get two people together. 

"It is all right. I think it's cool someone else likes Paul." I pat her shoulder. "I am happy for you... and your crush..." 

"Thanks..." she smiles. "I am sure you will have a great night. You are already Broadway material," 

Buffy and Rowan return along with Cyrus, and that's when I know we don't have much time left to talk. The three of them say goodbye and head back to their seats. I take a deep breath before I begin my exercises for my nerves and voice. 

Cyrus' POV

We are about to start the show. The people are already in their seats, waiting for it to begin. And I can feel it, you know. The responsibility, the pressure, the happiness, the nervousness. Everything. Not a single person here is relaxed. They all have one thing they want to prove. Maybe it is their first musical or their last before leaving Shadyside along the theater. Or they just gave up on this world. Whatever it is, they have something to accomplish. Actually, all of us. I want people to like this musical, my parents to enjoy it, my best friends and boyfriend to love it, and Libby to be proud of what we created together. I guess I have high expectations of myself. 

"All right, everyone, get ready. We have five minutes left!" Bowie says, standing next to me. 

"I thought CeCe was in charge of telling everyone that" I turn to him. 

"She is on a call with Bex," he smiles. "And I really wanted to say that... being the boss, the main character," 

"If life were a musical, it would be much easier," I sigh. 

"Why do you think that?" 

"Well, you already know what is happening. Plus, you can sing all of your problems away," 

"I already sing all of my problems away! You have been there too," he says so calmly. But I don't get it, so I stare at him in confusion. 

"Sorry, Bowie, but when have you ever done that?"

"Red Rooster open mic nights!" 

And just like that, every word he said made sense. But we can't continue our conversation since CeCe is telling everyone we only have one minute left. We all go to our spots. I stand next to her. Blue is in front of us, ready to walk into the stage and give the performance of her life. Right straight to Broadway. I try not to worry about how the musical would turn out in the end. But all I know is how much I wish TJ was here next to me, making jokes about me not showing up to the stage, just like it happened before. At least, I am sure he is next to his parents, waiting for our narrator, Bowie, to start. Yes, we gave him that role, and he is good at it. He might not be the main character, but he makes the story shine. Although, he shares that role with someone else, details, you know. 

"You better be ready, Bowie," CeCe whispers to herself as she gives him his signal. 

"Don't worry about him, CeCe," I whisper. "He knows what he is doing," 

As we share looks, he starts. Now I feel like my heart is jumping all over the place. My hands are shaking slightly, and I keep biting my lip. Yes, this has officially started. I have complete confidence in my team and in what I wrote. Everything we have worked for, and we can finally show it to the residents of Shadyside. Let the show begin.

Blue's POV

The time has come. I don't look at anyone before entering the stage. All I have in my mind is to make this the best I can, to go out there and perform as I've never done before. Make my family and friends proud. Not to let Cyrus or CeCe down. For people to like my acting, dancing, and singing. I am at the point where I fully define if I can be good at musicals. If the big dream of going to Broadway someday can be fulfilled. To be able to show my older sister that the fact that she took me there for the first time almost ten years ago had an influence on me and the path I want to go down. Blue is the person everyone sees from day to day, and Darcy is who my parents want to become a doctor. But who says Darcy can't be this too? I have spent much of my life avoiding being called by my real name, hiding in Blue. But I realize I can be both. I can be Darcy and act, I can be Blue and fulfill my dreams. The name doesn't matter, and my hair doesn't matter. They're both me.

"You can do it," I whisper to myself.

Following Bowie's voice, I move to the beginning of our musical. We start with a slow song. Which, if I remember correctly, was rewritten by my brother. Here I introduce the character, her desires, dreams, and goals. This is the crucial point, according to Joseph. 

"My dearest, Hazel," I wrap my arms around her, making every movement as delicate as possible. Just as we rehearsed. "I thought I would see you until the ball tomorrow night." 

"Mabel! I have some news to deliver" She advances a few steps toward the table. 

Cyrus' POV

The first song ended, and Blue finds herself acting out the first scene before continuing with another, shorter song. One of the few in which Bowie and Paul did not intervene. That one is all mine. This gives me another reason to be even more nervous. And that's why I play with the pen in my hand. I know it's something CeCe doesn't like, but it's inevitable. Also, she is so focused on following every actor's move that I could run out of here, and she wouldn't notice. Tempting, isn't it? I can leave in silence, run, and hide in the park. I can text TJ, Andi or Buffy, or even Jonah. We could go for a coffee and come back when everything ends. But I can't do it. I just can't do that again, I can't keep running away from my problems. I am almost 23 years old, I've grown so much in so many ways, and I know everyone counts on me. I can't let them down. 

I accidentally drop the pen and wake up from my intrusive thoughts. Luckily, CeCe does not notice since she is too focused on Blue's acting. I decided it was time to end it, to stay here and face what the people will say about the musical. So, I pay my undivided attention to it, finding it good. I never noticed how good the actors were. I mean, we choose them for a reason, but I never thought it had to do with how all would turn out. But I can picture it all now. This is what I had in mind when I wrote it. 

"This is incredible," I whisper to myself. 

Blue's POV

Short pause. CeCe congratulated us once the scenes finished, and Cyrus complimented every single thing we did as if he did not pay attention before. But the show must go on, right? Now there goes my romantic interest in the musical. They are doing their thing. I realize that I have, no, I must appear so in love. The kind of love you would do anything for them, the intense and makes you sick kind of love. I have to look at them and convince everyone how much I love them, how I would pull off a Juliet only to be with them. And I hate it. In the rehearsals, that was the only thing CeCe and Cyrus, god, and even Bowie told me about. I don't seem to get how deep their love is, their bond. And I tried to think about previous experiences, but I don't have any. I haven't had a crush before, not even when I was 15 and all of my friends were dating, but it didn't seem like a problem because Rowan and I never cared. It's just that now I need it. I need the feeling, the experience I didn't have before. And the clock is ticking, and my time fades away. 

"Hey, I came to check on you," Bowie's reflection smiles toward me. "You look... concerned," 

"Well, I am," I smile weakly. "You know what comes next and how much I struggled when we rehearsed it. It looks like I can't feel love or something" I shake my head in defeat. 

"I am sure that is not true," he pats my head. "Kid, you love your friends? And your siblings? You love acting and singing. You may not have experience with that kind of love, but... who says you can't use other forms of love and perform it with this character?" 

The words click on my head, other forms of love. I can do that. I finally turn to face him, my face lightening up. "Thank you, Bowie,"

Cyrus' POV

In this scene, the main characters confess their feelings, and everything seems so bright and beautiful. Here, it is where my song goes. Blue is about to go on stage again. After a talk with Bowie, she looks much more confident than before. I know how difficult this part can be for her since she didn't perform well the whole "I love you with all my soul, it is so intense that my whole body sores", and she stressed out. Seeing her like this is how I finally have an answer. I walk up to her before she enters the stage. The romantic interest will be singing for a bit longer, so I know this is my last chance. 

"Did you memorize both versions?" I whisper to her, and she almost hits me. 

"Sorry, I was focused on my lines," she whispers. "And yes, I did. Why do you ask?" 

"Sing the original. I'm seeing your confidence now, I know you will be incredible, outstanding, the greatest... just... sing that one, only for tonight" Somewhere in between my words, my tone raised, but we did not care. Before CeCe called for my presence next to her, all Blue does is stare right into my soul and nod. She gets it. She is going to do it. 

Blue's POV

Cyrus just told me to sing his original version of the song, and yes, I will do it because even if he didn't say that, I was going to do it anyway. Even if that meant no longer being part of the musical. He is my friend and boss, but mainly we are friends. That means I want the audience to know how talented he is at writing songs. My brother and Bowie worked hard on this one, but they won't be mad at me or us. That is what I hope so. So, I finally walk up next to my friend in the musical. Everything goes great until they arrive. We are almost over with the opening night. 

They approach me, and I remember Bowie's words, so when they end their song, confessing their feelings for Mabel, it is my turn. 

"My dearest, your feelings are very much reciprocated" I take their hands, thinking about my friends, on how I felt playing with them at the battle. I think of my siblings, Paul and me watching Big Time Rush together and eating ramyeon. On Gen and me going to Broadway for the first time. On all the love I have for them. "I must tell you how much I love you... with all my soul, it is so intense that my whole body sores... and my lungs almost run out of air... how you accompany me in my daily chores, in every ball since that night. I must tell you that I will be yours for what our lives last," 

I am not sure how this confession goes, but now it's time for their kiss. We share, for the audience, a passionate, full-of-love one. But in reality, it was gross. Or at least for me. I had to contain this feeling that something was wrong and maintain the sense that we are in love. Finally, we reach the final song. Cyrus' song. I stand in the middle of the scenario and start singing. 

Cyrus' POV

For a moment, I don't feel my feet. Blue finished the song, and my musical is really brought to life. The stage curtain comes down, and all that is left is the crowd applauding. CeCe takes my arm, leading me with her and making sure I won't disappear this time. I stand there as she says the sweetest words for me. The whole cast joins us, so we can do our curtain call. We receive more applauses. I scan the audience until I find Iris and her magazine team. Judging by their faces, they enjoyed the musical. My musical, I did it this time. I didn't run away or have a panic attack in the park. I am Cyrus Goodman, and I finally love what I do after a year of doubts. 

I go backstage and find TJ waiting for me with a plant in his hands. I smile at him and wrap him in a hug, simply enjoying the moment and his familiar scent. "I don't want to ask, but why do you have a plant with you?" I say once we break it and share a small kiss. 

"It's for you, actually. Paul's idea" He hands me the unusual present.  

"Thank you, I love it," I smile. 

"Everyone loved the musical... I think I saw Marty crying during the confessions" He places a hand on my cheek. 

"I'm glad we could do that. I think the cast had so much fun," I sigh with joy. 

"This is what your hard work becomes... I'm proud of you" He leans to kiss me once more. 

He mentions the celebration in Tony's. Those are other words for a party but not in someone else's house. Which is an improvement. We are celebrating the battle of the bands and my musical. I just know this will be another magical night. He takes my hand, and we leave backstage together. 

Blue's POV

I think about the performance as I use wipes to remove my makeup. I am already in my Blue clothes, so I'm almost ready to leave. It took me longer to leave behind everything related to the opening night. I believe I did well with the confession thing. But I don't want to know anything until it comes out in the newspaper and Rocking Shadyside. I had a feeling when we did our curtain call, everyone was singing my name. Well, chanting my name, but hope you like my not-great humor. Once I finish, I put all my stuff in my tote bag. Everything feels so calm that I know I am one of the few left in the building. 

"My sister is a star!" Paul shouts behind me, making me jump a little. 

"Don't say that, please," I turn to him. 

"We're celebrating at Tony's," he starts. "You tell me when you're ready to go" I see it on his face... he is genuinely proud. 

"Thanks, I'm actually ready... Mom and Dad are not coming, right?" I love them, but I don't want to have a party with them.

"No, Gen said she'll handle them" He offers his hand to take my bag. 

"Poor of her, but I'll take it" I smile and hand him my stuff. 

We walk out of the theater. I look back at it, sighing dreamingly, knowing how much this means. My dream, my, for now, workplace. The building that has seen my best performance to date, even if I am still debating about the confession one. Now, I will celebrate with the people who gave me the strength to keep going. I feel my brother's hand on my shoulder, indicating that we need to go to Tony's. So, I look back once more and walk along his side.

Chapter Text

Andi's POV

Amber and I entered Tony's, hoping to meet our friends right away at our usual table, but we did not find what we thought. Instead, we walked into the other bands and their friends, the whole Rocking Shadyside team, and even CeCe and Bowie greeted us. They said they were already leaving because it was Kai's time back at Mack's house. We stand still at the door, not knowing where to find Cyrus, Buffy, TJ, Jonah, or any other of our friends. She takes my hand before someone notices us, and we walk to the right side of the place. The music is loud, and I love it, but I prefer to find my friends first. 

"It's literally a party, Andi" Amber keeps looking for TJ and Iris. 

"Remember what happened at our last party?" I squeeze her hand and shoot her a smile. 

"Yes, we kissed..." She meets my eyes. "And we started dating" 

"Such a magical night," I add. "What if we order something? They could be near there," 

"You are right. Not because I want pizza, but because TJ loves it more than we both do," she smiles.

On our way to order our beloved pizza, some people stopped us to chat a little. I don't judge them because we probably know almost everyone in this place because of the battle, so we have to be social butterflies and look out for our friends. It takes us about fifteen minutes to order our food. But once we are there, someone tells us about the special table where everyone is. Cyrus and TJ talk to Jonah and Buffy while eating some chips. The rest is enjoying their pizzas as we are about to do. 

Jonah's POV

I break from the group's table for a few minutes. I have to order more soda for Blue and Cyrus since they are both stars in the making. I'm sure they'll end on Broadway in no time. As for us, I am not sure yet, but let's hope everything goes great on tour. I still can't believe we are touring with The Renaissance Boys for three months. My parents are super excited about it. At this point, I'm sure they told all of their friends and the rest of my family. Marty's mom is, I have to admit it, one of our biggest fans, so she was the first to actually scream in our faces that will be famous. I don't think I have to tell you how she feels now. TJ's parents wished us good luck. They can't believe we are a step closer to getting more people to know us, you know, outside Shadyside. Our only issue now is Paul's parents, you already know how he almost did not make it to the final round, but we hope to count on Gen to convince them to let him go. We are No Exit. There is no band without our drummer. 

"Jonah! How is the celebrating thing going?" I find Bowie waiting for some pizzas. He told Andi he was leaving, but apparently, Bex wanted to eat something. 

"As great as you can imagine," I smile. "We are already discussing which songs we should sing," 

"You'll be great at the tour. I'm happy you guys won," he pats my shoulder. 

"Thanks, Bowie. It means a lot you are like our teacher," I nod. "We always learn something new with you,"

"You can come by and visit Red Rooster whenever you have a question regarding touring," he smiles. 

He picks up his order and leaves Tony's. I guess we can still learn from his knowledge, he already toured with The Renaissance Boys, and he definitely knows what it feels like to play in front of all their fans. I pick up the drinks and go to our special table, ready to keep celebrating. 

TJ's POV

It has been almost thirty minutes since we got here, and it seems to be more people in Tony's. Jonah returned with some drinks and told us about his talk with Bowie. Marty tells us to leave the party and go directly to Red Rooster. He is really excited about touring with his favorite band, but I tell him Bowie is at home with Bex and the baby. The next topic entering our table is what we will do about Paul's parents. He hasn't talked to them, but he expects to get a cold no from them. We need a plan urgently. Before we could say another thing, Sam from Search and Maddie from Fire Bite come to our table. Somebody suggested to them that the fantastic four should play a song. One we did not sing at the battle. Jonah and Blue are not convinced of doing it, but Cyrus says it's a great idea. 

"Just a song, please. From every band!" he smiles adorably. 

"Do we have one prepared?" Jonah turns to the rest of the band. 

"You know we do," Marty responds. 

"Yeah, we have like two thousand songs written," Paul adds. 

"I guess you are playing, right?" Sam winks at us. 

"No Exit is on board then" Maddie turns to him. "Now let's see what The Rose Ladies have to say," 

They all share glances. I can imagine how tired Blue must be. She played at the battle and then had a musical to lead in. But there is something else they are not telling us. Rowan turns to me, asking me with her eyes to encourage her best friend. I was about to open my mouth and say some words to her, but she accepted after seeing Buffy and Jane's expressions. I do not know what happens, but we'll get more from them. 

"The fantastic four playing at Tony's, at the same time!" Cyrus takes my hand. "Unprecedented, iconic!" 

"You really like us, huh?" I tease him. 

"I want to enjoy this party, and you are the best band of Shadyside for a reason..." he smiles. "I mean, you literally have a trophy... and you'll go on tour with the biggest band ever," 

"What about the other three?" 

"They are impressive as well," 

"This is our last performance before going on tour, Teej," Jonah interrupt us. "Let's give them something they won't forget," 

"Yeah, even if we have to sneak Paul out of his house to come with us” Marty raises his drink.

"You want his parents to sue us, don't you?" I joke. 

I know we can convince his parents to let him come with us, even if it takes us two weeks to prepare. You know we always have a plan B in case we fail, but now, we enjoy joking and laughing about stupid plans. 

Jonah tells Sam to let us be the last ones to play, we haven't decided on the song, but I feel like playing one of Paul's, Love Parade since he said we inspired the song. 

Buffy's POV

This could probably be the very last performance of The Rose Ladies. We still haven't talked about it, and maybe no one wants to end this, but if we did not stop being a band... what does it mean? Do we need to chase the same dream as No Exit, Fire Bite, and Search? Do we have to record songs and have gigs? We don't have it clear yet, that is why it is so hard to decide. However, we all agree to be the first ones to play. That way, we enjoy the rest of the bands without feeling guilty, but we also wanted to play first because we were the last ones in almost every round. Now, as we get closer to the instruments, we share glances. Realizing we do not know what song we will play in a few minutes. Luckily, Rowan is the one who stops and calls for a small band meeting. 

"Which song are we playing? I mean, we just sang our best one at the battle," she says as if we did not have more songs. Well, we don't.

"We have another one," Jane responds. 

"Moonlight?" I ask. That is the song we discarded to play at the battle. Not because it was bad or something, but we thought Cry For Me would fit better. 

"We have the other one too, but I think Moonlight it's a great idea," Blue smiles. 

"It's time for Rowan's song to shine," I say, putting a hand on her shoulder. 

"Hopefully, we will have our turn too" Jane turns to Blue, and just for a second, I hope we'll continue as a band. 

"I don't want to interrupt, but you guys have to play in five minutes" Sam warmly smiles at us, standing at Rowan's side. 

There is only one thing I have to say about this song... I don't sing much of it. But it is all right because I start the song with my drums. It sounds dumb. But if I ask Paul, I'm sure he will understand. We make it to the instruments, and I try not to think about our issue and enjoy one of my favorite songs of ours. I remember how much we all loved it when Rowan showed us the lyrics and Jane gave it some rhythm. The pure joy of us. Now, I start the song and our possibly last performance as a band. 

[Jane]: Your eyes are glowing in the dark | Lighting the way to where you are | Ain't nothing pulling us apart | When we're together

[Blue]: Diamonds are everywhere, they're all that I can see | Close isn't close enough for you to be to me | I wanna be the air, be the air you breathe | Hold you forever

[Jane]: Ooh, all the stars above | Got nothing on you, baby | And your love is shining like the sky | But all I want tonight

[Blue]: You and I | Dancing in the moonlight | Kiss you when the mood's right | Baby, I don't want nobody else, but 

[Jane]: You and I | Dancing in the moonlight | Kiss you when the mood's right | Baby, I don't want nobody else, but

[All]: You-hoo, you-hoo-hoo-hoo-hoo-hoo-hoo | You-hoo, you-hoo-hoo-hoo-hoo-hoo-hoo

[Blue &  Buffy ]:  Summer, it never had a chance  |  Winter could melt inside your hands  | You do it all because you can | Don't you forget it! 

[Jane]: Ooh, all the stars above | Got nothing on you, baby | And your love is shining like the sky | But all I want tonight

As the song fades away, so does the smile I had the entire time. We gather near our table, but no one decides to talk about it, but we all hold hands. I can't believe how much being in The Rose Ladies has changed my life. I will always be grateful for this opportunity. It does not feel like the end of something. More of a start, I dare to say. Whatever we decide after this performance, I know I will have friends that will last forever. 

Sam and Maddie announce the next band, Search. They won't be performing until twenty minutes, so we take the chance to eat more pizza and grab some drinks. We have some stuff to discuss, but tonight is not the perfect time to do it. 

Paul's POV

I almost missed The Rose Ladies' performance since I got a text from Jo. She and Robby were close to Tony's. Robby's dad and her friend Miguel were also coming, but they stopped in a store before the pizzeria. Luckily, I could enjoy the full song. But my friends now missed it, it's not that bad because I recorded it, just like a proud brother would. I see Jo, Robby, Miguel, and Johnny enter the place. A pizzeria is full of people from a music contest and a theater. Pretty much sums up the essence of Shadyside. Back where they are from, you can tell karate is their thing, and here we have those things. I left TJ and Cyrus at the table, I was in my third-wheel moment with them. But now, I get to be with other people and not look like the child they adopted. I lead them to where the magic happens, meaning where we order the pizzas.

"Hope you are enjoying your first time in Shadyside" I turn to them. "Now you are about to taste the best pizzas ever!" I smile at them. It is obvious how excited I am for them being here. 

"I heard so much about these pizzas. I am so excited. Everything here is so pretty. I am considering leaving all behind and coming with you," Jo smiles, looking at the place. "Oh, Paul, he is Miguel, one of my best friends. Miguel, this is Paul, also one of my best friends... and Johnny, who you already know because I can't get him off me," 

"It is a pleasure meeting you, Paul," Miguel says. "Jo has talked about you so much," 

"The pleasure it's mine, Miguel" I smile at him. "Jo has told me about how impressive you are at fighting" I turn to Jo. "You can stay in Shadyside whenever you want. Having you around will be great for us," 

"I'd be No Exit's bodyguard," she smiles. "We could go on tour and all," 

"That means I would have my off time from the beast," Johnny says. "You can keep her now. I don't think her father would notice" 

"Very funny" 

"You are hilarious, sir" I turn to Johnny. "Let's order those pizzas!" I smile at the four of them. 

I lead them to our table. All of my friends must be dancing. The only people there were Jonah and Rowan, but they left to see Search's performance. So, again, I couldn't get the band to meet them. But it is not bad since Jo, Miguel, and Robby told me about their karate tournament. And the problems and rivalry the dojos have. It seems too much to get in thirty minutes, but I have practice from my classes. The only difference is that this topic is so much fun.

Rowan's POV

After the great song our band played... and like twenty minutes of an eating contest Jonah and I had. We are in the first row, watching Search's performance. I don't want to admit it in front of him, but I have had a great relationship with their drummer, guitarist, and violinist since the magazine cover. But we are not necessarily best friends. I know he is now close to Sam, so we can call it even, right? It is still weird for me to be close to him because many people ask me if we are dating. How could they think such a thing? We only work together, and both are friends of the Kim siblings, like music, and had a terrible accident swapping coffees. But just that. He is such a great friend, ignoring the fact that he thought I liked him. But I see us more of music buddies and hate selling clothes teams. 

"Did you ever think we would become friends?" I turn to him once Search finishes their performance. 

"Of course not. You insulted my excellent taste in coffee" He raises both eyebrows. 

"You don't know what you're talking about... that is the worst type of coffee, and I drink coffee every day!" I shove him playfully. 

He has this offended expression, but five seconds later, we are laughing again. He is a safe person to be with. With him, I feel the same way as I do with Darcy. Close friends' energy is what we have. 

"Do you realize how we sound?" he asks. 

"Yeah... I hate being sick," I sigh. "But it was your fault," 

"Actually, it was Gen's fault!" he says. "When her friend came to visit her... and we had to spend with them the whole day because she was out of town," 

"You are right..." I rarely say that to him. 

"Want a second round? We can eat ice cream now," he suggests as we approach our table. "But no one has to see us, we are still sick"

"The first one to have their brain frozen wins," I smile. 

We both rush to order. The competition is on. We don't win anything, but at least we are having fun. That is what being with Jonah Beck means. 

Marty's POV

So, we'll be touring with The Renaissance Boys. And I don't know how to react or what to say. They are my favorite band, and you all know that. It was an honor having them at the battle, but now, I'll be traveling with them and opening their shows with the guys. That is a dream coming true. Although I want to keep talking about this to everyone here. I know the rest of the bands were looking for the same... and Buffy looked distracted since then, so I guess I'll be talking about this with her another day. We still have two weeks until we leave. Then it will be three months of concerts and visiting places all over the country. But, as I said, Buffy. She is my priority right now. I take her hand and give it a little squeeze. She is lost in her thoughts, but still turns to me and smiles very weakly. 

"You look beautiful tonight" I give her a small kiss. She smiles but still does not feel like my Buffy. 

"You look great too," she squeezes my hand. "Why haven't you talked about the tour yet? I was expecting you to tell me everything you already organized in your head," 

"Well, we are celebrating. I can do that tomorrow," I smile. 

"Tomorrow... how long until you leave?" she tries to keep an emotion there, but I don't know why she sounds so down. 

"Two weeks..." I start. "But we'll spend those days together, all right? I have many ideas for cute dates," 

"Oh, you better remember about the exhibition Libby has next week. She invited us" She starts to sound like herself now. 

"Of course," I smile. "Want to dance? They are playing our song," 

And they are playing our song. The same one we kissed for the first time at the last party we were invited to. I still don't know what is going on with her, and I don't want to ask. She always tells me when something is wrong, but I guess this issue is different. That is why I told her to dance. She is a dancer, and that must cheer her up. I stare into her eyes as we sway along to the music. She does look beautiful, and I want her to never forget it. 

Jane's POV

I haven't left Blue's side since we played. Rowan spent much time with Jonah, but we sent a message to our group chat, and she joined us. Buffy also came. She was dancing with Marty. And it makes me feel guilty that I may ruin her night. The band reunion was my idea, actually. I think it's time we talk about the future of The Rose Ladies. But I can't get myself to say something first. Instead, I look at them as they talk about all the food Rowan and Jonah ate. I laugh whenever they say something funny, but I'm dying to ask about our issue here. There is a moment when they go silent, and Buffy asks me what is so important to call for a reunion. That was my opportunity, but I wasted it once my eyes landed on Paul, dancing with the pretty girl who traveled only to see him and No Exit at the battle. She is gorgeous and clearly funny, and they have known each other for a long time. Even Blue loves her. But most important... she loves Big Time Rush. They talked about their new songs and the album they promised to drop. 

"If you don't talk to him tonight, you'll miss a big chance, Jane," Rowan says, clearly noticing where I am looking... and still sounding very sick. 

"I can't... he is with his friends," I sigh. 

"You know Jo and Robby are dating, right?" Blue turns to the pretty girl and the guy who just joined them. "Also she is seventeen, so that wouldn't be right"

"I ignored that... thanks for the information," and thanks to my brain for overthinking... as always. 

"Someone call Dr. Love because we have an emergency!" Rowan brings us close to her. 

"Rowan, this is serious" Buffy turns to her. 

"I know. That is why we'll distract that cute couple over there" She glances at Paul's friends. "Friendship powers!" 

"You are never watching Big Time Rush with us again" Blue shakes her head. 

"You all are forgetting something here. And I don't say this because I'm afraid of confessing my feelings..." I finally found the courage to say those words. "What will happen with us as a band?"

"I wanted to ask that too" Buffy smiles at me. I bet she feels the same way as I do. 

But all we have is silence. No one wants to start a difficult conversation. At some point, Blue suggests talking about it tomorrow, when Rowan does not sound like an old car, and I stop staring at Paul and his pretty friend... and we all agree. The future of the band will be decided until further notice. 

TJ's POV

It is finally our turn to play. Cyrus and I spent together almost all night, but he left during Fire Bite's performance to chat with some of his coworkers. He said he'll be seeing us. And I guess this is our last performance before going on tour with one of the biggest bands. I can't describe how incredible this is... and the opportunity we have. People all over different parts of the country will listen to us. If this is not how we start our rising path, I don't know what it is then. But the best part of all is traveling with my best friends. Even if it means not being here on Cyrus' birthday. He keeps saying it's not a big deal, but I still feel bad for not celebrating his 23s. I still plan to dedicate him a song. I only need to talk with one of the members of The Renaissance Boys to see if they can help me record it. In short, I want to surprise him specially. I might not have all the people singing that song, but if I sing a Taylor Swift cover, we'll see. 

"So, we'll sing Paul's song, right?" Marty asks, snapping me out of my thoughts. 

"We have many songs... and you still decide to sing two of mine on the same day" Paul shakes his head. 

"Your songs are great! And we still need to decide the tour setlist, so don't worry" Jonah places his hand on Paul's shoulder. 

"We are expecting an equal number of songs per member," I add. 

"How many songs are we permitted to play?" Marty interrupts. 

"Later! We'll talk about it later," Jonah responds. "I don't want you to scare the kid," 

"Let's just go and play" I grab Paul by his arm and lead him to the instruments where Sam is waiting for us.

Our introduction was great, everyone cheered for us, and we felt appreciated. Marty even jokes with the people here. I guess he is just excited all of this is happening to us. Paul starts with his drums once Jonah gives him the signal. This last performance is for us to have fun, not stress. 

[TJ]: Filled with gray | Add color to the world | About to explode | Colorful | The way you want | As much as you want | Pour it out 

[Marty]: When words don't make sense | Emotions are understood | Shout it | Cry it | Love whatever you want | As much as you want | Keep screaming 

[Marty &  TJ ]: Mhm |  Can I wear it too?  | Mhm |  If you're hesitating  | Don't hesitate | Come right in | Want you to sing it with me 

[All,  Marty ]: LOVE |  Stays here  | LOVE | From now on | One step forward | Join this endless march 

[All,  TJ ]: LOVE |  One   more   time  | LOVE | From now on | Anytime, anywhere | Our love parade will continue 

[Marty]: It's cold and frozen | Add some heat here | For us | Warmer temperature 

[TJ]: The way you want | As much as you want | Light a fire 

[Marty &  TJ ]: Mhm |  Now to this song  | Mhm |  If   you   are   nodding  | Don't hesitate | Come right in 

[Paul]: Want you to sing it with me

And we keep our Love Parade. This beautiful song with a danceable rhythm. The one our drummer wrote. Honestly, I am excited to play this in the tour. The others might not know, but I'll nominate this when we decide on our setlist. Once we finish, everyone applauses. They are clearly infected by the love parade. A happy song and four best friends who experience love differently can relate. It is magical. I spot Cyrus in the first row, cheering our names and looking so pretty. I'm really going to miss him. I cannot imagine not reading the same book when we meet or going to the café and ending up mentioning when we drank each other's coffee. Everyone knows the story, but we still talk about it like it was the first time. I love him so much. 

Paul's POV

Once we end our performance, I grab the guys and bring them to my friends. Surprisingly, Cyrus, Andi, and The Rose Ladies are already talking to them. I still don't understand why, but they are. Mainly about the musical. Jo and Robby went to see it too. I am not sure about Johnny and Miguel. However, we join them, and everyone talks about us and how good we will be once the tour starts. Andi even jokes about us forgetting Shadyside right away. But that is impossible. We love it here. Jonah asks her if they will forget about us once we leave. Everyone, even Jo, Miguel, and Robby, stares at him judgingly. I can't believe he said that. 

"Of course not. We are never leaving your side! We love you," Cyrus hugs Jonah. 

"We are family, guys," Buffy smiles. "With new members, apparently," she looks at Jo, Robby, and Miguel. 

"New members who are not from Shadyside," Andi adds. "But still, you are very welcome here," 

"Well, I can finally introduce you to the rest of the band," I smile. "This is our impressive leader, guitarist, and vocalist, Jonah. He is sick and couldn't sing, but hopefully, you can come and see us at the concert in California!" now I am saying too much. "Anyway, this is our subleader, bassist, and also vocalist, Marty... and this is our keyboardist and vocalist, TJ," 

"Also known as my talented boyfriend," Cyrus grabs TJ's hand. 

"Exactly, and well, this is Josephine, badass queen and future fashion designer, also the best rusher ever" I turn to Jo. "He is Robby, also a karate king and Jo's boyfriend... and he is Miguel, we just met, but he is also a karate champion," 

"Jo told me so much about Paul, so it's great being here and meeting all of you, guys," Miguel says. "And she needed having someone to talk about Big Time Rush who understands it," 

"Miguel is pretty bad for that," she explains. "He only watches the show," 

"And it was necessary for them to meet... Paul never shuts up about them," TJ adds between small laughs. 

"But the show is great" Marty turns to Jo and me, leading to a momentaneous silence. Only the music can be heard. 

In less than thirty seconds, someone finally speaks again. "You all were incredible in your performances. You are very talented," Robby says. 

"I appreciate you saying that," Jonah starts, "so you'll want to come and see us open The Renaissance Boys' concert," 

"You know what would be cool? Us going out, it'll be nice, you two" Cyrus turns to Jo and Robby holding hands. "TJ and I... and Paul, of course," 

"So I'll be the fifth wheel," I nod. 

"Jane can go with you," Blue suggests. "I have to help Gen at the store tomorrow," 

"Yes! It would be nice meeting you more before we leave," Jo smiles. 

"Of course, there is no problem from me," Robby adds. 

The night ends with us making plans to go out, minus the rest of the gang. They also have other plans. So it'll be only us four showing Shadyside to them. Jonah offered to show Miguel and Johnny other places, so they won't be around the couples and Jane and me. I guess it will be a fun day. After that, we have to get my parents' approval for the tour. I'll try asking them tomorrow morning. But still, I prefer to enjoy this moment with all of my friends. It still feels like a dream, for me to have this much of friends. I love it though. So we'll spend the rest of the night together.  

Chapter Text

Paul's POV

It's been a few days since we won the battle of the bands and Cyrus' musical premiered. My parents, as I expected, said there was no way for me to go on tour. And when I told the guys, well. What can you expect from us? They had some plans, but they were all too much. We agreed that Blue and I try one more time to convince them. And if that fails, then we will proceed with their ideas. And I am unsure of how that would turn out. Today is not the perfect day to ask them since we have a traditional celebration. My parents told me to not invite anyone, but I still managed to escape from a lot of work since I had a class early. I told them I also had to work on a team project, but I came to Jonah's. They are already making plans for later, and I only listen to them. 

"I can't, guys. We have Chuseok, it lasts three days... and since my grandparents don't want to be in California, they are coming over. Not to mention my aunts and their families..." I make a pause. "So, don't come over, please." 

"Why not? It will be fun to join" Marty pulls out his phone, ready to search for what in the world is Chuseok. 

"Yeah, because my band who's going on tour is way better for my aunts than their lawyer and doctor kids” I pack all of my stuff. 

"Wait... did your parents finally say yes?" Jonah's eyes are full of hope. 

"No... Blue and I are still working on it," and we are, but not during these three days. 

"So... not No Exit allowed?" TJ helps me with my books. 

"I'm afraid not," I sigh. "I'll text you later," 

I leave Jonah's house, thinking about how my sister and I will convince my parents to let me go on tour with my best friends. I know they haven't forgotten about my grade, so if I tell them I'll be doing everything while we are away and document it all, they might say yes. But this plan has many layers. First, I must be an exemplary son at Chuseok. Second, I need to talk to some of my professors, and Jane has to help me. Third, I'll show many interests in physics. Fourth, Darcy will ask me physics-related stuff, and I'll show off my knowledge. And finally, fifth, I'll ask them. What could go wrong?  

Iris' POV

You might wonder where were I during the celebration of No Exit's win, Cyrus' musical, and the end of the battle of the bands. Well, I had all the intentions of staying there, but life had other plans. My mother called and told me about my dad being involved in an accident. It was not a bad one, but still, he had to spend some time in the hospital. He broke his foot. I stayed by his side all night and could not even text my friends. I was too afraid they would stop everything and come by my side. I could not do that to them. They were celebrating important milestones. 

However, he is still in the hospital. And there is where I am right now. With Walker, since he offered to come with me and say hi to him. We walk through the corridors until we reach the room my father is. To my surprise, there are my mother and Maddie. Something inside me seems to freeze, as I can't take another step, and I stop listening to the story Walker was telling me. I feel someone's hand on my shoulder, making me react. When I turn my head, I find the doctor attending to my dad. He has some news for us. So my mom would rather she listen, and the three of us get out of there. 

"Do you think it's something good?" Walker turns to me. 

"I hope so..." My eyes catch both of their glances. "Thank you, to both, for coming... I did not know you were here, Maddie," 

"Oh, I went to your house earlier. Your mom said you were busy with a friend and she'll see you here. So I came with her," she smiles. 

"That is really nice," Walker says. 

I don't know what else to say. Both are here. Visiting my father and coming to see me. How I cannot be confused? 

"Any want coffee? I really need caffeine right now" I try to sound as natural as possible. 

"I'll go with you" Maddie stands up, wrinkling her nose. 

I stay close to her. She leads the way and even orders the coffee for me. That only means how much time we spend together every day. 

"So, after this, do you have plans?" she stares at her hands. 

"Not really, it's our free day. I thought of watching a movie on my laptop" I wait for her to look at me. 

"That sounds like a great evening," she smiles. "I was about to ask you to go to The Spoon," 

I can't say something, so I smile as I sigh nervously, taking my coffee and guiding her back to where Walker is. And there it goes again, this strange feeling I have when I'm with both of them. 

Marty's POV

It's been an hour since Paul left. He is probably enjoying with his family a lot of food. We met very early. It is not even 11 am. I know we should not think about walking near his house, but this could be an opportunity to prove he can go with us on tour to his parents. But Jonah and TJ also need to agree with me and this crazy plan I have in mind. Buffy texted me earlier she's spending the day with Jane, so there is not much to do. I turn to the guys. They are working on the possible set list for the concerts. This is the perfect moment to shoot the comment. There is nothing to lose. Well, there is, but you know what I mean, right? What could possibly go wrong when you have such a team like us? 

"All right, who is coming with me to this festivity thing?" I open my arms, inviting them to follow me.

"I thought Paul said we can't go," Jonah responds. 

"Let's trust him and his plan, okay?" TJ smiles. 

"I trust him. But if we go, maybe that could boost it up a little," I add.

"What do you mean by that?" he has that look in his eyes. 

"Think about it. We make a good impression in this thing. And that way, they'll know we care about their son. And we will make sure he does not end up dropping out of his physician career" I stay still, letting them know I am serious. 

"That is not a bad plan" Jonah turns to TJ. 

"What if it all goes wrong, and they don't let him go with us, and Fire Bite takes our place?" I think he is about to accept. 

"Is that a yes?" I smile. 

"If this does not work, you are screwed" he shakes his head. "Let's go. Hopefully, Blue can help us too," 

We get into TJ's father's car, and after some more convincing from Jonah and me, we move. TJ wants to make a stop before heading to Paul's house. He parks outside the theater, and just like that, we know we will be visiting Cyrus. Even against our will. But Shadyside's favorite couple must have their moment before we try to save the biggest opportunity our band will have in a long time. 

Cyrus' POV

Another day in the theater. This time, I am alone running everything. CeCe has to prepare for her moon festival. One of the biggest events in the Mack house. And since it is Kai's first one, she took the day off to make it perfect. Blue also took her day off, better said, three days off. She is also celebrating with her family, so I have to work with her understudy for these three functions. We are on a break right now. It is all the time I need to eat some cookies and finish my tea. I check through my chats for some news from my friends. It's too early for any of them to do something interesting, but I need a distraction. And I'll meet with TJ for lunch later. I don't want to bother him now. 

"Hello, handsome," my boyfriends' voice catches my attention. 

"Hi... I thought we were meeting for lunch in like four hours," I smile. 

"Yes, but I wanted to tell you in person. We have a band emergency" he takes my hand. 

"It's all right. Go and do your thing" I shortly kiss him. 

"I know I will miss you" he leans again for another kiss. "But I have to go. We're visiting Paul," 

"Is not he celebrating the moon festival?" now I am confused. Blue mentioned her family attending, and only them.  

"Yes," he smiles. "He does not know we'll be at his house yet..." 

Now the pieces fall into place. They are crashing the celebration. And I am not sure it is a good idea. But I don't say anything. TJ says goodbye and leaves with Jonah and Marty. I know I have to go back to work, so I finish what is left of my tea. And get ready for the action. 

Buffy's POV

I am meeting Jane at The Spoon for breakfast. Even though we are supposed to drink something like coffee, tea, or anything else, we can't live without our milkshakes. I order my usual meal and a chocolate one. She goes for her classic pancakes and a strawberry one. The future of The Rose Ladies is still unsure. We haven't had the chance to talk about it since many things have happened these days. Not to mention how much time Marty wants us to spend together. I know he is leaving, but I have to talk to my friends. We don't seem to match our schedules. Either I have a class or a date with Marty. Or Blue has rehearsals, Rowan has double shifts at the store, or Jane spends too much time helping her parents at the shelter or with them in reunions. Maybe I am too far, but it seems like we don't want to talk about the band. 

"So it's only us today," I smile at Jane. "Marty told me about doing something with the guys," 

"Well, we still need to discuss the future of the band, but I'm glad to spend the day together," she leans into her milkshake. "Is this a new flavor? I don't think I ordered mint choco," 

"Do you want me to tell them the mistake? I can go right now. It's no problem" I am about to grab her milkshake. 

"It's all right. I don't want to bother," she takes a sip. "It's not that bad, actually," 

"Okay... what else do you want to do? There is the library. And I also heard there will be some poetry reading in the park" I stare at her for some reaction, and she smiles. "Or we can visit Cyrus at the theater," 

"I like the poetry reading plan. Let me find some of mine, and we can go up there a read one..." she short pauses. "Or you can do that and say the author is anonymous," 

I chuckle at her words. "You know, we can go up there together and read it," 

"Fine, we'll do that," she smiles. 

How can I tell her how much I don't want the band to end? But we have different goals in life, and it would take us many hours to agree. There is a way. I know that. But to organize it, we need to be sure that the four of us want the same. However, I enjoy the rest of my meal with Jane, hoping she would talk about the band at any moment. But she does not. 

Jonah's POV

We are finally outside Paul's house. Having second thoughts. Thanks to TJ. He said what if we mess up everything? What if his dad does not let us in, and we don't even have a chance to talk to him? What if the rest of his family does not know he is supposed to be on tour with us in a few weeks?  And we started to doubt Maty's plan ever since. How can we know this will help Paul finally get a yes from his parents? At least we know Blue is in there, so she can back up us. It does not take us long to walk right to the door. I am the one to ring the bell, but my hand is already trembling. Marty ends up pushing my hand to do so. There is no way to back off now. 

To our luck, it is Paul who opens the door. But his face grows full of surprise, and I am not saying this in a good way. 

"I told you not to come," Paul whispers. "My family is bowing to the ancestors right now, guys," 

"We are not ruining your day. Don't worry," I say automatically. I'll probably regret this later.   

"But we can use this chance to convince your parents," Marty adds. "And if our plan A does not work... we have a plan B," 

"Only for emergencies," TJ says, turning and giving us a look. 

"I'm afraid to ask what the plan B is" Paul shakes his head. 

"It's better if you don't ask... but just for curiosity... where is your father's studio?" Marty smiles innocently at him.

He is about to answer, but we spot his father behind him. TJ motions him to stop talking, then he turns around and smiles. 

"Hello, gentlemen. What brings you here?" he uses his not these kids again tone. 

"We wanted to watch how you celebrate this important day in your family," TJ responds. "We are invested in learning more about Paul's culture," 

"And the food smells great... it must be a lot," Marty says, trying to peek at what is happening inside. 

It takes us more effort to convince his father to let us stay. But I guess TJ's words can take all the credit. Once we are inside the house, we meet a lot of people. Paul's cousins, aunts, uncles, and grandparents. They don't look interested in us, and I get it. We interrupted them. I only have been in this situation once with Andi, and it didn't end well. 

Andi's POV

It's that time of the year when CeCe gets into full planner mode. Moon festival is super important. And this year, she is taking it to a higher level since it's my little brother's first one. That means I must make time to buy everything she asks me to. I usually go with my mom, but she is busy with Kai. So, I thought it could be a great idea to invite Amber. She is coming to celebrate with us. Cyrus was not able to attend this year, same as Buffy. But Libby and Walker are coming too. I had to promise CeCe I won't invite many friends, so I chose them over the rest. I thought of Blue and Paul, but they have their own time and way of celebrating it. 

So, as I mentioned, I am with Amber, shopping for everything on CeCe's list. She is having fun while doing all of this. And so do I. I love spending time with her outside the gallery duties, even if it is doing chores. 

"Thank you for coming with me" I kiss her on the cheek. 

"You know I love shopping," she smiles. 

"I know, it's just... CeCe gets a little perfectionist over these festivities," I sigh. "But tomorrow will be much better with you by my side," 

"I am just happy you invited me to be part of it," she squeezes my hand.

"Well, they probably expect you to keep coming to these events, so prepare yourself," I say before entering the next store. 

"I don't mind. I love the food your father cooks" she follows me. 

"So, you are only with me because of the food?" I hold back my laughter. 

"Well, no. But I hope you can cook as well as he does." She chuckles. 

We look for everything we need from the list. I think this will be good to share in our relationship. I know Amber is for me when I need her, and I am for her. She doesn't mind being part of CeCe's attempt to overshadow her sister with this. And to give Kai the best memories for when he grows up and feels the pressure of hosting a celebration as good as this one. Yes, I already feel it. In the not-too-distant future, I will be living on my own. That's just one of the big steps. 

Paul's POV

My parents don't look bothered to have the guys here. And the rest of my family was not fond of seeing my friends, but my dad had the last word. Darcy was also surprised. I think she knows why they visited us. Invested in learning about our culture? Those words only work with my father. I know all this is overwhelming, especially when you don't know what to do or say. My sisters and I have been doing this our whole lives. But I believe in them. 

When we get the chance, we sneak into my dad's office. I still do not understand why they wanted to come here, but I stopped asking them questions when Marty tried to explain their plan. Anyway, I sit at my father's desk, opening his laptop. Jonah and TJ are waiting for me to do something, but I stare at the computer, completely blank. I am getting the idea they want to blackmail him or something. Does it sound as something they would do? 

"What do you have in there?" TJ looks at Marty as he keeps eating something. 

"I don't know. Paul's mom gave it to me... and it was supposed to be for the three of us, but it is too good" he eats one more of those things. 

"That is songpyeon. And you are most likely to eat the ones I made," I look up from the screen. 

Jonah shakes his head, standing next to me. "Anybody knows about computers?" 

The three of them turn to me. "Don't look at me," I try to move away from the desk. 

"You are the smartest of the band!" Marty, with a mouth full of songpyeon, points at me. 

"Yeah, I barely know how to use my phone," 

"I can do it" Marty takes the laptop in his hands. 

And then, they find out what stopped me from doing the job myself. My father has the language of all his devices in Korean. I am as clueless as they are at this point. No sight of hope at all. Marty turns to me, expecting me to already know something I ignore. He asks me to translate, then I say what I thought they knew. 

"You're not fluent?" he looks more surprised than I imagined. 

"Of course not. I only know a few words... Gen is the only fluent in Korean, and Blue knows some words too, but she can hold a small conversation somehow" I take a deep breath, knowing that we are stuck now.

"Then text Gen! She must be almost here. The store closes early today," Jonah suggests. 

"But what if she asks what it is for?" again, TJ, the voice of reason, makes them doubt. 

"I can tell her I accidentally changed the language of my computer to Korean and don't know what it says" It could work. I hope Gen is as distracted as I expect her to be. 

"A real-life problem fast-solver right here," Marty pats my back. 

I type as fast as I can with them standing behind me. Gen sees it incredibly sooner than I thought it would take. But it took her much time to respond. We left the door unsupervised. Right when I gave my idea. Our first mistake. Someone enters the room and takes us by surprise. It is my sister. She promised not to tell my parents about this, but she offered help. Oh, and the guys did not want to blackmail my father, they wanted to write an e-mail to Rafe telling him I was free to go on tour... honestly, I don't know that plan would turn out but I appreciate the intention and the reason behind it. We still need to find another way to make that happen, but you already know No Exit. 

Anyway, after that, we went back to continue with what it was supposed my friends came to my house. I swear. Their faces when my mother told them to come back the next two days were so funny and worth every crazy plan. I just love my best friends. 

Chapter Text

Jonah's POV

We leave in two days. Only 48 hours for the biggest thing No Exit will live. My parents have talked about it for a week. Anyone that comes our way must know their son's band will go on tour. And do not ask us how we convinced Paul's parents. All I can say is that it was intense. We thought we wouldn't have him by our side. But as always, we managed to triumph. Now is when it all starts kicking in, it feels real. I felt this was a dream before, but now it's true. We are truly going on tour with the greatest band ever. I know this is what I have always wanted, but I never thought it could become a reality with the band. No Exit it's my everything, my family, my safe place. Sharing something like this with Marty, Paul, and TJ only shows me how deep our love and bond are. Because I love them, it's not the way TJ loves Cyrus or Marty loves Buffy, but it's as intense as that. I love my friends, I love music, and I love that we are going to present in front of thousands of people.

"Jonah, Gen needs you at the cash register" Rowan pats my shoulder before taking my place sorting the clothes.

"Thanks," I smile. 

Gen never asks me to help her with the register, that is only her job, and of course, she knows I'll be leaving for the tour, but that does not seem like a legit excuse for me to go there. And I know this is not something Rowan just pulled off. I mean, she can make pranks sometimes, but not like that. 

I get to the register, and Gen is standing there, checking some notes. "Hey, Rowan said you needed me," 

"Hi, Jonah. Yes, could you please count how much we earned today? I need to fill this up before we close," she smiles. 

"Are you sure you don't want Rowan to do this job?" I stare at her in confusion. 

"Rowan do what?" Rowan brings some belts that people left in the shoe section. 

"Nothing. Please, Jonah, just do what I asked you to" She does not look up from her notes. 

I mouth an all right and open the cash register. I do not find any cash in there. Instead, there is a guitar strap and some picks too. I blink a few times, clearly confused. But as I look up from it, Rowan and Gen throw some confetti at me, shouting surprise. 

"I do not know what to say... thank you so much" I can't stop smiling. 

"We hope you like them. It took us so much to choose those," Gen explains. 

"Please use them wisely. Meaning, use them on the very first concert" Rowan, for the first time since we became friends, puts her arm around me, squeezing me close to her. I guess this is what a hug from her is like. I'm honored. 

"I promise. These will remind me about the best boss and coworker in the whole of Shadyside" I touch my heart as a sign of appreciation. 

"Well, then you are dismissed. Go and have a great evening with your friends. I'll finish cleaning" Gen shoots us a smile. 

"You don't have to tell us twice, boss!" I grab my gifts and then turn to Rowan. "Do you feel like eating pizza today?" 

"I always feel like eating pizza," she smiles. 

We leave the store, talking about what I should do in the cities we'll be visiting, she wants me to do some crazy stuff, but I know I'll get some great anecdotes from them. This night will be unforgettable. Rowan and I decided to have an ice cream and pizza contest. The winner chooses what movie we will watch afterward. I hope to win because she loves animated films. And we could end up watching Sherk again. But I wouldn't mind since this is one of the last moments we are getting together in a while. And I know I'll miss her. She is an incredible friend. So, we order a large pizza first. Rowan has that smirk on her face, a winning one. But I've been craving this food, so we don't know who will win this. After all, we are only having fun. 

TJ's POV

Cyrus came to my house very early. Last night I spent my time with my parents playing music and watching movies. We leave tomorrow. So I have my last 24 hours with my boyfriend. It sounds unreal whenever he says we won't meet in some months. But at the same time, I am excited to go on tour with my best friends. I do not know what will happen after it, but our lives won't be the same. The band who performed at Red Rooster will be a band that played in different venues. But I still have time to think about it once we leave. Today, it would be only Cyrus and TJ. 

"I have everything ready. We go and drink some coffee or tea, then go to the bookstore because it brings back some memories. And after it, there'll be a picnic in the park waiting for us" Cyrus wraps his arms around me. 

"Sounds like a lovely day to spend with my boyfriend," I smile. “Are there going to be any books to read?"

"That is why we'll go to the bookstore, Teej" he lets go out of me. "I promise you won't forget today," 

"I don't have any intention to do so" I take his hand. "I wish you could come with us," 

"It's not like we are not talking. You know the deal, facetime every day," he smiles. "Now, let's go. We have the entire day planned and cannot miss any minute," 

I let him lead the way, and as he said, our first stop it's the café. I order tea, and he orders the same coffee he had when we swapped drinks. We also eat some donuts. He talks about the musical and how grateful he is it is doing well. I tell him some of my plans for some of the cities. This looks like a typical day for us. People won't even notice this is the last time they'll see us in a while. We are so immersed in the conversation that I feel that we are the only ones in the place. Sitting at this table around nobody else. This is how it feels being with Cyrus Goodman, like his favorite scene from his favorite movie. At this very moment, we are Elizabeth and Mr. Darcy dancing. The only difference is that we are chatting instead. 

Our next stop is the bookstore. Cyrus grabs Romeo and Juliet, and we actually have some flashbacks. We show books to each other and kiss between aisles. It's been a while since we had a date like this, and it feels good to do it now. I pick a book we can read at the picnic. He also chooses one. We leave in the direction of our last stop, the park. This place feels like ours. Many things happened here when we were friends and now as boyfriends. We sit and take out the food he prepared. Everything is delicious, but after eating it all, we pull out our books and lay. 

"What is yours about?" he turns to me. I know he has read this book before. I could tell it by his face when I grabbed this one.

"It's not a love story for sure," I frown, trying to focus on the words. 

"But it's good, right?" he smiles. 

"Immensely good. You could say you already read this one, you know" I put the book down. 

"Oh no. You have to read it yourself. Not everyone has the same opinion about it," Cyrus takes a deep breath. 

"Well, it's a bit confusing to keep up to. Why did you not tell me to grab something else? I had intentions to choose a graphic novel," I smile. 

"We won't swap reads! You choose Wuthering Heights, and you keep it. I choose Heartstopper, I keep this one" he wrinkles his nose. 

"Not even for a kiss?" I get close to him, brushing our lips.

He breaks the minimum distance. We share a sweet kiss. I can feel the taste of the strawberries he was eating two minutes ago... but then we pull apart. 

"No, not even for a kiss," he smiles. 

"You are... precious," I smile. 

"What is that? I mean it's not that I hate when you say it, but that won't make me swap reads" he stares into my eyes. And I know, I know how much I will miss those eyes. 

"Nothing. It's just that I love you so much," I dreamily sigh. "And I'll miss you a lot," 

We kiss again. Then we go back to our books. I don't plan to finish this one today, but Cyrus ends his so fast that we agree for him to let me read it too. These are our last hours together, and every time I repeat it in my head. I don't want the day to end. I know it's only 2 pm, but I need the hours to pass by so slowly. 

Marty's POV

Today is our last full day here in Shadyside. Buffy and I decided to spend the day together at my house. And of course, my brother Jason had to visit my grandparents, so he won't be bothering us. As for my mom, she is busy with her friends from our cooking classes... so, it's only Buffy, my dogs, and me. We are watching one of my favorite tv shows, and she does not seem to laugh as much as I do. I don't know why... but it may be because we are leaving for months, or it could be because she still does not know what will happen with her band. I take her hand and squeeze it a little, she turns and smiles. I pause the show and suggest starting with our baking plans for the day. We'll be making a cake, cookies, cupcakes, and delicious pasta I learned in my classes. There is not any special event. We only felt like cooking that stuff today. 

"So, what do you want to do first" I turn to her. 

"The cookies and the pasta. I need to eat something before we play our friendly basketball game," Buffy smiles. 

"Great. Prepare to eat the best things you will ever have, and to lose against your boyfriend" We short kiss. 

"Just tell me what to do" She raises an eyebrow. 

"All right. Before we start, please tell me you will miss me," I pout. 

"Of course, I am missing you, you idiot!" she chuckles. "You are my boyfriend. I'll miss all the food you prepare for me, the long walks in the mornings, our friendly games at the park... when you visit me at the dance studio, and when you play the bass and sing to me," she takes my hand. "But mostly, I'll miss this," she kisses me. 

"It's good to know I'll be missed by my beautiful and talented girlfriend," I smile. 

"Remember, you owe me an entire day in Adrenaline City when you come back," she points at me with a spoon. 

"As soon as I come back, we'll be driving there. I promise," I wink. 

"Let's start... I want to take some pictures of us cooking, so I can post them when you leave," she looks at all the ingredients. 

"All right," I chuckle. 

I explain what she has to do. As she said, she puts her phone on the timer and takes multiple photos of us cooking. Buffy looks flawless... I can't believe she is actually my girlfriend. At some point, I don't know how we end up in a chocolate chip fight. It is all laughs and kisses with her in the kitchen. And I know we probably made a mess, but cleaning everything up will be as good as cooking together... I will miss her so much. I can't imagine not seeing her gorgeous face and spending time doing nothing or everything. Although we'll chat all the time and Facetime before we sleep. This is my dream, the band's dream, but it's hard to think about how not long ago we became a couple, and now I won't be here for a while. 

Will that make a difference in all of this? 

"I have a present for you," Buffy snaps me out of my thoughts in the middle of eating the pasta we made. 

"A present?" I smile. 

"Yes, now close your eyes" She looks so happy.

"Fine" I do what I am told to. 

I hear how she puts something in front of me, probably next to my plate. I chuckle at the thought of how cute she is. 

Buffy places her hands on my shoulders. "Now, open your eyes!"

I see a bag there. Full of curiosity, I open it. "Wow, you shouldn't have to" I turn to her. 

"Oh, yes, I had to" She takes a seat. "Now, I hope you wear these because you need to look closer and find something else," she smiles. 

"What is it?" I look into the pair of shoes she just gifted me. Inside one of them is a letter, and the other one has a T-shirt. 

I unfold the shirt and laugh when I see what it says. "I love my girlfriend, written in your handwriting... I love it!" 

I reach out her hand and place a kiss on it. Every doubt I had faded away. Buffy won't forget about me so easily. I love her so much. And her presents are incredible. I can't believe I have a girlfriend who gives me these types of presents right when I have to leave for a tour, we will be alright, I know. 

After that, we head to our friendly basketball game, and as usual, we get pretty competitive. 

Paul's POV

As you should know by now, we leave tomorrow. My parents helped me prepare my luggage, so there was nothing left to do. My sisters are working today, and my father had to attend to an issue at his job. My mom went to help Gen at the store since Jonah did not work today. TJ and Marty are with Cyrus and Buffy, and Jonah said he'd be spending the day with Rowan. I tried calling Jo, but she has some serious stuff going on in her life right now. I first thought of texting Jane and asking her out... but I couldn't. She has been busy lately, and I don't want to bother her. So, I called Bex. She said Andi and Amber were still coming back from their road trip, but she was able to hang out at Cloud 10. And while she works, I play with Kai. He is getting so big. In no time, he will be as tall as Bowie. 

"We finally have a break before the next customer comes," she says, sitting with us. "You are really good with kids. Kai is so calm with you," 

"I guess he knows when a person is socially awkward," I smile. "Who is your next appointment?" 

"Jane Stevens," she reads from her notebook. I feel how slowly my expression changes. "Buffy's bandmate. Right? Are you okay?" 

"Yeah... I did not expect her to come," I nod. 

"I see what is going on... you have a crush on her, don't you?" she takes some of my fries. 

"I cannot lie to you, Bex. It is killing me... I like her so much" I hug Kai for comfort. 

"I thought you liked Iris," she frowns. "Maybe I am too outdated,"  

"I never liked Iris..." I say, shocked by her comment.  

"Really? Then it was Walker? I don't keep up with these since I got pregnant and then had a baby, and then my daughter started dating" She notices how confused I look. "I don't judge which genders you like," 

"It's not that. I am impressed. I did not know there were rumors of me crushing on them" Now I eat some fries. "But I like Jane. I really do... and don't worry, I didn't think you were judging..." I smile.  

"Fantastic! Now, let's go back to the Jane thing," she lowers her tone. 

I was about to tell her everything, when I started to like her, how I realized it, our moments together... but then, she appeared, opened the door of Cloud 10, ready to trim her hair, surprised that I was there with Bex and Kai... I couldn't take my eyes off her, and I guess we stared at each other for two minutes. 

Now, she is sitting next to me, eating the fries we have left, and Jane asks me about the tour, mostly, what I want her to bring up. I haven't had the chance to talk about it with someone who is not my family. Bex leaves the table since she has to prepare some things before trimming Jane's hair, but I catch her looking at us occasionally as we play with Kai; I feel comfortable with her knowing about my crush... I needed to tell someone who lives here but has zero connections with Jane. And now I am leaving for the tour, I don't know how to tell Jane I'll miss her. How can I say those words to her? 

Bex does her job and finishes doing Jane's hair... I haven't seen her so beautiful as I do now... she is always pretty, but today she seems ten times prettier; before she leaves Cloud 10, I tell her I'll see you once I am back from tour. I couldn't tell her what I wanted, but she smiled and hugged me. So, once she is nowhere to be seen, I stand up from my seat, announcing I have to leave and regret my actions for hours. 

"I am an adult who will evade his problems by watching all four seasons of Big Time Rush," I sigh. "See you, Bex and little Kai," 

"You can't watch all four seasons... you leave tomorrow" Bex raises her eyebrows.  

"What if I just watch a few episodes from season two?" I awkwardly smile. 

"Go on, but we will talk about this crush thing when you come back" I nod. "Now come here, let me give you a hug... good luck, you'll be great," 

"Thanks, Bex," I smile. 

I leave Cloud 10 and go to my house; there is still no one to be found, so I walk up to my room and take my laptop, ready to watch Big Time Rush, but my phone distracts me from searching for the episode I want. 

Jane: I couldn't tell you before, but good luck with the tour!

Jane: I'll miss you

TJ's POV

Today is the day. We agreed to meet at my house before we leave. Everyone and I mean everyone, insisted on coming too and saying goodbye. My parents are making sure no one starts crying. Paul is the last one to arrive. We want to hang out with our big friend group before getting on the plane. Buffy is with Marty, holding hands as they talk to CeCe and Bowie. Jonah and Rowan drink coffee as they watch something from his phone. Paul, Blue, and Genevieve are chatting with their parents. Andi and Amber play with Kai. Iris, Jane, and Walker listen to Jonah's parents talk about their hobbies. My parents and Marty's mom check the time every ten seconds. They don't want us to be late. And for me, well, I am with Cyrus. 

It's fun to think about how everything will change after these three months. Once we come back, many things will have already happened, everyone will have new stories to tell, including us. The tour will be something incredible, I am sure of it. But I cannot help thinking about my family, friends, and Cyrus. I, somehow, have a routine, they are part of it. Not seeing them every day will be new and scary. To me, three months is a lot of time, but we are lucky that someone messed up the tour dates and after the last concert in California, The Renaissance Boys have to fly straight to Europe, specifically Madrid, Spain. Meaning, we could have been almost seven months on tour, and of course, we can't go with them to another continent, so we'll end the tour once they already have performed in the rest of the world. I guess that works for our families and friends. Paul won't have to do that much homework, and me neither. I have a feeling that once we come back, everything will be different... but not in a bad way, it is all about positive changes. Or I hope so. 

"Well, I think it's time you guys leave," my dad announces. 

"We'll miss you so much," Amber says and then she and Iris hug me. 

"Please, keep in touch. We want to know everything" Bex says, she and Bowie take turns hugging Jonah, Paul, Marty, and me. 

"You are already rockstars, good luck," Walker nods at us. 

"I am so proud of you four!" Andi smiles, not wanting to cry.  

"Enjoy touring, kids" Gen pulls us into a hug. 

"Don't forget about us and tell Jonah to do everything I told him to," Rowan chuckles. 

"We are proud of you" Cyrus takes my hand and smiles at the guys. "Bon voyage!"

"Please, if you happen to go to Broadway, get me an autograph... and good luck," Blue smiles. 

"Have fun, and don't forget we will wait for you" Jane shyly looks at us. 

We walk out of the house and get into my father's car. The drive was silent. My father only played music we liked. Lots of 5 Seconds Of Summer, Big Time Rush, Selena Gomez, and of course, The Reinassance Boys. We did not even say a single word as we are closer to the airport. Many hours to kill after my dad drop us off. We are excited about what will happen. Once we say goodbye and approach our waiting space, Jonah turns to us. "All right, guys. Are you ready?"  

I am not sure if we are ready. How do you know that you are ready? It is something we need to elaborate a bit more. We smile at each other, not knowing exactly what to say. But someone knows that we only need two words. 

"No Exit" Marty wants us to do the hand thing. 

"No Exit" Jonah follows him. 

"No Exit," I join them. 

"No Exit" Paul places his hand above the rest. 

You know what happens next. We shout in unison No Exit. This is the start of a whole new chapter in our lives. What a privilege is to experience it with my best friends... we'll go on tour. And we don't care if people hear us saying our traditional cheer. We are happy. For the rest of these hours, we will talk about how of an opportunity this is. Marty and I will definitely talk about how much we'll miss Buffy and Cyrus, and Jonah will probably talk about the shows and how different they will be from our Shadyside gigs while Paul will nod to everything he says, avoiding talking because he hates airplanes and this makes him nervous. You already know how this is. How the band is and our dynamic. Hopefully, the tour won't change what we've been working on but also come back with new songs and knowledge from these concerts. We are halfway there, right?

To new experiences and changes but to never lose ourselves. 

Chapter Text

Andi's POV

I enter the gallery with some folders in my left hand and a coffee in my right one, ready to start another day. I have not been able to catch a break lately, ever since the road trip Amber and I went to. Now that the battle of the bands ended and No Exit left for the tour, we have more art-related events, and they demand more energy from us. Walker has an exhibition here tomorrow, which means he needs us all the time to double-check everything. Libby got us all the food and drinks he asked for, Amber was in charge of the decorations, and the rest only helped her to set them up. You might wonder what my job is... well, I need to get a band to perform. Shadyside's favorite band is not here, so I need an alternative. I tried to book Fire Bite, but they already have a gig in Tony's. My second option was Search, but their drummer, Paige, has the flu and can't perform, and in the words of their bassist, since she and their guitarist and lead vocalist, Sam, are dating, they are both sick. And the rest of the bands that were part of the battle are either taking a break or going out of Shadyside looking for some opportunity. That leaves me only one option... and I don't even know if it's a solid one. 

"Andi! Did you order the gifts Walker asked you to?" Amber helps me with my folders and tenderly smiles. 

"Yes, someone will bring them here in three hours, then we can start filling the bags with them," I sigh. 

"What about the band?" she takes my hand. 

"I have nothing... literally nothing. Not one band from the Battle of the Bands is available" I take a sip from my coffee. “And don't say ask Buffy because she does not even know if they are still a band," 

"I won't say it... but they are the only hope we have. This means a lot to Walker," she sighs. "I don't want him to be upset because we couldn't find an act," 

"What if I ask Cyrus to do a monologue or something like that?" 

"You have to be kidding, Andi Mack," 

"That is an act! And it's not like he is not a professional. You have seen his plays and musicals," I smile. 

"I give up" She is about to leave me there but turns to me. "It's up to you," 

I stay still, thinking about what it's best to do. I know Walker asked for a musical act, not a monologue from our favorite playwright. I shake my head and open one of my folders. There are options for a secret thing I have going on. I can't tell you yet, but this will definitely change my life. 

"What will you do, Andi Mack?" I say to myself. 

This is a dilemma. How am I supposed to ask Buffy? That topic remains untouched since Marty left. She tried to match the rest's schedules, but it looked like they didn't want to talk about it. I need a plan B. I don't want to end up asking my best friend to have that talk with the girls. I don't want to push anyone into anything... but who can give us a musical performance for the exhibition? I think I know someone... my dad! 

I pull out my phone to text him the details. All I have to do is wait for his response... and it does not take long. 

Dad: I'm sorry, Andi. Your mom, Kai, and I will visit your grandma

Dad: we leave tonight, you know she has not met the little guy yet

Andi: don't worry, dad

Andi: good luck with Cookie, I'll see you in a few hours

And there it goes my last option... I guess I have to talk to Buffy now. But how do I find a gentle way to bring that topic into the conversation? I mean, I can't start with a Hey, Buffy, I booked The Rose Ladies a gig... where? Oh, in Walker's exhibition! I'll see you there. Yeah, I cannot do that, she'll end me. I guess I need more than a minute to plan something.  

Buffy's POV

I end another successful dance class and finally have enough time to go and eat something at The Spoon. These days I have been feeling much better, we still don't know what will happen with The Rose Ladies, but I guess it has to wait since we all are in different places, doing our stuff. It feels like a break from it. It's not that bad. Our last performance and anything related to the band was in the celebration... now with No Exit touring, it feels like a lifetime. Speaking of them, Marty sends me a picture of the guys every day. I don't know how many pics of Paul studying or Jonah making silly faces are on my phone at this point. But I know he is having fun and enjoying playing his songs in front of many people. And, of course, hanging out with his favorite band. He is living his dream and I love it. 

"Buffy!" Andi says from the door of the restaurant. I only smile in her direction. "Did you get my text?" she sits in front of me. 

I check my phone, and there it is. I am seeing this almost twenty minutes later. 

Andi: hi, I saw you getting out of class, can we meet?

"Yes, but I just read it," I smile. "Is something wrong?"

"No, no... well... yeah, actually, yes," she frowns. 

"What happened? Do you need help with the exhibition?" 

"Yes... I wanted to ask you something big..." she smiles. 

"What is it?" this might be serious, she is speechless. 

"Let's eat first..." she asks a waitress to come and takes her order. 

We talk about some of her future plans... secret future plans. She mentions something I've been considering too. Maybe we can help each other with it. I watch her eat her meal. I finished my burger. But she takes her time. I am almost out of my patience of the day only by seeing her like that. I do not have anything to do later, but I was expecting to go home and watch a movie with my dad. I tap my fingers on the table, one after the other. For several seconds before saying what I have had in my mind for a long time.

"Andi... I have plans with my father. Please, tell me what you need," I sigh. 

"All right..." She looks down at her food and then up at me. "Walker needs a musical act... and I already asked everybody you can think of... even my dad! Fire Bite has a thing in Tony's, Search is unavailable due to health issues, the rest of the bands already said they couldn't... my dad has to visit Cookie, and of course, No Exit has the concert with The Renaissance Boys... you, you and the rest of The Rose Ladies are my last hope... the only ones who can save Walker's exhibition... I wouldn't ask if it weren't important..." she takes a deep breath. "Please, I need you and the girls to perform... please, Buffy," 

I do not know what to say. I don't want to push, but Walker is our friend and helped us at the battle. I can’t speak on behalf of them... I can't take the decision for them... but Andi's face exclaims for help. I might be able to make them discuss the topic if Jane helps me. She wanted us to have the talk for so long. 

"I..." I hesitate. The words are right there on my tongue. "I... I'll ask them... no, I'll convince them, don't worry," I smile. 

Her face lights up, and not even finished her meal. She hugs and tanks me many times. She leaves the place almost running, and I take the chance to send a message to a certain group chat. 

The Rose Ladies: greatest starts of the galaxy 

Buffy: hi... I'm calling an emergency band meeting

Buffy: it is important... actually, it is URGENT!

Blue: my house... in an hour

Blue: see you there 

Iris' POV

"Iris, Emma sent me to ask you which photos we will use for this article" Gus passes me the folder. 

"I think these four are fantastic. Let's use those," I smile. 

As you can see, the magazine is doing great. Rocking Shadyside is doing great, and we feel incredible about it. Our next cover is Cyrus and CeCe, we plan to do one with Andi, Amber, Libby, and Walker once all the exhibitions and super important events at the gallery cool down. The article Gus was talking about is from the Battle of the Bands and the ranking of the fantastic four. We didn't get the chance to do a shoot with No Exit, so we'll have to wait until they return from the tour. I try not to miss my best friend, but I feel something is missing. And I know I have my love problems to look at. I miss him telling me that I should talk to them. Which is funny, considering how he confessed to his boyfriend. But overall, I miss hanging out with him and Amber... that does not mean we don't text or Facetime each other, but you know... it's different. 

I focus my eyes on the article I am editing. I got to write about Fire Bite and their performance in the last round and, of course, about them getting second place. I don't know how to write about Maddie without mentioning things I romantically like about her. I stare at the screen without any idea of what to type. But just then, Amber peeks her head above my laptop. 

"Amber! This is a surprise... I thought you always get lunch with Andi," I smile. 

"She ate with Buffy" She takes a seat next to me. "I came because I have orders from Libby to ask you all if you could add an article in the magazine about Walker’s exhibition, which is tomorrow, and you are already invited," 

"You don’t have to worry. Kira has that covered. She will write it, and Emma will take the pictures" I nod. 

"What about you? You’re not coming?" she looks concerned by my not given answer. 

"I'll go... Gus and I are on the support team. This is Kira’s first article. She needs my supervision," 

"And Walker? He is your friend... and you know what else too," I know what she means, but I don't want Kira, Gus, and especially Maddie to know what she is talking about. 

"You asked me about the article, so it's related to my professional life, not sentimental," I smile. 

"Ugh, you are like an iceberg when you work..." she sighs. "I'll see you tomorrow then," she kisses my cheek. "And grab your stuff. I feel like eating pizza today," 

I nod and do what I am told to. Not before giving Gus and Emma some guidance on the rest of the pictures. Maddie is out with Kira, Emma needed something related to her camera, and they offered. Maddie thinks it's a great opportunity to give Kira some tips about writing her own article. Amber takes my hand before I sit back down with them and drags me out of there in the direction of Tony's. 

Blue's POV

An hour has passed, and Buffy is the only one in my house. We wait for the others in the kitchen. My dad is not here, but my mom is cutting fruit for us. I won't lie to you, but when Buffy sent the message to our group chat, my hopes went up. I thought she wanted to end the band... and maybe this is what the reunion is about, but something deep in my heart tells me we might have a chance to keep being The Rose Ladies. All we need is for Rowan and Jane to be here. And we can finally decide. I check my phone for any signal from my best friend, and I am about to give up and cancel the reunion since they are already fifteen minutes late... but someone calls at the door. I stand up as fast as I can, grabbing Buffy by the wrist, and run to the door. I take a deep breath and find the courage to open it. And there they are. Jane and Rowan smile at us, and I get the four of us in a hug, even if my best friend does not like them. But she does not let us go... she squeezes our bodies together. We truly missed each other.

I lead everyone to the kitchen, where my mom greets them. She points at the fruit and leaves us alone so we can talk in total privacy. 

"Buffy... you can start," I nod. 

"Hi... I know it's been a while since the four of us were in the same room," she smiles. "I know we have been avoiding having this talk... but we don't need to decide yet... just listen to what I have to ask you to do" She rubs her hands together. "You must know about Walker's exhibition... he needs a band to perform at it... and we weren't considered at first because they know our current situation, but we are the only ones who can help them at this point... and I'm not asking you to keep being a band afterward if you don't want that... but we can help a friend and make a choice about us" she takes a deep breath. "Please, tell me you are in... this is important to him," 

"I'm in... I miss playing so much" Rowan raises her hand.

"I like the idea of helping a friend... and I also miss playing" I turn to Buffy with a tender smile. 

Only Jane is left. We turn to her, waiting for her response. She was the one who insisted on having the talk... she must have a lot to say. 

She plays with her hair and looks up from her shoes. "Yes, I'll play with you all again. You don't even have to ask" 

"And we are back, baby!" Rowan shouts behind us. "Group hug, come on" We stare at her in confusion. "I'm happy, do not judge," 

We all laugh and join her group hug, but when the happiness fades away, we start working on the setlist. Jane suggests using two old songs and the one we never got the chance to play. Rowan wanted to leave that one as the grand finale, but Buffy said it was better if we started with that one... so we don't feel it's like a goodbye if we decide that is what it is. I am glad to have these three women in my house, discussing songs and who will sing what. Our future is still unsure, but hopefully, tomorrow night will have an answer. 

Cyrus' POV

I go to the gallery to meet Andi. She said she needed help with something related to tomorrow's exhibition. And since it's getting a bit late, I bring her a coffee to bear the work. I enter the place and find Andi, Amber, and Libby putting stuff in bags with the logo of Walker's exhibition. I greet them and sit next to Libby. They explain what has to be done and how much we have left. I don't mind working, it's been somewhat weird not having TJ near, but my friends always keep me occupied. I know he is rocking every No Exit song and getting many new fans, so I see the bright side of it. And we don't have as much work as the premiere week, so I often visit Andi or Buffy, and they also pass by the theater and stay at the rehearsals. I am happy to have such supportive friends. 

"We have news" Andi turns to me, excited by the information she holds. 

"What is it?" I look at them. 

"The Rose Ladies is performing tomorrow," she claps her hands. 

"For real? Are they finally back as a band?" I can't contain my happiness. 

"Not yet... but they are back for tomorrow's event," Amber adds. 

"I take it... I miss Buffy performing" I get back into my bag. "She looked so happy and more herself than ever"

"I know! Marty will be so proud of her," Andi dreamily sighs. "Have you talked to TJ?" 

"Every day," I smile. "They are doing great, and the cities are incredible. He sends me pictures of almost everything," 

"And what do you send in return? Those cities must be hard to top," 

"Pictures of his favorite dishes from The Spoon" I pull out my phone. "And pics of me, of course... mostly sending kisses, he hates that," I chuckle. 

I show them all the pictures TJ has sent me over the weeks he has been gone. Amber says he never sends her photos like these and texts him about it. We know he is in a concert right now, but the thought of him seeing it tomorrow has us laughing. Libby has to remind us of what we are here for. She shakes her head whenever Andi brings back the gossip from the tour. But still aware of the stories Jonah has told to our friend. We might stay here for longer than we planned. But we can keep talking and enjoying our time together. I can't wait for the exhibition, to see Buffy performing again. I know Andi considered me to read something, so I am so happy she got The Rose Ladies' help. But all we have to do is wait... and finish what Walker asked for. It's going to be a great night. 

Amber's POV

Andi and I greet everyone at the exhibition. The whole day was about checking everything one last time and getting ready for it. Walker looks happy with how it turned out. He takes time to talk with every person in this gallery. I only lead some of them where the food is, and Andi makes sure no one grabs one of the bags before the established time we set. I spot Iris and their magazine team exploring every piece of the art Walker created. I manage to say hi and immediately return to my place. The Rose Ladies are also here. They find Walker and congratulate him for everything. After the first hour of the event, I sneak to meet with Andi. 

"All looks amazing. I know Walker is happy with the hard work," she smiles. 

"You are right, and the food is delicious" I grab more of it. 

"I have to tell you something" She takes my hand. "I promise it's not a bad thing," 

"Does it have to do with us?" I put the food down. 

She shakes her head, smiling. "Of course not! It has to do with something else... it's somewhat personal, but not that much since Buffy already knows," 

"All right... what is going on?" I raise an eyebrow. 

"Well, I-"

I am not going to lie, whatever she will say, I am already nervous. I can't stop thinking about the possibilities, what could be going on with her?

"Hi, sorry to interrupt. I'm Gus, part of Rocking Shadyside Magazine. We would like you to add some comments about the exhibition if you are down for it," the guy I met yesterday interrupts Andi. 

"Yeah, there is no problem," she smiles. 

"Sure... I'd like to be interviewed" I look at Andi. 

"Great! Please follow me. My friend Kira will be asking you a few things," he smiles gently.

Before we went in Kira's direction, Andi said she'll tell me everything when the event ended. We know a lot happens, and Walker needs our attention more than any other day. So we agree to talk about it later. I still don't know what she has to say, but I know how to wait. But this is not about us, and I'm relieved. But I am still worried about her, about what she is hiding, if she is hiding something. Suddenly, I feel like Iris and TJ worrying about everything for nothing. I still love when they do that, but I do not like it when I am the one overthinking. 

Buffy's POV

We have been in the gallery for over an hour. Walker's art is a total hit, and I know this will make it to Rocking Shadyside since I saw Iris and two other people with her talking to Andi, Amber, and him. I followed Blue and Rowan to the food. These two read the word free on something and immediately have to go there. But I have to admit the food is delicious. They also were about to grab a bag, but we heard a no from Cyrus. Andi left him in charge of them. We end up going back to the food and seeing all the art our talented friend has in the exhibition. I must say, all of this inspires me in some way. I might not be the next grand thing in the gallery, but I can use it for my dances... or, if the band stays together, to write songs. You have no idea how much I expected the night to come. We are hanging out as before, laughing at Rowan's jokes, asking Jane to keep showing us pictures from the animal shelter, and collectively shocked by Blue's new hair. She went from long and black hair for the first time since I met her... to a new short and still dark style. A big change if you ask me. Probably they also feel that mine is different since I had an appointment with Bex. It's not short but straight. Well, more of a wavy thing.

"So, you all changed hairstyles, and I still look the same?" Rowan sighs. 

"I did mine a day before No Exit left... it's not of a big change, actually," Jane puts her hand on Rowan's shoulder. 

"Something big happened, and I had to do something," Blue smiles. 

"And I wanted something different for the event... sorry, Rowan," I stand next to her. 

"It's all right... I never do much with my hair anyway" She shakes her head. 

"Hello, ladies" Andi joins our circle. "I hope I am not interrupting anything, but Walker says it's time for your show," she smiles. 

"We'll be ready in a minute" I turn to her. 

As we watch her leave, Blue takes the chance to give us an encouraging message... in her own way. "I guess this is it. We go there and play... have fun, enjoy the lyrics of our songs, and once we finish, we take a decision," 

"Lovely discourse, Darce," Rowan nods. 

"You should write poems," I chuckle before starting a group hug. "Let's go," 

And we walk right to the instruments... it's been a while since we did that. It feels great to be back at it. Tonight's opening song is the only one we did not sing before. We wanted to sing it on a special occasion, and here we are. I love the lyrics. And we had so much fun creating the melody. I don't have many lines, but I love it. Blue starts with some jokes, and then she congratulates Walker for his exhibition and exceptional art. Everyone cheers. Then she introduces us and our song... the next thing she does is give me a sign to start drumming along to her guitar. Oh, how I am turning into Paul. 

[Rowan]: Watch me run, watch me run away | Got no ties left to yesterday | I know who I was, put me here now | I got no intention to slow down 

[Jane]: Burn my past in the fireplace | From the ashes, I rise again | Looking at the future, it's so bright | I'm gonna make it mine, gonna make it mine 

[ Buffy  & Blue]: Show you how I do, out here making these moves | Ain't here to play  (you ain't ready for it)

[Jane]: Watch me go | Watch me go rule the world | Know you never doubted, baby | I'ma go run the whole universe 

[ Buffy  & Rowan]: Baby, I was born to rule |  Yeah, I'm the queen, I'm the queen  | And it's all because of you | That I'm the queen of hearts

[Jane &  All ]: See it clear as day, dreaming 'bout the way | One day, I would rule the world | And now that I'm surrounded by all my girls | We be shining bright like diamonds and pearls  (hey, hey, hey) 

[Blue &  Rowan ]: You all made it like a movement | Yeah, take a bow up on the stage | All my friends know how to do it | And you can do it too, just follow, hey |  You're making me shine today  (yeah, you can do it, hey) |  Yeah, I do this every day, oh-ooh  

[Buffy &  Jane ]: Show you how I do, out here making these moves | Ain't here to play  (you ain't ready for it)

We keep going with the song. At some point, Blue and Rowan turn to join Jane and me near our instruments. We look happy, and everyone else seems to enjoy our performance as much as us. Our following songs were Moonlight and I Can't Stop Me. I was surprised to see Andi and Amber singing along to those. And Walker loving Queen of Hearts. Do you understand what happened here? They like us as a band. They actually do, and we were doubting all this time if we had enough to be a real one. 

We finish our presentation as everyone applauses and cheers. I follow the girls back to where we were before the performance. We hold hands, smiling, trying to wake up from what looks like a dream. This is not the battle of the bands where everybody just loved music, and that's all. No bad bands. We are in the gallery, with some people who did not see us nor listen before... we know we need an answer. I was about to speak, but someone else looked anxious to know what the future holds for us. 

"So, what is next?" Jane looks at us. 

"I think we should keep being a band..." I say, hesitating. I don't know what they think or feel right now. 

"We don't have to be like No Exit. Let's create our own term about being The Rose Ladies" Blue smiles. Oh, we know what she means. 

"I like that," Jane nods. 

"Only us can decide how to be a band is... there is no manual out there... so we have all four votes. The Rose Ladies are back!" Rowan cheers. 

"Please, tell me we're not doing the hands thing the guys do," I say, waiting for them to come with something else. 

"What about a hug instead?" Blue raises an eyebrow. 

We do what our leader suggests and stay like that for two minutes. After all, our temporal band ended up becoming a real band. We mainly do this for fun, like the guys, but we won't chase international fame, concerts, fans, albums, and awards. We are four Shadyside women with different goals but with a hobby in common... and that is enough for us.